GENEX Probe User Guide V200R003 04

GENEX Probe V200R003
User Guide
Issue Date 04 2011-02-15
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Website: Email:
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
GENEX Probe User Guide
About This Document
About This Document

Overview
The document provides the guidelines for installing and using the GENEX Probe (hereinafter referred to as Probe) and methods for collecting the test data, analyzing the test data in real time, and replaying the test data.
Product Version
The following table lists the product and version related to this guide. Product Name GENEX Probe Product Version V200R003
Intended Audience
This document is intended for: l l l Network design engineers Network monitoring engineers System maintenance engineers
Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.
04 (2011-02-15)
This is the third commercial release. Compared with 03 (2010-08-10), this version has the following modifications:
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii
About This Document
Content 2.5 Recommended Device List 7.1 Connectable External Devices 7.3.1 Configuring External Devices Automatically 11.2.6 Conducting the LTE Forcing Function Test 13.3.4 What Should I Do If No Data Is Displayed in the WCDMA View Windows? 13.4.4 How to Convert Frequencies into UARFCNs (WCDMA)? 13.4.5 What Should I Do When the Automatic Answer Setting of Huawei U1251 Is Invalid? 14.5 PSTN SQE Server
Description New Added terminals. New New New
New New
New
03 (2010-08-10)
This is the second commercial release. Compared with 02 (2010-06-25), this version has the following modifications: Content 2.2 Basic Concepts of the Probe 2.3 Main Interface of the Probe 8.5.3 Performing an Outdoor Test 13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE? Serving/Active Set and Neighboring Cells Description The content descriptions are changed. The content descriptions are changed. The content descriptions are changed. New The content descriptions are changed.
02 (2010-06-25)
This is the first commercial release. Compared with 01 (2010-04-14), this version has the following modifications: Content 1 New Features of the Probe V200R003 Description The content descriptions are changed.
iv
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
About This Document
Content 7.2 Plugging in External Devices 8.4 Designing Test Plans 11.1 Speech Quality Evaluation Tests (GSM/WCDMA) 11.3 IP Analysis 13.4.3 What Should I Do When UE Fails to Access the Network During the LTE Forcing Feature Test? 14.3.5 LTE Information Elements of UEs
Description The content descriptions are changed. The content descriptions are changed. The content descriptions are changed. New New
The content descriptions are changed.
01 (2010-04-14)
This is the first release. It is prepared for the Beta test version of V200R003.
Organization
1 New Features of the Probe V200R003 This section describes the new features of Probe V200R003. 2 Overview of the Probe The Probe is an air interface test software, which is used to collect the test data of the air interface of the GSM/GPRS/EDGE, WCDMA/HSPA/HSPA+, CDMA2000 1x/EV-DO, WiMAX, and LTE network. Through the Probe, the network performance can be evaluated, the network optimization can be guided, and the fault can be rectified. The collected test data of the air interface on the radio network can be saved as the test logfile. This facilitates the data analysis after the logfile is imported to other post-processing software (such as GENEX Assistant) or the later data replaying. 3 Installing the Probe This section describes how to install the Probe and other assistants. To complete the installation of the Probe, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as prompted by the installation wizard. 4 Starting the Probe Once installed, the Probe application can be launched from the Start menu or the shortcut icon. 5 Managing the Map Window The map window displays map-related information in a test area and counter information such as cell information, event information, and IE information on the drive test route. You can add a layer, configure layer properties, and configure the legend properties of the IE layer in the map window. 6 Managing Engineering Parameters
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v
About This Document
This chapter describes engineering parameters of different network systems supported by the Probe and the method for importing engineering parameters. You can learn about the details of base station parameters, antenna parameters, neighboring cell parameters, and various technology parameters of the current test area through the engineering parameters. 7 Connecting External Devices Connecting external devices involves connecting external devices to the PC and in the Probe, so that the external devices can work with the Probe to perform tests. When you use the Probe to replay data, you need not connect external devices. 8 Collecting Data The Probe collects the air interface test data through the test terminal and other external devices and records test data in logfiles. Before collecting the data, make sure that a computer installed with the Probe, the test terminal, the scanner, and the GPS are available and the dongle must be plugged in. You can also import engineering parameters for different network systems and map files, which helps to provide a vivid view of test data. 9 Managing Logfiles During tests, test data is saved in .gen files that are called logfiles. This chapter describes how to record, replay, segment, and export logfiles. 10 Managing View Windows This section describes how to view data in view windows and how to configure properties of view windows. View windows are key windows of the Probe. You can view IEs, events, Layer 2 or Layer 3 messages, and statistical values of indicators in view windows. 11 Typical Application This section describes typical test methods supported by the Probe. 12 Interface Reference of the Probe This describes the interface and parameters of the Probe. You can refer to these parameters when you collect, view, and replay the data through the Probe. 13 FAQs This describes the problems that may occur during the use of the software and the corresponding causes. This also describes how to solve these problems. This also describes the using skills. 14 Appendix This describes the test items, information elements (IEs), predefined events, and keyboard shortcuts supported by the Probe. You can refer to these parameters when you collect or view data through the Probe. 15 Technical Support
Conventions
Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
About This Document
Symbol
Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.
Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
About This Document
Convention { x | y | ... }*
Description Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1, Key 2 Description Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
viii
Contents
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 New Features of the Probe V200R003.....................................................................................1-1
1.1 New Features of the Probe V200R003C01.....................................................................................................1-2 1.2 New Features of the Probe V200R003C00.....................................................................................................1-2
2 Overview of the Probe...............................................................................................................2-1

2.1 Introduction to the Probe.................................................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Basic Concepts of the Probe............................................................................................................................2-4 2.3 Main Interface of the Probe.............................................................................................................................2-7 2.4 Working Mode of the Probe..........................................................................................................................2-18 2.5 Recommended Device List...........................................................................................................................2-19 2.5.1 Recommended Terminal List (GSM/WCDMA)..................................................................................2-19 2.5.2 Recommended Terminal List (LTE)....................................................................................................2-21 2.5.3 Recommended Terminal List (WiMAX).............................................................................................2-21 2.5.4 Recommended Scanner List.................................................................................................................2-22
3 Installing the Probe....................................................................................................................3-1

3.1 Preparations Before Installing the Probe.........................................................................................................3-2 3.2 Installing Shared Components........................................................................................................................ 3-3 3.3 Installing the Probe Main Program................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.4 Plugging in a Dongle.......................................................................................................................................3-8
4 Starting the Probe.......................................................................................................................4-1 5 Managing the Map Window....................................................................................................5-1

5.1 Basic Concepts About Maps...........................................................................................................................5-2 5.2 Importing Maps...............................................................................................................................................5-3 5.2.1 Importing Outdoor Test Maps................................................................................................................5-3 5.2.2 Importing Indoor Test Maps.................................................................................................................. 5-4 5.3 Adding Layers.................................................................................................................................................5-5 5.4 Configuring Layer Properties..........................................................................................................................5-6 5.5 Configuring Legend Properties.......................................................................................................................5-8
6 Managing Engineering Parameters........................................................................................6-1

6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems................................................................6-2 6.2 Importing Engineering Parameters..................................................................................................................6-9 Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix
Contents
7 Connecting External Devices...................................................................................................7-1

7.1 Connectable External Devices.........................................................................................................................7-2 7.2 Plugging in External Devices........................................................................................................................7-11 7.3 Configuring External Devices.......................................................................................................................7-12 7.3.1 Configuring External Devices Automatically......................................................................................7-12 7.3.2 Configuring External Devices Manually..............................................................................................7-13 7.4 Enabling External Devices............................................................................................................................7-16 7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected................................................................................................................7-17 7.6 Configuring Device Alarms..........................................................................................................................7-18
8 Collecting Data...........................................................................................................................8-1
8.1 Data Collection Process..................................................................................................................................8-3 8.2 Preparations Before Data Collection...............................................................................................................8-3 8.3 Creating a Project............................................................................................................................................8-4 8.4 Designing Test Plans.......................................................................................................................................8-5 8.5 Performing a Test Plan....................................................................................................................................8-7 8.5.1 Setting the APN (GSM/WCDMA)........................................................................................................8-8 8.5.2 Performing an Indoor Test.....................................................................................................................8-9 8.5.3 Performing an Outdoor Test.................................................................................................................8-10 8.5.4 Monitoring the Test..............................................................................................................................8-11 8.5.5 Stopping Test Plans..............................................................................................................................8-11
9 Managing Logfiles.....................................................................................................................9-1
9.1 Recording Logfiles..........................................................................................................................................9-2 9.2 Segmenting Logfiles.......................................................................................................................................9-3 9.3 Replaying Logfiles..........................................................................................................................................9-3 9.4 Exporting Logfiles...........................................................................................................................................9-5
10 Managing View Windows....................................................................................................10-1

10.1 Presentation of IEs and Events....................................................................................................................10-2 10.2 Browsing Data.............................................................................................................................................10-2 10.3 Configuring the View Window...................................................................................................................10-3 10.3.1 Configuring the Line Chart View.......................................................................................................10-3 10.3.2 Configuring the List View..................................................................................................................10-4 10.3.3 Configuring the Chart View...............................................................................................................10-5 10.3.4 Configuring the Plain Text View.......................................................................................................10-5
11 Typical Application...............................................................................................................11-1
11.1 Speech Quality Evaluation Tests (GSM/WCDMA)...................................................................................11-2 11.1.1 Synchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test...................................................................................11-2 11.1.2 Asynchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test.................................................................................11-3 11.1.3 Speech Quality Evaluation Test Between PHU Terminal and PSTN SQE Server............................11-4 11.2 Forcing Function Tests................................................................................................................................11-6 11.2.1 Setting the GSM Nonvolatile Parameters..........................................................................................11-6 11.2.2 Conducting GSM C/A Measurements................................................................................................11-7 x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Contents
11.2.3 Conducting GSM Frequency Scanning..............................................................................................11-8 11.2.4 Conducting the GSM Forcing Function Test.....................................................................................11-9 11.2.5 Conducting the WCDMA Forcing Function Test............................................................................11-11 11.2.6 Conducting the LTE Forcing Function Test....................................................................................11-13 11.3 IP Analysis................................................................................................................................................11-14
12 Interface Reference of the Probe.........................................................................................12-1

12.1 Interface Description: Test Plan Control Window....................................................................................12-4 12.2 Interface Description: Engineering Parameter management Window...................................................12-6 12.3 Interface Description: OutdoorMap Window...........................................................................................12-8 12.4 Interface Description: IndoorMap Window............................................................................................12-13 12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View......................................................................................................12-17 12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View....................................................................................................12-18 12.7 Parameters for Configuring External Devices...........................................................................................12-19 12.8 Parameters for Filtering the Original Data................................................................................................12-25 12.9 Parameters for Configuring the Test Items...............................................................................................12-26 12.10 Parameters for Monitoring the Test........................................................................................................12-26 12.11 Parameters for Importing the Engineering Parameters...........................................................................12-27 12.12 Parameters for Importing the Outdoor Raster Map.................................................................................12-29 12.13 Parameters for Configuring the Legend Properties.................................................................................12-30 12.14 Parameters for Configuring the Layer Control Properties......................................................................12-32 12.15 Parameters for Setting the Predefined Event...........................................................................................12-34 12.16 Parameters for Configuring the Device Alarm........................................................................................12-35 12.17 Parameters for Setting IE Audio Indications...........................................................................................12-36 12.18 Parameter for Other System Settings......................................................................................................12-36 12.19 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the List Views.................................................................12-38 12.20 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the Line Chart View........................................................12-40 12.21 Parameters for Testing the Forcing Feature of the GSM........................................................................12-41 12.22 Parameters for WCDMA Forcing Feature Test......................................................................................12-42 12.23 Parameter Description: LTE Forcing Feature Test.................................................................................12-43 12.24 Parameters for Performing the C/A Measurement of the GSM..............................................................12-44 12.25 Parameters for Exporting the Data..........................................................................................................12-45 12.26 Parameters for Configuring the Data Export Format of the Scanner......................................................12-51
13 FAQs.........................................................................................................................................13-1
13.1 Problems Related to Software Start............................................................................................................13-2 13.1.1 What Should I Do When the Verification of the Dongle Fails?........................................................13-2 13.1.2 What Should I Do When the License Check Fails?...........................................................................13-3 13.1.3 How to Install the East Asian Language Package?............................................................................13-3 13.1.4 How to Uninstall the Main Program..................................................................................................13-3 13.1.5 How to Uninstall the GENEX Shared Components...........................................................................13-4 13.2 Problems Related to Device Connections...................................................................................................13-4 13.2.1 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the MS Fails?......................................................13-5 13.2.2 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the Scanner Fails?...............................................13-5 Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi
Contents
GENEX Probe User Guide 13.2.3 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the GPS Fails?....................................................13-6 13.2.4 What Should I Do When the Mouse Becomes Invalid After the GPS Is Connected to the PC?.......13-6 13.2.5 What Should I Do When the PCTel DTI Scanner Fails to Receive the GPS Signals?......................13-7 13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE?..........................................................................................................13-7
13.3 Problems Related to Views.......................................................................................................................13-10 13.3.1 What Should I Do When Opening the Map View Fails?.................................................................13-11 13.3.2 What Should I Do When Opening the Chart View Fails?...............................................................13-11 13.3.3 What Should I Do When Importing Engineering Parameters Fails?...............................................13-11 13.3.4 What Should I Do If No Data Is Displayed in the WCDMA View Windows?...............................13-12 13.4 Problems Related to Tests.........................................................................................................................13-13 13.4.1 What Should I Do When FTP Service Tests Fail?...........................................................................13-13 13.4.2 What Should I Do When Invalid MOS Values Are Generated?......................................................13-15 13.4.3 What Should I Do When UE Fails to Access the Network During the LTE Forcing Feature Test? .....................................................................................................................................................................13-16 13.4.4 How to Convert Frequencies into UARFCNs (WCDMA)?.............................................................13-16 13.4.5 What Should I Do When the Automatic Answer Setting of Huawei U1251 Is Invalid?.................13-17
14 Appendix..................................................................................................................................14-1
14.1 Description of Test Items............................................................................................................................14-2 14.1.1 Test Items Supported in Different Networks.....................................................................................14-2 14.1.2 Test Items of MSs..............................................................................................................................14-6 14.1.3 Test Items of PCTel Scanners..........................................................................................................14-60 14.1.4 Test Items of Anritsu Scanners........................................................................................................14-65 14.1.5 Test Items of Rohde & Schwarz Scanners.......................................................................................14-91 14.2 Description of Predefined Events..............................................................................................................14-92 14.2.1 General Events.................................................................................................................................14-93 14.2.2 GSM Predefined Events...................................................................................................................14-94 14.2.3 WCDMA Predefined Events............................................................................................................14-98 14.2.4 CDMA Predefined Events..............................................................................................................14-121 14.2.5 WiMAX Predefined Events...........................................................................................................14-126 14.2.6 LTE Predefined Events..................................................................................................................14-130 14.3 Description of Information Elements......................................................................................................14-131 14.3.1 GSM Information Elements of MSs...............................................................................................14-132 14.3.2 WCDMA Information Elements of UEs........................................................................................14-148 14.3.3 CDMA Information Elements of MSs...........................................................................................14-167 14.3.4 WiMAX Information Elements of UEs.........................................................................................14-191 14.3.5 LTE Information Elements of UEs................................................................................................14-228 14.3.6 Information Elements of Scanners.................................................................................................14-273 14.3.7 Packet Service Testing Information Elements...............................................................................14-276 14.3.8 Speech Quality Evaluation Information Elements.........................................................................14-282 14.3.9 Noise Test Information Elements...................................................................................................14-282 14.4 Keyboard Shortcuts.................................................................................................................................14-283 14.5 PSTN SQE Server...................................................................................................................................14-284 xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Contents
14.5.1 Overview of the PSTN SQE Server...............................................................................................14-285 14.5.2 Installing the PSTN SQE Server....................................................................................................14-295 14.5.3 Using PSTN SQE Server................................................................................................................14-301 14.5.4 Interface Reference of the PSTN SQE Server................................................................................14-306 14.5.5 FAQs..............................................................................................................................................14-309 14.5.6 Test Items of the PSTN SQE Server..............................................................................................14-311 14.5.7 Predefined Events of the PSTN SQE Server..................................................................................14-313
15 Technical Support..................................................................................................................15-1
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
xiii
Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 Synchronous speech quality evaluation test.......................................................................................1-3 Figure 1-2 Asynchronous speech quality evaluation test.....................................................................................1-4 Figure 1-3 Speech quality evaluation test between the MS and the PSTN SQE Server......................................1-4 Figure 2-1 System structure of the Probe.............................................................................................................2-3 Figure 2-2 Main interface of the Probe................................................................................................................2-7 Figure 2-3 Standard toolbar................................................................................................................................2-12 Figure 2-4 Replay toolbar...................................................................................................................................2-14 Figure 2-5 Navigation pane................................................................................................................................2-15 Figure 2-6 Shortcut menu of the status bar of the operation interface...............................................................2-17 Figure 2-7 System status bar..............................................................................................................................2-17 Figure 3-1 Customer Information.........................................................................................................................3-6 Figure 5-1 Cell layer.............................................................................................................................................5-2 Figure 7-1 Device Configure dialog box...........................................................................................................7-13 Figure 7-2 The example of COM port..............................................................................................................7-15 Figure 7-3 The example of Modem port...........................................................................................................7-15 Figure 12-1 Test Plan Control window............................................................................................................12-4 Figure 12-2 Engineering Parameter management window...........................................................................12-6 Figure 12-3 OutdoorMap window....................................................................................................................12-8 Figure 12-4 Map Layers window....................................................................................................................12-12 Figure 12-5 IndoorMap window.....................................................................................................................12-13 Figure 12-6 Map Layers window....................................................................................................................12-16 Figure 12-7 Interface of the test data view.......................................................................................................12-17 Figure 12-8 Line Chart window.....................................................................................................................12-18 Figure 13-1 Y-shaped cable...............................................................................................................................13-8 Figure 13-2 Querying the IP address of the host................................................................................................13-9 Figure 13-3 UARFCN definition (general)......................................................................................................13-17 Figure 13-4 UARFCN definition (additional channels)...................................................................................13-17 Figure 14-1 System structure of the PSTN SQE Server................................................................................14-287 Figure 14-2 Speech evaluation on the uplink.................................................................................................14-287 Figure 14-3 Speech evaluation on the downlink............................................................................................14-288 Figure 14-4 Main interface of the PSTN SQE Server....................................................................................14-290 Figure 14-5 Customer Information.................................................................................................................14-297 Figure 14-6 Test Plan Editor interface.........................................................................................................14-306 Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv
Tables
Tables
Table 2-1 Description of the system structure of the Probe.................................................................................2-3 Table 2-2 Basic concepts of the Probe.................................................................................................................2-4 Table 2-3 Description of the main interface of the Probe....................................................................................2-8 Table 2-4 Description of the menu bar of the Probe............................................................................................2-8 Table 2-5 Description of the Project menu..........................................................................................................2-9 Table 2-6 Description of the Logfile menu..........................................................................................................2-9 Table 2-7 Description of the Configuration menu............................................................................................2-10 Table 2-8 Description of the View menu...........................................................................................................2-10 Table 2-9 Description of the Test menu.............................................................................................................2-11 Table 2-10 Description of the Window menu....................................................................................................2-11 Table 2-11 Description of the Help menu..........................................................................................................2-12 Table 2-12 Description of the standard toolbar..................................................................................................2-13 Table 2-13 Description of the replay toolbar......................................................................................................2-14 Table 2-14 Description of the icons under the Project tab................................................................................2-15 Table 2-15 Description of the icons under the Configuration tab....................................................................2-16 Table 2-16 Description of the system status bar.................................................................................................2-17 Table 2-17 Device status description..................................................................................................................2-18 Table 3-1 Hardware requirements of the Probe....................................................................................................3-2 Table 3-2 Software requirements of the Probe.....................................................................................................3-2 Table 3-3 Structure of the Probe installation folder.............................................................................................3-7 Table 7-1 Specifications of GSM/WCDMA test terminals..................................................................................7-2 Table 7-2 Specifications of CDMA test terminals...............................................................................................7-7 Table 7-3 Specifications of WiMAX test terminals.............................................................................................7-8 Table 7-4 Specifications of LTE test terminals....................................................................................................7-9 Table 8-1 Data collection procedure.....................................................................................................................8-3 Table 8-2 Requirements for the external devices.................................................................................................8-4 Table 12-1 Description of the Test Plan Control window................................................................................12-4 Table 12-2 Description of the Test Plan Control window toolbar...................................................................12-5 Table 12-3 Description of the Engineering Parameter management window...............................................12-6 Table 12-4 Toolbar description of the Engineering Parameter management window..................................12-7 Table 12-5 Description of the OutdoorMap window.......................................................................................12-9 Table 12-6 Description of the OutdoorMap window toolbar...........................................................................12-9 Table 12-7 Description of the Map Layers window.......................................................................................12-12 Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii
Tables
GENEX Probe User Guide Table 12-8 Description of the IndoorMap window........................................................................................12-14 Table 12-9 Description of the IndoorMap window toolbar............................................................................12-14 Table 12-10 Description of the Map Layers window.....................................................................................12-16 Table 12-11 Description of the test data view..................................................................................................12-17 Table 12-12 Description of the Line Chart window.......................................................................................12-19 Table 13-1 Data packets need to be selected....................................................................................................13-13 Table 13-2 Fault cause......................................................................................................................................13-14 Table 13-3 Fault cause......................................................................................................................................13-15 Table 14-1 Properties of the MMS test item....................................................................................................14-30 Table 14-2 Auxiliary parameters......................................................................................................................14-30 Table 14-3 Description of system structure of the PSTN SQE Server...........................................................14-287 Table 14-4 Speech evaluation on the uplink..................................................................................................14-288 Table 14-5 Speech evaluation on the downlink..............................................................................................14-288 Table 14-6 Basic concepts of the PSTN SQE Server.....................................................................................14-289 Table 14-7 Description of the main interface.................................................................................................14-290 Table 14-8 Description of the menu bar.........................................................................................................14-291 Table 14-9 Description of the File menu........................................................................................................14-291 Table 14-10 Description of the Configuration menu....................................................................................14-291 Table 14-11 Description of the View menu...................................................................................................14-292 Table 14-12 Description of the Test menu.....................................................................................................14-292 Table 14-13 Description of the Help menu....................................................................................................14-292 Table 14-14 Description of the toolbar...........................................................................................................14-292 Table 14-15 Description of the navigation pane of the operation interface...................................................14-293 Table 14-16 Operation procedures.................................................................................................................14-294 Table 14-17 Hardware requirements of the PSTN SQE Server.....................................................................14-295 Table 14-18 Software requirements of the PSTN SQE Server......................................................................14-296 Table 14-19 Description of the Test Plan Editor interface...........................................................................14-306 Table 14-20 Description of the Test Plan Editor Toolbar............................................................................14-307 Table 14-21 Fault cause..................................................................................................................................14-310
xviii
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
1 New Features of the Probe V200R003
New Features of the Probe V200R003
About This Chapter

This section describes the new features of Probe V200R003. 1.1 New Features of the Probe V200R003C01 This section describes the new features of Probe V200R003C01. 1.2 New Features of the Probe V200R003C00 This section describes the new features of Probe V200R003C00.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
1-1
1.1 New Features of the Probe V200R003C01

This section describes the new features of Probe V200R003C01.
Configuring External Devices Automatically

For details, see 7.3.1 Configuring External Devices Automatically.
New Test Terminals

The new test terminals of Probe V200R003C01 are as follows: l GSM/WCDMA Huawei U1280-5 Huawei U8220 Huawei U8226 Huawei U7519 Huawei U7517 Huawei U3220 Huawei E1823 Card Huawei E372u-8 Card l LTE Huawei UE 2.2 Huawei B390 Huawei E398 Card For details, see Test Terminal.
New Scanners
The new scanners of Probe V200R003C01 are as follows: l l PCTel PCT-505 (WCDMA) PCTel PCT-520 (GSM/WCDMA)
1.2 New Features of the Probe V200R003C00

This section describes the new features of Probe V200R003C00. Compared with Probe V200R002, the new features of Probe V200R003C00 are as follows: l l l l
1-2
Supporting the WiMAX Beceem test and LTE TDD/FDD test. Supporting the enhanced speech quality evaluation test. For details, see Speech Quality Evaluation Test. Supporting more test items. For details, see New Test Items. Supporting more forcing function tests. For details, see New Forcing Functions.
l l
Supporting the settings of the size of the TCP window. For details, see Setting the Size of the TCP Window. Supporting more models of test terminals. For details, see New Test Terminals.
Speech Quality Evaluation Test

Based on Probe V200R002, Probe V200R003 enhances the speech quality evaluation tests. The speech quality evaluation tests are categorized into the following types: l Synchronous speech quality evaluation test One Probe is configured with the two PHU terminals. The Probe performs the synchronous speech quality evaluation test by enabling a PHU terminal to call the other PHU terminal. During the test, the calling PHU terminal plays speech samples and the called PHU terminal records result files so that the uplink and downlink MOSs are obtained. For details, see Figure 1-1. In this case, only the test plan for the calling PHU terminal needs to be configured. l Asynchronous speech quality evaluation test The Probe is installed on two PCs. Each Probe is configured with a PHU terminal. The Probes perform the asynchronous speech quality evaluation test by enabling the two PHU terminals to call each other. During the test, the calling and called PHU terminals record and play speech files alternatively so that each Probe records the MOS. For details, see Figure 1-2. In this case, the test plans for the calling and called PHU terminals need to be configured separately. l Speech quality evaluation test between the MS and the PSTN SQE Server For two PCs, one is configured with the Probe that is configured with a PHU terminal, and the other is configured with the PSTN SQE Server. The Probe performs the speech quality evaluation test between an MS and the PSTN SQE Server by enabling the PHU terminal to call the PSTN SQE Server or the PSTN SQE Server to call the PHU terminal. During the test, the calling party plays voices and the called party records voices so that the MOS is obtained. For details, see Figure 1-3. In this case, the test plans for the calling and called parties need to be configured separately. Figure 1-1 Synchronous speech quality evaluation test
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
1-3
Figure 1-2 Asynchronous speech quality evaluation test
Figure 1-3 Speech quality evaluation test between the MS and the PSTN SQE Server
New Test Items

The new test items of Probe V200R003 are as follows: l GSM/WCDMA Email, which indicates the email sending test. Multi-FTP, which indicates that a test terminal performs the FTP download and upload tests at the same time. Async SQE(MS-MS), which indicates the asynchronous speech quality evaluation test. AMR E2E Delay (MS-MS), which indicates the AMR end-to-end delay test. l l WiMAX NetSearch, which indicates the WiMAX Beceem frequency scan test. LTE Frequency Scan, which indicates the LTE RRC spectrum scan test. Cell Scan, which indicates the LTE RRC cell scan test. Iperf, which indicates the LTE TCP or UDP network performance test.
1-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
New Forcing Functions

l l l l GSM nonvolatile parameter setting GSM frequency scan test WCDMA UARFCN locking and scrambling code locking tests LTE EARFCN locking and scrambling code locking tests
Setting the Size of the TCP Window

You can change the size of the TCP window to decrease the delay in the data transmission. The size of the TCP window can be set in System Configure.
New Test Terminals

The new test terminals of Probe V200R003 are as follows: l GSM/WCDMA Huawei U6100 PHU Huawei U1251 PHU Huawei E270+ Card l WiMAX Huawei Beceem BM328 Huawei Beceem BM338 Huawei Sequans BM358 l LTE Huawei UE 1.0 Huawei UE 1.1 Huawei UE 2.0 For details, see Test Terminal.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
1-5
2 Overview of the Probe
2
About This Chapter
Overview of the Probe
The Probe is an air interface test software, which is used to collect the test data of the air interface of the GSM/GPRS/EDGE, WCDMA/HSPA/HSPA+, CDMA2000 1x/EV-DO, WiMAX, and LTE network. Through the Probe, the network performance can be evaluated, the network optimization can be guided, and the fault can be rectified. The collected test data of the air interface on the radio network can be saved as the test logfile. This facilitates the data analysis after the logfile is imported to other post-processing software (such as GENEX Assistant) or the later data replaying. 2.1 Introduction to the Probe The Probe supports multiple network systems, device types, features powerful service test function, and data management function. In addition, the Probe is easy to operate. 2.2 Basic Concepts of the Probe This describes certain central concepts of the Probe, such as external device, logfile, test plan, signaling, and air interface parameters. These concepts help you better use the Probe to collect, view, and analyze the test data of the air interface. 2.3 Main Interface of the Probe This section describes the main interface of the Probe, including the menu bar, toolbar, navigation pane, operation interface, status bar, and entries to perform related operations by using the Probe. 2.4 Working Mode of the Probe The Probe can work in two different working modes. One for testing and recording data. The other is for replaying and analyzing data. 2.5 Recommended Device List This section describes the recommended devices, including UEs, data cards, and scanners.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
2-1
2.1 Introduction to the Probe

The Probe supports multiple network systems, device types, features powerful service test function, and data management function. In addition, the Probe is easy to operate.
Features
The features of the Probe are as follows: l l Supports the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX, and LTE network systems. Supports multiple device types, including: Multiple types of test terminals. Multiple types of scanners. Multiple types of GPS. l l l l Supports multiple tests of the voice service and the data service, including the voice service test, scanner test, data service test, and concurrent test of the voice and data service. Supports multiple speech quality evaluation tests. For details, see 1 New Features of the Probe V200R003. Supports forcing function test. For details, see 11.2 Forcing Function Tests. Supports the geographic display of the wireless measurement data. The Probe can dynamically display the test parameters, test routes, and neighboring connection line and display events by using graphics. In addition, the Probe supports the geographic display of the MapInfo map, raster map, and site information. l Supports recording and saving logfiles in real time and replaying the test procedure through the replay function. In addition, during the test, the logfiles can be sliced to facilitate the management of the logfiles recorded in different time segments. Supports displaying key events in real time, such as handover and call drops during the test. The statistics of key events and KPIs in real time during the test facilitates the detection of problems. Supports the data view synchronization of the message view, map view, and event view facilitate the problem location and analysis.
Application Scenarios
The Probe can be used at every stage of the network lifecycle, such as the network planning, network construction, network capacity expansion, and network optimization. l Exploring propagation environment During the network planning, the Probe uses the scanner to perform the continuous wave (CW) test to obtain the test data of the radio signal space fading in typical running environment. The data can be used to calibrate propagation models and function as a guide to the network planning. l
2-2
Performance test and evaluation

During network construction and capacity expansion, you can evaluate the network performances by the Probe. The evaluation result functions as a guide to adjusting and optimizing network parameters. l Network problem identification During the network maintenance or optimization, the test process can be replayed through the replay function of the Probe. The network problems can be quickly identified through the replay function of the Probe and the post-processing data analysis software (such as GENEX Assistant).
System Structure
The Probe system consists of the test terminal, scanner, GPS, PC installed with the Probe, and dongle. It supports simultaneous testing on the test terminal, scanner, and GPS. During the test, up to six test terminals, one scanner, and one GPS can be connected to the PC. Figure 2-1 shows the system structure of the Probe. Table 2-1 describes the physical entities shown in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 System structure of the Probe
Table 2-1 Description of the system structure of the Probe Physical Entity PC Description Refers to a desktop or laptop. The PC is used to install the main program of the Probe, the GENEX shared components, and the driver of certain devices to provide the data test platform of the air interface. In addition, the PC can be connected to the GPS, scanner, test terminal, or dongle through the serial port, USB port, IEEE 1394 port, or ethernet port. Refers to the hardware device with the license information. The dongle is used to control the usage rights to the Probe. The GPS is used to record outdoor test tracks. Refers to the scanner. The scanner can record the spectrum of the air interface data and import the spectrum to Probe for observation.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2-3
Dongle GPS Scanner
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Physical Entity Test terminal
Description Refers to the MS or PC card.
2.2 Basic Concepts of the Probe

This describes certain central concepts of the Probe, such as external device, logfile, test plan, signaling, and air interface parameters. These concepts help you better use the Probe to collect, view, and analyze the test data of the air interface. Table 2-2 describes the basic concepts of the Probe. Table 2-2 Basic concepts of the Probe Basic Concepts External device Description The external device refers to the test terminal, scanner, and Global Positioning System (GPS). l Test terminal The test terminal includes the test mobile phone and PC card. l Scanner The scanner can record the spectrum of the air interface data and import the spectrum to Probe for observation. l GPS The GPS is used to record outdoor test tracks. Logfile The logfile is the record of the collected information during the drive test. During the drive test, the test data can be saved in a file, and the file is called logfile (a .gen file). Through the logfile, you can replay the test procedure. This facilitates observing and analyzing the data. When recording a logfile, the Probe automatically saves a .tab file with the same name with the logfile. The .tab file is used to store GPS information. Project The Probe manages test items based on projects. You can configure multiple external devices and other system parameters and design the test plan for one project. The test plan is a customized test task and consists of test items provided by the Probe. You can design test plan for the test terminal and scanner according to your requirements to guide the test of each data service and voice service during the drive test. Remarks For types and specifications of the external device supported by the Probe, see 7.1 Connectable External Devices.
Test plan
For the test items provided by the Probe, see 14.1 Description of Test Items.
2-4
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Basic Concepts
Description
Remarks -
Indoor test The difference between the indoor test and the outdoor test lies in the methods of obtaining the test tracks. In the case of the outdoor test, the test tracks are obtained through the dot trace by the GPS. In the case of the indoor test, the test tracks are obtained through the manual dot trace. The indoor test consists of horizontal test and vertical test. l In the case of the horizontal test, the fixed points are selected according to the floor plan of the equipment room. The horizontal test consists of automatic test and manual test. The automatic test is performed according to the tracks entered beforehand. The manual test is performed by manually controlling the tracks of points. l In the case of the vertical test, the signal distribution in the vertical direction between floors is tested. Statistic Report of Event By using the air interface message or Layer2/Layer3 signaling, the Probe can judge the events in accordance with the event definition rules and help in locating radio network problems. The Probe provides predefined events of the system. Through the event view window, you can browse the predefined events of the system or check the events in the map view. Device alarm During the drive test, when the device is unexpectedly disconnected or the signal strength of the GPS is weak, the Probe generates alarm in dialog box or voice mode. You can set alarm events for special situations and alarm modes. The message provided by the Probe refers to the air interface message, generally the layer 2 message and the layer 3 message. In the message view window, you can browse air interface messages or the messages from various protocols or events. Air interface parameters refer to the information elements (IEs) of the test terminal. The air interface parameters of each network protocol are displayed in the air interface parameter view or map view in digital or text mode. The session of the data service can be performed through the setup of the Packet Switched (PS) connection.
For the predefined events provided by the Probe, see 14.2 Description of Predefined Events.
Message
Air interface parameter s
For the air interface parameters that can be collected by the Probe, see 14.3 Description of Information Elements. -
Data service
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
2-5
Basic Concepts Voice service Data view
Description The voice service or the video call service can be tested through the setup of the Circuit Switched (CS) connection. The data view is used to display the test data. The data views provided by the Probe include the IE view, message view, event view, map view, KPI statistic view, and GPS view. These data views are displayed on the Probe in chart, list, text, line chart, or mixed mode.
Remarks -
Engineeri ng parameter s
Engineering parameters include base station (BS) engineering parameters, BS technical parameters, antenna parameters, and neighboring cell parameters. After the engineering parameters are imported, the system can find the information about the best matched site in time and consider the engineering parameters as network parameters for analysis. The map consists of a series of map elements and involves the MapInfo map and the raster map. The map information is displayed in the map window on the Probe. The map information involves the test area, test routes, events, and engineering parameters. l MapInfo Map A MapInfo map consists of multiple layers, and each layer is saved in a file. The files supported by the MapInfo map are in .tab or .gst (GeoSet) format. A GeoSet is a special type of workspace used for map layers and saves the configurations including layer order, labels, and legends. l Raster map The entire raster map can be considered as a layer. The raster map supported by the Probe is in .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png format.
For the engineering parameters supported by the Probe, see 6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems. -
Map
Layer
A layer is a set of data displayed in the map window. There are two main types of layers: map layers and indicator layers. l A map consists of multiple map layers. l An indicator layer consists of events, IEs, and cells. A layer may contain multiple objects. For example, a map layer contains all the roads and water areas on the map; a cell layer contains multiple engineering parameters.
2-6
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Basic Concepts Label
Description The labels indicates the objects in various layers of maps in text form. The objects include field names of engineering parameters in cell layers, IE values and numbers in IE layers, and names of buildings in building layers. The filemark is used to record the geographic information about the test location in texts. The geographic information includes the features of buildings and interference source. The filemarks can be displayed as events in view windows. You can search for filemark events to locate the filemark area during the data replay.
Remarks -
Filemark
2.3 Main Interface of the Probe

This section describes the main interface of the Probe, including the menu bar, toolbar, navigation pane, operation interface, status bar, and entries to perform related operations by using the Probe. Figure 2-2 shows the interface after the Probe is started. Table 2-3 describes the items shown in Figure 2-2. Figure 2-2 Main interface of the Probe
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
2-7
Table 2-3 Description of the main interface of the Probe No. 1 2 3 4 5 Name Menu bar Toolbar Navigation pane Operation interface Status bar of the operation interface System status bar Description Displays the main menu of the system. For details, see Menu Bar. Provides the shortcut icons for common operations. For details, see Toolbar. Provides shortcut icons for the main operations of the system. For details, see Navigation Pane. Displays different view windows and configuration interfaces. For details, see Operation Interface. Displays the worksheet that is added by users. For details, see Operation Interface. Displays the status information about the system, including the current status of the system and the device. For details, see System Status Bar.
Menu Bar
The menu bar of the Probe shows the main menu of the system. The menus on the menu bar are arranged according to the main functions of the Probe to facilitate your operations. Table 2-4 describes the menu bar of the Probe and the corresponding functions. Table 2-4 Description of the menu bar of the Probe Main Menu Project Logfile Configuration Description Provides entries for operations related to the project management. For details, see Table 2-5. Provides entries for operations related to the management of the logfile. For details, see Table 2-6. Provides entries for operations such as configuring external devices, engineering parameters, test plans, and the system. For details, see Table 2-7. Provides entries for operations related to the view management. For details, see Table 2-8. Provides entries for certain basic operations during data collection. For details, see Table 2-9. Provides entries for operations such as arranging view windows. For details, see Table 2-10.
View Test Window
2-8
Main Menu Help
Description Provides entries for the system help and operations related to the license management. For details, see Table 2-11.
Table 2-5 Description of the Project menu Menu Item New Open Open From Description Enables you to create a project. Enables you to open a project under a specified path. Enables you to open projects of different types. The menu items are as follows: Site Verification, Optimize, Benchmark, Acceptance, and Customize. Close Remove Save Save As Exit Enables you to close the project that is opened currently. Enables you to delete a project. Enables you to save a project. Enables you to save the current project as another one. Enables you to exit the main program of the Probe.
Table 2-6 Description of the Logfile menu Menu Item Open Logfile Close Logfile Play Pause Stop Speed Up Speed Down Export Data Description Enables you to open a logfile. Enables you to close a logfile. Enables you to replay a logfile. Enables you to pause the logfile replay. Enables you to stop the logfile replay. Enables you to accelerate the replay of a logfile. Enables you to slow down the replay of a logfile. Enables you to convert the test data format.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
2-9
Table 2-7 Description of the Configuration menu Menu Item Device Configure Engineering Parameter management Test Plan Control System Configure Description Enables you to configure external devices. Enables you to manage engineering parameters. Enables you to design a test plan. Enables you to set configuration items of the system.
Table 2-8 Description of the View menu Menu Item Toolbars Description Enables you to set whether to display the standard toolbar, replay toolbar, and navigation pane. By default, these items are displayed. Enables you to set whether to display the system status bar. By default, the system status bar is displayed. Enables you to open the view of GSM/GPRS air interface parameters. Enables you to open the view of WCDMA air interface parameters. Enables you to open the view of CDMA2000 1X/EVDO air interface parameters. Enables you to open the view of WiMAX air interface parameters. Enables you to open the view of LTE air interface parameters. Enables you to open the GPS view. Enables you to open the view of data service parameters. Enables you to open the view of speech quality evaluation. Enables you to open the event statistics view and KPI statistics view. Enables you to open the Layer 2 or Layer 3 message view. Enables you to open the event list view. Enables you to open the information view.
Status Bar GSM WCDMA CDMA WiMAX LTE GPS Service Quality MOS Statistic Message Event List Information
2-10
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Menu Item OutdoorMap IndoorMap Scanner Custom Line Chart
Description Enables you to open the outdoor map view. Enables you to open the indoor map view. Enables you to open the scanner view. Enables you to open the line chart view.
Table 2-9 Description of the Test menu Menu Item Start Test Plan Stop Test Plan Start Record Pause Record Slice Record File Mark Description Enables you to start a test plan. Enables you to stop a test plan. Enables you to start or stop the logfile recording. Enables you to pause or resume the logfile recording. Enables you to slice a logfile. During the test, the Probe records the geographic information about the test location in texts and automatically saves the information in DT logfiles. The geographic information includes the features of buildings and interference source. During the data replay or data analysis, the Probe can quickly locate the user-concerned area based on the Filemark event. This menu is available after the Probe starts the DT logfile recording. Forcing Function Enables you to controls a terminal to perform the forcing feature test, including the GSM, WCDMA, and LTE forcing feature test, GSM Carrier-to-Adjacent (CA) measurement, and GSM NV parameter setting. Enables you to control a LTE terminal to perform the demodulation reference signal (DMRS) frequency hopping test. For details about the hopping group information, see Radio Parameters.
LTE Send Command
Table 2-10 Description of the Window menu Menu Item Cascade Description Enables you to arrange view windows in cascade mode.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
2-11
Menu Item Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Close All
Description Enables you to arrange view windows in horizontal tile mode. Enables you to arrange view windows in vertical tile mode. Enables you to close all the view windows of the currently active worksheet.
NOTE
The Window menu enables the system to display the names of the opened view windows of the currently active worksheet.
Table 2-11 Description of the Help menu Menu Item Contents License Info Update License View ESN Check License About Probe Tech Support Description Enables you to open the Help of the Probe. Enables you to view the license information. Enables you to update the license. Enables you to obtain the electronic serial number (ESN). Enables you to check whether the dongle is connected properly. Enables you to view the version information about the Probe. Enables you to view the technical support information.
Toolbar
The toolbar on the main interface of the Probe consists of the standard toolbar and the replay toolbar. By clicking the icon on the toolbar, you can switch to the corresponding interface or perform the corresponding operation quickly. l Standard toolbar Figure 2-3 shows the icons on the standard toolbar. Table 2-12 describes the icons shown in Figure 2-3. Figure 2-3 Standard toolbar
2-12
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

NOTE
You can choose View > Toolbars > Standard to set whether to display the standard toolbar.
Table 2-12 Description of the standard toolbar Icon Name New Project Open Project Save External Device Configuratio n Auto Connect Disconnect Test Plan Control Description Enables you to create a project. Enables you to open a project in .xml format. Enables you to save the current project. Enables you to configure external devices.
Enables the Probe to automatically connect to an external device added in the Device Configure dialog box so that the external device can be used. Enables the Probe to disconnect an external device added in the Device Configure dialog box. Enables you to design a test task. In the Test Plan Control dialog box displayed after you click this icon, you can design test plans, configure test items, and view the execution status of the test items. Enables you to open the OutdoorMap window.
Map Window Management Engineering Parameter Management Record Start/ Stop
Enables you to open the Engineering Parameter management window. Enables you to start or stop the logfile recording. When the logfile recording is started, this icon becomes the icon.
Record Pause/ Resume
Enables you to pause or resume the logfile recording. If KPIs are required to be evaluated, it is recommended that you do not pause the logfile recording. When the logfile recording is paused, this icon becomes the icon.
Record Segment
Enables you to slice a logfile. If you click this icon, the system closes the currently recorded logfile and creates a new logfile to slice the corresponding logfile while performing the ongoing tests.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
2-13
Icon
Name Filemark
Description During the test, the Probe records the geographic information about the test location in texts and automatically saves the information in DT logfiles. The geographic information includes the features of buildings and interference source. During the data replay or data analysis, the Probe can quickly locate the user-concerned area based on the Filemark event. This icon is available after the Probe starts the DT logfile recording.
Start Test Plan Stop Test Plan Online Help
Enables you to start a test plan. Enables you to stop a test plan. Enables you to open the Help of the Probe.
Replay toolbar Figure 2-4 shows the icons on the replay toolbar. Table 2-13 describes the icons shown in Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-4 Replay toolbar
NOTE
You can choose View > Toolbars > Replay to set whether to display the replay toolbar.
Table 2-13 Description of the replay toolbar Icon Name Open Logfile Play Logfile Description Enables you to open a drive test file in .gen format. Enables you to replay a logfile. This icon is available only after a logfile is opened. Enables you to pause the logfile replay.
Pause Logfile Playing
2-14
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Icon
Name Stop Playing Logfile
Description Enables you to stop the logfile replay. Stopping the logfile replay does not close the logfile. You can choose Logfile > Close Logfile to close a logfile.
Locate
Enables you to search for an event in a logfile and find the location where the event occurs on the map. Enables you to adjust the replay speed. The range is from 1/8speed to 32-speed. Enables the logfile to be replayed from a specified position.
CAUTION The Probe does not count the key events or KPIs when you move the slide bar.
Replay rate dropdown list box Slide bar
Navigation Pane
The navigation pane, located in the left pane of the main interface, provides shortcut icons for the main operations of the system. The navigation pane consists of four tabs, namely, Project, Control, Configuration, and View, as shown in Figure 2-5. Click in the upper right corner of the navigation pane to hide the navigation pane.
Figure 2-5 Navigation pane
Project tab Table 2-14 describes the shortcut icons under this tab. Table 2-14 Description of the icons under the Project tab Icon Description Enables you to create a project.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
2-15
Icon
Description Enables you to open the project file in the following path: software installation path \Projects\Site Verification. Enables you to open the project file in the following path: software installation path \Projects\Optimize. Enables you to open the benchmark project file in the following path: software installation path \Projects\Benchmark. Enables you to open the project file in the following path: software installation path \Projects\Acceptance. Enables you to open the project file in the following path: software installation path \Projects\Customize.
l l
Control tab Table 2-12 describes the shortcut icons under this tab. Configuration tab Table 2-15 describes the shortcut icons under this tab. Table 2-15 Description of the icons under the Configuration tab Icon Description Enables you to configure external devices. After you click this icon, the Device Configure dialog box is displayed for you to configure external devices. Enables you to design a test plan. After you click this icon, the Test Plan Control dialog box is displayed for you to design a test plan. Enables you to set configuration items of the system. After you click this icon, the System Configure dialog box is displayed for you to modify the pre-defined event attributes, alarm mode when the device is abnormal, and attributes of the logfile.
View tab The icons under this tab provide operation entries for various view windows, engineering parameter windows, and test plan control windows. For details, see Table 2-8.
2-16
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Operation Interface
The operation interface is used to display various view windows and configuration windows. The operation interface consists of multiple worksheets. You can add multiple worksheets as required. Right-click the status bar of the operation interface shown in Figure 2-2. Then, you can add, delete, or rename a worksheet through the options displayed in the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 2-6. Figure 2-6 Shortcut menu of the status bar of the operation interface
System Status Bar

The system status bar, located at the bottom of the main interface, displays the current status of the system and the device, as shown in Figure 2-7. For descriptions on the Figure 2-7, see Table 2-16. Figure 2-7 System status bar
Table 2-16 Description of the system status bar No. (1) (2) Name Menu description System status Description This area displays the function description of a menu when the menu is in use. This area displays the current status of the system. The status can be Idle, Testing, or Replay.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
2-17
No. (3)
Name Device status
Description This area displays the connection status of the currently configured devices. If you place the mouse pointer on the status indicator, the name of the device that the indicator stands for is displayed. Different colors represent different status, as shown in Table 2-17. l l l indicates the MS. indicates the GPS. indicates the Scanner.
Table 2-17 Device status description Icon Meaning Red indicator: l The external device is connected to the PC properly but the connection displayed on the Probe is broke down or abnormal. l The external device is disconnected from the PC or the connection to the PC is abnormal. The green indicator indicates that the external device connected to the PC and the connection displayed on the Probe is normal. The yellow indicator indicates that the signals of the external device are insufficient or the device is in the Searching state.
2.4 Working Mode of the Probe

The Probe can work in two different working modes. One for testing and recording data. The other is for replaying and analyzing data. The Probe can work in the following working modes: l Drive test mode By working with the test terminal and other external devices, the Probe collects the air interface data and records the test data (saving the test data in logfiles). During the data collection, you can also observe the test data in real time. For details, see 8 Collecting Data. l Replay mode The Probe reads the test data from logfiles and replays logfiles for inspection and analysis. During the replay, you can adjust the replay speed and assign the replay start point to facilitate the problem identification and analysis. For details, see 9.3 Replaying Logfiles.

NOTE
The minimum replay rate and the maximum rate supported by the Probe are 1/8 and 32 times of the test rate.
The preceding two working modes are mutually exclusive: l l When the system is in the drive test mode, if the working mode needs to be switched to the replay mode, the test must be stopped before the logfile is opened. When the system is in the replay mode, if the working mode needs to be switched to the drive test mode, the replay must be stopped and the logfile must be closed before the external device is connected to the Probe.
2.5 Recommended Device List

This section describes the recommended devices, including UEs, data cards, and scanners. 2.5.1 Recommended Terminal List (GSM/WCDMA) This section describes the recommended GSM/WCDMA terminals and data cards and the features supported by these GSM/WCDMA terminals and data cards. 2.5.2 Recommended Terminal List (LTE) This section describes the recommended LTE data cards and the features supported by these LTE data cards. 2.5.3 Recommended Terminal List (WiMAX) This section describes the recommended WiMAX data cards and the features supported by these WiMAX data cards. 2.5.4 Recommended Scanner List This section describes the recommended scanner list and the features supported by these scanners.
2.5.1 Recommended Terminal List (GSM/WCDMA)

This section describes the recommended GSM/WCDMA terminals and data cards and the features supported by these GSM/WCDMA terminals and data cards.
NOTE
l : Supported. l : Not supported.
Recommended terminal list (GSM/WCDMA)

Feature/Terminal GSM 850 GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900 WCDMA 850
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
U6100
U1251
U1280-5
2-19
Feature/Terminal WCDMA 900 WCDMA 1900 WCDMA 2100 WCDMA AWS EDGE HSDPA (Mbit/s) HSUPA (Mbit/s) External Antenna Video Phone SQE(MS-MS) SQE(MS-PSTN) GSM Cell Locking GSM Forced Handover/Prohibited Handover GSM ARFCN/Band Locking GSM CBA Turnover GSM Frequency Scan WCDMA UARFCN Locking WCDMA Scrambling Code Locking
U6100
U1251
U1280-5
Recommended data card list (GSM/WCDMA)

Feature/Data Card GSM 850 GSM 900 GSM 1800 GSM 1900 E372u-8
2-20
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Feature/Data Card WCDMA 850 WCDMA 900 WCDMA 1900 WCDMA 2100 WCDMA AWS HSDPA (Mbit/s) HSUPA (Mbit/s) MIMO MIMO+64QAM HSPA+ DC-HSPA+ PC Voice
E372u-8 21.6 5.76 42
2.5.2 Recommended Terminal List (LTE)

This section describes the recommended LTE data cards and the features supported by these LTE data cards.
NOTE
Feature/Data Card 2100 2650 900 800 Band 64 TDD
Huawei B390
Huawei E398
2.5.3 Recommended Terminal List (WiMAX)

This section describes the recommended WiMAX data cards and the features supported by these WiMAX data cards.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
2-21

NOTE
Feature/Data Card 2.3 (GHz) 2.5 (GHz) 3.5 (GHz) External Antenna MIMO FFR
Huawei Sequans BM358
Seowon GCT SWU3120
Seowon GCT SWU3220
2.5.4 Recommended Scanner List

This section describes the recommended scanner list and the features supported by these scanners.
NOTE
Feature/Scanner GSM 850 (MHz) GSM 900 (MHz) GSM 1800 (MHz) GSM 1900 (MHz) WCDMA 850 (MHz) WCDMA 900 (MHz) WCDMA 1900 (MHz) WCDMA 2100 (MHz) WCDMA AWS (MHz) WiMAX 2.3 (GHz) WiMAX 2.5 (GHz) WiMAX 3.5 (GHz) CW
PCTEL SeeGull Ex
TSMQ/TSML
2-22
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Feature/Scanner RSSI Scanning GSM Scanning Spectrum Analysis TopN Pilot Scanning (WCDMA) TopN Preamble Index Scanning (WiMAX) External Antenna External GPS
PCTEL SeeGull Ex
TSMQ/TSML
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
2-23
3 Installing the Probe
3
About This Chapter
Context
Installing the Probe
This section describes how to install the Probe and other assistants. To complete the installation of the Probe, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as prompted by the installation wizard.
After the Probe is installed, you must connect the dongle to the PC to obtain the license so that you can use the relevant functions authorized by the license. 3.1 Preparations Before Installing the Probe Before installing the Probe, you must check whether the installation requirements are met. The installation requirements are as follows: The software package of the Probe is available. The software package of the shared components is available. The configuration of the PC meets the requirement for the installation. 3.2 Installing Shared Components The GENEX Shared components provide functions for map processing and view editing. Therefore, the Shared components must be installed to ensure normal running of the Probe. 3.3 Installing the Probe Main Program The Probe main program must be installed on the computer used for the test and must be active during the test. 3.4 Plugging in a Dongle The dongle is a device that provides the user with the authorization to use the GENEX series products. License is integrated with the dongle. Therefore, you must plug the dongle into the computer before using the Probe to collect data or using the PSTN SQE Server to evaluate speech quality. If you only use the Probe to replay data, the dongle is not required.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
3-1
3.1 Preparations Before Installing the Probe

Before installing the Probe, you must check whether the installation requirements are met. The installation requirements are as follows: The software package of the Probe is available. The software package of the shared components is available. The configuration of the PC meets the requirement for the installation.
Hardware Requirements of the Probe

Table 3-1 lists the hardware requirements for the PC. Table 3-1 Hardware requirements of the Probe Configuration Item CPU Memory Hard disk PC port Configuration Requirement It is recommended that the processor be Intel 1.8 GHz Dual-Core. The minimum memory is 1 GB and it is recommended that the memory be 2 GB or larger. It is recommended that the free hard disk space be 10 GB or larger. l If a scanner is connected to the PC, one USB port, one serial port, or one IEEE 1394 port is required. l If a test terminal is connected to the PC, at least one USB port, one USB hub, one serial port, or one PCI slot is required. l If a GPS is connected to the PC, one USB port or one serial port is required. l If a dongle is connected to the PC, at least one USB port is required. Operating System Microsoft Windows XP or Microsoft Windows 7
Software Requirements of the Probe

Table 3-2 lists the software and the corresponding configurations required for the drive test. Table 3-2 Software requirements of the Probe Configuration Item Operating system Obtaining Method Configuration Requirement Microsoft Windows XP or Microsoft Windows 7 Remarks Mandatory
3-2
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Configuration Item Operating software
Obtaining Method -
Configuration Requirement Microsoft Office 2003 or Microsoft Office 2007
Remarks If the Microsoft Office is not installed, the engineering parameter file in xls or xlsx format cannot be imported. Mandatory
GENEX Probe V200R003C01 software installation package
l Download the software package from http:// support.huawei.co m. l Obtain from the GENEX Probe V200R003C01 software installation CDROM.
The user must have an account for the http:// support.huawei.com. In addition, the user must be authorized to download the GENEX Probe V200R003C01 software installation package or the user purchased the GENEX Probe V200R003C01.
Software installation package of the GENEX shared components
l Download the software package from http:// support.huawei.co m. l Obtain from the GENEX Probe V200R003C01 software installation CDROM.
The user must have an account for the http:// support.huawei.com. In addition, the user must be authorized to download the software installation package of the GENEX shared components or the user purchased the GENEX Probe V200R003C01.
If the GENEX Shared components are not installed, the Probe cannot be used normally.
License
The license is integrated in the dongle.
The GENEX Probe V200R003C01 is purchased.
If the dongle is not installed, only the replay function of the Probe can be used.
3.2 Installing Shared Components

The GENEX Shared components provide functions for map processing and view editing. Therefore, the Shared components must be installed to ensure normal running of the Probe.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-3
Context
If the computer is already installed with the Probe before, you need not to install the Shared components again. For an upgrade version of the Probe, the GENEX Shared components also need to be upgraded. Therefore, you need to install an upgraded GENEX Shared components if you install an upgrade version of the Probe.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the installation program of GENEX Shared components. If ... The installation program is downloaded from http://support.huawei.com. The installation CD-ROM of GENEX Probe V200R003 is available. Then ... Decompress the downloaded package and perform Step 2. Perform Step 2.
Step 2 Double-click Setup.exe. The installation interface is displayed. Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click Yes. Step 5 After the installation is complete, click Finish. Step 6 Check whether the GENEX Shared components are successfully installed. Choose Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs. In the displayed Add or Remove Programs window, check whether the software information about the GENEX Shared components is listed. If ... The software information about the GENEX Shared components is listed. The software information about the GENEX Shared components is not listed. ----End Then ... The GENEX Shared components are installed successfully. Perform Step 1 through Step 6.
3.3 Installing the Probe Main Program

The Probe main program must be installed on the computer used for the test and must be active during the test.
3-4
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Prerequisite
Get the Probe installation program ready and check whether the computer meets the hardware requirements for installing the Probe. For details about the hardware requirements, see 3.1 Preparations Before Installing the Probe.
Context
During the installation of the Probe, the system installs the PSTN SQE Server by default. You can install the two softwares according to your requirements. If you need to perform the speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink, you must install the PSTN SQE Server. For details about the PSTN SQE Server, see the corresponding user guide.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the GENEX Probe V200R003C01 installation program. If ... The installation program is downloaded from http://support.huawei.com. The installation CD-ROM of GENEX Probe V200R003C01 is available. Then ... Decompress the downloaded package and perform Step 2. Perform Step 2.
Step 2 Double-click Setup.exe. The installation interface is displayed. Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, choose I accept the terms of the license agreement. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 In the dialog box as shown in Figure 3-1, specify User Name and Company Name.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
3-5
Figure 3-1 Customer Information
NOTE
l Anyone who uses this computer (all users): Authorize all users of this computer to use the Probe. l Only for me (user): Authorize only the current user to use the Probe.
Step 7 Click Next. Step 8 Select the installation mode. l Complete: Installs the Probe and the PSTN SQE Server at a time. l Custom: Refers to the custom installation mode. You can choose to install the PSTN SQE server. Step 9 Click Browse to select the installation directory. Step 10 Click Next. If ... The Complete installation mode is used The Custom installation mode is used Then ... Perform Step 11. 1. In the displayed dialog box, select Probe. 2. Click Next. 3. Perform Step 11. Step 11 After the installation is complete, you can select Yes, I want to restart my computer now or No, I will restart my computer later. Then click Finish.
It is recommended that you select Yes, I want to restart my computer now. Step 12 Check whether the Probe is installed successfully. Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 > Probe and check whether the shortcut for the Probe exists. If ... The shortcut for the Probe exists. The shortcut for the Probe does not exist. Then ... The Probe is installed successfully. Perform Step 1 through Step 12 again.
After the Probe main program is installed, the generated Probe installation folder is in a structure described in Table 3-3. Table 3-3 Structure of the Probe installation folder Folder Probe 2.3 Bin Fonts HelpManual Language MsgDecoder PLUGIN SQE Voice Config EventConfig Log Map Description Saves the fonts used by the Probe. Saves the help documents. Saves the supported language resources. Saves the data used for decoding. Saves the plug-ins supported by the Probe. Saves the sample files and the destination files of the speech quality evaluation test. Saves the voice files. Saves the system configuration files. Saves the configuration files that serve as the principle for event handling. Saves the logfiles recording history operations. Saves the map files.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
3-7
Folder Projects
Description Save project files. By default, the following folders are contained: l Acceptance: Saves the project files for acceptance tests. l Benchmark: Saves the project files for benchmark tests. l Customize: Saves the customized project files. l Optimize: Saves the project files for optimization tests. l Site Verification: Saves the project files for site verification tests. Temp Template Saves the temporary files. Saves the templates of projects and engineering parameters.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the Probe is installed, you must connect the dongle to the PC to obtain the license so that you can use the relevant functions authorized by the license.
3.4 Plugging in a Dongle

The dongle is a device that provides the user with the authorization to use the GENEX series products. License is integrated with the dongle. Therefore, you must plug the dongle into the computer before using the Probe to collect data or using the PSTN SQE Server to evaluate speech quality. If you only use the Probe to replay data, the dongle is not required.
Procedure
Step 1 Plug in the dongle. If ... Then ...
The software is being used for the first time Plug the dongle into the USB port of the PC. and the dongle is available. The dongle expires. Perform Step 2 through Step 5 to obtain a valid license and update the license for the dongle.
3-8
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Step 2 Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 > corresponding software name (such as Probe or PSTN SQE Server) to run the main program. Step 3 On the displayed main interface, choose Help > View ESN. Step 4 Send the ESN to Huawei technical support engineer and wait for a new license. Normally, the new license will be delivered in two to three days. Step 5 Update the new license for the dongle. 1. 2. 3. 4. On the main interface, choose Help > Update License. In the Open dialog box, select the new license. Click Open. In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click OK.
CAUTION
When updating the new license for the dongle, ensure that only the dongle for the corresponding software is plugged into the computer. Step 6 Optional: Choose Help > License Info to check the authorization information of the dongle. ----End
Follow-up Procedure
If the dongle can not be used normally, the dongle driver should be installed. You can obtain the dongle driver through the following modes: l l Huawei website: http://support.huawei.com GENEX Probe V200R003 software installation CD-ROM
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
3-9
4 Starting the Probe
4
Procedure
l l Double-click ----End
Starting the Probe
Once installed, the Probe application can be launched from the Start menu or the shortcut icon.
Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 > Probe to open the main interface of the Probe. For details about the main interface of the Probe, see 2.3 Main Interface of the Probe. to open the main interface of the Probe.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
4-1
5 Managing the Map Window
5
About This Chapter
Context
l l
Managing the Map Window
The map window displays map-related information in a test area and counter information such as cell information, event information, and IE information on the drive test route. You can add a layer, configure layer properties, and configure the legend properties of the IE layer in the map window.
To open an indoor map window, choose View > IndoorMap. To open an outdoor map window, choose View > OutdoorMap.
5.1 Basic Concepts About Maps This section describes the basic concepts about maps. It is recommended that you perform relevant operations in the map window to learn the relevant concepts of maps. 5.2 Importing Maps You can import a map through the indoor map window or outdoor map window. In this manner, you can directly know the wireless environment of the test area and easily analyze the test data. 5.3 Adding Layers This section describes how to add map layers or counter layers such as IE layer, cell layer, and event layer to an indoor map or an outdoor map so that you can view and analyze test data. 5.4 Configuring Layer Properties Layer properties consist of layer display properties and layer label properties. Layer display properties specify the display modes of the objects on a layer. Layer label properties specify the labeling modes of the objects on a layer. You can configure layer offset properties and adjust the projection of map layers in the outdoor map window. You can also configure the offset properties of IE layers in the indoor or outdoor map window. The configuration of layer properties is temporary and is not saved in projects. 5.5 Configuring Legend Properties Legend properties include the colors, shapes, and fonts of legends. You can configure the IE legend properties of MSs in the indoor or outdoor map window so that IEs are displayed on the map as dots according to different legends. If legend properties are not configured, the Probe displays IEs according to the default legend.
5.1 Basic Concepts About Maps

This section describes the basic concepts about maps. It is recommended that you perform relevant operations in the map window to learn the relevant concepts of maps.
Map
The map consists of a series of map elements and involves the MapInfo map and the raster map. The map information is displayed in the map window on the Probe. The map information includes the map information about the test area, test routes, events, and engineering parameters. l MapInfo map A MapInfo map consists of multiple layers, and each layer is saved in a file. The files supported by the MapInfo map are in .tab or .gst (GeoSet) format. A GeoSet is a special type of workspace used for map layers and saves the configurations including layer order, labels, and legends. l Raster map The entire raster map can be considered as a layer. The raster map supported by the Probe is in .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png format.
Layer
A layer is a set of data displayed in the map window. There are two main types of layers: map layers and indicator layers. l l A map consists of multiple map layers. An indicator layer includes the information related to events, IEs, and cells.
A layer may contain multiple objects. For example, a map layer contains all the roads and water areas on the map; a cell layer (see Figure 5-1) contains multiple engineering parameters. Figure 5-1 Cell layer
5-2
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Label
Labels are the texts that represent the objects contained on each layer in the map window. For example, the fields of the engineering parameters on a cell layer, the values and indexes of the IEs on an IE layer, and the names of the buildings on a building layer.
5.2 Importing Maps

You can import a map through the indoor map window or outdoor map window. In this manner, you can directly know the wireless environment of the test area and easily analyze the test data.
Context
After the Probe is installed, the system automatically installs the world map. If no other maps are imported, the system displays the world map by default each time you open the outdoor map window. If engineering parameters are imported, the Probe automatically loads the engineering parameters and displays them as a layer of the map after you open the outdoor map window. The indoor map window and the outdoor map window are mutually exclusive. Therefore, you must close the outdoor map window before opening the indoor map window. Similarly, you must close the indoor map window before opening the outdoor map window. 5.2.1 Importing Outdoor Test Maps The MapInfo map and raster map can be imported. The MapInfo map consists of multiple layers, and each layer is saved in a file. The entire raster map can be considered as a layer. You can import outdoor test map during the outdoor test to facilitate the data browse in the outdoor map view. 5.2.2 Importing Indoor Test Maps Only the raster indoor map can be imported. You can import indoor test map during the indoor test to facilitate the data browse in the indoor map view.
5.2.1 Importing Outdoor Test Maps

The MapInfo map and raster map can be imported. The MapInfo map consists of multiple layers, and each layer is saved in a file. The entire raster map can be considered as a layer. You can import outdoor test map during the outdoor test to facilitate the data browse in the outdoor map view.
Procedure
l Import a MapInfo map. 1. 2. 3. Choose View > OutdoorMap from the system menu, or double-click OutdoorMap on the View tab page in the navigation area. In the OutdoorMap window displayed, click the icon.
Select one or more outdoor map files in .tab format or .gst format. You can select multiple map files by holding down Ctrl.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
5-3
4. l 1. 2. 3. 4.
Click Open. Choose View > OutdoorMap from the system menu, or double-click OutdoorMap on the View tab page in the navigation area. In the OutdoorMap window displayed, click the icon.
Import a raster map.
Select a .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png file and then click Open. In the Raster Image dialog box, click on the map to add a reference point.
NOTE
The imported raster map does not contain geographical information; therefore, reference points must be added for determining geographic locations on the map.
5. 6. 7. ----End
In the Add Control Point dialog box, enter the name of the reference point, longitude, latitude, and location information. Click OK. Perform Step 4 through Step 5 repeatedly to add at least three reference points. The reference points should not be in the same line. Click OK.
Follow-up Procedure
You can add layers or configure the display properties of layers in an active outdoor map. For details, see 5 Managing the Map Window.
Related References
12.3 Interface Description: OutdoorMap Window 12.12 Parameters for Importing the Outdoor Raster Map
5.2.2 Importing Indoor Test Maps

Only the raster indoor map can be imported. You can import indoor test map during the indoor test to facilitate the data browse in the indoor map view.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose View > IndoorMap from the system menu, or double-click IndoorMap on the View tab page in the navigation area. Step 2 In the IndoorMap window displayed, click the Step 3 Choose a .tif file or a .bmp file. Step 4 Click Open. ----End icon.
Follow-up Procedure
You can add layer or configure the legends properties of the layer in an active indoor map. For details, see 5 Managing the Map Window.
Related References
12.4 Interface Description: IndoorMap Window
5.3 Adding Layers

This section describes how to add map layers or counter layers such as IE layer, cell layer, and event layer to an indoor map or an outdoor map so that you can view and analyze test data.
Prerequisite
l l If you want to add map layers, the map files in .tab format must be ready. If you want to add counter layers, make preparations as follows: If you want to add IE layers and event layers, external devices must be configured. If you want to add cell layers, engineering parameters must be imported.
Context
A layer is a set of data displayed in the map window. There are two main types of layer, namely, map layer and counter layer. Map layers form the map. Counter layers consist of information about event, IE, cell, alarm, and GPS counters. A layer may contain multiple objects. For example, a map layer contains all the roads and water areas on the map; a cell layer contains multiple engineering parameters.
Procedure
Step 1 Determine the type of layers to be added. If you need to... Add map layers Add counter layers Then ... Perform Step 2 through Step 6. Perform Step 7 through Step 9.
Step 2 In the outdoor map window, click or right-click in the map display area and then choose Layer Control from the shortcut menu. The Layer Control dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click Add. Step 4 Select one or more .tab files, and then click Open.
NOTE
You are advised to add only necessary layers such as base stations, test routes, and main roads on the map.
Step 5 Optional: In the Layer Control dialog box, click Up or Down to move a layer forward or backward. Step 6 Click OK. Step 7 In the Map Layers window of the indoor or outdoor map view, click
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
.
5-5
Step 8 In the Add Layer dialog box, select the layers to be added. Step 9 Click OK. ----End
5.4 Configuring Layer Properties

Layer properties consist of layer display properties and layer label properties. Layer display properties specify the display modes of the objects on a layer. Layer label properties specify the labeling modes of the objects on a layer. You can configure layer offset properties and adjust the projection of map layers in the outdoor map window. You can also configure the offset properties of IE layers in the indoor or outdoor map window. The configuration of layer properties is temporary and is not saved in projects.
Prerequisite
l l l If you want to configure the properties of cell layers, ensure that engineering parameters are imported. If you want to configure the properties of counter layers during a test, ensure that external devices are configured. If you want to configure the properties of counter layers during a replay, ensure that the logfile used for the replay contains the information about external devices. Choose View > Information. Then, you can view the contents in the logfile in the displayed Information window.
Context
l Labels are the texts that represent the objects contained on each type of layer in a map. For example, the fields of the engineering parameters on a cell layer, the values and numbers of the IEs on an IE layer, and the names of the buildings on a building layer. For the GSM system, the BTSName and BTSID can be labeled for the base station. By default, engineering parameter fields BTSName and BCCHNO are labeled. For the WCDMA system, the NodeBName and NodeBID can be labeled for the base station. By default, engineering parameter fields NodeBName and P-SC are labeled. For the CDMA system, the Site Name and Site ID can be labeled for the base station. By default, engineering parameter fields Site Name and PN are labeled. For the WiMAX system, the BS Name and BS ID can be labeled for the base station. By default, engineering parameter fields BSName and Preamble Index are labeled. For the LTE system, the eNodeBName and eNodeBID can be labeled for the base station. By default, engineering parameter fields eNodeBName and PCI are labeled. l The map projection refers to the method of projecting the points on the spheroid earth to the plane coordinates. The projection varies with layers, and thus a standard is required to normalize the projection, namely, to adjust the map projection. l Layer offset refers to the method of making an offset of certain distance on an IE layer in the longitude or latitude direction so that the objects on each layer can be displayed clearly.
5-6
Procedure
l Configuring layer display properties 1. 2. 3. 4. In the outdoor map window, click or right-click the map, and then choose Layer Control from the shortcut menu. The Layer Control dialog box is displayed. In the Layers area, select a layer for which the display properties are to be configured. In the Properties area, select Visible to display the selected layer on the map. Click Display to configure the display properties of this layer. For details about the relevant parameters, see Parameters of the Display Properties Dialog Box. 5. 6. 7. l After the configuration is complete, click OK. The Layer Control dialog box is displayed. Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 until the display properties of all the required layers are configured. In the Layer Control dialog box, click OK.
Configuring layer label properties You can configure layer label properties by using either of the following methods: In the outdoor map window, click Cell Label Setting dialog box. , and then configure layer label properties in the
You can choose to label a base station field or the imported engineering parameter fields. In the outdoor map window, click or right-click the map, and then choose Layer Control from the shortcut menu. Configure the layer label properties in the Layer Control dialog box. For details, see Step 1 through Step 6. 1. 2. 3. In the Layers area of the Layer Control dialog box, select a layer for which the label properties are to be configured. In the Properties area, select Visible and Automatic Labels to display the labels of the selected layer on the map. Click Labels to configure the label properties of this layer. For details about the relevant parameters, see Parameters of the Label Properties Dialog Box. 4. 5. 6. l After the configuration is complete, click OK. Then, the Layer Control dialog box is displayed. Repeat Step 1 through Step 4 until the label properties of all the required layers are configured. In the Layer Control dialog box, click OK. The labels of the configured layers are displayed in the map. Adjusting the projection of a map layer 1. 2. 3.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
In the outdoor map window, right-click the map, and then choose Projection from the shortcut menu. The Choose Projection dialog box is displayed. Select a projection mode from the Category drop-down list and select an adjustment mode in the Category Members area. Click OK.
Configuring the offset properties of IE layers 1. In the Map Layers window of an indoor or outdoor map view, right-click the IE layer, and then choose Offset Layer from the shortcut menu. The Layer Offset dialog box is displayed. Set the offset. For detailed description about the parameters, see Parameters for Configuring the Layer Offset. After the configuration is complete, click OK.
2.
3. ----End
5.5 Configuring Legend Properties

Legend properties include the colors, shapes, and fonts of legends. You can configure the IE legend properties of MSs in the indoor or outdoor map window so that IEs are displayed on the map as dots according to different legends. If legend properties are not configured, the Probe displays IEs according to the default legend.
Prerequisite
l l If you want to configure IE legend properties during a test, ensure that the MS is configured. If you want to configure IE legend properties during a replay, ensure that the logfile used for the replay contains the information about the MS. Choose View > Information. Then, you can view the contents in the logfile in the displayed Information window.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Map Layers window of the indoor or outdoor map view, select an IE layer. or right-click the IE layer, and then choose Edit Layer from the shortcut menu. Step 2 Click the The Layer Parameter dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the relevant parameters in the Layer Parameter dialog box. For detailed description about the parameters, see Parameters of the Layer Parameter Dialog Box. Step 4 After the configuration is complete, click OK. ----End
Related References
12.13 Parameters for Configuring the Legend Properties
5-8
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
6 Managing Engineering Parameters
Managing Engineering Parameters
About This Chapter

This chapter describes engineering parameters of different network systems supported by the Probe and the method for importing engineering parameters. You can learn about the details of base station parameters, antenna parameters, neighboring cell parameters, and various technology parameters of the current test area through the engineering parameters. 6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems This describes mandatory fields and optional fields of the engineering parameters supported in different network system. You can refer to these parameters when you import the engineering parameters of different network protocol. 6.2 Importing Engineering Parameters You can import engineering parameters of the test area before the test or replay. After the engineering parameters are imported, the system detects the best matched BTS from the imported BTS information according to the network parameter values of the Probe.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
6-1
6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems

This describes mandatory fields and optional fields of the engineering parameters supported in different network system. You can refer to these parameters when you import the engineering parameters of different network protocol. l l l l l For details on GSM engineering parameters, see GSM Engineering Parameters. For details on WCDMA engineering parameters, see WCDMA Engineering Parameters. For details on CDMA engineering parameters, see CDMA Engineering Parameters. For details on WiMAX engineering parameters, see WiMAX Engineering Parameters. For details on LTE engineering parameters, see LTE Engineering Parameters.
The default saving path of the engineering parameters is as follows: Software Installation Directory\Template\Engineering Parameters.
GSM Engineering Parameters

Field Description Value Mandat ory (Yes/ No) Yes Yes Yes
Azimuth CI LAC
Azimuth (degree) Cell ID Location area code Absolute radio frequency channel number of the broadcast control channel Longitude (degree) Latitude (degree) Base transceiver station (BTS) ID BTS name Cell name Cell global identification Traffic channel (TCH) list
Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 360. Data type: double. Range: 0 to 65535. Data type: double. Range: 0 to 65535. Data type: double. Range: 0 to 1023. Data type: double. Range: -180.0 to 180.0. Data type: double. Range: -90.0 to 90.0. Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Data type: character string.
BCCHNo Longitude Latitude BTSID BTSName CellName CGI TCHList

6-2
Yes Yes Yes No No No No No
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Field
Description
Value
Mandat ory (Yes/ No)
BSIC AntHeight MechTilt ElecTilt Altitude GprsSuppo rt Polarizatio n AntGain FreqBand EdgeSupp ort FH Mode SiteConfig City Region BTSType AntType BSCName ProjectPha se RAC MA TMAType
Base station identity code, consisting of network color code (NCC) and base station color code (BCC) Antenna height Machine downTilt angle (degree) Electronic downTilt (degree) Antenna altitude Indicates whether the general packet radio service (GPRS) is supported Polarization type Antenna gain Band Indicates whether the EDGE is supported Frequency hopping mode NodeB Type City Region NodeB type Antenna type Base station controller (BSC) name Indicates to which phase the project belongs Routing area code Mobile allocation Tower amplification (TMA) type
Data type: character string. Range of the NCC and BCC: 0 to 7. Data type: float. Data type: float. Data type: float. Data type: float.
No No No No No
Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Data type: float. Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Value: Macrocell and Microcell. Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 65535. Data type: character string. Data type: character string.
No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
6-3
Field
Description
Value
Mandat ory (Yes/ No) No
TMAGain
TMA gain
Data type: integer.
WCDMA Engineering Parameters

Field Description Value Mandat ory (Yes/ No) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No
CellID UARFCN P-SC Azimuth Longitude Latitude RNCID NodeBID NodeBNa me NodeBTyp e SectorID CellName DownTilt EDownTilt MDownTilt GroudHeig ht
Cell ID Carrier frequency point Primary scrambling code Azimuth (degree) Longitude Latitude Radio network controller (RNC) ID NodeB ID NodeB name NodeB type Sector ID Cell name Downtilt (degree) Internal E-downTilt (degree) Machine downTilt angle (degree) Antenna height above the ground
Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 65535. Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 20000. Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 511. Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 360. Data type: double. Range: -180.0 to 180.0. Data type: double. Range: -90.0 to 90.0. Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 255. Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Value: Macrocell and Microcell. Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90. Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90. Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90. Data type: float.
6-4
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Field
Description
Value
Mandat ory (Yes/ No) No No No No
Altitude AntennaTy pe AntennaG ain HBeamwidt h VBeamwidt h FeederTyp e FeederLen gth NodeBCE ActiveStat us Outdoor TMA
Antenna altitude Antenna type Antenna gain Width of horizontal halfpower beam Width of vertical half-power beam Feeder type Feeder length Number of NodeB CEs Cell status (active or not) Outdoor station Tower mounted amplifier
Data type: float. Data type: character string. Data type: float. Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90.
Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90.
No
Data type: character string. Data type: float. Data type: integer. Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Data type: character string.
No No No No No No
CDMA Engineering Parameters

Field Description Value Mandat ory (Yes/ No) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
PN Longitude Latitude Azimuth Cell ID
Pseudo-random number Longitude Latitude Azimuth (degree) Cell ID
Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 511. Data type: double. Range: -180.0 to 180.0. Data type: double. Range: -90.0 to 90.0. Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 360. Data type: integer.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
6-5
Field
Description
Value
Mandat ory (Yes/ No) Yes Yes No No No No No No No No
ARFCN Sector ID DownTilt Site ID Site Name Carrier ID SID NID Antenna Height BeamWidt h
Frequency number Sector ID Downtilt (degree) Site ID Site name Carrier ID System ID Network ID Antenna height (m) Angle of the horizontal lobe (degree)
Data type: integer. Data type: integer. Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 90. Data type: integer. Data type: character string. Data type: integer. Data type: integer. Data type: integer. Data type: integer. Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 90.
WiMAX Engineering Parameters

Field Description Value Mandat ory (Yes/ No) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
BSID Longitude Latitude Freq Azimuth Preamble Index FA Index Operator ID
Base station ID, including Operator ID and Sector ID Longitude Latitude Frequency (kHz) Azimuth of an antenna (degree) Preamble index, corresponding to Segment and Cell ID Frequency allocation index Operator ID corresponding to BSID
Data type: character string. Data type: double. Range: -180.0 to 180.0. Data type: double. Range: -90.0 to 90.0. Data type: integer. Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 360. Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 114. Data type: integer. Data type: integer.
No No
6-6
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Field
Description
Value
Mandat ory (Yes/ No) No No No No No No No
Sector ID Cell ID Cell Name BS Name Antenna Height DownTilt Angle
Sector ID Cell ID Cell name Base station name Antenna height (m) Azimuth of an antenna (degree) Width of the antenna main lobe (degree) PermBase in the cell
Data type: integer. Data type: integer. Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Data type: integer. Data type: double. Range: 0 to 90. Data type: double. Range: 0 to 360, where, 0 indicates the omnidirectional antenna. Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 33.
PermBase
No
LTE Engineering Parameters

Field Description Value Mandato ry (Yes/ No) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
eNodeBID eNodeBNa me SectorID Local CellID CellID UARFCN PCI Longitude Latitude
LTE eNodeB ID LTE eNodeB name Sector ID Local cell ID Cell ID Carrier frequency point ID of the primary cell Longitude Latitude
Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 533. Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 20000. Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 503. Data type: double. Range: -180.0 to 180.0. Data type: double. Range: -90.0 to 90.0.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
6-7
Field
Description
Value
Mandato ry (Yes/ No) Yes No No No No No No No No No No
Azimuth eNodeBTy pe CellName DownTilt EDownTilt MDownTilt GroudHei ght Altitude AntennaT ype AntennaG ain HBeamwidt h VBeamwidt h FeederTyp e FeederLen gth ActiveStat us Outdoor TMA
Azimuth (degree) LTE eNodeB type Cell name Downtilt (degree) Internal E-downTilt (degree) Machine downTilt angle (degree) Antenna height above the ground Antenna altitude Antenna type Antenna gain Width of horizontal halfpower beam Width of vertical half-power beam Feeder type Feeder length Cell status (active or not) Station type (outdoor or not) The tower mounted amplifier is available or not
Data type: float. Range: 0 to 360. Data type: character string. Data type: character string. Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90. Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90. Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90. Data type: float. Data type: float. Data type: character string. Data type: float. Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90.
Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90.
No
Data type: character string. Data type: float. The value is Yes or No. The value is Yes or No. Data type: character string.
No No No No No
6-8
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
6.2 Importing Engineering Parameters

You can import engineering parameters of the test area before the test or replay. After the engineering parameters are imported, the system detects the best matched BTS from the imported BTS information according to the network parameter values of the Probe.
Context
According to service requirements, engineering parameters are classified into mandatory parameters, optional parameters, and neighboring cell parameters. For details, see 6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems. You can click the icon to view engineering parameter templates of different networks in the default path provided by the Probe. In addition, you can modify the format of the current engineering parameter table based on the project reference template to ensure that the format of the engineering parameter table meets the requirements of the Probe. l l The mandatory fields must be totally matched. Otherwise, the corresponding engineering parameter cannot be imported. In the case of the optional fields, you can perform the match operation according to the actual situation. If the optional field is not matched, the Probe does not import the data in the corresponding column as the engineering parameter. Neighboring cells are classified into horizontal neighboring cells and vertical neighboring cells. Horizontal neighboring cell The engineering parameter fields of the serving cell and the cell fields are in the same line of the same table. Horizontal neighboring cells support only the GSM network system. In this case, engineering parameter fields contain neighboring cell fields. Vertical neighboring cell Each line in the table indicates a neighboring cell relation. Vertical neighboring cells support the GSM, WCDMA, WiMAX, and LTE network systems. In this case, engineering parameter fields do not contain neighboring cell fields, and you need to import the corresponding engineering parameter when importing a neighboring cell.
NOTE
In the case of importing vertical neighboring cell fields, pay attention to the following points: l In GSM network system, LAC and CI of the engineering parameter field must be matched, and NLAC and NCI of the neighboring cell field must be matched. l In WCDMA network system, RNCID and CellID of the engineering parameter field must be matched, and NRNCID and NcellID of the neighboring cell field must be matched. l In WiMAX network system, BSID of the engineering parameter field must be matched, and NBSID of the neighboring cell field must be matched. l In LTE network system, CellID and PCI of the engineering parameter field must be matched, and NcellID and NPCI of the neighboring cell field must be matched.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Engineering Parameter management.
Step 2 In the Engineering Parameter management window, click displayed.
. The Select File dialog box is
Step 3 Select the network mode of the imported engineering parameter in Protocol. Step 4 Perform the operation according to the type of the imported data. If ... Then...
The engineering parameter is imported, Open an engineering parameter file in but no neighboring cell field is imported. Engineering parameter file. The engineering parameter and the horizontal neighboring cell field are imported. 1. Select Config Neighboring Cell. 2. Choose Horizontal. 3. Open an engineering parameter file (containing neighboring cell fields) in Engineering parameter file. 1. Select Config Neighboring Cell. 2. Choose Vertical. 3. Open an engineering parameter file in Engineering parameter file. 4. Open a neighboring cell parameter file in Neighboring cell file. Step 5 Click Next. The Match Parameters dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Select the sheet that the engineering parameter or neighboring cell field is located in Select sheet. Step 7 Click Finish. The Probe starts to match the engineering parameters in the Probe Param and Excel Param lists automatically. Then, the engineering parameters are displayed in the Engineering Parameter management window.
The engineering parameter and the vertical neighboring cell field are imported.
6-10
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
If ... The Probe displays a dialog box
Then... You can infer that the mandatory parameters in the Probe Param and Excel Param lists do not match. In this case, you must manually match these mandatory parameters. 1. Click OK. 2. Select the line in which the field does not match. 3. Click Match Date. The Match dialog box is displayed. 4. Select the correct field name and click OK. 5. To match other fields, perform 7.2 through 7.4 repeatedly. 6. Click Finish, and then wait until importing the engineering parameters is complete. 7. Perform Step 8.
The Probe doe not display any dialog box You do not need to manually match the engineering parameters. After the engineering parameters are imported, go to Step 8. Step 8 Optional: Edit the engineering parameters. 1. 2. In the Engineering Parameter management window, select the parameters to be edited, and then type the new values in the table. Click for the new values to take effect.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
In addition, you can click future use. to export engineering parameters to XLS file or CSV file for
After importing engineering parameters, you can add engineering parameter layers or view the engineering parameters and neighboring cell connection line information in the map window.
Related References
12.2 Interface Description: Engineering Parameter management Window 12.11 Parameters for Importing the Engineering Parameters
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
6-11
7 Connecting External Devices
7
About This Chapter
Connecting External Devices
Connecting external devices involves connecting external devices to the PC and in the Probe, so that the external devices can work with the Probe to perform tests. When you use the Probe to replay data, you need not connect external devices. 7.1 Connectable External Devices The Probe supports various types of external devices, such as test terminal, scanner, and GPS. This describes the types and specifications of external devices used in the data collection. 7.2 Plugging in External Devices Before a test is performed, ensure that the external devices are properly plugged into the PC and are correctly positioned. 7.3 Configuring External Devices This section describes how to configure external devices. After external devices are connected to the PC installed with the Probe, you need to add and configure related parameters in the Device Configure window of the Probe so that external devices work with the Probe to collect data. 7.4 Enabling External Devices Enabling external devices refers to connecting external devices in the Probe so that the Probe can recognize the configured external devices. 7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected Selecting the data to be collected refers to the process in which the Probe selectively collects the data reported by test terminals. In this case, the logfile records only the selected data. For the data that is frequently read, you can set data sampling intervals. This avoids the receipt of redundant data and increases the speed of reading data. 7.6 Configuring Device Alarms The Probe generates alarm in dialog box or voice mode, when the device is unexpectedly disconnected or the signal strength of the GPS is weak. You can set alarm events or alarm modes for special situations.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
7-1
7.1 Connectable External Devices

The Probe supports various types of external devices, such as test terminal, scanner, and GPS. This describes the types and specifications of external devices used in the data collection.
Test Terminal
l Table 7-1 shows the types and specifications of GSM/WCDMA test terminals. Table 7-1 Specifications of GSM/WCDMA test terminals Type of the Test Terminal Huawei U120e Supported Band Detect Automatically (Yes/No) Yes Remarks
GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 900/1800/1900 WCDMA (MHz): 2100
Support the following test items: l Forcing function test l Speech quality evaluation test l Video Phone test
Huawei U1205
GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/1800/1900 WCDMA (MHz): 850/1900
Yes
Huawei U6100
Yes
Huawei U1211
GSM/GPRS (MHz): 900/2100 WCDMA (MHz): 900/1800/2100
Yes
7-2
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Type of the Test Terminal Huawei U1251
Supported Band
Detect Automatically (Yes/No) Yes
Remarks
GSM/GPRS (MHz): 850/1800/1900 WCDMA (MHz): 900/2100
Huawei U1307
Yes
Huawei U8220
GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900 WCDMA (MHz): 850/1900/2100
Yes
Not support the following test items: l MMS test l Video Phone test l KeyEmul test l Multi-RAB test l Async SQE(MSMS) test l SQE(MS-PSTN) test
Huawei U8226
GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900 WCDMA (MHz): 850/1900/2100
No
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
7-3
Supported Band
Remarks
Huawei U7517
Yes
Huawei U526
GSM/GPRS (MHz): 900/1800/1900 WCDMA (MHz): 2100
No
Huawei U535
GSM/GPRS (MHz): 900/1800/1900 WCDMA (MHz): 2100
No
Huawei U550
GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 900/1800/1900 HSDPA/WCDMA (MHz): 2100 HSDPA (Mbit/s): 3.6
No
Huawei U626
GSM/GPRS (MHz): 900/1800 WCDMA (MHz): 2100
No
7-4
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Supported Band
Detect Automatically (Yes/No) No
Remarks
Huawei U1280-5
No
Support the following test items: l Speech quality evaluation test l Video Phone test
Huawei U3220
GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900 WCDMA/HSPA+ (MHz): 1700/1900
Yes
Not support the following test items: l Speech quality evaluation test l Video Phone test l MMS test
Huawei E176 Card
GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900 HSPA/WCDMA (MHz): 850/1900/2100 HSDPA (Mbit/s): 7.2 HSUPA (Mbit/s): 2
Yes
Huawei E180 Card
GSM (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900 HSPA/WCDMA (MHz): 900/2100 HSDPA (Mbit/s): 7.2 HSUPA (Mbit/s): 2
Yes
Huawei E270 Card
GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900 HSPA/WCDMA (MHz): 850/1900/2100 HSDPA (Mbit/s): 7.2 HSUPA (Mbit/s): 2
Yes
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
7-5
Type of the Test Terminal Huawei E270+ Card
Supported Band
Remarks
GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900 HSPA+/WCDMA (MHz): 1900/2100 HSDPA (Mbit/s): 7.2 HSUPA (Mbit/s): 2
Support the Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) test.
Huawei E1820 Card
GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900 HSPA+/WCDMA (MHz): 2100 HSDPA (Mbit/s): 21.6
Yes
Support the MIMO test.
Huawei E182E Card
GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900 HSPA+/HSPA/ WCDMA (MHz): 850/900/1900/2100 HSDPA (Mbit/s): 21.6 HSUPA (Mbit/s): 5.76
Yes
Support the MIMO test.
Huawei E1823 Card
GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900 HSPA+/HSPA/ WCDMA (MHz): 850/900/1900/2100 HSDPA (Mbit/s): 21.6 HSUPA (Mbit/s): 5.76
Yes
7-6
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Type of the Test Terminal Huawei E372u-8 Card
Supported Band
Remarks
GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900 HSPA+/HSPA/ WCDMA (MHz): 850/900/1900/2100 HSDPA (Mbit/s): 21.6 HSUPA (Mbit/s): 5.76 DC-HSPA+ (Mbit/ s): 43.2
Support the DCHSDPA test.
Qualcomm TM6200
No
Qualcomm TM6250
No
Qualcomm TM6275
GSM (MHz): 900/1800/1900 WCDMA (MHz): 2100
No
Qualcomm TM6280
GSM (MHz): 900/1800/1900 WCDMA (MHz): 850/1900/2100
No
Table 7-2 shows the types and specifications of CDMA test terminals. Table 7-2 Specifications of CDMA test terminals Type of the Test Terminal Huawei C300 Huawei C506 Huawei C2860 Huawei C5005 Supported Band 1x 800 MHz 1x 800 MHz 1x 800 MHz 1x 800 MHz Detect Automatically (Yes/No) No No No No
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
7-7
Type of the Test Terminal Huawei C5588 Huawei C7100 Huawei C7168 Huawei C7188 Huawei C7200 Huawei EC360 Card Qualcomm QTP-6800 LG KX206 LG KX236
Supported Band 1x 800 MHz 1x 800 MHz 1x 800 MHz 1x 800 MHz 1x 800 MHz 1x/DO0/DOA: 800 MHz, 1900 MHz 1x/DO0/DOA: 800 MHz, 1900 MHz 1x 800 MHz 1x 800 MHz
Detect Automatically (Yes/No) No No No No No No No No No
Table 7-3 shows the types and specifications of WiMAX test terminals. Table 7-3 Specifications of WiMAX test terminals Type of the Test Terminal ZyXEL MAX100 ZyXEL MAX210 Seowon GCT SWU1100 Seowon GCT SWU3020 Seowon GCT SWU3120 Seowon GCT SWU3220 Huawei Sequans BM325 Huawei Sequans BM355 Huawei Sequans BM358 Supported Band 2500 MHz 3500 MHz 2500 MHz, 3500 MHz 2300 MHz 2500 MHz 3500 MHz 2500 MHz 2300 MHz 2300 MHz Detect Automatically (Yes/No) No No No No No No No No No Remarks
7-8
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Type of the Test Terminal Huawei Sequans BM625 Huawei Sequans BM635 Huawei Beceem BM328 Huawei Beceem BM338 l
Supported Band 2500 MHz 3500 MHz 2500 MHz 3500 MHz
Detect Automatically (Yes/No) No No No No
Remarks
Supports only the USB connection mode. Supports only the USB connection mode. Supports only the USB connection mode. Supports only the USB connection mode.
Table 7-4 shows the specifications of LTE test terminals. Table 7-4 Specifications of LTE test terminals Type of the Test Terminal Huawei UE 1.0 Supported Band Detect Automatically (Yes/No) No Remarks
Band 4: AWS Band 7: 2.6GHz Band 12: 700 MHz Band 40: 2.3 GHz DD: 800 MHz
Supports only the network port connection mode.
Huawei UE 1.1
Band 4: AWS Band 7: 2.6 GHz Band 12: 700 MHz Band 40: 2.3 GHz DD: 800 MHz
No
Huawei UE 2.0
Band 1: 2.1 GHz Band 3: 1800 MHz Band 4: AWS Band 7: 2.6 GHz Band 8: 900 MHz Band 12: 700 MHz Band 38: 2.6 GHz Band 40: 2.3 GHz DD: 800 MHz
No
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
7-9
Type of the Test Terminal Huawei B390
Supported Band
Remarks
Band 38: 2.6 GHz Band 40: 2.3 GHz Band 64: 2545 MHz to 2575 MHz Band 7: 2.6 GHz Band 20: 791 MHz to 821 MHz (Downlink), and 832 MHz to 862 MHz (Uplink)
Huawei E398 Card
Band 1: 2.1 GHz Band 7: 2.6 GHz Band 3: 1800 MHz
No
Supports only the USB connection mode.
Scanner
The followings scanners are supported by the Probe: l GSM/WCDMA PCTel SeeGull EX GSM 900/1800 WCDMA 900/2100 PCTel SeeGull LX Tri-Band GSM 900/1800 WCDMA 900/2100 PCTel PCT-505 PCTel PCT-520 Tri-Band GSM 900/1800 WCDMA 2100 Anritsu ML8720 GSM 850/900/1800/1900 WCDMA 2100 Anritsu ML8740 GSM 850/900/1800/1900 WCDMA 2100 Anritsu ML8742A WCDMA 2100 Rohde & Schwarz TSML-W It supports all the WCDMA band class defined by 3GPP by default. l l CDMA PCTel SeeGull LX Dual Mode Quad Band CDMA 850/1900 EV-DO 850/1900 WiMAX PCTel SeeGull EX Mini Dual Band WiMAX 2500/3500
GPS
The Probe supports the GPS that complies with the National Marine Electronics Association 0183 (NMEA0183) protocol. For example, the GARMIN series and supports the text format of the GARMIN series. NMEA0183, enacted by the NMEA, is a data protocol that complies with industrial standards. Based on all ASCII characters, this protocol adapt to custom options . Thus, this protocol is flexible. The following GPSs are supported by the Probe:
l l
GARMIN GPS76 Huan Tian BU353
7.2 Plugging in External Devices

Before a test is performed, ensure that the external devices are properly plugged into the PC and are correctly positioned.
Prerequisite
The external devices and auxiliary equipment for a test are available. For details, see 8.2 Preparations Before Data Collection.
Context
The connection modes that vary with the types of the external devices are as follows: l l l l l Test terminal: USB, PCMCIA slot, or Ethernet port Data card: USB or PCMCIA slot PCTel SeeGull scanner and Anritsu scanner: USB or COM port Rohde&Schwarz TSML-W scanner: FireWire (IEEE 1394 port) GPS: USB or COM port
NOTE
In the case that the Probe performs tests of multiple terminals at a time, the Belkin USB 7-port Hub must be used to ensure the proper connection between test terminals and a PC.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect all required external devices to a PC and ensure that all cables are plugged in properly. For details about how to connect the external devices, see the installation guide of the corresponding external device.
CAUTION
Required drivers of the external devices must be installed so that the PC can identify these devices. You can find drivers of a variety of external devices in the Accessory\Driver directory in the Probe software installation package. For details about how to install these drivers, see the user guide of the corresponding external device. Step 2 Ensure that the external devices are positioned correctly. l Ensure that the connection between the external devices and the PC is secure. l Ensure that the cables connected to the external devices bend naturally. l Ensure that the receive signals of the test terminals and the GPS are not blocked. Otherwise, the signals may be insufficient, which affects the data collection. ----End
Example
For details about the connection mode of an LTE UE, see 13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE?.
Follow-up Procedure
After the external devices are plugged into the PC, you must configure these devices on the Probe and ensure that the Probe identifies them so that they can work with the Probe to collect data.
7.3 Configuring External Devices

This section describes how to configure external devices. After external devices are connected to the PC installed with the Probe, you need to add and configure related parameters in the Device Configure window of the Probe so that external devices work with the Probe to collect data. 7.3.1 Configuring External Devices Automatically This section describes how to configure external devices automatically. The Probe automatically detects external devices that are connected to the PC and automatically adds the detected external devices to the Device Configure window. 7.3.2 Configuring External Devices Manually This section describes how to configure external devices manually. Devices which cannot be detected automatically must be added manually in the Device Configure window.
Related References
12.7 Parameters for Configuring External Devices
7.3.1 Configuring External Devices Automatically

This section describes how to configure external devices automatically. The Probe automatically detects external devices that are connected to the PC and automatically adds the detected external devices to the Device Configure window.
Context
Currently, the Probe supports automatic detection of certain models of test terminals and does not support automatic detection of scanners and GPS. For details about test terminals that can be automatically detected by the Probe, see 7.1 Connectable External Devices.
Procedure
l in the main interface of the Probe. Click The detected external devices are automatically added to the Device Configure dialog box and Down is displayed in State, as shown in Figure 7-1.
7-12
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 7-1 Device Configure dialog box
NOTE
If automatic detection fails or external devices do not support automatic detection, you need to manually configure external devices. For details, see 7.3.2 Configuring External Devices Manually.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can configure external devices that are connected to the PC on the Probe by referring to 7.4 Enabling External Devices.
7.3.2 Configuring External Devices Manually

This section describes how to configure external devices manually. Devices which cannot be detected automatically must be added manually in the Device Configure window.
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the Probe, click Step 2 In the displayed dialog box, click . .
Step 3 From the Type drop-down list box, select an external device such as the MS, GPS, or scanner to be configured. From the Model drop-down list box, select the model of the selected external device. Step 4 Click Next to set the relevant parameters. For details about the parameters, see 12.7 Parameters for Configuring External Devices.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
7-13

TIP
l You can view the value of COM port of the external device under the Ports (COM & LPT) node in the Device Manager window. In a data service test, you can right-click an external device node under the Modem node in the Device Manager window and then choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Then, you can view the value of Modem port of the external device on the Modem tab page. You can enter the Device Manager window by clicking Configure window. icon on the toolbar of Device
l You can click Filter to select the data to be received. For the description of the parameters, see 12.8 Parameters for Filtering the Original Data. l You can also select the data to be received after the external device is configured. For details, see 7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected.
Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 Check the configuration status of the external device. In the Device Configure dialog box, if the value of the configured external device is Down in the State column, you can infer that the external device is configured in the Probe. If no value is displayed in the State column, you can infer that the external device is not configured in the Probe. In this case, repeat Step 2 through Step 5 to configure the external device based on the actual situation until the values of all the configured external devices are Down in the State column. Step 7 Optional: Synchronize the PC time with the GPS time. 1. 2. 3. Choose Configuration > System Configure to open the System Configure dialog box. Click .
Select Synchronize PC Time with GPS Time, and then select the time zone of the place where you are located from the Time zone drop-down list box. The range of time zone is GMT +12 to GMT -12. Click OK.
NOTE
4.
After synchronizing the time of the GPS with that of the PC, do not modify the system time, otherwise, the preset time is invalid.
----End
Example
You can enter the Device Manager window by clicking icon on the toolbar of Device Configure window. You can view the value of COM port of the external device under the Ports (COM & LPT) node. In a data service test, you can right-click an external device node under the Modem node in the Device Manager window and then choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Then, you can view the value of Modem port of the external device on the Modem tab page
7-14
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 7-2 The example of COM port
Figure 7-3 The example of Modem port
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
7-15
Follow-up Procedure
You need to connect the external devices in the Probe. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External Devices.
7.4 Enabling External Devices

Enabling external devices refers to connecting external devices in the Probe so that the Probe can recognize the configured external devices.
Prerequisite
The external devices are configured. For details, see 7.3 Configuring External Devices.
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the Probe, click Step 2 Select an added external device. If ... Connect the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, or WiMAX external device Connect the LTE external device Step 3 Click If ... Then ... Skip to Step 3. Skip to Step 5. to open the Device Configure dialog box.
, and then check whether the port of the external device is available. Then ...
The system displays Enable in the State In this case, you can infer that the port is list of the external device in the Device available. Configure dialog box. Perform Step 4. The system prompts you by displaying a In this case, you can infer that the port is dialog box. unavailable and cannot be connected properly. Perform the following steps: 1. Click OK. The system displays Disconnect in the State list of the external device in the Device Configure dialog box. 2. Re-set the port of the external device. For details, see 13.2 Problems Related to Device Connections. 3. Perform Step 4.
Step 4 Repeat Step 2 to Step 3 until the system displays Enable in the State list of the added external devices in the Device Configure dialog box. Step 5 On the main interface of the Probe, click external devices. . Then the Probe automatically connects to the
The system displays the connection status in the State list of the corresponding external device in the Device Configure dialog box. l Searching: indicates that the external device is being connected. l Disconnect: indicates that the external device is disconnected or the connection is abnormal. l Connected: indicates that the external device is connected. Step 6 Check the connection status of the external devices in the system status bar. For the description of the system status bar, see System Status Bar. ----End
7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected

Selecting the data to be collected refers to the process in which the Probe selectively collects the data reported by test terminals. In this case, the logfile records only the selected data. For the data that is frequently read, you can set data sampling intervals. This avoids the receipt of redundant data and increases the speed of reading data.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > Device Configure, or click the icon on the toolbar.
Step 2 In the Device Configure dialog box, double-click the configured test terminal. Step 3 Click Filter, and set the relevant parameters. For detailed description about the parameters, see 12.8 Parameters for Filtering the Original Data.
CAUTION
When the AMR end-to-end delay test is performed, the calling and called terminals must be connected to the same Probe. In addition, when configuring the terminals, you must select the data packets related to the AMR in LogCode in the Filter dialog box. l For the calling terminal, Ox7143 need to be selected. l For the called terminal, 0x7144 need to be selected. Step 4 Click OK. ----End
Related References
12.8 Parameters for Filtering the Original Data
7.6 Configuring Device Alarms

The Probe generates alarm in dialog box or voice mode, when the device is unexpectedly disconnected or the signal strength of the GPS is weak. You can set alarm events or alarm modes for special situations.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Configuration > System Configure. The System Configure dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Click .
Step 3 Set Language to specify the language type of the device alarm. You can set the language type of the device alarm to Chinese or English. Step 4 Set the device alarm mode. If ... Generating alarms in voice mode Then... Choose Audio Alarm, and select a voice file (.wav file) in Sound.
Generating alarms in dialog box mode Choose Visual Alarm. Step 5 Click OK. ----End
Related References
12.16 Parameters for Configuring the Device Alarm
7-18
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
8 Collecting Data
8
About This Chapter
Context
Collecting Data
The Probe collects the air interface test data through the test terminal and other external devices and records test data in logfiles. Before collecting the data, make sure that a computer installed with the Probe, the test terminal, the scanner, and the GPS are available and the dongle must be plugged in. You can also import engineering parameters for different network systems and map files, which helps to provide a vivid view of test data.
You can start the data analysis through operations on the menu bar, toolbar, tabs in navigation pane, or view windows. This section describes the most commonly used methods on how to collect data by using the Probe.
CAUTION
When you use the Probe to collect data, the dongle must be always connected to the USB port on the PC. Otherwise, the Probe cannot be used to collect data. You can choose Help > Check License to check whether the dongle is plugged in properly. 8.1 Data Collection Process The data collection function of the Probe is responsible for collection of the test data on the wireless air interface. 8.2 Preparations Before Data Collection Before data collection, you need to have the following items ready: Probe of the latest version, external devices and auxiliary equipment for the test. In addition, you need to ensure that the external devices are running properly. 8.3 Creating a Project All operations on the Probe are based on the project. Therefore, before the data collection or data analysis, you need to create a project or open an existing project. 8.4 Designing Test Plans
8 Collecting Data
A test plan is a customized test task that consists of test items provided by the Probe. You can configure different test items for the MS or the scanner based on the actual situation to guide various data service tests and voice service tests during the drive test. 8.5 Performing a Test Plan Performing a test plan refers to performing the configured test items of the MS or scanner through the Probe to collect test data. You can use the Probe to perform indoor tests and outdoor tests. Before performing a test plan, ensure that external devices are properly connected and test plans are assigned for the scanner or MS. After the test plan is started, the system carries out the plan and records the test data. You can monitor the test process in real time during the test.
8-2
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
8 Collecting Data
8.1 Data Collection Process

The data collection function of the Probe is responsible for collection of the test data on the wireless air interface. Table 8-1 shows the procedure for data collection on the Probe. Table 8-1 Data collection procedure Proce dure 1 2 Operation Preparations Before Data Collection Connecting External Devices Description Make preparations for the data collection to improve the data collection efficiency. Connect the external devices used for the data collection to the test PC and then configure the relevant parameters on the Probe. Create a project for data collection. You can also import the map or relevant engineering parameters to the project to facilitate data observation. Design the test plan for the test terminal or scanner to test the voice service or data service. Start a test plan and record a logfile. During the test, you can view the test data in real time in the view window.
Creating a Project
5 6 7
Designing a Test Plan Performing a Test Plan Browsing Data in Real Time
8.2 Preparations Before Data Collection

Before data collection, you need to have the following items ready: Probe of the latest version, external devices and auxiliary equipment for the test. In addition, you need to ensure that the external devices are running properly. It is recommended that you perform the following operations before the drive test: l l Determine the test objective and test area, plan the test route, and update the base station information to improve the data collection efficiency. Have the engineering parameter table and map for the drive test ready. For the engineering parameters supported by the Probe, see 6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems. For the maps supported by the Probe, see 5.1 Basic Concepts About Maps. l l Have the Probe and GENEX Shared components of the latest version ready. Have the relevant hardware and software ready. A PC installed with the Probe and GENEX Shared components is available.
8 Collecting Data
The dongle and the corresponding driver are available. External devices and the corresponding auxiliary equipment and their drivers used for the drive test are available. Ensure that the external devices run properly. Table 8-2 describes the requirements for the external devices. Table 8-2 Requirements for the external devices Configu ration Item GPS Scanner Configuration Requirement Auxiliary Equipment
For the GPS supported by the Probe, see GPS. For the scanner supported by the Probe, see Scanner. For the test MS and PC card supported by the Probe, see Test Terminal.
External antenna Vehicle-mounted DC/ AC converter, external antenna, and so on Spare battery, charger, data cable, and so on
Test terminal
NOTE
During the drive test, ensure that the power supply of the connected devices is sufficient.
8.3 Creating a Project

All operations on the Probe are based on the project. Therefore, before the data collection or data analysis, you need to create a project or open an existing project.
Context
Upon the startup of the Probe, an empty project is created automatically by default. You can perform subsequent operations for this default project. The Probe can display only one project at a time. To open another project, you need to close the current project.
Procedure
Step 1 In the navigation pane, expand the Project tab and then click the Step 2 Choose a project template. l Empty Project: creates an empty project. l GSM View Template: project template used in GSM tests provided by the Probe. l WCDMA View Template: project template used in WCDMA tests provided by the Probe. l WiMAX Beceem View Template: project template used in WiMAX Beceem tests provided by the Probe. l LTE View Template: project template used in LTE tests provided by the Probe.
icon.
8 Collecting Data
After a template is selected, the system automatically names the new project Untitled.
NOTE
You can open an existing project through the Project tab in the navigation pane.
Step 3 Configure the related parameters. For example, configure data related to external devices, make test plan, or specify other system settings. Step 4 Optional: Save the current project as required. If you need to ... Directly save the current project Rename and then save the current project Then ... Choose Project > Save. Choose Project > Save As.
The folders provided by the Probe for saving project files are under the following path: software installation path\Projects. The following folders are contained: l Site Verification Saves the project files for single-site verification tests. l Optimize Saves the project files for optimization tests. l Benchmark Saves the project files for benchmark tests. l Acceptance Saves the project files for acceptance tests. l Customize Saves the customized project files. ----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can close or delete a project by choosing Project, clicking the corresponding icon on the toolbar, or clicking the corresponding icon under the Project tab in the navigation pane on the main interface. For details about the main interface of the Probe, see 2.3 Main Interface of the Probe.
8.4 Designing Test Plans

A test plan is a customized test task that consists of test items provided by the Probe. You can configure different test items for the MS or the scanner based on the actual situation to guide various data service tests and voice service tests during the drive test.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
8-5
8 Collecting Data
Context
Ensure that the MS is properly connected and the related parameters are set. For details about how to configure the MS, see 7 Connecting External Devices.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose ConfigurationTest Plan Control, or click on the Configuration tab page in the navigation pane to open the Test Plan Control window. Step 2 Click Click here to config in the left pane to add a test item, and then configure the properties of the added test item on the Config tab in the right pane. For the description of test items and related properties, see 14.1 Description of Test Items.
CAUTION
l To perform a data service test, such as the Ping, FTP, HTTP, WAP, Video Streaming, or Email test, you must configure the Dial Up test item before configuring the test item required by the data service. l To perform a speech quality evaluation test, you need to configure the test item according to the following situations: l To perform a synchronous speech quality evaluation test, you need to configure the Sync SQE(MS-MS) test item for the calling PHU terminal. l To perform an asynchronous speech quality evaluation test, you need to configure the Sync SQE(MS-MS) test item for the two PHU terminals. l To perform a speech quality evaluation test between an MS and the PSTN SQE Server, you need to configure the SQE (MS-PSTN) test item for the PHU terminal that is configured for the Probe and configure the SQE test item for the PSTN SQE Server. Step 3 Repeat Step 2 to add multiple test items. If the added test item need to be performed cyclically, you need to add the Loop Start test item. After the Loop Start test item is added, the Probe adds the Loop End test item automatically, which indicates that the test items between Loop Start and Loop End are performed cyclically. Step 4 Optional: Adjust the execution sequence of the test items. 1. 2. Select a test item whose execution sequence you want to adjust. Click or to move the test item up or down.
Step 5 Set whether to perform the added test item in Enable. Clicking Yes indicates that this test item is performed. Clicking No indicates that this test item is not performed. Step 6 Optional: Click ----End
to save the configured test plan.
8 Collecting Data
Follow-up Procedure
You can also click to delete unnecessary test items.
Related References
12.1 Interface Description: Test Plan Control Window 12.9 Parameters for Configuring the Test Items 14.1 Description of Test Items
8.5 Performing a Test Plan

Performing a test plan refers to performing the configured test items of the MS or scanner through the Probe to collect test data. You can use the Probe to perform indoor tests and outdoor tests. Before performing a test plan, ensure that external devices are properly connected and test plans are assigned for the scanner or MS. After the test plan is started, the system carries out the plan and records the test data. You can monitor the test process in real time during the test.
Context
CAUTION
Before performing the test plan, disable the call waiting function of the test terminal. 8.5.1 Setting the APN (GSM/WCDMA) The APN represents the name of an external network that is connected through packet switched (PS) domain. The APN is used for initializing the modem port of the MS before a data service test is performed. Therefore, the APN must be set before a data service test is performed. 8.5.2 Performing an Indoor Test The indoor test is performed to test the quality of radio signals inside buildings. Indoor tests are classified into horizontal tests and vertical tests. The GPS is not required for locating the test route indoors. Therefore, the manual dot trace is used for indoor tests. Before performing an indoor test, you do not need to connect the GPS to the PC. 8.5.3 Performing an Outdoor Test An outdoor test is performed to test the quality of radio signals outside buildings. In an outdoor test, the GPS is required to locate the test route. Therefore, you need to connect the GPS to the PC before an outdoor test. 8.5.4 Monitoring the Test You can check the progress and status of the test items and test plans during the test or the test replay. This enables you to observe and analyze the test procedure. 8.5.5 Stopping Test Plans If a test plan is complete or you are about to leave the test car for a long period, you need to stop the test plan and disconnect the external devices.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
8-7
8 Collecting Data
8.5.1 Setting the APN (GSM/WCDMA)

The APN represents the name of an external network that is connected through packet switched (PS) domain. The APN is used for initializing the modem port of the MS before a data service test is performed. Therefore, the APN must be set before a data service test is performed.
Prerequisite
The MS is connected and can be recognized by the Probe. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External Devices.
Context
The APN can be set by using any of the following methods: l l l Setting the APN in the operating system Setting the APN in the MS Setting the APN in the Probe
NOTE
Among the three APN setting methods, settings in the operating system are of the highest priority and settings in the Probe are of the lowest priority. That is, if an APN is set in the operating system and in the Probe, settings in the operating system take effect. Likewise, the maximum uplink and downlink rates set in the operating system have higher priorities than those set in the Probe. If the APN or the maximum uplink and downlink rates do not work during the test, check whether they are set in the operating system. If they are not set, the Probe initialize the modem based on the latest successful setting.
Procedure
l Set the APN in the operating system. 1. 2. 3. 4. Right-click My Computer and choose Properties to open the System Properties dialog box. On the Hardware tab page, click Device Manager to open the Device Manager dialog box. Expand the Modem node and then double-click the modem to be set. Choose Advanced in the displayed Modem dialog box. Enter the initialized command in the Extra Initialized Command field. The format of the initialized command is at+cgdcont=1,"ip","APN". Here, APN is the access point name. For example, the APN of China Mobile is cmwap or cmnet. 5. l Click OK. Set the APN in the MS. For details about how to set the APN in the MS, see the user guide of the corresponding MS. l Set the APN in the Probe. In the Probe, to set the APN when configuring the properties of the Dial Up test item, perform the following steps: 1.
8-8
On the Probe main interface, click
icon to open the Test Plan Control dialog box.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
8 Collecting Data
2. 3. ----End
Click Click here to config and choose the Dial Up test item. Set the PDP APN property of the Dial Up test item.
8.5.2 Performing an Indoor Test

The indoor test is performed to test the quality of radio signals inside buildings. Indoor tests are classified into horizontal tests and vertical tests. The GPS is not required for locating the test route indoors. Therefore, the manual dot trace is used for indoor tests. Before performing an indoor test, you do not need to connect the GPS to the PC.
Context
In horizontal tests, fixed points are selected according to the floor plan of a building. You can perform a horizontal test according to a predefined test route or according to the test route controlled manually. In vertical tests, the signal distribution in the vertical direction between floors is tested.
Procedure
Step 1 On the View tab page in the navigation pane, double-click IndoorMap. The IndoorMap window is displayed. Step 2 Optional: Click to open the indoor test map.
Step 3 Right-click on the map area and choose a type of indoor tests from the shortcut menu.
CAUTION
The automatic horizontal type and manual horizontal type can be selected only when the external devices are disconnected from the PC. The vertical type can be chosen only when the external devices are connected to the PC. l To perform a horizontal test, you need to set the test type to the indoor test, connect external devices to the PC, and then perform subsequent operations. l To perform a vertical test, you need to connect external devices to the PC before setting the test type to the indoor test.
If you need to...
Then...
Start an automatic horizontal test 1. Choose Walking Test > Automatic from the shortcut menu. 2. Click to draw the test route.
3. Perform Step 4 through Step 5. During the test, press the Spacebar. The test data that is already collected is displayed on the map.
8 Collecting Data
If you need to... Start a manual horizontal test
Then... 1. Choose Walking Test > Manual from the shortcut menu. 2. Perform Step 4 through Step 5. 3. On the toolbar of the IndoorMap window, click to draw the test route manually.
Start a vertical test
1. Choose Vertical Test from the shortcut menu. The Floor dialog box is displayed. 2. In the displayed Floor dialog box, click Setting. The Floor Setting dialog box is displayed. 3. In the Floor Setting displayed dialog box, specify Min floor, Max floor, and Invalid floor. 4. Click OK to switch to the Floor dialog box. 5. Perform Step 4 through Step 5. 6. In the Floor dialog box, click route. or to draw a test
Step 4 On the main interface of the Probe, click
to start the test plan.
The Probe automatically displays a message for you to select whether to record logfiles. The default naming convention of a logfile is Probe_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.gen. YYYYMMDDHHMMSS indicates the current PC time, which is precise to seconds, such as Probe_20100906135414.gen. Step 5 Optional: View the test data. For details, see 10.2 Browsing Data. ----End
8.5.3 Performing an Outdoor Test

An outdoor test is performed to test the quality of radio signals outside buildings. In an outdoor test, the GPS is required to locate the test route. Therefore, you need to connect the GPS to the PC before an outdoor test.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Click on the toolbar to start the test plan.
The Probe automatically displays a message for you to select whether to record logfiles. The default naming convention of a logfile is Probe_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.gen. YYYYMMDDHHMMSS indicates the current PC time, which is precise to seconds, such as Probe_20100906135414.gen.

NOTE
8 Collecting Data
After the test plan is started, the Probe automatically saves a .tab file of which the name is same as the recorded logfile. The .tab file is used to store GPS information. You can set the attributes of the .tab file in the Route File Setting area in Other Settings of the System Configure dialog box. For details about the parameters, see 12.18 Parameter for Other System Settings.
Step 2 Optional: View the test data. For details, see 10.2 Browsing Data. ----End
8.5.4 Monitoring the Test

You can check the progress and status of the test items and test plans during the test or the test replay. This enables you to observe and analyze the test procedure.
Procedure
icon on the toolbar. The Test Plan Control window is displayed. Step 1 Click the For details about the parameters in the Test Plan Control window, see 12.10 Parameters for Monitoring the Test. Step 2 Monitor the test. If ... Then ...
You need to check the status of test items. Check the information about the test item progress at the bottom of the Test Plan Control window. You need to check the statistics of test plans. Check the information listed on the Statistic tab page in the Test Plan Control window.
Step 3 Check the color of the device status indicator in the system status bar to monitor the connection status of the external devices. For details about the status bar, see System Status Bar.
NOTE
If an external device is disconnected or the connection is abnormal and the connection cannot be enabled within 10 seconds, it is recommended that you stop the test, re-connect the external devices, and find and record the fault causes.
----End
Related References
12.10 Parameters for Monitoring the Test
8.5.5 Stopping Test Plans

If a test plan is complete or you are about to leave the test car for a long period, you need to stop the test plan and disconnect the external devices.
8 Collecting Data
Context
Before stopping a test, you need to terminate the call or disconnect the data service of the MS, stop the test plans, stop recording logfiles, and finally disconnect the external devices. In this way, the integrity of the recorded data is guaranteed.
Procedure
Step 1 Disconnect the voice or data service interaction with the test terminal. Step 2 Stop the test plan by clicking on the toolbar. on the toolbar. on the toolbar.
Step 3 Stop the logfile recording by clicking
Step 4 Disconnect the external devices by clicking ----End
Follow-up Procedure
After a test plan is stopped, save the logfile properly to avoid data loss.
8-12
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
9 Managing Logfiles
9
About This Chapter
Managing Logfiles
During tests, test data is saved in .gen files that are called logfiles. This chapter describes how to record, replay, segment, and export logfiles. 9.1 Recording Logfiles The logfile recorded during a test is used for replaying the test process or import the related data into the GENEX Assistant for further analysis. If the logfile recording is performed for an outdoor test, the Probe will automatically save a .tab file with the same name of the recorded logfile to store the GPS information. 9.2 Segmenting Logfiles You can segment logfiles as required. You can record logfiles of different sizes or different periods in different files for better management. The Probe supports automatic logfile segmentation and manual logfile segmentation. Automatic logfile segmentation had better be performed before the logfile is recorded, and manual logfile segmentation should be performed when the logfile is recorded. 9.3 Replaying Logfiles The purpose of replaying logfile is to reproduce the drive test process. Replay logfile does not require the dongle. Before replaying logfile, you can preview the drive test route and the key events in the map window. During a replay, you can adjust the replay rate and specify the start point for the replay. You can open only one logfile at a time. 9.4 Exporting Logfiles This describes how to export logfiles. You can convert a logfile to a binary file, .txt file containing separators, or an MDM file and convert a PHU file to a logfile for future analysis.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
9-1
9 Managing Logfiles
9.1 Recording Logfiles

The logfile recorded during a test is used for replaying the test process or import the related data into the GENEX Assistant for further analysis. If the logfile recording is performed for an outdoor test, the Probe will automatically save a .tab file with the same name of the recorded logfile to store the GPS information.
Prerequisite
Context
l l The Probe supports the logfile segmenting, including the automatic segmenting and manual segmenting. For details, see 9.2 Segmenting Logfiles. The Probe supports the recording of geographic information about the test location in texts and automatically saves the information in logfiles for further analysis and problem location. The geographic information includes the features of buildings and interference source. This type of text is called filemark.
Procedure
Step 1 Click to record a logfile.
You can specify the save path and logfile name as prompted. l The default save path is the same as the setting in the Logfile Setting area on the Other Settings tab page in the System Configure dialog box. It is recommended that logfiles are not saved in the system installation disk. l The default naming convention of a logfile is Probe_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.gen. YYYYMMDDHHMMSS indicates the current PC time, which is precise to seconds, such as Probe_20100906135414.gen. Logfile names must be easy to understand. For example, a logfile can be named as Probe_20100906135414_FTPDownload.gen.
NOTE
You can also enable the Probe to record logfiles when the test plan is executed. In this case, the Probe records data of the test terminal in the service state. However, in the case specified in Step 1, the Probe records data of the test terminal in the idle state.
Step 2 Optional: Insert a filemark. 1. 2. 3. Click . Type the filemark in the Filemark dialog box. The length of the filemark cannot exceed 30 Chinese characters. Click OK. The Probe automatically saves the typed filemark, including the information about the current time and longitude and altitude of current geographic location, in the logfiles. ----End
9 Managing Logfiles
9.2 Segmenting Logfiles

You can segment logfiles as required. You can record logfiles of different sizes or different periods in different files for better management. The Probe supports automatic logfile segmentation and manual logfile segmentation. Automatic logfile segmentation had better be performed before the logfile is recorded, and manual logfile segmentation should be performed when the logfile is recorded.
Procedure
l Automatically segment logfiles. It is recommended that the logfile size be equal to or more than 10 MB.
NOTE
If a logfile records more than 1048064 data packages, the logfile size is invalid, and the system automatically segments the logfile.
1.
Choose Configuration > System Configure. The System Configure dialog box is displayed. Click .
2. 3.
Set the relevant parameters in the Logfile Setting area. For details about the parameters, see 12.18 Parameter for Other System Settings.
4. l
Click OK.
Manually segment logfiles. . Then, the system closes the logfile being recorded and creates a logfile Click automatically. The new logfile is automatically stored to the path where the previous logfile is stored. The new logfile is named as name of the file before being segmented_N. The value of N is equal to or greater than 1, indicating the number of segmentation times.
----End
9.3 Replaying Logfiles

The purpose of replaying logfile is to reproduce the drive test process. Replay logfile does not require the dongle. Before replaying logfile, you can preview the drive test route and the key events in the map window. During a replay, you can adjust the replay rate and specify the start point for the replay. You can open only one logfile at a time.
Prerequisite
l l The ongoing test is stopped and the external devices are disconnected. If you want to preview the drive test route before the replay, the logfile storing the test route must be available.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
9 Managing Logfiles
If you want to preview key events before the replay, the open logfile must contain the information about key events, and you must set the display mode of the events on the map in the System Configure dialog box.
Context
The replay rate supported by the Probe ranges from 1/8 to 32 times of the test rate. Currently, you can preview only the key events and the drive test route that are in the outdoor test data.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Logfile > Open Logfile or click on the replay toolbar.
Step 2 Select a logfile in .gen format. Then, click Open. l Preview Route in Map indicates that you can preview the drive test route in the OutdoorMap window. If you also select Clear Historical Info, the Probe will clear the test route in the logfile that is last imported. l Preview Event in Map indicates that you can preview the key events route in the OutdoorMap window.
NOTE
You can also select both Preview Route in Map and Preview Event in Map to preview the drive test route and the key events in the OutdoorMap window.
Step 3 Optional: Search for an event in the logfile and find the location where the event occurs. 1. 2. 3. On the Probe main interface, click . The Find Event dialog box is displayed.
Select a device from the Device drop-down list box and select an event to be searched for from the Event drop-down list box. Click Search. The Probe displays the search result in the Search Result area. If no information is displayed, you can infer that the logfile does not contain this event.
NOTE
The Probe supports the searching of the filemark event so that the filemark area can be located for users to analyze the coverage status of the radio network.
4. 5.
In the Search Result area, select the event that you want to locate on the map. Click Find. The Probe marks the location where the event occurs with in the OutdoorMap window.
Step 4 Start the replay. Choose Logfile > Play or click Step 5 Optional: Browse the test data. For details, see 10.2 Browsing Data. ----End
on the replay toolbar.
9 Managing Logfiles
Follow-up Procedure
You can click the corresponding icons on the replay toolbar to control the replay progress. For details, see Replay Toolbar.
9.4 Exporting Logfiles

This describes how to export logfiles. You can convert a logfile to a binary file, .txt file containing separators, or an MDM file and convert a PHU file to a logfile for future analysis.
Prerequisite
l l The ongoing test is stopped and the external devices are disconnected. For details, see 8.5.5 Stopping Test Plans. The ongoing replay is stopped and the logfile is closed. The procedure is as follows: 1. 2. Click on the replay toolbar to stop a replay.
Choose Logfile > Close Logfile to close the logfile.
Context
l A logfile can be converted to the file in the following formats: Bin: indicates the binary file. The extension is .gen. The binary file can be directly imported to the Probe. CSV: indicates the .txt file containing separators. The extension is .csv. In the exported .txt file, the test data is separated by separators such as the comma, semicolon, or colon. MDM: indicates the Qualcomm file. The extension is .dlf. The logfile must contain the test data of the Qualcomm test terminal. l The PHU file contains the data collected by the PHU MS. The extension is .phu.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Logfile > Export Data. The wizard for exporting the test data is displayed. If you need to ... Convert a logfile to a binary file Then ... Select Bin. l To export multiple logfiles as a binary file, select Multi-f. l To export a logfile as a binary file, clear Multif. Convert a logfile to a .txt file containing Select Csv. separators
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
9-5
9 Managing Logfiles
If you need to ...
Then ...
Convert the messages and events in the Select Csv (Messages_Events). Logfile to a .txt file containing separators Convert a logfile to a Qualcomm file Select MDM.
Convert a PHU file (.phu file) to a logfile Select PHU. (.gen file) Step 2 Click Next to set corresponding parameters. For details about parameters, see 12.25 Parameters for Exporting the Data. Step 3 Repeat Step 2 until Next in the dialog box is changed to Start. Step 4 Click Start and wait for data conversion. Step 5 In the displayed prompt box, click corresponding buttons to complete the data conversion. If you need to ... Continue to export data Exit the wizard for exporting data ----End Then ... Click Yes. Click No.
Related References
12.25 Parameters for Exporting the Data 12.26 Parameters for Configuring the Data Export Format of the Scanner
9-6
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
10 Managing View Windows
10
About This Chapter
Managing View Windows
This section describes how to view data in view windows and how to configure properties of view windows. View windows are key windows of the Probe. You can view IEs, events, Layer 2 or Layer 3 messages, and statistical values of indicators in view windows. 10.1 Presentation of IEs and Events IEs and events are displayed in the Event List window and other IE views of the Probe. In addition, IEs and events can be presented as symbols and audio signals. 10.2 Browsing Data The view window is used to display test data. During a test or a replay, you can open the view window to browse data in the view as required. 10.3 Configuring the View Window You can customize the view window before a test or a replay. You can also modify the configuration of the view window during a test or a replay. The configuration of the view window is temporary and is not saved in projects.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
10-1
10.1 Presentation of IEs and Events

IEs and events are displayed in the Event List window and other IE views of the Probe. In addition, IEs and events can be presented as symbols and audio signals. IEs and events can be presented as: l l l Symbols on a map For details, see 12.15 Parameters for Setting the Predefined Event. Symbols and vertical lines in line charts For details, see 12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View. Audio signals For details, see 12.17 Parameters for Setting IE Audio Indications and 12.15 Parameters for Setting the Predefined Event.
10.2 Browsing Data

The view window is used to display test data. During a test or a replay, you can open the view window to browse data in the view as required.
Prerequisite
l If you want to browsing data in a view during a test, ensure that external devices are connected and can be recognized by the Probe so that the open view window can display data. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External Devices. l If you want to browse data in a view during a replay, ensure that the replay is ongoing so that the open view window can display data. For details, see 9.3 Replaying Logfiles.
Context
The views provided by the Probe consist of the air interface parameter view, data service view, signaling view, event list view, event statistics view, map view, KPI statistics view, scanner view, GPS view, line chart view, and information view. In the Probe, the views are displayed in chart, list, plain text, line chart mode or in chart-and-list mixed mode. For the description of the view window, see 12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose View or click the View tab in the navigation pane to display a view window. Then, browse data in the view window. Step 2 Optional: Configure the properties of the view window as required. For details, see 10.3 Configuring the View Window. ----End
Related References
12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View 12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View
10.3 Configuring the View Window

You can customize the view window before a test or a replay. You can also modify the configuration of the view window during a test or a replay. The configuration of the view window is temporary and is not saved in projects. 10.3.1 Configuring the Line Chart View The line chart view can display the changes of IEs over time. You can configure two charts in the line chart view to facilitate the comparison between IEs. 10.3.2 Configuring the List View The list view displays test data in tables. You can configure the properties of the list view as required to facilitate data browse and data analysis. 10.3.3 Configuring the Chart View The chart view displays test data in charts. You can configure the properties of the chart view as required to facilitate data browse and data analysis. 10.3.4 Configuring the Plain Text View The plain test view displays the basic information about the logfile and the events and statistics in the logfile in plain texts. You can configure the properties of the plain text view as required to facilitate data browse and data analysis.
10.3.1 Configuring the Line Chart View

The line chart view can display the changes of IEs over time. You can configure two charts in the line chart view to facilitate the comparison between IEs.
Context
For the description of the line chart view, see 12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose View > Custom Line Chart. Step 2 Right-click any area in the Custom Line Chart dialog box, and then choose Properties from the shortcut menu. l The Color shortcut menu item is used to configure the color properties of the line chart view. l The Time shortcut menu item is used to set the amount of that is allowed to be displayed in the current line chart. By default, the data within 60 seconds can be displayed. The data within 3600 seconds can be displayed at most. Step 3 In the Set Chart Properties dialog box, select the chart to be configured, and then click Edit. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set relevant parameters.
For the description of the parameters, see Parameter of the Modify Chart Properties dialog box. Step 5 Click OK. The Set Chart Properties dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Repeat Step 3 through Step 5 until all the required chart properties are configured. Step 7 In the Set Chart Properties dialog box, click OK. ----End
Related References
12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View 12.20 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the Line Chart View
10.3.2 Configuring the List View

The list view displays test data in tables. You can configure the properties of the list view as required to facilitate data browse and data analysis.
Prerequisite
The view window to be configured is displayed. For details, see 10.2 Browsing Data.
Context
For the description of the view window, see 12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View.
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click any area in the list view, and then choose Custom from the shortcut menu. The ListView Custom Properties dialog box is displayed. l The Device shortcut menu item is used to display the parameters of different devices. If no device is added to the current system, the Device shortcut menu item does not provide any options. l The SetTitle shortcut menu item is used to change the title of the current list view. Step 2 Click the Mode tab and Cell Contents tab. Then configure the layout and appearance of the view window. For the description of the parameters, see 12.19 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the List Views.
TIP
Select an IE, and then click Edit. Alternatively, double-click an IE. In the IE Information dialog box, configure IE-related information.
Step 3 After the configuration, click OK. ----End
Related References
12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View 12.19 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the List Views
10.3.3 Configuring the Chart View

The chart view displays test data in charts. You can configure the properties of the chart view as required to facilitate data browse and data analysis.
Prerequisite
Context
For the description of the view window, see 12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View.
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click any area in the chart view, and then choose Custom from the shortcut menu. The ChartView Custom Properties dialog box is displayed. l The Legend shortcut menu item is used to display the legend of the current chart view. l The Color shortcut menu item is used to configure the legend properties of the current chart view. Step 2 Click the Chart General tab, and then set relevant parameters. Step 3 After the configuration, click OK. ----End
Related References
12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View 12.19 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the List Views
10.3.4 Configuring the Plain Text View

The plain test view displays the basic information about the logfile and the events and statistics in the logfile in plain texts. You can configure the properties of the plain text view as required to facilitate data browse and data analysis.
Prerequisite
Context
For the description of the view window, see 12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View. The plain text views provided by the Probe consist of the information view, event list view, and statistics view. They are used to display the basic information about the logfile, the event information, and the statistics of events and KPIs in the logfile.
Procedure
l Configure the properties of the event list view and the statistics view. 1. Right-click any area in the view, and then choose Event Filter or KPI Filter from the shortcut menu.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
The list in the left pane of the event list view or the statistics view displays the events or KPIs provided by the Probe. 2. 3. l From the list in the left pane of the view, select the event or KPI to be displayed. Optional: During the test or replay, right-click any area in the view, and then choose Clear List from the shortcut menu. The displayed events or KPIs are cleared. Choose View > Information. The Information view window is displayed.
NOTE
Configure the properties of the information view. 1.
l The Log File tab page displays the information related to logfiles. l The FTP Info tab page displays the information related to FTP upload or download. l The PHU Info tab page displays the version of the PHU terminal. You can check the version of the PHU terminal during terminal connecting or data replaying. When the Probe can not get the version of the PHU terminal, the Unknown Version will be displayed. l The IE Audio Indications Info tab page displays the Information Elements (IEs) which played audio indications.
2.
Right-click any area in the Information view window, and then choose Font from the shortcut menu. Then, configure the fonts of the texts in the view window. The Copy menu item is used to copy the texts in the view window to the clipboard of the Windows. Then, the texts can be pasted to other documents conveniently.
----End
Related References
12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View
10-6
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
11 Typical Application
11
About This Chapter
Typical Application
This section describes typical test methods supported by the Probe. 11.1 Speech Quality Evaluation Tests (GSM/WCDMA) The voice service is a basic radio network service. The Probe supports speech quality evaluation tests. The Probe uses the Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ) algorithm to evaluate the speech quality by comparing the speech sample file and the speech result file. 11.2 Forcing Function Tests The Probe supports forcing function tests in GSM, WCDMA, and LTE modes. The forcing function test involves the setting of the GSM NV (Nonvolatile) parameter, carrier-to-adjacent (C/A) measurement, forcing feature test, and frequency scanning. 11.3 IP Analysis The Probe obtains the raw data packets of data service tests through the WinPcap tool and then obtains the information about the transport layer protocols and the network layer protocols through the IP analysis.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
11-1
11.1 Speech Quality Evaluation Tests (GSM/WCDMA)

The voice service is a basic radio network service. The Probe supports speech quality evaluation tests. The Probe uses the Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ) algorithm to evaluate the speech quality by comparing the speech sample file and the speech result file. 11.1.1 Synchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test This section describes the synchronous speech quality evaluation test. One Probe is connected with two PHU terminals and performs the synchronous speech quality evaluation test by enabling the calling PHU terminal to play speech sample and the called PHU terminal to record result file so that the MOS is obtained. 11.1.2 Asynchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test This section describes the asynchronous speech quality evaluation test. Two PHU terminals that are configured for different Probes call each other. The Probes perform the asynchronous speech quality evaluation test by enabling the PHU terminals to play and record speech files alternatively so that the MOS is obtained. 11.1.3 Speech Quality Evaluation Test Between PHU Terminal and PSTN SQE Server This section describes the speech quality evaluation test between an MS and the PSTN SQE Server. The Probe is configured with a PHU terminal and performs the speech quality evaluation test between an MS and the PSTN SQE Server by enabling the PHU terminal to play voices and the PSTN SQE Server to record voices or enabling the PSTN SQE Server to play voices and the PHU terminal to record voices so that the uplink or downlink MOS is obtained.
11.1.1 Synchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test

This section describes the synchronous speech quality evaluation test. One Probe is connected with two PHU terminals and performs the synchronous speech quality evaluation test by enabling the calling PHU terminal to play speech sample and the called PHU terminal to record result file so that the MOS is obtained.
Prerequisite
The Probe is configured with two terminals installed with the PHU of V100R002C01B010SPC120 or a later version.
Context
The PHU terminals supported by the Probe are Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, Huawei U1251, and Huawei U6100.
Procedure
Step 1 Design the test plan. Only the test plan for the calling PHU terminal need to be designed. 1. 2. icon on the Configuration tab page of the navigation pane to open the Test Click the Plan Control window. On the left pane of the window, click Click here to config to add the Sync SQE(MSMS) test item, and then set the properties of this test item on the Config tab page.
11-2
For details about the properties of the Sync SQE(MS-MS) test item, see Sync SQE(MSMS) (GSM/WCDMA). Step 2 Perform the test plan. 1. 2. Click the Click the icon to start the logfile recording. icon to start the test plan.
Step 3 View the test data. Choose View > MOS > Speech Quality Evaluation to view the IEs of the speech quality evaluation. Step 4 Optional: End the test plan. If the test is complete or you are carrying the PHU terminal far away from the test vehicle for a long time, the test plan needs to be stopped. 1. 2. 3. Click Click Click on the toolbar to stop the test plan. on the toolbar to stop the logfile recording. on the toolbar to disconnect the PHU terminals from the Probe.
----End
11.1.2 Asynchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test

This section describes the asynchronous speech quality evaluation test. Two PHU terminals that are configured for different Probes call each other. The Probes perform the asynchronous speech quality evaluation test by enabling the PHU terminals to play and record speech files alternatively so that the MOS is obtained.
Prerequisite
1. 2. The Probe is installed on two PCs. The terminals installed with the same PHU version are configured for the two Probes separately. The PHU version is V100R002C01B010SPC120 or a later version. 3. The PHU terminals quit from the PHU running mode.
Context
Procedure
Step 1 Design the test plan. When designing the test plan, you need to design the test plan for the calling PHU terminal before designing the test plan for the called PHU terminal. 1. icon on the Configuration tab page of the navigation pane to open the Test Click the Plan Control window.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
2.
On the left pane of the window, click Click here to config to add the Async SQE(MSMS) test item, and then set the properties of this test item on the Config tab page. For details about the properties of the Async SQE(MS-MS) test item, see Async SQE(MSMS) (GSM/WCDMA).
Step 2 Perform the test plan. When performing the test plan, you need to perform the test plan of the called PHU terminal before performing the test plan of the calling PHU terminal. 1. 2. Click the Click the icon to record the data in a logfile. icon to start the test plan.
Step 3 View the test data. In the two Probes, choose View > MOS > Speech Quality Evaluation to view the IEs of the speech quality evaluation. Step 4 Optional: End the test plan. If the test is complete or you are carrying the PHU terminal far away from the test vehicle for a long time, the test plan needs to be stopped. Note that you need to stop the test plan of the calling PHU terminal first. 1. 2. 3. Click Click Click on the toolbar to stop the test plan. on the toolbar to stop the logfile recording. on the toolbar to disconnect the PHU terminals from the Probe.
----End
11.1.3 Speech Quality Evaluation Test Between PHU Terminal and PSTN SQE Server
This section describes the speech quality evaluation test between an MS and the PSTN SQE Server. The Probe is configured with a PHU terminal and performs the speech quality evaluation test between an MS and the PSTN SQE Server by enabling the PHU terminal to play voices and the PSTN SQE Server to record voices or enabling the PSTN SQE Server to play voices and the PHU terminal to record voices so that the uplink or downlink MOS is obtained.
Prerequisite
1. 2. 3. The two PCs are installed with the Probe and the PSTN SQE Server respectively. The system time of the two PCs is consistent. The Probe is configured with a PHU terminal. The PHU version is V100R002C01B010SPC120 or a later version. The coloring ring back tone (CRBT) services are disabled for the PHU terminal.
Context
In the case of the uplink speech quality evaluation, the PHU terminal is used as the calling MS and the PSTN SQE Server is used as the called MS. In the case of downlink speech quality evaluation, the PSTN SQE Server is used as the calling MS and the PHU terminal is used as the called MS.
Procedure
Step 1 Design the test plan for the PHU terminal on the Probe: 1. 2. Click the icon on the Configuration tab page of the navigation pane to open the Test Plan Control window. On the left pane of the window, click Click here to config to add the SQE(MS-PSTN) test item, and then set the properties of this test item on the Config tab page. For details about the properties of the SQE(MS-PSTN) test item, see SQE(MS-PSTN) (GSM/WCDMA). Step 2 Perform the following operations on the PSTN SQE Server: For details, see 14.5.3 Using PSTN SQE Server. 1. 2. 3. Configure a voice card. Configure a speech channel. Configure the SQE test item.
Step 3 Perform the test plan. When performing the test plan, you need to perform the test plan of the calling MS before performing the test plan of the called MS. This section takes the PHU terminal that is used as the calling MS and the PSTN SQE Server that is used as the called MS as an example. 1. Perform the test plan on the Probe. a. b. 2. Click the Click the icon to start the logfile recording. icon to start the test plan.
Perform the test plan on the PSTN SQE Server. Click the icon to start the test plan.
Step 4 View the test data. l If you perform the uplink speech quality evaluation, choose View > MOS > Speech Quality Evaluation to view the uplink MOS. l If you perform the downlink speech quality evaluation, choose View > Speech/TV to view the downlink MOS. Step 5 Optional: End the test plan. If the test is complete or you are carrying the PHU terminal far away from the test vehicle for a long time, the test plan needs to be stopped. Note that you need to stop the test plan of the PHU terminal before stopping the test plan of the PSTN SQE Server. This section takes the PHU terminal that is used as the calling MS and the PSTN SQE Server that is used as the called MS as an example. 1. End the test plan on the Probe. a.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Click
on the toolbar to stop the test plan.

b. c. 2.
Click Click
on the toolbar to stop the logfile recording. on the toolbar to disconnect the PHU terminal from the Probe.
End the test plan on the PSTN SQE Server. Click on the toolbar to stop the test plan.
----End
11.2 Forcing Function Tests

The Probe supports forcing function tests in GSM, WCDMA, and LTE modes. The forcing function test involves the setting of the GSM NV (Nonvolatile) parameter, carrier-to-adjacent (C/A) measurement, forcing feature test, and frequency scanning. 11.2.1 Setting the GSM Nonvolatile Parameters This describes how to use the GSM test terminal to set Nonvolatile parameters, thus enabling the terminal to attach to the GPRS or EDGE. 11.2.2 Conducting GSM C/A Measurements This describes how to conduct the GSM C/A measurement. The C/A measurement is used to check whether the planning of the radio network frequency is reasonable and whether the adjacent-channel interference occurs on the network. In the GSM, the C/A indicates an amplitude of the level difference between the serving cell and the cell whose frequency is adjacent to the frequency of the serving cell. 11.2.3 Conducting GSM Frequency Scanning This describes how to use the GSM test terminal to perform the frequency scanning test. You can perform the scanning test in the specified frequency range or band. 11.2.4 Conducting the GSM Forcing Function Test This describes how to test the forcing functions of the GSM. The forcing functions include the handover feature, ARFCN control, band control, and cell bar access (CBA) inversion. The handover features must be performed on the MS in dedicated state. The ARFCN control and band control must be performed in idle state. 11.2.5 Conducting the WCDMA Forcing Function Test The WCDMA forcing function involves locking the specified UARFCN and locking scramble codes. When locking frequencies or scramble codes, the test terminal must be in idle mode. 11.2.6 Conducting the LTE Forcing Function Test This section describes how to perform the LTE forcing function test. The LTE forcing functions consist of locking network, frequency band, cells, turning over the cell bar access (CBA), and locking the transmit power of the PUSCH.
11.2.1 Setting the GSM Nonvolatile Parameters

This describes how to use the GSM test terminal to set Nonvolatile parameters, thus enabling the terminal to attach to the GPRS or EDGE.
Prerequisite
Test terminals are connected, and the Probe can enable the test terminals. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External Devices.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > GSM NV Setting. The GSM Nonvolatile Parameters Setting dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Select a test terminal in the Device Select drop-down list. Step 3 Select the forcing feature in MS NV Setting. If ... Attach to the GPRS. Attach to the EDGE. Then... Choose GPRS. Choose EDGE.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the test terminal performs the forcing feature test. Step 5 Optional: Click Inquire MS State. Then, the latest forcing feature status of the test terminal is displayed in the MS Current State area. ----End
11.2.2 Conducting GSM C/A Measurements

This describes how to conduct the GSM C/A measurement. The C/A measurement is used to check whether the planning of the radio network frequency is reasonable and whether the adjacent-channel interference occurs on the network. In the GSM, the C/A indicates an amplitude of the level difference between the serving cell and the cell whose frequency is adjacent to the frequency of the serving cell.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > GSM C/A Setting. The GSM C/A Setting dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters related to the GSM C/A Setting dialog box, see 12.24 Parameters for Performing the C/A Measurement of the GSM. Step 2 Select an MS from the Device Select drop-down list. Step 3 Select a C/A measurement type from the MS C/A State area. Objective Disable the C/A measurement Action Choose OFF.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
11-7
Objective Calculate the C/A values of the two neighboring frequencies of the current serving cell Calculate the C/A values of the four neighboring frequencies of the current serving cell
Action Choose 1 Channel (-1, +1).
Choose 2 Channel (+2, +1, -1, -2).
Step 4 Click Apply. The C/A measurement is performed on the MS. Step 5 Optional: Click Search MS State. The latest C/A state of the MS is displayed in the MS C/A State area. Step 6 Optional: Choose View > GSM > Interference > GSM C/A to browse the C/A measurement data in the displayed GSM C/A window. l SS: indicates the signal strengths of the four adjacent frequencies of the current serving cell. The range is -110 to -47 and the unit is dBm. l C/A, indicates the carrier-to-adjacent. The calculation method is to subtract the adjacentfrequency received signal strength from the received signal strength of the current serving ARFCN. ----End
Related References
12.24 Parameters for Performing the C/A Measurement of the GSM
11.2.3 Conducting GSM Frequency Scanning

This describes how to use the GSM test terminal to perform the frequency scanning test. You can perform the scanning test in the specified frequency range or band.
Prerequisite
The GSM test terminal is connected. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External Devices.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > GSM Frequency Scan. The GSM Frequency Scan dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Select a test terminal in Device Select. Step 3 Choose the scanning mode.
11-8
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
If ... Perform the scanning test in a specified frequency range.
Then... Choose Specific Scan, and then enter the frequency value in From and To. The Probe supports the scanning in the frequency range 0 to 124, 512 to 885, 512 to 810, or 975 to 1023.
CAUTION The value of (To - From) must be smaller than 32.
Perform the scanning test when no frequency range is specified.
Choose Unspecific Scan, and then select the band to be scanned in Scan Band. The Probe supports the scanning in the band GSM 900, DCS 1800, or PCS 1900. You can select All to scan all bands.
Recover the MS to the non-scanning status. Choose Disable. Step 4 Click Apply, and then the test terminal performs the scanning test. Step 5 Optional: Click Inquire Scan State, and then check the scanning status of the test terminal in the Scan State regional box. Step 6 Optional: Choose View > GSM > GSM Frequency Scan Result to browse the GSM scanning data in the GSM Frequency Scan Result view window. l ARFCN: Indicates the scanned frequency, which ranges from 0 to 1023. GSM 900 MHz: 0 to 124 and 975 to 1023 DCS 1800 MHz: 512 to 885 PCS 1900 MHz: 515 to 810 l RxLev: Indicates the received signal level, which ranges from -110 to -47 (Unit: dBm). l BSIC: Indicates the base station identity code, which ranges from 00 to 77. l BAND: Indicates the scanned band. The value can be set to GSM 900 MHz, DCS 1800 MHz, or PCS 1900 (Unit: MHz). ----End
11.2.4 Conducting the GSM Forcing Function Test

This describes how to test the forcing functions of the GSM. The forcing functions include the handover feature, ARFCN control, band control, and cell bar access (CBA) inversion. The handover features must be performed on the MS in dedicated state. The ARFCN control and band control must be performed in idle state.
Prerequisite
Context
l Handover feature The handover feature consists of forcing handover and forbid handover. The forcing handover is used to check whether the neighboring relation between cells is added properly. The forbid handover is used to measure the coverage range of the newly constructed site. The forcing handover and forbid handover are independent of each other. If the forbid handover is successfully performed, the MS in dedicated state is not switched until the MS is disconnected from the network. If the forcing handover is successfully performed and the neighboring relation between the serving cell and the neighboring cells is normal, the MS can be switched to the destination cell other than the non-destination cell. l ARFCN control and band control After the ARFCN is controlled in idle state, the system automatically prohibits the handover if the MS originates a call. In such a case, the MS remains on the destination ARFCN. After the band is controlled in idle state, the band is controlled in dedicated state. In such a case, the system filters the neighboring cells of the non-destination band. l CBA inversion The CBA is a parameter set by the BSC in the GSM system and is used to control the access of a cell. When the cell is under construction, the value of the CBA cannot be accessed by common users. During this time, the MS can access the cell to verify the functions of the newly-constructed cell through the CBA inversion function.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > GSM Forcing Feature. The GSM Forcing Feature dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters related to the GSM Forcing Feature dialog box, see 12.21 Parameters for Testing the Forcing Feature of the GSM. Step 2 Select an MS from the Device drop-down list. The ARFCNs of the current serving cell of the selected MS are displayed in Serving ARFCN. Step 3 Choose the forcing feature. If You Need To ... Perform the forcing handover Then ... 1. Select Forcing Function. 2. Select Force HO (Dedicated) from the Function Select area. 3. Select Input ARFCN from the Target ARFCN Setting area. Then, enter the ARFCN in Target ARFCN or select Select Neighbor to select the ARFCN of a neighboring cell. Perform the forbid handover 1. Select Forcing Function. 2. Select Forbid HO (Dedicated) from the Function Select area.
If You Need To ... Control a band
Then ... 1. Select Band Control. 2. Select a band from the Band Setting area.
Control the specified ARFCN
1. Select Forcing Function. 2. Select Lock Specific ARFCN (Idle) from the Function Select area. 3. Select Input ARFCN from the Target ARFCN Setting area. Then, enter the ARFCN in Target ARFCN or select Select Neighbor to select the ARFCN of a neighboring cell.
Control the ARFCN of the serving cell 1. Select Forcing Function. 2. Select Lock Serving ARFCN (Idle) from the Function Select area. Invert the CBA 1. Select Forcing Function. 2. Select CBA Invert from the Function Select area.
NOTE
l For the forcing handover, if the entered or selected ARFCN is not the ARFCN of a neighboring cell, the forcing handover fails. l If the specified ARFCN or the ARFCN of a serving cell is controlled successfully, the cell reselection is not performed on the MS in idle state until the MS is in non-dedicated state.
Step 4 Click Apply. The forcing feature is performed on the MS. Step 5 Optional: Click Inquire MS State. The latest forcing feature state of the MS is displayed in the MS Current State area. ----End
Related References
12.21 Parameters for Testing the Forcing Feature of the GSM
11.2.5 Conducting the WCDMA Forcing Function Test

The WCDMA forcing function involves locking the specified UARFCN and locking scramble codes. When locking frequencies or scramble codes, the test terminal must be in idle mode.
Prerequisite
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
11-11
Context
After the UARFCN is locked successfully, the test terminal can perform cell reselection or cell handover only in the cell that uses the locked UARFCN. The cell reselection or cell handover cannot be performed in the cell that spans UARFCN. When a scrambling code is locked, the corresponding UARFCN needs to be locked at the same time. After the scrambling code is locked successfully, the test terminal is not allowed to perform cell reselection or cell handover.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > WCDMA Forcing Feature. The WCDMA Forcing Feature dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters, see 12.22 Parameters for WCDMA Forcing Feature Test. Step 2 Select a test terminal in the Device Select drop-down list. Step 3 Select the forcing feature. If ... Then ...
Lock the specified UARFCN 1. Choose Lock ARFCN. 2. Enter a UARFCN that exists on the current network in the Target ARFCN area. If the entered UARFCN does not exist on or covered by the current network, the UARFCN cannot be locked. Lock the scrambling code 1. Choose Lock ARFCN&PSC. 2. Select the mode for obtaining a scrambling code. l If you choose Select PSC, select a scrambling code among the scrambling codes under the current UARFCN. l If you choose Input PSC, enter a UARFCN that exists on the current network in the Target ARFCN area, and then enter the scrambling code in the Input PSC text box. Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the test terminal performs the forcing feature test. You can click Default to recover the terminal status. Step 5 Optional: Click Inquire UE State. Then, the latest forcing feature status of the test terminal is displayed in the UE Current State area. ----End
Related References
12.22 Parameters for WCDMA Forcing Feature Test
11-12
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
11.2.6 Conducting the LTE Forcing Function Test

This section describes how to perform the LTE forcing function test. The LTE forcing functions consist of locking network, frequency band, cells, turning over the cell bar access (CBA), and locking the transmit power of the PUSCH.
Prerequisite
The Probe is connected with UEs, and the UEs can be enabled by the Probe. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External Devices.
Context
l Locking the network According to the mobile country code (MCC) and mobile network code (MNC), the UE camps on a specific PLMN after the network is locked. l Locking EARFCN and band After the EARFCN is locked in idle state, the system automatically prohibits the handover if the UE originates a call. In such a case, the UE remains on the destination EARFCN. After the band is locked in idle state, the band is locked in dedicated state. In such a case, the system filters the neighboring cells of the non-destination band. l Locking a cell According to the EARFCN and physical cell identity (PCI), the UE camps on a specific serving cell after a cell is locked. l Turning over the CBA The CBA is a parameter configured for the LTE system to control whether the UE is allowed to access a cell. When the cell is under construction, the CBA value indicates that the common subscriber cannot access the cell. In this case, the UE can access this cell through the CBA turn-over function to verify the functions of this cell. l Locking the transmit power of the PUSCH According to the transmit power of the PUSCH within the specified range, perform the related operations. Then, the UE uses the constant transmit power to transmit signals and the power control function does not take effect. In this case, the cell performance can be evaluated.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > LTE Forcing Feature. The LTE Forcing Feature dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters in the LTE Forcing Feature dialog box, see 12.21 Parameters for Testing the Forcing Feature of the GSM. Step 2 Select a UE from the Device drop-down list. The EARFCN of the serving cell that the UE camps on is displayed in Serving ARFCN. The PCI of the serving cell is displayed in Serving PCI. Step 3 Select the forcing feature. For details about the parameters, see 12.23 Parameter Description: LTE Forcing Feature Test.
Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the UE performs the forcing feature test. The latest forcing feature status of the UE is displayed in the MS Current State area. Click Reset. Then, the UE status is recovered. ----End
Related References
12.23 Parameter Description: LTE Forcing Feature Test
11.3 IP Analysis
The Probe obtains the raw data packets of data service tests through the WinPcap tool and then obtains the information about the transport layer protocols and the network layer protocols through the IP analysis.
Prerequisite
l l The WinPcap tool is already installed on the PC. The Network Monitor Driver protocol components are already installed. If the Network Monitor Driver protocol components are not installed, the network protocol analysis cannot be performed. The method for installing the Network Monitor Driver protocol components is as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. l Right-click Local Area Connection and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Choose Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) on the General tab page. Then, click Install. Double-click Protocol in the Select Network Component Type dialog box. Select Network Monitor Driver in the Select Network Protocol dialog box. Click OK. The installation is complete.
The test plan related to the data services is already configured on the Probe. For details, see 8.4 Designing Test Plans.
Context
The Probe supports the analysis of the following network protocols: l l Transport layer protocols: Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and User Datagram Protocol (UDP) Network layer protocols: Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) and Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6)
The Probe disables the IP analysis function by default.
Procedure
Step 1 Enable the IP analysis function. 1. Choose Configuration > System Configure. The System Configure dialog box is displayed.
11-14
2. 3. 4.
Click
. The IP Settings dialog box is displayed.
Select On in Packet Capture to enable the IP analysis function. Off indicates that the IP analysis function is disabled. Click OK.
Step 2 Execute the configured test plan. For details, see 8.5 Performing a Test Plan. Step 3 View the information about the protocols used by data packets. Choose View > Message > IP Messages. l Time: indicates the time for reporting data packets. l Source: indicates the source IP address. l Destination: indicates the destination IP address. l Protocol: indicates the used protocols. l Info: indicates the information about data packets. ----End
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
11-15
12 Interface Reference of the Probe
12
Interface Reference of the Probe
About This Chapter

This describes the interface and parameters of the Probe. You can refer to these parameters when you collect, view, and replay the data through the Probe. 12.1 Interface Description: Test Plan Control Window This describes the Test Plan Control window and helps you understand the window component, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon. 12.2 Interface Description: Engineering Parameter management Window This describes the Engineering Parameter management window and helps you understand the window component, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon. 12.3 Interface Description: OutdoorMap Window This describes the OutdoorMap window and helps you understand the window component, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon. 12.4 Interface Description: IndoorMap Window This describes the IndoorMap window and helps you understand the window component, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon. 12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View This describes the test data view. You can learn the mode in which the Probe displays the data. 12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View This describes the Line Chart window and helps you understand the window components, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon. 12.7 Parameters for Configuring External Devices This section describes the parameters for configuring external devices. You can refer to this section when configuring parameters for a test terminal, a GPS, or a scanner. 12.8 Parameters for Filtering the Original Data This describes the parameters for filtering the original data in the Filter dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you configure whether to report or collect the signaling on a test terminal. 12.9 Parameters for Configuring the Test Items
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-1
This describes the parameters for configuring the test items and attributes of the MS and scanner. You can refer to these parameters when you configure the MS or scanner test plan in the Test Plan Control window. 12.10 Parameters for Monitoring the Test This describes the parameters for monitoring the test. During the test or replay, you can refer to these parameters when you query the status and statistics value of each test item in the test plan in the Test Plan Control window. 12.11 Parameters for Importing the Engineering Parameters This describes the parameters for importing the engineering parameters. You can refer to these parameters when you import the engineering parameters. 12.12 Parameters for Importing the Outdoor Raster Map This describes the parameters for importing the outdoor raster map. You can refer to these parameters when you import the outdoor raster map or add the outdoor raster map. 12.13 Parameters for Configuring the Legend Properties This describes the parameters for configuring the legend properties of the IE layer and layer offset properties. You can refer to the description when configuring the legend properties of the IE layer in the Layer Parameter dialog box or configuring the layer offset properties in the Layer Offset dialog box. 12.14 Parameters for Configuring the Layer Control Properties This describes the parameters for configuring the layer control properties, such as layer display properties and layer label properties. You can refer to these parameters when you configure the layer display properties in the Layer Control dialog box. 12.15 Parameters for Setting the Predefined Event This describes the proprieties of the predefined event. You can refer to these parameters when you set the properties of the predefined event in the System Configure dialog box. 12.16 Parameters for Configuring the Device Alarm This describes the parameters for configuring the device alarm. You can refer to these parameters when you configure the device alarm in the System Configure dialog box. 12.17 Parameters for Setting IE Audio Indications This describes the parameters about setting audio indications for IEs. You can set related parameters according to the following information when configuring audio indications for IEs. 12.18 Parameter for Other System Settings This describes the parameters related to other system settings. You can refer to this part when synchronizing the external device time, setting logfile storage properties, or setting event replay mode. 12.19 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the List Views This describes the parameters for configuring the properties of the list view. You can refer to the description when configuring the properties of the list view. 12.20 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the Line Chart View This describes the parameters for configuring the properties of the line chart view. You can refer to these parameters when you configure the properties of the line chart view. 12.21 Parameters for Testing the Forcing Feature of the GSM This describes the parameters for testing the forcing function of the GSM. You can refer to this part when setting the parameters for testing the forcing function of the GSM in the GSM Forcing Feature dialog box. 12.22 Parameters for WCDMA Forcing Feature Test
This describes the parameters related to the WCDMA forcing feature test. You can refer to this part when setting WCDMA forcing feature test parameters in the WCDMA Forcing Feature dialog box. 12.23 Parameter Description: LTE Forcing Feature Test This section describes the parameters related to the LTE forcing feature test. You can set parameters related to the LTE forcing feature test in the LTE Forcing Feature dialog box by referring to this section. 12.24 Parameters for Performing the C/A Measurement of the GSM This describes the parameters for performing the C/A measurement of the GSM. You can refer to this part when setting parameters for performing the C/A measurement of the GSM in the GSM C/A Setting dialog box. 12.25 Parameters for Exporting the Data This describes the parameters for exporting data. You can refer to this part when converting a .gen file to the file in other formats or converting a .phu file to a .gen file. 12.26 Parameters for Configuring the Data Export Format of the Scanner This describes the parameters for configuring the export format of the CW data of the PCTel DTI scanner. You can refer to this part when exporting the CW data of the PCTel DTI scanner.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-3
12.1 Interface Description: Test Plan Control Window

This describes the Test Plan Control window and helps you understand the window component, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon. Figure 12-1 shows the Test Plan Control window and Table 12-1 provides the description of the Figure 12-1. Figure 12-1 Test Plan Control window
Table 12-1 Description of the Test Plan Control window No. 1 2 Name Toolbar for Controlling the Test Plan Test item list Description Provides the shortcut icon for editing the test item and controlling the test plan. Provides the default test item. You can select the test item according to requirements.
12-4
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
No. 3
Name Attribute and statistics value list
Description Contains the Config and Statistic tab pages. l Config tab page: You can set the properties of each test item. l Statistic tab page: Displays the statistics value of the test item that is performed. For detailed description of the parameters, see 12.10 Parameters for Monitoring the Test.
List of the test item that is performed
Displays the test item that is performed.
Toolbar for Controlling the Test Plan

You can edit the test item and control the test plan by clicking the corresponding icons. Table 12-2 shows the toolbar. Table 12-2 Description of the Test Plan Control window toolbar Icon Name Importing the test plan Exporting the test plan Starting the test plan Stopping the test plan Moving the test item upward Moving the test item downward Deleting Description Enables you to open a configured test plan (in .xml format). Enables you to save a configured test plan (in .xml format). Enables you to start performing the test item configured in the test plan. Enables you to stop all the test items that are being performed. Enables you to move the selected test item upward. Enables you to move the selected test item downward. Enables you to delete the selected test item.
Related Tasks
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-5
12.2 Interface Description: Engineering Parameter management Window

This describes the Engineering Parameter management window and helps you understand the window component, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon. Figure 12-2 shows the Engineering Parameter management window. Table 12-3 provides the description of the Figure 12-2. Figure 12-2 Engineering Parameter management window
Table 12-3 Description of the Engineering Parameter management window No. 1 2 3 4 Name Engineering Parameter toolbar Field name of the engineering parameter Engineering parameter list Status bar of the engineering parameter Description Provides shortcut icons for importing, exporting, adding, and deleting a row. Displays the field name of the engineering parameter. Displays the value corresponding to each field name of the engineering parameter. Displays the network protocol corresponding to the imported engineering parameter.
12-6
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Engineering Parameter Toolbar

The engineering parameter toolbar is in the upper areal of the Engineering Parameter management window. The icon description is provided in Table 12-4. Table 12-4 Toolbar description of the Engineering Parameter management window Icon Name Importing the engineering parameter Description Enables you to import the engineering parameter. You can click the icon to open the Select File dialog box. For detailed description about the parameter, see 12.11 Parameters for Importing the Engineering Parameters. Enables you to export the engineering parameter. After you click the icon, the xls or xlsx file is opened automatically. If the engineering parameters of multiple network protocols exist, the xls or xlsx file contains multiple sheets whose names are corresponding to the network protocols displayed in the status bar of the Engineering Parameter management dialog box. Enables you to make the editing operation to take effect. You can click the icon to apply the editing result to the file of the current engineer parameter. Enables you to add a row in the sheet. You can click the icon to add a row in the engineer parameter sheet. Enables you to view engineering parameter templates of different networks in the default path provided by the Probe. You can modify the format of the current engineering parameter table based on the project reference template to ensure that the format of the engineering parameter table meets the requirements of the Probe. The default path is as follows: Software Installation Directory \Template\Engineering Parameters.
Exporting the engineering parameter
Application
Adding a row
Checking the templates of engineering parameters
Icon
Name Deleting a row
Description Enables you to delete a row. You can click the icon to delete a row where the selected engineer parameter is located.
Related Tasks
12.3 Interface Description: OutdoorMap Window

This describes the OutdoorMap window and helps you understand the window component, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon. Figure 12-3 shows the OutdoorMap window. Table 12-5 provides the description of the Figure 12-3. Figure 12-3 OutdoorMap window
12-8
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 12-5 Description of the OutdoorMap window No. 1 2 3 Name Outdoor map toolbar Displaying area of the outdoor map Map Layers window Description Provides the shortcut icons for common outdoor map operations. Displays the outdoor map imported, event occurred, and drive test route. Indicates the layer management window that provides the operation entry for the layer management of the device layer and air interface parameters. Displays the longitude and latitude of the current position and distance of the test points on the map.
Outdoor map status bar
Outdoor Map Toolbar

The OutdoorMap window provides the entry for common outdoor map operations. You can open the related window or perform related operations by clicking certain icons. For the description of the toolbar, see Table 12-6. Table 12-6 Description of the OutdoorMap window toolbar Icon Map Shortcut Menu Name Opening the MapInfo map Saving a map Opening the raster map Description Enables you to open the MapInfo map. The extension is .tab or .gst. Enables you to save the map to a .gst file. Enables you to open the raster map. The extension is .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png. Enables you to manage layers or change displaying or labeling properties. For details, see 5.4 Configuring Layer Properties. Changes are only temporary and cannot be saved in the project.
Layer Control
Layer control
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-9
Icon
Map Shortcut Menu -
Name Cell search
Description Searches for the information about a specified cell on the map. Currently, only the GSM and WCDMA network systems are supported. Search results are valid only engineering parameters are used.
Tools > Zoom In
Zooming in
Enables you to enlarge a portion of the map to view it in more detail. Enables you to view a larger area than the current map view. Enables you to zoom in or out in an area on the map. Clicking the map and then dragging the mouse rightward indicates zooming in on the map; clicking the map and then dragging the mouse leftward indicates zooming out on the map. Enables you to move the map. You can click the map and hold down the mouse to move the map. Enables you to set any point on the map as the center. You can click the icon and then click a spot on the map. The map is centered around the spot. Enables you to select the object contained in the current layer. You can select multiple objects by holding down Ctrl. Enables you to select all the objects in a rectangle. You can click the map and move the mouse to form a rectangle area.
Tools > Zoom Out
Zooming out
Tools > Zoom
Zooming in or out
Tools > Pan
Moving the map
Tools > Center
Center map
Tools > Center
Selection tool
Tools > Rectangle Select
Rectangle selection tool
12-10
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Icon
Map Shortcut Menu Tools > Distance
Name Ruler
Description Enables you to measure the distance between two points on the map. You can click a point on the map as the starting point and drag the mouse to any direction. The system displays the distance from the starting point to the point where the mouse stops on the status bar at the bottom of the outdoor map window. Enables you to view the map. You can open the Zoom to dialog box to selectively zoom out the selected layer. Displays a position in the map. You can move the mouse to the position where you are interested in. Then, the name of the position is displayed. Displays the grid and legend of a map. Enables you to label the engineering parameters on the map. Enables you to clear the IE or track information in the current map layer. The cell site information is not cleared.
Entire Map
Viewing
Tools > Arrow
Arrow tool
Drawing a grid Label
Clearing the map
Map Layers Window

The Map Layers window is in the right pane of the OutdoorMap window. You can right-click the map and choose Layer Bar to configure whether to display the Map Layers window. Figure 12-4 shows the Map Layers window and Table 12-7 provides the description of Figure 12-4.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-11
Figure 12-4 Map Layers window
Table 12-7 Description of the Map Layers window No. 1 Name Layer toolbar Icon Map Shortcut Menu Add Layer Description Enables you to add the air interface parameter layer. You can click the icon to open the Add Layer dialog box to add the air interface parameter layer. Enables you to remove a selected layer. After you click the icon, the layer node in the Map Layers window is deleted. In addition, the data that displays the layer on the map is deleted.
Remove Layer
12-12
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
No.
Name
Icon
Map Shortcut Menu Edit Layer
Description Enables you to edit the layer properties. You can click the icon to open the Layer Parameter dialog box to edit the layer properties. For details, see 5.5 Configuring Legend Properties.
Area of editing the layer
Enables you to edit the added layer.
Related Tasks
12.4 Interface Description: IndoorMap Window

This describes the IndoorMap window and helps you understand the window component, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon. Figure 12-5 shows the IndoorMap window. Table 12-8 provides the description of the Figure 12-5. Figure 12-5 IndoorMap window
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-13
Table 12-8 Description of the IndoorMap window No. 1 2 3 Name Indoor map toolbar Displaying the display area of the indoor map Map Layers window Description Provides the shortcut icons for common indoor map operations. Displays the indoor map imported, event occurred, and drive test route. Indicates the layer management window that provides the operation entry for the layer management of air interface parameters.
Indoor Map Toolbar

The IndoorMap window provides the entry for common map operations. You can open the related window or perform related operations by click certain icons. For the detailed description of the toolbar, see Table 12-9. Table 12-9 Description of the IndoorMap window toolbar Icon Map Shortcut Menu Name Opening the raster map Locating the point manually Zooming in Zooming out Zooming in or out Description Enables you to open the grid map (the extension is .tif or .bmp.) Enables you to zoom in on the map. Enables you to zoom out on the map. Enables you to zoom in or out in an area on the map. Clicking the map and then dragging the mouse rightward indicates zooming in on the map; clicking the map and then dragging the mouse rightward indicates zooming out on the map.
Localizer Zoom In Zoom Out Pan
12-14
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Icon
Map Shortcut Menu Arrow
Name Arrow tool
Description Displays a position in the map. You can move the mouse to the position where you are interested in, and then the name of the position is displayed. Enables you to selectively zoom out the selected layer. Enables you to cancel the previous operations of locating the points. This tool is enabled to the drive test mode.
Undo
Viewing Undoing the last operation
Clearing the map
Enables you to clear the IE or track information in the current map layer. During a horizontal test, the IE information and track information can be cleared when the tracks of points are controlled manually. When the tracks of points are controlled automatically, that is, the test is performed according to the predefined tracks, only IE information is cleared, and the track information is not cleared.
Map Layers Window

The Map Layers window is in the right pane of IndoorMap. You can right-click the map and choose Layer Bar to configure whether to display the window. Figure 12-6 shows the Map Layers window. Table 12-10 provides the description of the Figure 12-6.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-15
Figure 12-6 Map Layers window
Table 12-10 Description of the Map Layers window No. 1 Name Layer toolbar Icon Description Enables you to add the air interface parameter layer. Enables you to delete the layer. After you click the icon, the layer node in the Map Layers window is deleted. In addition, the data that displays the layer on the map is deleted. You can click the icon to add the layer that is deleted. Enables you to edit the layer properties. You can click the icon to open the Layer Parameter dialog box to edit the layer properties. For details, see5.5 Configuring Legend Properties. 2 Area of editing the layer Displays the name of the layer that is added and configures whether to display the layer on the map.
Related Tasks
5.2.2 Importing Indoor Test Maps
12-16
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View

This describes the test data view. You can learn the mode in which the Probe displays the data. Figure 12-7 shows the test data view of the Probe. Table 12-11 shows the description of Figure 12-7.
NOTE
Take the BA List, Radio Parameter, Information, and Power views as examples.
Figure 12-7 Interface of the test data view
Table 12-11 Description of the test data view View Name BA List view Power view Radio Parameter view View Type List view Chart view Mixed view Description Displays test data in tables. Displays test data in charts. Displays the changed value of each parameter directly by using the combination chart and list view.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-17
View Name Information view
View Type Plain text view
Description Displays the basic information about the logfile, the event information, and the statistics of events and KPIs in the logfile.
Related Tasks
10.2 Browsing Data 10.3.2 Configuring the List View 10.3.3 Configuring the Chart View 10.3.4 Configuring the Plain Text View
12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View

This describes the Line Chart window and helps you understand the window components, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon. Figure 12-8 shows the Line Chart window. Table 12-12 provides the description of the Figure 12-8. Figure 12-8 Line Chart window
12-18
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 12-12 Description of the Line Chart window No. 1 2 Name Chart display area Axis display area Description Displays the IE information of each chart in a line chart or bar chart. Displays the value range and color of the selected IE in the axes of each chart. You can change the properties of the IE through the shortcut menu in the view window. For the description of the shortcut menu, see 12.20 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the Line Chart View. l If you click , the scroll bar moves leftwards by one second, and the data presented one second ago is displayed in the view. l If you click , the scroll bar moves rightwards by one second, and the data presented one second later is displayed in the view. and , the scroll l If you click the blank area between bar moves leftwards by one page, and the data presented 60 seconds ago is displayed in the view. l If you click the blank area between and , the scroll bar moves rightwards by one page, and the data presented 60 seconds later is displayed in the view. l If you click Lock, the system status is changed to UnLock. In this case, you can drag to check the data of the specific position. If you click UnLock again, the system status is changed to Lock. The Probe resumes the test or replay. 4 5 Legend area Text display area Legend of an IE. You can double-click the name of an IE to change its properties. IE information displayed in text format, which consists of the IE name, value, and the name of the corresponding terminal.
Scroll bar of the chart display area
Related Tasks
10.2 Browsing Data 10.3.1 Configuring the Line Chart View
12.7 Parameters for Configuring External Devices

This section describes the parameters for configuring external devices. You can refer to this section when configuring parameters for a test terminal, a GPS, or a scanner.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-19
Parameters in the Device Configure Window

Parameter Name Model COMPort ModemPort Description Indicates the name of the added device. Indicates the model of the added device. Indicates the COM port of the added device. Indicates the modem port number of the added device. If Modem port is not configured in the Device Configure dialog box, Not Configure is displayed. State Indicates the current state of the added device. l Down: The device is added but not connected. l Searching: The system is searching for the port corresponding to the device. l Disconnect: The device is disconnected. l Connected: The device is connected.
Common Parameters for Configuring External Devices

Parameter Name Type Description Indicates the name of the external device. The system names the added device automatically and displays the name. Indicates device types. The options are as follows: l MS l GPS l Scanner Model Indicates the model of the external device. For the type and specifications of the external devices that are supported by the Probe, see 7.1 Connectable External Devices.
Parameters for Configuring GSM, WCDMA, or CDMA Test Terminals

Parameter Name Type Model Description Indicates the name of the currently added test terminal. Indicates the type of the currently added device: MS. Indicates the actual model of the MS. For the models of the test terminals that are supported by the Probe, see Test Terminal.
12-20
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameter Baud rate
Description Indicates the baud rate of the MS. It must be the same as the actual setting of the MS. The options are 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 38400, 56000, 57600, 115200, 128000, 230400, 256000, 460800, and 921600. Indicates the actual COM port used by the MS after the MS is connected to the PC. You can view the actual port number of the MS under the Ports (COM & LPT) node in the Device Manager window.
COM port
Modem port
Indicates the actual modem port used by the MS after the MS is connected to the PC. In the Device Manager window, right-click the corresponding device under the Modem node, and then select Properties. You can view the actual modem port number on the Modem tab page. If you want to perform a data service test or send AT commands, Modem port must be set. In other cases, Modem port need not be set.
Adjust antenna
Indicates the antenna gain of the MS. Only the GSM and WCDMA modes are supported. You can select either of the following values: l Disable: not set the antenna gain of the MS. l Enable: set the antenna gain of the MS. If you select Enable, you can set the antenna gain in the displayed UE External Antenna Setting dialog box. The value ranges from 1 to 100 and can be a decimal. The default value is Disable.
CAUTION For the MS to which an external antenna is connected, you can set the antenna gain as required. For the MS to which an external antenna is not connected, if you set the antenna gain, the accuracy of counters such as the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI), Received Signal Level (RxLev), or Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) may be affected. Therefore, you are advised to select Disable.
Parameters for Configuring the WiMAX Test Terminal

Parameter Name Type Model Description Indicates the name of the currently added MS. Indicates the type of the currently added device: MS. Indicates the model of the WiMAX test terminal. For the models of the test terminals that are supported by the Probe, see Test Terminal.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-21
Parameter TE
Description Indicates the terminal that is connected to the PC. l WiMAX_GCT: Four GCT terminals can be configured. l WiMAX_Runcom: Only one terminal can be configured.
Card Index
Indicates the index of the terminal. The system allocates one index according to the selected TE. The index is allocated from 1.
Parameters for Configuring the LTE Test Terminal

Parameter Name Type Model OMAGENT IP address Description Indicates the name of the currently added MS. Indicates the type of the currently added device: MS. Indicates the model of the LTE test terminal. For the models of the test terminals that are supported by the Probe, see Test Terminal. Indicates the IP address of a PC that is connected to an LTE UE 1.X terminal. For LTE UE 2.0 terminals, this parameter is not required. Indicates the port corresponding to OMAGENT IP address. You need not set this parameter manually. The default value, 3000, is recommended. Query the IP address of the host through the HyperTerminal provided by the Windows operating system. For details, see 13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE?. UE port Indicates the port corresponding to UE IP address. You do not need to set this parameter manually. The default value, 5000, is recommended.
OMAGENT port
UE IP address
Parameters for Configuring the GPS

Parameter Name Type Description Indicates the name of the currently added GPS. Indicates the type of the currently added device: GPS.
12-22
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameter Model
Description Indicates the protocol used for the communication with the configured GPS. You can select NMEA or TEXT. NMEA is the GPS protocol that is used internationally. TEXT is the protocol provided by GARMIN, and only support the GPS of the GARMIN series such as 12XL and Vista.
NOTE If you select TEXT, you need to change the default output format of the GPS to TEXT.
For the GPS models supported by the Probe, see GPS. Baud rate Indicates the baud rate of the GPS. The options are 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 38400, 56000, 57600, 115200, 128000, 230400, 256000, 460800, and 921600. Indicates the actual COM port used by a GPS after the GPS is connected to the PC. You can view the actual port number of the GPS under the Ports (COM & LPT) node in the Device Manager window.
COM port
Parameters for Configuring Scanners

Parameter Name Type Model Description Indicates the name of the currently added scanner. Indicates the type of the currently added device: Scanner. Indicates the model of a scanner. Note that PCTEL EX scanners support multi-mode tests and multi-band tests. For the scanner models supported by the Probe, see Scanner. COM port Indicates the actual COM port used by the scanner after the scanner is connected to the PC. You can view the actual port number of the scanner under the Ports (COM & LPT) node in the Device Manager window. Protocol Indicates the protocol that is supported by the connected scanner.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-23
Parameter Band
Description Indicates the frequency band that is supported by the connected scanner. l GSM GSM850 (869 MHz to 894 MHz), E-GSM (925 MHz to 960 MHz), DCS1800 (1805 MHz to 1880 MHz), and PCS 1900 (1930 MHz to 1990 MHz). l WCDMA Band I DL (2110.0 MHz to 2170.0 MHz), Band I UL (1920.0 MHz to 1980.0 MHz), Band II (1930.0 MHz to 1990.0 MHz), Band III (1805.0 MHz to 1880.0 MHz), Band IV (2110.0 MHz to 2155.0 MHz), Band V (869.0 MHz to 894.0 MHz), and Band VIII (925.0 MHz to 960.0 MHz). l CDMA Band 0 (869.61 MHz to 893.40 MHz), Band 0 (860.64 MHz to 874.38 MHz), Band 1 (1930.65 MHz to 1989.35 MHz), Band 3 (860.6375 MHz to 869.3625 MHz), and BAND 5 (461.95 MHz to 466.85 MHz). l WiMAX 2.5 GHz (2498.50 MHz to 2687.50 MHz) and 3.5 GHz (3402.50 MHz to 3597.50 MHz).
Instance
Indicates the interface number that is used by the scanner of the Anritsu ML874X series (for example, ML8740 or ML8742) after the scanner is connected to the PC. You need to select an interface number that is not used by another scanner. If the scanner of the Anritsu ML874X series is not connected to the PC, select Not Configure.
1394
Indicates the interface number that is used by the scanner of the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX series after the scanner is connected to the PC. You need to select an interface number that is not used by another scanner. If only one TSMX scanner is connected, select 1. If the scanner of the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX series is not connected to the PC, select Not Configure.
12-24
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameter Adjust antenna
Description Indicates the antenna gain of the scanner. Only the scanners of the PCTel SeeGull LX series and the EX series are supported. You can select either of the following values: l Disable: not set the antenna gain of the scanner. l Enable: set the antenna gain of the scanner. If you select Enable, you can set the antenna gain in the displayed Scanner External Antenna Setting dialog box. The Probe may automatically compensate the antenna or cable loss of the scanner. The default value is Disable.
CAUTION For the scanner to which an external antenna is connected, you can set the antenna gain as required. For the scanner to which an external antenna is not connected, if you set the antenna gain, the accuracy of indicators such as the RSSI, RxLev, or RSCP may be affected. Therefore, you are advised to select Disable.
Related Tasks
7.3 Configuring External Devices
12.8 Parameters for Filtering the Original Data

This describes the parameters for filtering the original data in the Filter dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you configure whether to report or collect the signaling on a test terminal. Parameter LogCode Select Filter Description Displays the name of the data package. Indicates that whether the test terminal reports the data package. Indicates the mode that the Probe adopts to collect data packages: l No Filter: The Probe collects all the data packages reported by the terminal. l By Periods: The Probe collects the data packages reported by the terminal periodically. l All Filter: The Probe does not collect the data packages reported by the terminal. Interval Indicates the sampling interval. The Probe collects data packets at the sampling intervals set here. Redundant data packets are discarded.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-25
Related Tasks
7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected
12.9 Parameters for Configuring the Test Items

This describes the parameters for configuring the test items and attributes of the MS and scanner. You can refer to these parameters when you configure the MS or scanner test plan in the Test Plan Control window. Parameter Description
Adds the parameters of the test item. Name Status Displays the selected test item. Displays the current status of the test item. l Ready: Indicates the ready status. l Testing: Indicates the testing status. l Finish: Indicates the finish status. Progress Displays the count for which the test item is performed. The format is n/N. n indicates the count for which a test item is currently performed and N indicates the total count for which a test item is performed.
Parameters for setting the properties of the added test item. Property Value Displays the property name of the test item. Enables you to set values of the Property.
Related Tasks
12.10 Parameters for Monitoring the Test

This describes the parameters for monitoring the test. During the test or replay, you can refer to these parameters when you query the status and statistics value of each test item in the test plan in the Test Plan Control window.
Parameters for Monitoring the Test

The list for monitoring the test is in the lower pane of the Test Plan Control window to display the status of the test item. Parameter Time
12-26
Description Displays the time for performing the current test item.
Parameter Name Info
Description Displays the name of the test item that is currently performed. Displays the status of the test item that is currently performed, containing begin, failure, and success.
Parameter Description of the Statistic Tab Page

The Statistic tab is in the right pane of the Test Plan Control window to display the statistics value of the test item. Parameter Type Description Displays the statistics type defined by the system. l Total Count: Indicates the total count for which the current test item is performed. l Success Count: Indicates the count for which the current test item is successfully performed. l Failure Count: Indicates the count for which the current test item fails to be performed. l Success Rate: Indicates the percentage of the count for which the current test item is performed to the total count for which the current test item is performed. Value Displays the statistics result of the test item that is currently performed.
Related Tasks
8.5.4 Monitoring the Test
12.11 Parameters for Importing the Engineering Parameters

This describes the parameters for importing the engineering parameters. You can refer to these parameters when you import the engineering parameters.
Parameters in the Select File Dialog Box

Parameter Engineering parameter file Select Protocol Description Enables you to choose the required engineering parameter file in xls, xlsx, or csv format. Enables you to select the network protocol corresponding to the engineering parameter, including GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX, and LTE.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-27
Parameter Config Neighboring Cell
Description Indicates whether to configure the neighboring cell parameters. l Horizontal: indicates the horizontal neighboring cell The engineering parameter fields of the serving cell and the cell fields are in the same line of the same table. Horizontal neighboring cells support only the GSM network system. In this case, engineering parameter fields contain neighboring cell fields. l Vertical: indicates the vertical neighboring cell Each line in the table indicates a neighboring cell relation. Vertical neighboring cells support the GSM, WCDMA, WiMAX, and LTE network systems. In this case, engineering parameter fields do not contain neighboring cell fields, and you need to import the corresponding engineering parameter when importing a neighboring cell.
Neighboring cell file
Enables you to choose the required vertical neighboring cell file.
Parameters in the Match Parameters Dialog Box

Parameter Select Sheet Excel Param Probe Param Match Description Enables you to select the form where the project parameters are located. Displays all the field names of the imported engineering parameter. Displays the field name corresponding to the engineering parameters on the Probe. Enables you to match the field name in the form where the engineering parameters are located. You can select the row where the unmatched field is located, and then click Match to open the Match Data dialog box. Perform related matching operation. For the parameter description, see Parameters in the Match Data Dialog Box. Enables you to cancel the matching operation. Enables you to customize the engineering parameters. You can click Customize to open the Customize Parameters dialog box. Perform related customizing operation. For the parameter description, see Parameters in the Customize Parameters Dialog Box.
Cancel Customize
12-28
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameters in the Match Data Dialog Box

Parameter Excel Parameter Param List Description Displays the selected field name in the Match Parameters that needs to be matched. Displays the imported engineering parameters.
Parameters in the Customize Parameters Dialog Box

Parameter Param List Mandatory Description Displays the mandatory field name of the engineering parameter. For the parameter description, see 6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems. Optional Displays the optional field name of the engineering parameter. For the parameter description, see 6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems. Custom Add Delete Displays the customized field names of the engineering parameters. Enables you to add the customized field name. Enables you to delete the customized field. You can choose the field under the Custom node. Click Delete to delete the customized field.
Related Tasks
12.12 Parameters for Importing the Outdoor Raster Map

This describes the parameters for importing the outdoor raster map. You can refer to these parameters when you import the outdoor raster map or add the outdoor raster map. Parameter Label Longitude
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Description Indicates the name of the reference point. Indicates the longitude of the reference point.
Parameter Latitude PixelX PixelY
Description Indicates the latitude of the reference point. Indicates the X coordinate value of the reference point. The range is the range of the pixel point of the imported raster map. Indicates the Y coordinate value of the reference point. The range is the range of the pixel point of the imported raster map.
Related Tasks
12.13 Parameters for Configuring the Legend Properties

This describes the parameters for configuring the legend properties of the IE layer and layer offset properties. You can refer to the description when configuring the legend properties of the IE layer in the Layer Parameter dialog box or configuring the layer offset properties in the Layer Offset dialog box.
Parameters of the Layer Parameter Dialog Box

Parameter Range List Interval Symbol Add Description Displays the range within which the legend is configured. Displays the symbol whose legend is configured. Enables you to add the legend. You can click the icon to open the Add Color Range dialog box to add the legend. For detailed description of the parameter, see Parameters for Editing the Legend Attributes. Enables you to set the legend properties. You can click the icon to open the Edit Color Range dialog box to configure the properties for the legend that is selected. For detailed description of the parameters, see Parameters for Editing the Legend Attributes. Enables you to remove a selected legend.
Edit
Remove
12-30
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameter Auto Setup
Description Enables you to set the color of the legend. You can click the icon to open the Color Range Auto Setup dialog box to configure the number of color ranges of the legend in Interval.
Parameters for Editing the Legend Attributes

Parameter Start End Symbol Font Size Shape Color Example Description Enables you to set the start value of the legend. Enables you to set the end value of the legend. Enables you to set the font of the legend. Enables you to set the size of the legend. Enables you to set the shape of the legend. Enables you to set the color of the legend. Displays the example whose legend is configured.
Parameters for Configuring the Layer Offset

Parameter X(m) Y(m) Lock X and Y Description Indicates the distance (m) of the layer offset to the total length of the map. Indicates the distance (m) of the layer offset to the total width of the map. Indicates whether to zoom in or zoom out the map.
Related Tasks
5.5 Configuring Legend Properties
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-31
12.14 Parameters for Configuring the Layer Control Properties

This describes the parameters for configuring the layer control properties, such as layer display properties and layer label properties. You can refer to these parameters when you configure the layer display properties in the Layer Control dialog box.
Parameters of the Layer Control Dialog Box

Parameter Up Down Add Description Enables you to move a selected layer upwards on the map. Enables you to move a selected layer downwards on the map. Enables you to add a layer above a selected layer. You can click Add, select a .tab file in the displayed dialog box, and then click Open. Enables you to remove a selected layer. Enables you to set whether the selected layer is visible. Enables you to set whether the selected layer is selectable. Enables you to set whether the label of the selected layer is visible. If the label of the selected layer is visible, the layer must also be visible, that is, if you select Automatic Labels, you must select Visible at the same time. Enables you to set whether the selected layer can be edited. Enables you to set the properties of the layer. In the Layers area, select a layer, and then click Display. The Display Properties dialog box is displayed. Set the display properties of the selected layer. For the description of the parameters, see Parameters of the Display Properties Dialog Box. Labels Enables you to set the label properties of the layer. In the Layers area, select a layer, and then click Labels. The Label Properties dialog box is displayed. Set the label properties of the selected layer. For the description of the parameters, see Parameters of the Label Properties Dialog Box.
Remove Visible Selectable Automatic Labels
Editable Display
12-32
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameters of the Display Properties Dialog Box

Parameter Override style Description Indicates whether to change the style of the selected layer. The style of a layer consists of areas, lines, symbols, and texts. Zoom Layering Display Within Zoom Range Min Zoom Indicates whether to display map layer within the zooming range (Min Zoom to Max Zoom). Indicates the minimum zoom range. You can set the maximum zooming range after selecting Display Within Zoom Range. Indicates the maximum zoom range. You can set the maximum zooming range after selecting Display Within Zoom Range.
Max Zoom
Parameters of the Label Properties Dialog Box

Parameter Label with DataSet Field Visibility Display within Range Description Indicates the data contained in the selected layer. Indicates the label field list. Whether to display layer within the zoom range (Min Zoom to Max Zoom). Indicates the minimum zooming range. You can set the maximum zooming range after selecting Display Within Zoom Range. Indicates the maximum zooming range. You can set the maximum zooming range after selecting Display Within Zoom Range. Indicates whether to allow overlapped texts. Indicates whether to allow duplicated texts. Indicates whether to label the partial object.
12-33
Min Zoom
Max Zoom
Allow Overlapped Text Allow Duplicated Text Label Partial Objects
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameter Maximum labels Styles Label Lines None Simple Arrow
Description Indicates the maximum number of labeled objects. Enables you to set the style of the label text. Enables you select the label lines. Indicates that no label line exists. Indicates the simple label line. Indicates the label line with the arrow. Enables you to set the corresponding line style.
Position
Orientation Rotation None Parallel to One Segment
Indicates the direction of the anchor point. Enables you to set the rotating direction. Indicates no rotation. Enables you to rotate a text to make its direction parallel to one line segment. Enables you to rotate a text to make its direction parallel to all the line segments. Enables you to set rotation offset of the label.
Parallel to Multiple Segments Label Offset
12.15 Parameters for Setting the Predefined Event

This describes the proprieties of the predefined event. You can refer to these parameters when you set the properties of the predefined event in the System Configure dialog box. Parameter Mute all event sounds Language Description Indicates whether to disable the sounds of all predefined events. Displays the voice type. The Probe supports English and Chinese.
12-34
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameter Restore properties of all events
Description Enables you to restore the properties of the all predefined events. You can click Reset to restore. Displays the name of a selected predefined event. Indicates whether to display a predefined event in the Event List view window. You can select True or False. Indicates whether to display a predefined event in the indoor map window or outdoor map window. You can select True or False. Indicates the icon displayed on the map after a predefined event is selected. Indicates whether to play voice when a selected predefined event occurs. You can select True or False. Indicates the voice file that is used during voice playing. The parameter is valid when Voice enabled is set to True.
Property
EventName Shown in EventList Shown in Map
Icon Voice enabled
Voice
Value
Enables you to set the value of Property.
12.16 Parameters for Configuring the Device Alarm

This describes the parameters for configuring the device alarm. You can refer to these parameters when you configure the device alarm in the System Configure dialog box. Parameter Icon AlarmName Description Indicates the alarm icon displayed on the map. Indicates the list of alarms, including MS Disconnection, GPS Disconnection, Scanner Disconnection, Inadequacy of GPS Signal, and No Signal. Alarm Name Language Displays the name of the selected device alarm. Displays the voice type. The Probe supports English and Chinese.
Setup
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-35
Parameter Alarm Type Visual Alarm Audio Alarm Sound
Description Indicates whether to inform you of the alarm event by visual alarm. Indicates whether to inform you of the alarm event by audio alarm. Enables you to select the audio alarm. If you select the audio alarm, select Audio Alarm and selects a voice file. Then, the system automatically plays the voice file when an alarm of the device occurs. Displays the details about the selected alarm.
Description
Related Tasks
7.6 Configuring Device Alarms
12.17 Parameters for Setting IE Audio Indications

This describes the parameters about setting audio indications for IEs. You can set related parameters according to the following information when configuring audio indications for IEs. Parameter System Condition Setting IE Name Operator Value Audio Indication Setting Play Sound Description Enables you to select the network system. Enables you to select the IE name. Enables you to select the operator. Indicates the IE value, which must be within the value range of the IE. Indicates whether to play the IE audio indication during data test or replay. Indicates the audio indication file.
12.18 Parameter for Other System Settings

This describes the parameters related to other system settings. You can refer to this part when synchronizing the external device time, setting logfile storage properties, or setting event replay mode.
12-36
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameter Logfile Time Setting Synchronize PC Time with GPS Time Time zone
Description Indicates whether to synchronize the PC time with the GPS time. Enables you to select the time zone of the district where you are located. The range is GMT +12 to GMT -12. After you select Synchronize PC Timewith GPS Time, Time Zone becomes available, and you can set the time zone. Replays the events recorded in the logfile. Rejudges the occurred events according to the signaling messages in the logfile during the replaying process. Indicates how to slice the logfile. The options are as follows: l No limit: not to slice the logfile l By time: to slice the logfile by time (in minutes), working with File size limit l By file size: to slice the logfile by file size (in MB), working with File size limit File size limit Indicates the size of the sliced logfile. It is recommended that the value of this field be equal to or larger than 10 MB. Indicates the name of a logfile. It is recommended that its name illustrate the meaning of the logfile. Indicates the path where the logfile is stored. The default path is C:\GENEX Logfile. You can click File directory on the right of to change the path for storing the logfile. It is not recommended that the file be stored in the system disk.
Event Replay Mode
Normal Replay Rejudge Event
Logfile Setting
Limit type
File name
File directory
Operating System Setting
TCP window size
Indicates the TCP window size, which ranges from 1 to 65535 bytes. You are recommended to validate the settings by restarting the PC after the settings are complete.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-37
Parameter Route File Setting Autosave
Description Indicates whether to automatically save the GPS information (.tab file) when recording the logfile. You can select Yes or No. You can set this parameter when Autosave is Yes. The parameter specifies the automatic save period, and the value ranges from 1 to 300. The default value is 3, and the unit is second. Rout file directory Indicates the storage path of the .tab file containing GPS information. The name of the .tab file containing GPS information is the same as that of the logfile. The default path is C:\GENEX Logfile. You can click Rout file directory on the to change the path for storing right of the logfile. It is not recommended that the file be stored in the system disk.
Autosave period
12.19 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the List Views

This describes the parameters for configuring the properties of the list view. You can refer to the description when configuring the properties of the list view. Tab Mode Parameter Title Header Description Indicates the title of the table in the list view. It can be set based on the actual situation. Indicates the header of the table in the list view. Select Header to display the header and deselect Header to hide the header. The contents of the header can be set on the Cell Contents tab page. GridLines Columns Rows Indicates whether to display the grid lines. Indicates the number of columns of the table in the list view. Indicates the number of rows of the table in the list view.
12-38
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Tab
Parameter Font Device
Description Indicates the fonts of the texts in the table in the list view. Click Browse to set fonts. Indicates the device list. If you select a device from Device, the IEs that are currently displayed in the view window are collected by the device. The contents of each IE can be set on the Cell Contents tab page.
Cell Contents
Edit
Used to edit the information about a selected IE. Select an IE, and then click Edit. Modify the information about the IE in the displayed IE Information dialog box.
Description of the parameters in the IE Information dialog box Contents Device Indicates the device list. If you select a device from Device, the IEs that are currently displayed in the view window are collected by the device. System Information Text Indicates the network protocol of an IE. Indicates the IE list. Specifies the name or value of an IE. If you select Text, you need not set the parameters on the View and Color tab pages. View Value Specifies the value of an IE in the form of letters and numbers. You can adjust alignment modes such as Left, Center, and Right of the value. Displays the value of an IE through a bar. The options are as follows: l Constant Length: Draw a bar with constant length. Only a limited number of IEs can be displayed. l Max/Min Indicate: Use a vertical line to indicate an all-time-low or all-time-high value.
Bar
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-39
Tab Color
Parameter Use Default Color Ranges
Description Indicates the default color ranges of an IE. If Use Default Color Ranges is selected, it indicates that the default values are used. If Use Default Color Ranges is deselected, it indicates that the default values are not used. You can customize the color range according to your requirements.
Related Tasks
10.3.2 Configuring the List View 10.3.3 Configuring the Chart View
12.20 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the Line Chart View
This describes the parameters for configuring the properties of the line chart view. You can refer to these parameters when you configure the properties of the line chart view.
Parameter of the Set Chart Properties dialog box

Parameter Add Edit Description Enables you to add a view. Currently, you can add two views at most. Enables you to set the properties of the IE in the selected view. Click this button to open the Modify Chart Properties dialog box. Then you can set the properties of the IE in the dialog box. For details about parameters, see Parameter of the Modify Chart Properties dialog box. Enables you to delete the selected view.
Delete
Parameter of the Modify Chart Properties dialog box

Parameter System Description Network protocol of the IE. The IE matching System is displayed in the Available area. For details about the IE, see 14.3 Description of Information Elements. Model Displays the name of the configured terminal.
12-40
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameter Edit IE
Description Enables you to edit the IE selected in the Selected area. You can set the maximum value, minimum value, color, and style of the IE. Enables you to add all the IEs in the Available area to the Selected area. Enables you to add the IEs selected in the Available area to the Selected area. Enables you to remove the IEs selected in the Selected area to the Available area. Enables you to remove all the IEs in the Selected area to the Available area. Displays the added IEs.
Add all Add Remove Remove all Selected
Related Tasks
10.3.1 Configuring the Line Chart View
12.21 Parameters for Testing the Forcing Feature of the GSM

This describes the parameters for testing the forcing function of the GSM. You can refer to this part when setting the parameters for testing the forcing function of the GSM in the GSM Forcing Feature dialog box. Parameter Device Description Indicates the drop-down list of MSs. You can select only one MS from the drop-down list at a time. Indicates the ARFCN of the current serving cell. Indicates whether to use the forcing function of the GSM. Lock Serving ARFCN (Idle) Lock Specific ARFCN (Idle) Indicates that the ARFCN of the serving cell is locked in idle state. Indicates that the specified ARFCN is locked in idle state. After selecting Lock Specific ARFCN (Idle), you can enter an ARFCN in the Target ARFCN Setting area or select the ARFCN of the neighboring cell from this area. Indicates that the handover is forbidden in dedicated state.
Serving ARFCN Forcing Function Function Select
Forbid HO (Dedicated)
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-41
Parameter Forbid HO (Dedicated) CBA Invert Target ARFCN Setting Input ARFCN
Description Indicates that the handover is performed forcibly in dedicated state. Indicates that the CBA is inverted. This parameter is used to specify the destination ARFCN. After selecting Input ARFCN, enter an ARFCN in Target ARFCN. This parameter is used to select the ARFCN of the destination neighboring cell. After selecting Select Neighbor, select the ARFCN of the neighboring cell from the text box at the bottom. The selected ARFCNs of the neighboring cell are displayed in the Target ARFCN area. This area is used to enter the destination ARFCN. Indicates whether to use the band control function of the MS. Indicates the controlled band. After selecting Band Control, you can select the controlled band from Band Setting. Indicates the current forcing state of the MS.
Select Neighbor
Target ARFCN Band Control Band Setting
MS Current State
Related Tasks
11.2.4 Conducting the GSM Forcing Function Test
12.22 Parameters for WCDMA Forcing Feature Test

This describes the parameters related to the WCDMA forcing feature test. You can refer to this part when setting WCDMA forcing feature test parameters in the WCDMA Forcing Feature dialog box. Parameter Device Select Lock ARFCN Lock ARFCN&PSC Target ARFCN Input PSC Description Indicates the drop-down list of the test terminals. You can select only one terminal each time. Locks the frequency point in idle status. You can enter the frequency point in Target ARFCN. Specifies the target frequency point. Locks the scramble code in idle status. After choosing Lock ARFCN&PSC, you can enter or select the scramble code in PSC Setting.
12-42
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameter Select PSC
Description Specifies the target scramble code. After choosing Select PSC, you can select the scramble code in the text box below. Then, the selected scramble code is displayed in the Target PSC area. Displays the current forcing status of the UE. Click Inquire UE State. Then, the current forcing status of the UE is displayed.
UE Current State
Related Tasks
11.2.5 Conducting the WCDMA Forcing Function Test
12.23 Parameter Description: LTE Forcing Feature Test

This section describes the parameters related to the LTE forcing feature test. You can set parameters related to the LTE forcing feature test in the LTE Forcing Feature dialog box by referring to this section. Parameter Device Select Serving EARFCN Description Indicates the drop-down list of the UEs. You can select only one UE each time. Indicates the E-UTRA absolute radio frequency channel number (EARFCN) used by the serving cell. Indicates the physical cell identifier (PCI) of the serving cell. EARFCN PCI Upper Band Lower Band MCC MNC PUSCH Power Function Select Lock EARFCN Indicates the EARFCN used by the locked cell. Indicates the PCI of the locked cell. Indicates the upper threshold of the locked band. Indicates the lower threshold of the locked band. Indicates the mobile country code (MCC) for the locked public land mobile network (PLMN). Indicates the mobile network code (MNC) for the locked public land mobile network (PLMN). Indicates the transmit power of the locked physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH). Indicates the locked EARFCN of the serving cell.
Serving PCI Setting
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-43
Parameter Lock EARFCN and PCI Lock Band Lock PLMN
Description Indicates the specified EARFCN and PCI that are locked. Indicates the locked frequency band. Indicates the locked PLMN. According to the MCC and MNC, the UE camps on a specific PLMN after the network is locked. CBA Invert Lock PUSCH Power Indicates that the CBA turnover is performed on a cell or all cells. Indicates the transmit power of the locked PUSCH.
Related Tasks
11.2.6 Conducting the LTE Forcing Function Test
12.24 Parameters for Performing the C/A Measurement of the GSM

This describes the parameters for performing the C/A measurement of the GSM. You can refer to this part when setting parameters for performing the C/A measurement of the GSM in the GSM C/A Setting dialog box. Parameter Device Select Description Indicates the drop-down list of MSs. You can select only one MS from the drop-down list at a time. OFF 1 Channel (-1, +1) Indicates that the C/A measurement is disabled. Indicates two neighboring ARFCNs of the current serving cell. For example, if the ARFCN of the current serving cell is 80, the level difference between the current serving cell and the cells whose ARFCNs are 79 and 81 is respectively calculated in C/A measurement. Indicates four neighboring ARFCNs of the current serving cell. For example, if the ARFCN of the current serving cell is 80, the level difference between the current serving cell and the cells whose ARFCNs are 78, 79, 81, and 82 is respectively calculated in C/A measurement.
MS C/A State
2 Channel (+2, +1, -1, -2)
12-44
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameter Apply
Description Indicates that the parameters for performing the C/A measurement take effect, and then the MS performs the C/A measurement. l If the C/A measurement is successful, the system displays C/A Setting Command send successfully. l If the C/A measurement is failed, the system displays C/A Setting Command send unsuccessfully. In such a case, you need to set the parameters again to perform the C/A measurement. l If no response is received in two seconds, the system displays C/A Setting Command send Timeout. In such a case, you need to set the parameters or click Apply again to perform the C/A measurement.
Search MS State
Indicates the latest C/A state of the MS, which is displayed in the MS C/A State area. l If OFF is performed successfully, the system displays Phones C/A measurements NOT be set. l If 1 Channel (-1, +1) is performed successfully, the system displays Phones C/A measurements be set to measure 1 channel (1). l If 2 Channel (+2, +1, -1, -2) is performed successfully, the system displays Phones C/A measurements be set to measure 2 channels (1, 2).
MS C/A State
Indicates the C/A measurement state of the current MS.
Related Tasks
11.2.2 Conducting GSM C/A Measurements
12.25 Parameters for Exporting the Data

This describes the parameters for exporting data. You can refer to this part when converting a .gen file to the file in other formats or converting a .phu file to a .gen file.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-45
Parameters for Converting a Logfile to a Binary File (Clear Multi-f)

Parameter Log Wizard - Step Two dialog box Source Enables you to select the source file. You can click the icon next to Source to select the logfile to be exported. Destination Enables you to set the file name and the save path. You can click the icon next to Destination to set the save path and file name of the exported test data. File Information area Total Start End Packet Selection area Index Indicates the number of data package contained in the selected logfile. Indicates the start time of recording the data of the selected logfile. Indicates the end time of recording the data of the selected logfile. Enables you to set the range of the data package contained in the exported test data. Index indicates that the location of the data package is used as the range of the data package. Enables you to set the range of the data package contained in the exported test data. Time indicates that the record time of the data package is used as the range of the data package. Enables you to set the start value of the exported test data. If the data is exported by Index, you need to enter the location of the start data package. If the data is exported by Time, you need to enter the start time. Enables you to set the end value of the exported test data. If the data is exported by Index, you need to enter the location of the end data package. If the data is exported by Time, you need to enter the end time. Description
Time
Start
End
Log Wizard - Step Three dialog box Log Selection area Device Log Indicates the list of the device contained in the logfile. Enables you to select the test data to be exported.
12-46
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameter Explore the Exporting Destination
Description Enables you to set whether to automatically open the exported file. If you select Explore the Exporting Destination, the folder of the exported file is automatically opened after exporting data is complete.
Parameters for Converting a Logfile to a Binary File (Select Multi-f)

Parameter Log Wizard - Step Two dialog box Source Add Delete Destination area Open Selected Source File Information area File Total Indicates the list of the selected logfile. Enables you to select the source file. You can click Add to select the logfile to be exported. Enables you to delete the selected logfile in the Source area. Displays the save path and file name of the exported test data. Enables you to set the save path and file name of the exported test data. Indicates the size of the selected logfile in the Source area. The unit is MB. Indicates the number of data packages contained in the selected logfile in the Source area. Displays the time at which the system completes recording the data in the logfile selected in the Source area. Displays the time at which the system completes recording the data in the logfile selected in the Source area. Description
Start
End
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-47
Parameters for Converting a Logfile to a CSV File

Parameter Log Wizard - Step Two dialog box Time Formation Enables you to select the time formation for the first column of the exported CSV file. The options are as follows: l GMT: Indicates the GMT time when the data package is parsed. The format is YYYYMMDDHHMMSS l TickCount: Indicates the Tick value of the CPU when the data package is parsed. The unit is ms. Source Enables you to select the source file. You can click the icon next to Source to select the logfile to be exported. Destination Enables you to set the file name and the save path. You can click the icon next to Destination to set the save path and file name of the exported test data. File Information area Total Start End Packet Selection area Index Indicates the number of data package contained in the selected logfile. Indicates the start time of recording the data of the selected logfile. Indicates the end time of recording the data of the selected logfile. Enables you to set the range of the data package contained in the exported test data. Index indicates that the location of the data package is used as the range of the data package. Description
12-48
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameter Time
Description Enables you to set the range of the data package contained in the exported test data. Time indicates that the record time of the data package is used as the range of the data package. Enables you to set the start value of the exported test data. If the data is exported by Index, you need to enter the location of the start data package. If the data is exported by Time, you need to enter the start time. Enables you to set the end value of the exported test data. If the data is exported by Index, you need to enter the location of the end data package. If the data is exported by Time, you need to enter the end time.
Start
End
Log Wizard - Step Three dialog box Log Selection area Device Log Explore the Exporting Destination Indicates the list of the device contained in the logfile. Enables you to select the test data to be exported. Enables you to set whether to automatically open the exported file. If you select Explore the Exporting Destination, the folder of the exported file is automatically opened after exporting data is complete.
Log Wizard - Step Four dialog box Time Formation Separate Character Comma Tab Semicolon Customize Set Text Output Character to head Output unit Enables you to select the time formation. You can select GMT and TickCount. Enables you to separate exported CSV files by using commas. Enables you to separate exported CSV files by using tabs. Enables you to separate exported CSV files by using semicolons. Enables you to customize the separator (you can enter the character.) The exported CSV files contains the column. The exported CSV files contains the unit.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-49
Parameters for Converting a Logfile to an MDM File

Parameter Log Wizard - Step Two dialog box Source Enables you to select the source file. You can click the icon next to Source to select the logfile to be exported. Destination Enables you to set the file name and the save path. You can click the icon next to Destination to set the save path and file name of the exported test data. File Information area Total Start End Packet Selection area Index Indicates the number of data package contained in the selected logfile. Indicates the start time of recording the data of the selected logfile. Indicates the end time of recording the data of the selected logfile. Enables you to set the range of the data package contained in the exported test data. Index indicates that the location of the data package is used as the range of the data package. Enables you to set the range of the data package contained in the exported test data. Time indicates that the record time of the data package is used as the range of the data package. Enables you to set the start value of the exported test data. If the data is exported by Index, you need to enter the location of the start data package. If the data is exported by Time, you need to enter the start time. Enables you to set the end value of the exported test data. If the data is exported by Index, you need to enter the location of the end data package. If the data is exported by Time, you need to enter the end time. Description
Time
Start
End
12-50
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Parameters for Converting a PHU File to a Logfile

Parameter Log Wizard - Step Two dialog box PHU File Enables you to select the source file. Click following PHU File to select the PHU file to be exported. Destination File Enables you to set the save path and file name. Click following Destination File to set the save path and file name of the exported test data. File Information area IMSI Start Time Explore the Exporting Destination Displays the mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) of the PHU. Displays the time when the PHU data is recorded. Enables you to set whether to automatically open the exported file. If you select Explore the Exporting Destination, the folder of the exported file is automatically open after the data exporting is complete. Description
Related Tasks
12.26 Parameters for Configuring the Data Export Format of the Scanner
This describes the parameters for configuring the export format of the CW data of the PCTel DTI scanner. You can refer to this part when exporting the CW data of the PCTel DTI scanner.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
12-51
Parameter Columns Data Type
Description Indicates the test data type. Currently, only CW data is supported. The parameter is valid when CW Channel or CW RSSI is selected in the Log area of the Log Wizard - Step Three dialog box. Column Header Reset Display Date & Time with two columns Indicates the header of a column in the file. Indicates the reset button. It is used to reset the header modified in Column Header to the default header. Indicates whether the data and the time are displayed in the same column. Indicates the format of GPS information. You can select the following values: l Decimal fraction: Display GPS information in the format of angle. l Degree: Display GPS information in the format of degree, minute, and second. Date & Time Display with quotation marks Frequency Indicates the format of the date and time. Indicates that the date and time are enclosed with quotation marks. Indicates the unit of frequency. Indicates the size of an exported file. You can select the following values: l Records: indicates that the size of the exported file is determined by the number of data packets specified in Count. l Sizes: indicates that the size of the exported file is the size specified in Count. GPS information is necessary Indicates whether the exported file includes GPS information. If the parameter is selected, the exported file includes GPS information. If the parameter is not selected, the exported file does not include GPS information. Indicates to filter CW data by distance. Indicates the threshold of the RSSI. The threshold ranges from Lower Limit to Upper Limit, in dBm.
Format
GPS
File Size
FileSize Limited
CW Data
Binning by distance Threshold Lower Limit Threshold Upper Limit
Related Tasks
13 FAQs
13
About This Chapter
FAQs
This describes the problems that may occur during the use of the software and the corresponding causes. This also describes how to solve these problems. This also describes the using skills. 13.1 Problems Related to Software Start This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem related to software start. 13.2 Problems Related to Device Connections This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem that the external device fails to be connected. 13.3 Problems Related to Views This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem related to the views. 13.4 Problems Related to Tests This describes the problems that result in test failures due to the malfunction of the Probe, and provides the possible causes and solutions.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
13-1
13 FAQs
13.1 Problems Related to Software Start

This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem related to software start. 13.1.1 What Should I Do When the Verification of the Dongle Fails? 13.1.2 What Should I Do When the License Check Fails? 13.1.3 How to Install the East Asian Language Package? 13.1.4 How to Uninstall the Main Program 13.1.5 How to Uninstall the GENEX Shared Components
13.1.1 What Should I Do When the Verification of the Dongle Fails?

Symptom
The Probe cannot be started normally and the system displays Lock Error:Verify Lock Failed.
Possible Causes
The possible causes of the fault that the Probe fails to verify the dongle are as follows: l l l l l The dongle is plugged in improperly. The system time is changed before the Probe is started. The dongle expires. The GENEX Shared is abnormal. Other dongles exist.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the dongle is plugged in. Step 2 Check whether the connection between the dongle and the USB port is normal. Step 3 Check whether the dongle drive is installed correctly. It is recommended that you reinstall the dongle drive. Step 4 Check whether the system time is changed. Do not change the system time before starting the Probe. The dongle controls the authority through the system time. The system time must be the current time or later than the current time. Step 5 Check whether the dongle expires. The license of the dongle that expires cannot be used. You need to apply for a new license. Step 6 Check whether the GENEX Shared components are installed properly. It is recommended that you reinstall the GENEX Shared components.
13 FAQs
Step 7 Check whether another dongle exists and whether a dongle conflicts with the dongle of the Probe. It is recommended that you uninstall the Sentinal Drive and reinstall the GENEX Shared. ----End
13.1.2 What Should I Do When the License Check Fails?

Symptom
When the license edition of the Probe is used, the message Error: ESN is not correct! is displayed and the Probe cannot be started properly.
Possible Causes
The ESN changes and cannot match the license.
Procedure
l l Use the dongle edition of the Probe. Apply for multiple licenses based on the number of network adapters on the PC. The Probe cannot identify the ESN of the hard disk on the PC because of PC configuration. In this case, the Probe selectively identifies the ESN of the network adapter on the PC. If multiple network adapters exist on the PC, the network adapter ESN changes after the operating system is started. Therefore, you are advised to apply for licenses based on the number of network adapters on the PC. When the message Error: ESN is not correct! is displayed, load the corresponding license file to the system again. ----End
13.1.3 How to Install the East Asian Language Package?

Question
The system displays Selected collating sequence not supported by the operating system when the Probe is started in the operating system of non-Chinese version.
Answer
1. 2. 3. Choose Start > Control Panel > Regional and Language Options. In the Regional and Language Options dialog box, click the Languages tab page. Select Install files for East Asian languages and install the files for East Asian languages as the system prompts you.
13.1.4 How to Uninstall the Main Program

Question
How to uninstall the main program?
Answer
13 FAQs
After the Probe main program is uninstalled, the PSTN SQE Server and system templates are deleted but the operation logs and recorded logfiles are left.
Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 > Uninstall Probe. The uninstalling interface is displayed. Step 2 Choose Remove. Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click Yes. Step 5 After the installation is complete, click Finish. ----End
13.1.5 How to Uninstall the GENEX Shared Components

Question
How to uninstall the GENEX shared components?
Answer
The GENEX shared components remain after the Probe main program is uninstalled. You can determine whether to uninstall the GENEX shared components according to the actual situation. Step 1 Choose Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs. Step 2 In the displayed Add or Remove Programs window, click Change or Remove Programs. Step 3 Choose Shared. Step 4 Click Delete. Step 5 In the uninstall interface displayed, choose Remove. Step 6 Click Next. Step 7 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click OK. Step 8 After the installation is complete, click Finish. ----End
13.2 Problems Related to Device Connections

This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem that the external device fails to be connected. 13.2.1 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the MS Fails? 13.2.2 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the Scanner Fails? 13.2.3 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the GPS Fails?
13 FAQs
13.2.4 What Should I Do When the Mouse Becomes Invalid After the GPS Is Connected to the PC? 13.2.5 What Should I Do When the PCTel DTI Scanner Fails to Receive the GPS Signals? 13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE?
13.2.1 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the MS Fails?
Symptom
After the MS is connected to the PC, the Probe fails to search for the MS and fails to check the connection status of the MS. The system displays The MS cannot be connected!.
Possible Causes
l l The MS is not connected correctly. The MS parameters are not set correctly.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the connection between the MS and the USB port or COM port is normal. Step 2 Check whether the USB drive is installed properly. 1. 2. 3. 4. Right-click My Computer.. Choose Manage from the shortcut menu to open the Computer Management dialog box. Click the Device Manager node. Check whether the corresponding MS port exists under the Ports (COM & LPT) navigation tree, and check whether the MS port is normal. If the port works abnormally, reinstall the drive.
Step 3 Check whether the port is correct. 1. 2. 3. icon on the Configuration tab page in the On the Probe main interface, click the navigation area to open the Device Configure dialog box. In the device list of the Device Configure dialog box, double-click the MS. Check whether the settings in the Device Configure dialog box are consistent with the settings of the MS. If the settings are inconsistent, set the settings again.
----End
13.2.2 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the Scanner Fails?
Symptom
After the scanner is connected to the PC, the Probe fails to search for the scanner and fails to check the connection status of the scanner.
13 FAQs
Possible Causes
l l l The scanner is not connected correctly. On the Probe, the scanner parameters are not set correctly. Settings of the scanner parameters are inconsistent with the parameters on the Probe.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the connection between the scanner and the parallel port or USB port is normal. Step 2 In the Device Configure window on the Probe, check whether the settings of the port ID, baud rate, and GPS model are correct. Step 3 Check whether the scanner protocol is set to Direct and whether the setting of the baud rate of the scanner is consistent with the setting of the baud rate on the Probe. Default settings, such as 8 data bit, 1 stop bit, and no parity check, are used for the other elements. ----End
13.2.3 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the GPS Fails?
Symptom
After the GPS is connected to the PC, the Probe fails to search for the GPS and fails to check the connection status of the GPS.
Possible Causes
l l l The GPS is not connected correctly. On the Probe, the GPS parameters are not set correctly. The Probe does not support the interface protocol of the GPS.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the connection between the GPS and the parallel port or USB port is normal. Step 2 In the Device Configure window on the Probe, check whether the settings of the port ID, baud rate, and GPS model are correct. Step 3 Check whether the interface protocol of the GPS is set correctly. Currently, the Probe supports the GPS based on the NEMA0183. ----End
13.2.4 What Should I Do When the Mouse Becomes Invalid After the GPS Is Connected to the PC?
Symptom
The mouse of the PC cannot be used normally after the GPS is connected. The pointer moves randomly in a large scale on the screen.
13 FAQs
Possible Causes
The system mistakes the GPS as the PS/2 mouse.
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click My Computer and choose Properties to open the System Properties dialog box. Step 2 On the Hardware tab page, click Device Manager. Step 3 In the Device Manager window, expand the Mice and Other Pointing Devices node. Step 4 Right-click Microsoft PS/2 Mouse and choose Properties to open the Microsoft PS/2 Mouse Properties dialog box. Step 5 On the Driver tab page of the Microsoft PS/2 Mouse Properties dialog box, click Uninstall. Step 6 In the displayed Confirm Device Removal dialog box, click OK. ----End
13.2.5 What Should I Do When the PCTel DTI Scanner Fails to Receive the GPS Signals?
Symptom
The GPS module of the PCTel DTI equipment does not report data.
Possible Causes
l l l The GPS module does not receive sufficient satellite signals. The GPS module of the PCTel DTI equipment does not function. The GPS module of the PCTel DTI equipment is damaged.
Procedure
Step 1 Find out whether the GPS signals are blocked. Step 2 Connect the testing PC with external handset GPS device. The recommended model is GARMIN 60. Step 3 Send the PCTel DTI equipment to the specified servicing station to repair. ----End
13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE?

Question
Before performing service tests in the LTE network, the Probe must be configured with LTE UEs. How can I configure an LTE UE?
13 FAQs
Answer
Step 1 Connect an LTE UE to a PC. Two Ethernet ports and one serial port on the PC are used to connect to the debug Ethernet port (ETH) and service Ethernet port (FE/GE) on the UE. l A Y-shaped cable is connected to the debug Ethernet port on the UE. The connector (Debug) of the Y-shaped cable is connected to the serial port on the PC through a serial cable. The connector (Ethernet) of the Y-shaped cable is connected to one Ethernet port on the PC through an Ethernet cable. For details, see Figure 13-1. l The service Ethernet port on the UE is connected to the other Ethernet port on the PC through an Ethernet cable. Figure 13-1 Y-shaped cable
The connector numbered 1 is used to connect to the LTE UE. The connector numbered 2 is used to connect to the Ethernet port on the PC. The connector numbered 3 is used to connect to the serial port on the PC.
Step 2 Query the IP address of the host through the HyperTerminal provided by the Windows operating system. For details, see Figure 13-2.
NOTE
When configuring an LTE UE on the Probe, you must ensure that the typed value of UE IP is the same as the queried IP address of the host.
13-8
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
13 FAQs
Figure 13-2 Querying the IP address of the host
e indicates the IP address of the target board, that is, the IP address of the debug Ethernet port of the UE board. h indicates the IP address of the host, that is, the IP address of the PC that is used to control and communicate with the UE board. The IP address of the host must be on the same network segment as the IP address of the debug Ethernet port on the target board.
Step 3 Start the OMT tool. 1. 2. Type the IP address of the host queried in Step 2 in IP. Click OK. The OMT tool is started.
Step 4 Configure parameters that are used for tests on the OMT. Parameter IMSI Description Indicates the international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) of a UE. Indicates the ID of a public land mobile network (PLMN) where a UE camps on. It is composed of mobile network code (MNC) and mobile country code (MCC). Source The core network (CN) allocates the IMSI to a UE.
PLMN ID
This parameter is determined by the operator network where a UE accesses.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
13-9
13 FAQs
Parameter Freq
Description Indicates the EUTRA absolute radio frequency channel number (EARFCN) of a UE. Indicates the bandwidth supported by a UE. Indicates whether the FDD or TDD mode is adopted.
Source This parameter setting must be consistent with that of the eNodeB.
Bandwidth
This parameter setting must be consistent with that of the eNodeB. This parameter setting must be consistent with that of the eNodeB.
FDD/TDD Mode
Step 5 Run the following command to set the IP address of the service Ethernet port on the PC in command mode: You must set the IP address of the PC network interface card (NIC) that is connected to the service Ethernet port of a UE to the service IP address of the UE on the core network side. arp -s IP address of the PC NIC MAC address of the UE Service IP address of the UE on the core network side
NOTE
l IP address of the PC NIC: indicates the IP address of the PC NIC that is connected to the service Ethernet port of the UE. l Service IP address of the UE: indicates the service IP address of the UE. You can obtain it from the core network. Run the following command to check the configuration result: arp -a
Step 6 Run the following command to set the route in command mode: route add IP address of the PC NIC mask Subnet mask Service IP address of the UE -p
NOTE
l IP address of the PC NIC: indicates the IP address of the PC NIC that is connected to the service Ethernet port of the UE. l Service IP address of the UE: indicates the service IP address of the UE. You can obtain it from the core network. l p: indicates the permanent route. Run the following command to check the configuration result: route print
----End
13.3 Problems Related to Views

This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem related to the views.
13-10
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
13 FAQs
13.3.1 What Should I Do When Opening the Map View Fails? 13.3.2 What Should I Do When Opening the Chart View Fails? 13.3.3 What Should I Do When Importing Engineering Parameters Fails? 13.3.4 What Should I Do If No Data Is Displayed in the WCDMA View Windows?
13.3.1 What Should I Do When Opening the Map View Fails?

Symptom
The Probe fails to open the map windows, including the indoor test map window and outdoor test map window. The system displays Please install the MapX plug-in.
Possible Causes
The GENEX Shared component package is not installed, or it is damaged.
Procedure
Step 1 Reinstall the GENEX Shared component package. ----End
13.3.2 What Should I Do When Opening the Chart View Fails?

Symptom
The Probe fails to open the chart window. The system displays Failed to Create TeeChart Control! Be sure to have installed it.
Possible Causes
The GENEX Shared component package is not installed, or it is damaged.
Procedure
Step 1 Reinstall the GENEX Shared component package. ----End
13.3.3 What Should I Do When Importing Engineering Parameters Fails?

Symptom
Exceptions occur when the Probe imports engineering parameters.
13 FAQs
Possible Causes
l l l The network protocol that is selected during the import of engineering parameters is different from the actual network protocol of the engineering parameters. Any of the values of the mandatory fields in the engineering parameter table does not meet the requirements for the Probe. The Microsoft Office 2003 or higher is not installed in the PC.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the network protocol selected during the import of engineering parameters is the same as the actual network protocol. For details about how to import engineering parameters, see 6.2 Importing Engineering Parameters. To rectify this fault, do as follows: Step 2 Check whether the values of the mandatory fields in the engineering parameter table meet the requirements for the Probe. For details about engineering parameters, see 6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems. Step 3 If the system prompts Open Excel Failed! Please check the Excel Version!, install the Microsoft Office 2003 or higher. ----End
13.3.4 What Should I Do If No Data Is Displayed in the WCDMA View Windows?

Symptom
When the Probe performs WCDMA tests, no data is displayed in the following view windows: AMR Codecs, Vocoder Usage, Cell Search, DRX Mode, and RACH and PRACH.
Possible Causes
When configuring terminals on the Probe, you do not select data packets related to the WCDMA test in the Filter dialog box. As a result, no data is displayed in the related view windows.
Procedure
l When configuring terminals, select data packets related to the WCDMA test in the Filter dialog box. For details, see 7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected. Table 13-1 shows data packets that need to be selected.
13-12
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
13 FAQs
Table 13-1 Data packets need to be selected View Window Name AMR Codecs Data Packet l Ox7143 l 0x7144 Vocoder Usage l 0x5079 l Ox7143 l 0x7144 Cell Search l Ox414C l Ox4018 l Ox414D l Ox4019 l Ox414E l Ox401A DRX Mode RACH and PRACH Ox4004 l Ox4106 l Ox4160 l Ox410D
----End
13.4 Problems Related to Tests

This describes the problems that result in test failures due to the malfunction of the Probe, and provides the possible causes and solutions. 13.4.1 What Should I Do When FTP Service Tests Fail? 13.4.2 What Should I Do When Invalid MOS Values Are Generated? 13.4.3 What Should I Do When UE Fails to Access the Network During the LTE Forcing Feature Test? 13.4.4 How to Convert Frequencies into UARFCNs (WCDMA)? 13.4.5 What Should I Do When the Automatic Answer Setting of Huawei U1251 Is Invalid?
13.4.1 What Should I Do When FTP Service Tests Fail?

Symptom
l l Symptom I: Activating PDP contexts failed and the FTP service test cannot be performed normally. Symptom II: Activating PDP contexts succeeded; however, the FTP service test still cannot be performed normally.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
13 FAQs
Symptom III: The FTP upload or FTP download is disrupted.
Possible Causes
Table 13-2 lists the fault causes. Table 13-2 Fault cause Fault Symptom Symptom I Possible Cause l The modem port is not configured or the configuration is incorrect. l The APN is not set. l The configuration of the dial-up encryption protocol is incorrect. l The FTP server does not work. Symptom II Symptom III The properties of the FTP upload or FTP download test item are set incorrectly. l The network is blocked. l The FTP server is overloaded.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the modem port is configured. 1. 2. On the Probe main interface, click . The Device Configure dialog box is displayed. Check the value in the ModemPort column. If the value in the ModemPort column of the corresponding device is Not Configure, you can infer that the modem port is not configured. Then, you need to configure the modem port of the device. For details, see 7.3 Configuring External Devices. Step 2 Check whether the configuration of the modem port is correct. 1. 2. . The Device Configure dialog box is displayed. On the Probe main interface, click View the port number in the ModemPort column. In the Device Manager window, right-click the corresponding device under the Modem node, select Properties, and then view the actual port number of the device on the Modem tab page. If the set port number is different from the actual port number, you need to configure the modem port again. For details, see 7.3 Configuring External Devices. Step 3 Check whether the setting of the APN is correct. For details, see 8.5.1 Setting the APN (GSM/WCDMA). Step 4 Check whether the setting of the dial-up encryption protocol is correct. Check and ensure that the setting of Security Protocol of the Dial Up test item is correct. For the description of the Dial Up test item, see 14.1 Description of Test Items. Step 5 Check whether the properties of the FTP Upload or FTP Download test item are set correctly.
13 FAQs
For the description of the FTP Upload and FTP Download test items, see 14.1 Description of Test Items. ----End
13.4.2 What Should I Do When Invalid MOS Values Are Generated?

Symptom
l l Symptom I: The SQE (MS-PSTN) test fails to be performed. Symptom II: The SpeechView of the PSTN SQE Server contains invalid MOS values, that is, certain MOS values are smaller than 2.5.
Possible Causes
Table 13-3 lists the fault causes. Table 13-3 Fault cause Fault Symptom Symptom I Possible Cause l The version number of the Probe is incorrect. l The used test terminal is not Huawei U120e PHU, Huawei U1205 PHU or Huawei U6100 PHU. l The version number of the PHU is incorrect. l The RBT service of the PHU is not disabled. Symptom II The invalid MOS value may be caused by network problems if the following reasons are excluded. l The speech samples used by the Probe and PSTN SQE Server are different. l Other operations are performed on the keypad of the test MS. l An extension may be connected to the PSTN telephone cable that is connected to the PSTN SQE Server. l The configuration of the PC installed with the PSTN SQE Server does not meet the requirement.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the version number of the Probe. Use the Probe V200R002C01SPC010 or a later version. On the main interface of the Probe, choose Help > About PROBE to view the version number of the Probe. Step 2 Check the version number of the PHU. Use the PHU V100R002C01B010SPC110 or a later version.
13 FAQs
For details on how to view the version number of the PHU, see the help of the PHU. Step 3 Check whether the speech samples used by the Probe and PSTN SQE Server are the same. 1. 2. On the main interface of the Probe, click . The Test Plan Control window is displayed. View the value of the Sample Type property of the SQE (MS-PSTN) test item. On the main interface of the PSTN SQE Server, click . The Test Plan Editor window is displayed. View the values of the Sample Time and Language Of Sample properties of the SQE test item. If the time of playing the speech sample and the language type of the speech sample are different, reconfigure the two properties of the SQE (MS-PSTN) and SQE test items. ----End
13.4.3 What Should I Do When UE Fails to Access the Network During the LTE Forcing Feature Test?
Symptom
During the LTE forcing feature test, the UE fails to access the network if the locked ARFCN or PCI does not exist. The problem persists when users click Reset in the LTE Forcing Feature dialog box. What should I do?
Possible Causes
When the UE fails to access the network, click Reset in the LTE Forcing Feature dialog box. After that, the UE does not respond.
Procedure
l Start the UE by using the OMT so that the UE can access the network successfully. ----End
13.4.4 How to Convert Frequencies into UARFCNs (WCDMA)?

Question
In the WCDMA, how to convert frequencies into UARFCNs?
Answer
l Convert frequencies into UARFCNs. Uplink Uplink UARFCN = 5 (FUL - FUL_Offset). FUL indicates the uplink carrier frequency, and the range is from FUL_low to FUL_high. FUL_Offset indicates the UARFCN formula offset. Downlink
13 FAQs
Downlink UARFCN = 5 (FDL - FDL_Offset). FDL indicates the downlink carrier frequency, and the range is from FDL_low to FDL_high. FDL_Offset indicates the UARFCN formula offset. For parameters in the formula are defined in Figure 13-3 and Figure 13-4. Figure 13-3 UARFCN definition (general)
Figure 13-4 UARFCN definition (additional channels)
----End
13.4.5 What Should I Do When the Automatic Answer Setting of Huawei U1251 Is Invalid?
Question
How do I solve the problem that the automatic answer setting of Huawei U1251 is invalid?
13 FAQs
Answer
l Check whether Huawei U1251 is connected to earphones. The automatic answer function can be enabled only after you connect Huawei U1251 to earphones. Otherwise, the automatic answer setting is invalid. ----End
13-18
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
14
About This Chapter
Appendix
This describes the test items, information elements (IEs), predefined events, and keyboard shortcuts supported by the Probe. You can refer to these parameters when you collect or view data through the Probe. 14.1 Description of Test Items This describes the test items of the MS, Scanner, and PSTN SQE Server and describes properties of all test items. You can refer to this part and perform the related operations when designing a test plan. 14.2 Description of Predefined Events This describes the system predefined events of the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX and LTE networks. You can refer to this part when configuring event parameters on each network. 14.3 Description of Information Elements This describes the MS and Scanner information elements supported by the Probe. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the view window. 14.4 Keyboard Shortcuts This describes certain keyboard shortcuts of the Probe. 14.5 PSTN SQE Server This provides the guidelines for using the PSTN SQE Server and methods for speech quality evaluation. The PSTN SQE Server is an important component of the speech evaluation solution of Huawei GENEX series. The PSTN SQE Server is deployed on the PSTN as the application management program and is used to test the speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink of the GSM and WCDMA networks.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-1
14 Appendix
14.1 Description of Test Items

This describes the test items of the MS, Scanner, and PSTN SQE Server and describes properties of all test items. You can refer to this part and perform the related operations when designing a test plan. 14.1.1 Test Items Supported in Different Networks This describes the test items supported various systems. You can refer to this part when designing the test plan, and then complete related settings. 14.1.2 Test Items of MSs This describes the MS test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when designing a test plan for the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX, or LTE MS, and then perform the related operations. 14.1.3 Test Items of PCTel Scanners This describes the PCTel scanner test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when designing a test plan for the PCTel scanner, and then perform the related operations. 14.1.4 Test Items of Anritsu Scanners This describes the Anritsu scanner test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when designing a test plan for the Anritsu scanner, and then perform the related operations. 14.1.5 Test Items of Rohde & Schwarz Scanners This describes the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX scanner test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when designing a test plan for the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX scanner, and then perform the related operations.
Related Tasks
14.1.1 Test Items Supported in Different Networks

This describes the test items supported various systems. You can refer to this part when designing the test plan, and then complete related settings.
Test Items Supported by the GSM/WCDMA

This describes the test items supported by the GSM and WCDMA. Test Item AMR E2E Delay (MS-MS) Description Indicates the test of the delay in sending AMR packets from the calling terminal to the called terminal, which can be used to detect the end-toend delay in a voice call. Indicates the access terminal (AT) command test. Indicates the dial-up test. Indicates the email sending test.
AT Control Dial Up/Hang Up Email

14-2
14 Appendix
Test Item FTP Download
Description Indicates the FTP download test. It enables you to detect the network performance when downloading files. Indicates the FTP upload test. It enables you to detect the network performance when uploading files. Indicates the HTTP test. It enables you to detect the network performance when accessing the specified web page. Indicates the key emulation test. Indicates the loop implementation of multiple test items. Indicates the attach or detach test of PS services. Indicates the multimedia message service (MMS) test. It enables you to detect the network performance when sending multimedia files. Indicates the test of simultaneous FTP upload and download of a terminal. Indicates the test of CS and PS concurrence. Indicates the test of activating or deactivating the packet data protocol (PDP). Indicates the network connectivity test. Indicates the short message service (SMS) test. Indicates the bidirectional speech quality evaluation test between MSs. Indicates the uplink and downlink speech quality evaluation test between the MS and the PSTN SQE Server. Indicates the unidirectional speech quality evaluation test between MSs. Indicates the video phone test. It is supported by the WCDMA only.
FTP Upload
HTTP
KeyEmul Loop PS Attach/PS Detach MMS
Multi-FTP Multi-RAB PDP Ping SMS Async SQE(MS-MS) SQE(MS-PSTN)
Sync SQE(MS-MS) Video Phone
Video Streaming
Indicates the video streaming test. It is supported by the WCDMA only.
Voice Call
Indicates the voice call test.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-3
14 Appendix
Test Item Wait
Description Indicates the wait duration, that is, the time from the previous test item execution to the beginning of the next test item execution. Indicates the wireless application protocol (WAP) download test. Indicates the WAP gateway connection test. Indicates the WAP login test. Indicates the WAP page refreshing test.
WAP Download WAP Gateway Connection WAP Logon WAP Page Refresh
Test Items Supported in the CDMA Network

This describes the test items supported by the CDMA. Test Item Dial Up/Hang Up FTP Download Description Indicates the dial-up test. Indicates the FTP download test. It enables you to detect the network performance when downloading files. Indicates the FTP upload test. It enables you to detect the network performance when uploading files. Indicates the HTTP test. It enables you to detect the network performance when accessing the specified web page. Indicates the loop implementation of multiple test items. Indicates the multimedia message service (MMS) test. It enables you to detect the network performance when sending multimedia files. Indicates the network connectivity test. Indicates the short message service (SMS) test. Indicates the voice call test. Indicates the wait duration, that is, the time from the previous test item execution to the beginning of the next test item execution.
FTP Upload HTTP
Loop MMS
Ping SMS Voice Call Wait
Test Items Supported in the WiMAX Network System

This describes the test items supported in the WiMAX network system.
14 Appendix
Test Item FTP Download
Description Indicates the FTP download test. It enables you to detect the network performance when downloading files. Indicates the FTP upload test. It enables you to detect the network performance when uploading files. Indicates the HTTP test. It enables you to detect the network performance when accessing the specified web page. Indicates the network entry test of the MS. Indicates the Beceem frequency scanning test. Indicates the network connectivity test. Indicates the wait duration, that is, the time from the previous test item execution to the beginning of the next test item execution.
FTP Upload HTTP
NetEntry NetSearch Ping Wait
Test Items Supported by the LTE

This describes the test items supported by the LTE. Test Item FTP Download Description Indicates the FTP download test. It enables you to detect the network performance when downloading files. Indicates the FTP upload test. It enables you to detect the network performance when uploading files. Indicates the HTTP test. It enables you to detect the network performance when accessing the specified web page. Indicates the network performance test of the transfer control protocol (TCP) and the user datagram protocol (UDP). Indicates the loop implementation of multiple test items. Indicates the attach/detach test of data services. Indicates the cell scanning test on the RRC layer. Indicates the RRC spectrum scanning test. Indicates the network connectivity test.
FTP Upload HTTP
Iperf
Loop LTE Attach/LTE Detach LTE Cell Searching LTE Scanning Ping
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-5
14 Appendix
14.1.2 Test Items of MSs

This describes the MS test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when designing a test plan for the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX, or LTE MS, and then perform the related operations.
AMR E2E Delay (GSM/WCDMA)

This section describes the properties of the AMR E2E Delay (MS-MS) test item. You can set the AMR end-to-end delay test by referring to the following descriptions. The AMR E2E Delay (MS-MS) test item is used to detect the end-to-end delay in a voice call.
CAUTION
When the AMR end-to-end delay test is performed, the calling and called terminals must be connected to the same Probe. In addition, when configuring the terminals, you must select the data packets related to the AMR in LogCode in the Filter dialog box. l For the calling terminal, Ox7143 need to be selected. l For the called terminal, 0x7144 need to be selected. For details, see 7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected. Property Destination MS Destination Number Test Count Test Interval Value/Range/Unit Unit: s Description Indicates the destination MS. The MS is another terminal that is connected to the Probe. Indicates the called number. Indicates the number of tests. Indicates the interval between two tests. Indicates the maximum time for call setup. Setup Timeout Unit: s If the call cannot be set up within the period specified by this parameter, the call setup fails. Indicates the call exceptional interval, that is, the time from the previous call drop to the beginning of the next call. Indicates the voice file that is played after a call is set up.
Exceptional Interval
Unit: s
Speech Sample File
14-6
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Command Type
Value/Range/Unit The values are as follows: l Qualcomm Command: This command type is applicable to Qualcomm chipset-based terminals. If terminals fail to initiate calls through Qualcomm commands, you can configure a modem port and set Command Type to AT Command. l AT Command: After you set Command Type to AT Command, AT commands can be issued. Before setting Command Type to AT Command, you need to check that a modem port has been configured. The default value is Qualcomm Command.
Description Indicates the terminal command type. Select the command type according to the terminal type. Otherwise, call setup initiated by terminals may fail.
Async SQE(MS-MS) (GSM/WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the Async SQE(MS-MS) test item. You can refer to this part when performing a speech quality evaluation test by making calls between the PHU test terminals (such as Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, Huawei U6100, or Huawei U1251) configured on two Probes. In this scenario, the version numbers of the two PHU terminals must be the same. In addition, both the PHU terminals must be configured with the Async SQE(MS-MS) test item. Property Call Count Value/Range/Unit You can set this property when Call Type is set to Call by Call. The default value is 5. Call Duration You can set this property when Call Type is set to Call by Call. The default value is 120, and the unit is second. Indicates the call duration. Description Indicates the number of calls.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-7
14 Appendix
Property Call Interval
Value/Range/Unit You can set this property when Call Type is set to Call by Call. The value ranges from 1 to 120, and the default value is 30, and the unit is second.
Description Indicates the call interval.
Call Mode
The values are as follows: l Outgoing: Refers to the outgoing call mode. l Incoming: Refers to the incoming call mode. When selecting Incoming, you need to set Source Number and SaveFile only. The default value is Outgoing.
Indicates the call mode.
Call Type
The values are as follows: l Continuous Call: Refers to a long call. l Call by Call: Refers to a short call, which is controlled by the number of times a speech file is played. The default value is Call by Call.
Indicates the call type.
Destination Number Exceptional Interval
You can set this property when Call Mode is set to Outgoing. The default value is 10, and the unit is second.
Indicates the called number. Indicates the call exceptional interval, that is, the time from the previous call drop to the beginning of the next call. Indicates the MOS algorithm.
MOS Algorithm
The values are as follows: l PESQ.862.1 l PESQ.862 l PESQ LQ l PESQ Ie The default value is PESQ. 862.1.
MOS Direction
Indicates the MOS direction. The Half duplex mode, that is the half duplex interaction mode is supported by the Probe.
14-8
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Sample Type
Value/Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the type of a speech sample. The 5s,English type is supported by the Probe, that is the five seconds are spent in playing a speech sample, and the language of the speech sample is English.
Save All Result Files Source Number Score Threshold
You can select Yes or No. You can set this property when Call Mode is set to Ingoing. You can set this property when Save All Result Files is set to No. The default value is 25, and the unit is second.
Determines whether to save all speech result files. Indicates the caller number. Indicates the number of times for scoring the speech quality during the current call process. Indicates the maximum time for call setup. If the call cannot be set up within the period specified by this parameter, the call setup fails.
Setup Timeout
Speech Sample File
The default speech sample file is Software installation directory \Bin\SQE\ResultFile \VQA_Result.wav. You can select Yes or No.
Indicates the storage path and name of the recorded speech file.
Time Sync
Before performing a speech quality evaluation test, check whether to synchronize the PC time of the calling part with the PC time of the called part.
AT Control (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the AT Control test item. You can refer to this part when performing the Access Terminal (AT) control test, and then perform the related operations. The AT commands and their formats supported by different vendors greatly differ in many ways, therefore, you need to test the AT commands on each MS. Property Test Count Value/Range/ Unit The default value is 5. Description Indicates the number of AT control tests.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-9
14 Appendix
Property Command Edition
Value/Range/ Unit -
Description This property is used to edit test commands. Click the button in the right area. Then, add multiple test commands in the displayed AT Command Edit dialog box.
AT Command Edit dialog box AT Command area Idle Time AT Command Unit: s The default value is AT. Indicates the idle time. Indicates the AT command. The format of the entered commands must meet the requirements for the format of the AT commands. This parameter is used to add the values of AT Command and Idle Time to the list in the left area. This parameter is used to update the selected parameters of the command. This parameter is used to move a command upwards. This parameter is used to save a command file. This parameter is used to delete a command. This parameter is used to load a command file. This parameter is used to move a command downwards.
Add
Update
Operate area
Up Save Delete Load Down
Dial Up/Hang Up (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)

This describes the properties of the Dial Up and Hang Up test items. You can refer to this part when performing the data service dial-up connection test, such as FTP, HTTP, Ping, and Wap, and then perform the related operations. Dial Up and Hang Up are used to allow several data service sessions to be conducted after one another. The Dial Up test item enables you to establish a data service connection. The Hang Up test item enables you to terminate a data service connection.
14-10
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Test Item Dial
Property Test Count Test Interval Dial User
Value/Range/Unit The default value is 1. The default value is 3, and the unit is second. -
Description Indicates the number of dial-up tests. Indicates the interval between two dial-up tests. Indicates the dial-up user name. Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user name before the dial-up connection.
Dial Password -
Indicates the password for the dial-up connection. Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user password before the dial-up connection.
Phone Number PDP Type
The default value is *99#. You can select IP or PPP. l IP: Internet Protocol l PPP: Point-to-Point Protocol. It is a linklayer protocol of pointto-point links that carry the data packets of the network layer.
Indicates the phone number for the dial-up connection. Indicates the protocol used in PDP tests.
PDP APN
Indicates the name of the PDP access point. For example, the PDP APN of China Mobile is cmwap or cmnet. Indicates the amount of time to wait for the success of dial-up. If the dial-up connection is not set up during this period, the dialup connection attempt times out.
Timeout
You can select 30, 60, 120, 300, or 600. The unit is second.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-11
14 Appendix
Test Item
Property Security Protocol
Value/Range/Unit You can select PAP or CHAP. l PAP: Password Authentication Protocol. It is used for authenticating the users who attempt to log in to the service system using the PPP protocol. If the user name and password that a user submits to the PAP needs to be sent to another program without encryption, the PAP protocol must be used. l CHAP: Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol. It is an acknowledgement mode used by the PPP server. It is used for authenticating a user when the user initiates a connection or later. The default value is CHAP.
Description Indicates the network security authentication protocol.
Dial Type
You can select RAS or NDIS. l RAS: Remote Access Service. It indicates that the dial-up is performed through the modem. l NDIS: Network Driver Interface Specification. It indicates that the dialup is performed through a network adapter. In this case, Network Card must be set. Huawei E1820 Card or Huawei E182E Card is recommended.
Indicates the dial-up type.
14-12
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Test Item
Property Network Card
Value/Range/Unit You can set this property when Dial Type is set to NDIS.
Description Specifies the network adapter corresponding to the data card that is in use currently. Under the Network adapters node in the Device Manager window, you can view the name of the network adapter corresponding to the data card that is in use currently.
Traffic Class
You can select the following values: l background class: refers to the background class. l conversational class: refers to the conversational class. l interactive class: refers to the interactive class. l streaming class: refers to the streaming class. l subscribed value: refers to the subscribed value. The default value is background class.
Indicates the traffic class.
UL Max Rate
You can select 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 2048, or 4096. The unit is kbit/s. You can select 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 2048, 4096, or 8192. The unit is kbit/s. You can set this property when Traffic Class is set to conversational class, streaming class, or subscribed value. You can select 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 2048, or 4096. The unit is kbit/s.
Indicates the maximum uplink rate. Indicates the maximum downlink rate. Indicates the uplink guaranteed rate.
DL Max Rate
UL Guaranteed Rate
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-13
14 Appendix
Test Item
Property DL Guaranteed Rate
Value/Range/Unit You can set this property when Traffic Class is set to conversational class, streaming class, or subscribed value. You can select 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 2048, 4096, or 8192. The unit is kbit/s.
Description Indicates the downlink guaranteed rate.
Hang Up
Email (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the Email test item. When performing the email sending test, you can refer to the following descriptions. Before performing the Email test, you must perform the Dial Up test. Property From To Subject Body Text Attachment Value/Range/Unit Description Indicates the email address of the originator. Indicates the email address of the destination. Indicates the email subject. Indicates the email body text. Indicates the name of file to enclose with the email as attachment (optional). Indicates the IP address of the Simple Message Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server (for example, smtp.myserver.com). Indicates the user name that accesses the SMTP server. Indicates the password for accessing the SMTP server. Indicates the interval between two continuous email tests. Indicates the number of email tests.
SMTP server
Email User Email Password Test Interval Test Count
The default value is 5, and the unit is second. The default value is 1.
14-14
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Disconnection Mode
Value/Range/Unit The values are as follows: l Keep Connected After the download is complete, the Probe performs the next email test instead of disconnecting the data connection when the time specified in Test Interval is up. l Disconnected after transfer completed The Probe disconnects the data connection until the current activated email service is complete. In the next email test, you must perform the dial up test first. The default value is Disconnected after transfer completed.
Description Indicates the mode for disconnecting the current activated data connection.
Dial Type
You can select RAS or NDIS. l Remote access service (RAS): It indicates that the dial-up is performed through the modem. l Network driver interface specification (NDIS): It indicates that the dial-up is performed through a network adapter. In this case, Network Card must be set. Huawei E1820 Card and Huawei E182E Card are recommended.
Indicates the dial-up type.
Dial User
You can set this property when Disconnection Mode is set to Disconnected after transfer completed.
Indicates the dial-up user name. Certain operators require authentication for establishing a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user name before originating the dial-up connection.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-15
14 Appendix
Property Dial Password
Value/Range/Unit You can set this property when Disconnection Mode is set to Disconnected after transfer completed.
Description Indicates the password for the dialup connection. Certain operators require authentication for establishing a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user password before originating the dial-up connection. Indicates the phone number for the dial-up connection.
Phone Number
You can set this property when Disconnection Mode is set to Disconnected after transfer completed. The default value is *99#.
FTP Download
This section describes the properties of the FTP Download test item. You can refer to this section when performing an FTP download test. Through the FTP download test, you can check network performance during file download. Before performing an FTP download test, you must check whether your account enables you to download files to the specified directory. That is, whether you are authorized to access the FTP server. FTP Download (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA) describes the properties of the FTP Download test item supported by the GSM, WCDMA, or CDMA network. FTP Download (WiMAX/LTE) describes the properties of the FTP Download test item supported by the WiMAX or LTE network.
FTP Download (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)

You must perform a Dial Up test before the GSM, WCDMA or CDMA FTP Download test. Property User Password Remote File Value/Range/Unit Description Indicates the user name for accessing the FTP server. Indicates the user password for accessing the FTP server. Indicates the IP address of the FTP server. The format is ftp://IP address or domain name/file name Port The default value is 21. Indicates the port number of the FTP server.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-16
14 Appendix
Property Write Local File
Value/Range/Unit You can select either of the following values: l True: indicates that this file is saved after it is downloaded. l False: indicates that this file is not saved after it is downloaded. The default value is False.
Description Indicates whether the file needs to be saved.
Local File
You can set this property when Write Local File is set to True.
Indicates the filename and the path for saving files. You need to set a complete path such as C:\test.dat.
Multi Task Count Test Interval Test Count Disconnection Mode
The value ranges from 1 to 5, and the default value is 1. The default value is 15, and the unit is second. The default value is 1. You can select one of the following values: l Keep Connected After the download is complete, the Probe initiates the next FTP download test instead of disconnecting the data connection when the time specified in Test Interval arrives. l Disconnected by time The Probe disconnects the data connection based on the period when the time specified in Test Interval arrives. l Disconnected after transfer completed The Probe disconnects the data connection until the active FTP download is complete. In the next FTP download test, you must perform a dialup test first. The default value is Disconnected after transfer completed.
Indicates the number of tasks downloaded through the FTP. Indicates the interval between two FTP download tests. Indicates the number of FTP download tests. Indicates the mode for disconnecting the active data connection.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-17
14 Appendix
Property Port Type
Value/Range/Unit The values are as follows: l PASV: FTP passive mode. In this mode, the Probe functions as the client to actively connect to the FTP server. l PORT: FTP active mode. In this mode, the FTP server actively connects to the client. If this mode is used for a test, you are advised to disable the network firewall. The default value is PASV.
Description Indicates the active or passive mode of the FTP.
Valid FTP Duration
You can set this property when Disconnection Mode is set to Disconnected by Time. The default value is 300, and the unit is second.
Indicates the valid duration for the FTP download test.
Dial Type
You can set this property when Disconnection Mode is set to Disconnected by Time or Disconnected after transfer completed. You can select RAS or NDIS. l RAS: Remote Access Service. It indicates that dialup is performed through the modem. l NDIS: Network Driver Interface Specification. It indicates that dialup is performed through a network adapter. In this case, Network Card must be set. Huawei E1820 Card or Huawei E182E Card is recommended.
Indicates the dialup type.
Network Card
You can set this property when Dial Type is set to NDIS.
Indicates the network adapter corresponding to the data card that is in use currently. Under the Network adapters node in the Device Manager window, you can view the name of the network adapter corresponding to the data card that is in use currently.
14-18
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Dial User
Value/Range/Unit You can set this property when Disconnection Mode is set to Disconnected by Time or Disconnected after transfer completed.
Description Indicates the dialup user name. Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user name before the dialup connection. Indicates the password for the dialup connection. Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user password before the dialup connection. Indicates the phone number for the dialup connection.
Dial Password
You can set this property when Disconnection Mode is set to Disconnected by Time or Disconnected after transfer completed.
Phone Number
You can set this property when Disconnection Mode is set to Disconnected by Time or Disconnected after transfer completed. The default value is *99#.
FTP Download (WiMAX/LTE)

Property User Password Remote File Value/Range/Unit Description Indicates the user name for accessing the FTP server. Indicates the user password for accessing the FTP server. Indicates the file on the FTP server. The format is ftp://IP address or domain name/file name. Port The default value is 21. Indicates the port number of the FTP server.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-19
14 Appendix
Property Port Type
Value/Range/Unit The options are as follows: l PASV: FTP passive mode. In this mode, the Probe functions as the client to actively connect to the FTP server. l PORT: FTP active mode. In this mode, the FTP server actively connects to the client. If this mode is used for a test, you are advised to disable the network firewall. The default value is PASV.
Description Indicates the FTP active and passive modes.
Disconnection Mode
You can select either of the following values: l Disconnected by time Data connection is disconnected after Valid FTP Duration. l Disconnected after transfer completed Data connection is disconnected after the active FTP download service is complete. The default value is Disconnected by time.
Indicates the data disconnection mode. This property is applicable to Huawei Sequans BM358 terminals.
Valid FTP Duration
Indicates the valid duration for an FTP download test. This property is applicable to Huawei Sequans BM358 terminals. Indicates whether a file needs to be saved.
Write Local File
You can select either of the following values: l True: indicates that this file is saved after it is downloaded. l False: indicates that this file is not saved after it is downloaded. The default value is False.
Local File
You can set this property when Write Local File is set to True.
Indicates the file name and the path for storing files. You need to set a complete path such as C:\test.dat.
14-20
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Multi Task Count Test Interval Test Count
Value/Range/Unit The value ranges from 1 to 5, and the default value is 1. The default value is 1, and the unit is second. The default value is 10.
Description Indicates the number of tasks downloaded through FTP. Indicates the interval between two FTP download tests. Indicates the number of FTP download tests.
FTP Upload
This section describes the properties of the FTP Upload test item. You can refer to this section when performing an FTP upload test. By performing FTP upload tests, you can check network performance during file upload. Before performing FTP upload tests, you must check whether your account enables you to upload files to the specified directory. That is, whether you are authorized to access the FTP server. FTP Upload (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA) describes the properties of the FTP Upload test item supported by the GSM, WCDMA, or CDMA network. FTP Upload (WiMAX/LTE) describes the properties of the FTP Upload test item supported by the WiMAX or LTE network.
FTP Upload (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)

You must perform the Dial Up test before the GSM, WCDMA, or CDMA FTP Upload test. Property User Password Remote File Value/Range/Unit Description Indicates the user name for accessing the FTP server. Indicates the user password for accessing the FTP server. Indicates the file on the FTP server. The format is ftp://IP address or domain name/file name. Port Local File The default value is 21. Indicates the port number of the FTP server. Indicates the drive letter, path, and file name identifying the file to be uploaded. You need to set a complete path such as C:\test.dat. Multi Task Count The value ranges from 1 to 5 and the default value is 1. Indicates the number of tasks uploaded to the FTP server.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-21
14 Appendix
Property Test Interval Test Count Port Type
Value/Range/Unit The default value is 15 and the unit is second. The default value is 1. The values are as follows: l PASV: FTP passive mode. In this mode, the Probe functions as the client to actively connect to the FTP server. l PORT: FTP active mode. In this mode, the FTP server actively connects to the client. If this mode is used for a test, you are advised to disable the network firewall. The default value is PASV.
Description Indicates the interval between two FTP upload tests. Indicates the number of FTP upload tests. Indicates the active or passive mode of the FTP.
Disconnection Mode
You can select one of the following values: l Keep Connected After the upload is complete, the Probe initiates the next FTP upload test instead of disconnecting the data connection when the time specified in Test Interval arrives. l Disconnected by time The Probe disconnects the data connection based on the period when the time specified in Test Interval arrives. l Disconnected after transfer completed The Probe disconnects the data connection until the active FTP upload is complete. In the next FTP upload test, you must perform a dialup test first. The default value is Disconnected after transfer completed.
Indicates the mode for disconnecting the active data connection.
Valid FTP Duration
You can set this property when Disconnection Mode is set to Disconnected by Time. The default value is 300 and the unit is second.
Indicates the valid duration for an FTP upload test.
14-22
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Dial Type
Value/Range/Unit You can set this property when Disconnection Mode is set to Disconnected by Time or Disconnected after transfer completed. You can select RAS or NDIS. l RAS: Remote Access Service. It indicates that dialup is performed through the modem. l NDIS: Network Driver Interface Specification. It indicates that dialup is performed through a network adapter. In this case, Network Card must be set. Huawei E1820 Card or Huawei E182E Card is recommended.
Description Indicates the dialup type.
Network Card
You can set this property when Dial Type is set to NDIS.
Specifies the network adapter corresponding to the data card that is in use currently. Under the Network adapters node in the Device Manager window, you can view the name of the network adapter corresponding to the data card that is in use currently.
Dial User
Indicates the dialup user name. Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user name before the dialup connection. Indicates the password for the dialup connection. Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user password before the dialup connection.
Dial Password
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-23
14 Appendix
Property Phone Number
Value/Range/Unit You can set this property when Disconnection Mode is set to Disconnected by Time or Disconnected after transfer completed. The default value is *99#.
Description Indicates the phone number for the dialup connection.
FTP Upload (WiMAX/LTE)

Property User Password Remote File Value/Range/Unit Description Indicates the user name for accessing the FTP server. Indicates the user password for accessing the FTP server. Indicates the file on the FTP server. The format is ftp://IP address or domain name/file name. Port Local File The default value is 21. Indicates the port number of the FTP server. Indicates the drive letter, path, and file name identifying the file to be uploaded. You need to set a complete path such as C:\test.dat. Multi Task Count Test Interval Test Count The value ranges from 1 to 5 and the default value is 1. The default value is 1 and the unit is second. The default value is 10. Indicates the number of tasks uploaded to the FTP server. Indicates the interval between two FTP upload tests. Indicates the number of FTP upload tests.
14-24
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Port Type
Value/Range/Unit The options are as follows: l PASV: FTP passive mode. In this mode, the Probe functions as the client to actively connect to the FTP server. l PORT: FTP active mode. In this mode, the FTP server actively connects to the client. If this mode is used for a test, you are advised to disable the network firewall. The default value is PASV.
Description Indicates the active or passive mode of the FTP.
Disconnection Mode
You can select either of the following values: l Disconnected by time Data connection is disconnected after Valid FTP Duration. l Disconnected after transfer completed Data connection is disconnected after the active FTP download service is complete. The default value is Disconnected by time.
Indicates the data disconnection mode. This property is applicable to Huawei Sequans BM358 terminals.
Valid FTP Duration
Indicates the valid duration for the FTP upload test. This property is applicable to Huawei Sequans BM358 terminals.
HTTP
This describes the properties of the HTTP test items. You can refer to this part when performing the HTTP test, and then perform the related operations. Through the HTTP test, you can test the network performance when accessing specified web pages. You must perform the Dial Up test before the HTTP test. Property URL Value/Range/Unit The address starting with http://. Description Indicates the address of the HTTP server.
14-25
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Port Show Web Page
Value/Range/Unit The default value is 80. You can select True or False. The default value is True.
Description Indicates the port number of the HTTP server. Whether the page set in URL is displayed automatically. Indicates the interval between two HTTP tests. Indicates the number of HTTP tests. Indicates the mode for disconnecting the current activated data connection.
Test Interval Test Count Disconnection Mode
The default value is 20, and the unit is second. The default value is 1. You can select the following values: l Keep Connected After the test is complete, the Probe originates the next HTTP test instead of disconnecting the data connection when the time specified in Test Interval is up. l Disconnected after transfer completed The Probe disconnects the data connection until the current activated HTTP service is complete. In the next HTTP test, you must perform the dial up test first. The default value is Disconnected after transfer completed.
Dial User
Indicates the dial-up user name. Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user name before the dial-up connection. Indicates the password for the dial-up connection. Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user password before the dial-up connection.
Dial Password
14-26
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Phone Number
Value/Range/Unit You can set this property when Disconnection Mode is set to Disconnected after transfer completed. The default value is *99#.
Description Indicates the phone number for the dial-up connection.
KeyEmul (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the KeyEmul test item. You can refer to this part when performing the key emulation test, and then perform the related operations. Not all functions of a test MS can be executed by issuing commands. The function such as video phone calling can be automatically dialed through only the key emulation. Property Key Emulation List Value/Range/Unit Description Indicates the key emulation list. Click the button next to this item. The Key Emul Config dialog box is displayed. In the displayed dialog box, set corresponding parameters. Indicates the interval between two Key-Emul tests.
Test Interval
The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 30. The unit is second. The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 5.
Test Count
Indicates the number of tests.
Key Emul Config dialog box Phone Type Delay Indicates the phone types supported by the Probe. The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 300. The unit is ms. Phone type. Key pressing delay. Indicates the interval between two pressings.
Key Emulation List Key Input Test
Indicates the key emulation list. Maps the key input. Displays the key emulation. Indicates the test button. This item is used to test whether the sequence of key emulation meets the expectation.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-27
14 Appendix
Property Define Key Value
Value/Range/Unit -
Description Defines the key emulation map. Click the button next to this item. The Key Emulation Map Setting dialog box is displayed. In the displayed dialog box, set corresponding parameters.
Key Emulation Map Setting dialog box Key Emulation Map Phone Type Add & Edit Key Value Reset Press Next & Press Indicates the mapping table of key values of the key emulation. Phone type. Indicates the selected phone type. This item is used to add new phones. Indicates the key value. Indicates the reset button for the key value. Reset key values to 0x00. Press the key corresponding to a value of the Key Value. Press the key corresponding to the result of adding 1 to a value of the Key Value.
Loop Start
This describes the properties of the Loop Start test item. You can refer to this part when performing a cyclic test, and then perform the related operations. Property Test Count Value/Range/Unit The default value is 5. Description Indicates the times of executing test items circularly.
PS Attach/PS Detach (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)

This describes the properties of the PS Attach and PS Detach test items. You can refer to this part when performing the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, or WiMAX attach or detach test, and then perform the related operations.
NOTE
The Attach and Detach tests are performed alternately. If an Attach test is performed, the next Attach test cannot be performed until the Detach test is performed.
14-28
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Test Item PS Attach
Property Attach Mode
Value/Range/Unit You can select the following values: l Attach only: Only the Attach test is performed. If you select the Attach only mode, you must perform a Detach test before the next Attach test. l Detach before Attach: A Detach test is performed before the Attach test.
Description Indicates the packet service attach test mode.
Timeout
The value must be a positive integer. The value range is 15 to 60. The default value is 15. The unit is second. The value must be a positive integer. The value range is 15 to 60. The default value is 15. The unit is second.
Indicates the time to wait for the attach successful or attach failed. Indicates the time to wait for the detach successful or detach failed.
PS Detach
Timeout
MMS (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)
This describes the properties of the MMS test item. You can refer to this part when performing the multimedia message service (MMS) test, and then perform the related operations. Through the MMS test, you can test the network performance when multimedia files are being sent. The Probe supports the GSM MMS test and WCDMA MMS test performed by using Huawei U120e or Huawei U535 test terminals. Also the Probe supports the CDMA MMS test performed by using Huawei C5588 test terminal. Table 14-1 describes the properties of the MMS test item. If an MMS fails to be sent, you need to manually set the parameters listed in Table 14-2 on your test terminal.
CAUTION
By default, the Probe sends the first MMS in the inbox of the test terminal. Thus, before performing MMS test, you should ensure that MMSs are present in the test terminal and the MMS to be sent is the first MMS in the inbox. You can use other terminal to send MMSs to the test terminal to ensure that MMSs are present in the test terminal.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-29
14 Appendix
Table 14-1 Properties of the MMS test item Property Test Count Test Interval Value/Range/Unit The default value is 5. The default value is 15, and the unit is second. Description Indicates the number of MMS tests. Indicates the interval between two MMS tests, that is, the interval between the ended MMS test and the MMS test to be started.
Table 14-2 Auxiliary parameters Property MMS Gateway Gateway Port APN MMS Center URL Description Indicates the IP address of the WAP gateway of an operator. The value is a string, for example, 10.10.10.1. Indicates the gateway port on the server. For example, 80. Indicates the access point name. For example, the APN of China Mobile is cmwap or cmnet. Indicates the URL of the MMS center, starting with http://. For example, http://mmsc.monternet.com.
Multi-FTP (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the Multi-FTP test item. You can refer to this part when using a terminal to perform FTP upload and download tests simultaneously, and then perform the related operations. Property FTP Download DL User Value/Range/Unit Description Indicates the user name for accessing the FTP server when downloading files. Indicates the user password for accessing the FTP server when downloading files. Indicates the file on the FTP server. The input format is ftp:// IP address or domain name/File name. DL Port The default value is 21. Indicates the port number of the FTP server.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
DL Password
DL Remote File
14-30
14 Appendix
Property DL Write Local File
Value/Range/Unit The values are as follows: l True: Indicates that the file is saved after it is downloaded. l False: Indicates that the file is not saved after it is downloaded. The default value is False. DL Local File You can set this property when DL Write Local File is set to True.
Description Specifies whether to save the file.
Indicates the file name and the path for saving the file. You need to set a complete path, such as C: \test.dat.
DL Multi Task Count DL Count FTP Upload UL User
The value ranges from 1 to 5, and the default value is 1. The default value is 1. -
Indicates the number of FTP download tasks. Indicates the number of FTP download tests. Indicates the name of the user that accesses the FTP server when uploading files. Indicates the user password for accessing the FTP server when uploading files. Indicates the file on the FTP server. The input format is ftp:// IP address or domain name/File name.
UL Password
UL Remote File
UL Port UL Local File
The default value is 21. -
Indicates the port number of the FTP server. Indicates the file name and the path for saving the file. You need to set a complete path, such as C: \test.dat.
UL Multi Task Count
The value ranges from 1 to 5, and the default value is 1.
Indicates the number of FTP upload tasks.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-31
14 Appendix
Property UL Count Common Property Dial User
Value/Range/Unit The default value is 1. -
Description Indicates the number of FTP upload tests. Indicates the dial-up user name. Certain operators require authentication for establishing a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user name before originating the dial-up connection.
Dial Password
Indicates the password for the dial-up connection. Certain operators require authentication for establishing a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user password before originating the dial-up connection.
Phone Number
The default value is *99#.
Indicates the phone number for the dial-up connection. Indicates the FTP active and passive modes.
Port Type
The values are as follows: l PASV: FTP passive mode. In this mode, the Probe functions as the client to actively connect to the FTP server. l PORT: FTP active mode. In this mode, the FTP server actively connects to the client. If this mode is used for a test, you are advised to disable the network firewall. The default value is PASV.
Test Interval
The default value is 10, and the unit is second.
Indicates the interval between two continuous Multi-FTP tests.
14-32
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Multi-RAB (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the Multi-RAB test item. You can refer to this part when testing the CS and PS concurrently, and then perform the related operations. You can test the CS and PS concurrently through the Multi-RAB test item and resolve the failed hang up of the MS for the automatic adaptive multi rate test in the case of the normal dial-up connection of the PS. The Multi-RAB test item involves the concurrent test of AMR and FTP and the concurrent test of video phone (VP) and FTP. Property Multi-RAB Concurrent Type Value/Range/Unit You can select the following values: l AMR & FTP: indicates the concurrent tests of the AMR and FTP. l Video & FTP: indicates the concurrent tests of the Video and FTP. The default value is AMR & FTP. Startup Priority You can select the following values: l CS First: indicates that the CS test is performed first. l FTP First: indicates that the FTP test is performed first. The default value is CS First. Test Count Test Interval The default value is 10. The default value is 10, and the unit is second. Indicates the number of tests. Indicates the time interval between two tests, that is, the time from the previous test to the beginning of the next test. Indicates the time from the call originated by the MS to the beginning of the FTP service. Indicates the destination number. Indicates the startup priority of subservices during the concurrent test. Description Indicates the type of the concurrent test.
CS and FTP Interval
CS
Destination Number
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-33
14 Appendix
Property Setup Timeout
Value/Range/Unit The default value is 25, and the unit is second.
Description Indicates the maximum time for call setup. If the call cannot be set up within a defined period, the call setup fails. Indicates the terminal command type. Select the command type according to the terminal type. Otherwise, call setup initiated by terminals may fail.
Command Type
The values are as follows: l Qualcomm Command: This command type is applicable to Qualcomm chipsetbased terminals. If terminals fail to initiate calls through Qualcomm commands, you can configure a modem port and set Command Type to AT Command. l AT Command: After you set Command Type to AT Command, AT commands can be issued. Before setting Command Type to AT Command, you need to check that a modem port has been configured. The default value is Qualcomm Command.
FTP
FTP Type
You can select the following values: l Upload: indicates the FTP upload. l Download: indicates the FTP download. The default value is Download.
Indicates the FTP type.
14-34
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Write Local File
Value/Range/Unit You can select the following values: l True: indicates that this file is saved after it is downloaded. l False: indicates that this file is not saved after it is downloaded. The default value is False. Local File You can set this property when Write Local File is set to True.
Description Indicates whether the file needs to be saved.
Indicates the filename and the path for saving files. You need to set a complete path such as C: \test.dat. Indicates the end type.
End Type
You can select the following values: l By Time: indicates that the test ends until the time specified in FTP Time for transmitting data through the FTP is up. l By File: indicates that the test ends until the file download is complete. The default value is By Time and is set in FTP Time.
FTP Time
You can set this property when End Type is set to By Time. The default value is 15, and the unit is second.
Indicates the duration of a FTP transmission.
FTP Retry Count
The default value is 3.
Indicates the maximum number of allowed retries when the FTP connection fails. Indicates the port number of the FTP server. Indicates the user name for accessing the FTP server.
14-35
Port User
The default value is 21. -
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Password
Value/Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the user password for accessing the FTP server. Indicates the IP address of the FTP server. The format is ftp://IP address or domain name/ file name
Remote File
Multi Thread Count
Indicates the number of tasks downloaded through the FTP. Indicates the protocol of PDP test. Indicates the name of the PDP access point. For example, the APN of China Mobile is cmwap or cmnet. Indicates the dial-up user name. Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user name before the dial-up connection.
FTP Dial
PDP Type PDP APN
You can select IP and PPP. -
Dial User
Dial Password
Indicates the password for the dial-up connection. Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user password before the dialup connection.
Phone Number
The default value is *99#.
Indicates the phone number for the dial-up connection.
14-36
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property FTP QoS Traffic Class
Value/Range/Unit You can select the following values: l background class: refers to the background class. l conversational class: refers to the conversational class. l interactive class: refers to the interactive class. l streaming class: refers to the streaming class. l subscribed value: refers to the subscribed value. The default value is background class. UL Max Rate You can select 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 2048, or 4096. The unit is kbit/s. You can select 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 2048, 4096, or 8192. The unit is kbit/s. You can set this property when Traffic Class is set to conversational class, streaming class, or subscribed value. You can select 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 2048, or 4096. The unit is kbit/s. DL Guaranteed Rate You can set this property when Traffic Class is set to conversational class, streaming class, or subscribed value. You can select 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 2048, 4096, or 8192. The unit is kbit/s.
Description Indicates the traffic class.
Indicates the maximum uplink rate. Indicates the maximum downlink rate.
DL Max Rate
UL Guaranteed Rate
Indicates the uplink guaranteed rate.
Indicates the downlink guaranteed rate.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-37
14 Appendix
PDP (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the PDP test item. You can refer to this part when performing the Packet Data Protocol (PDP) activation and deactivation tests, and then perform the related operations. By sending the AT commands to the MS, you can test whether the MS can activate or deactivate the GPRS properly. Property PDP Type PDP APN Traffic Class Value/Range/Unit You can select IP and PPP. You can select the following values: l background class: refers to the background class. l conversational class: refers to the conversational class. l interactive class: refers to the interactive class. l streaming class: refers to the streaming class. l subscribed value: refers to the subscribed value. The default value is background class. UL Max Rate You can select 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 2048, or 4096. The unit is kbit/s. You can select 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 2048, 4096, or 8192. The unit is kbit/s. You can set this property when Traffic Class is set to conversational class, streaming class, or subscribed value. You can select 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 2048, or 4096. The unit is kbit/s. DL Guaranteed Rate You can set this property when Traffic Class is set to conversational class, streaming class, or subscribed value. You can select 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 2048, 4096, or 8192. The unit is kbit/s.
Description Indicates the PDP type. Indicates the name of the PDP access point. Indicates the traffic class.
Indicates the maximum uplink rate. Indicates the maximum downlink rate. Indicates the uplink guaranteed rate.
DL Max Rate
UL Guaranteed Rate
Indicates the downlink guaranteed rate.
14 Appendix
Property Auto Dialup
Value/Range/Unit You can select the following values: l False: disables the dial-up connection. l True: enables the dial-up connection. The default value is False.
Description Indicates whether to set up the dial-up connection of the packet service after the PDP activation.
Reserved Duration
The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 5. The unit is second.
Indicates the PDP duration, that is, the time from the previous PDP activation to the beginning of the PDP deactivation. Indicates the time from the previous PDP deactivation to the beginning of the next PDP activation. Indicates the number of tests. Indicates the call exceptional interval, that is, the time from the failed PDP activation to the beginning of the next PDP activation.
Test Interval
The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 5. The unit is second. The default value is 5. The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 20. The unit is second.
Test Count Exceptional Interval
Ping
This describes the properties of the Ping test item. You can refer to this part when testing the delay of a transmitted or received packet, and then perform the related operations. The Ping test is used to test the communication connectivity of a network. The test result acts as an evidence for diagnosing daily network faults. You must perform the Dial Up test before the Ping test. Property IP Packet Size Value/Range/Unit Enter an IP address such as 10.10.10.1. The range is 8 to 1024. The default value is 32. The Unit is byte. Description Indicates the destination IP address. Indicates the packet size. The size of a transmitted packet affects the delay.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-39
14 Appendix
Property Fragment Flag
Value/Range/Unit The value can be either of the following: l False: Disable the fragment test. l True: Enable the fragment test. The default value is False.
Description Indicates whether to split a Ping packet.
Test Control Mode
Currently, only the Test by Count mode is supported. That is, the test is controlled by Test Count. The default value is 5. The default value is 1, and the unit is second.
Indicates the test control mode.
Test Count Test Interval
Indicates the number of tests. Indicates the interval between two ping tests.
SMS (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)
This describes the properties of the SMS test item. You can refer to this part when testing the short message service (SMS), and then perform the related operations. You can test whether the short message service is normal by sending an SMS to the destination MS.
NOTE
The test terminal on which the SMS test is performed must be configured with the modem port. For details, see 7.3 Configuring External Devices
Property Test Count Test Interval
Value/Range/Unit The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 5. The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 5. The unit is second. Only numbers, * and # can be used. The length of the short message content must be less than or equal to 160 characters. The default value is Happy Everyday!. Only numbers, * and # can be used.
Description Indicates the number of tests. Indicates the interval between two tests. Indicates the SMS center number. Indicates the short message contents. You can enter a string.
Service Center Number Message
Destination Number
Indicates the number of the destination MS.
SQE(MS-PSTN) (GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the SQE(MS-PSTN) test item. You can refer to this part when performing a speech quality evaluation test by making calls between the PHU test terminal (such
14 Appendix
as Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, Huawei U6100, or Huawei U1251) and the PSTN SQE Server. In this scenario, you need to configure the SQE(MS-PSTN) test item for the PHU terminal in the Probe and configure the SQE test item in the PSTN SQE Server. For details about the PSTN SQE Server, see the relevant user guide. Property Call Count Value/Range/Unit You can set this property when Call Type is set to Call by Call. The default value is 5. Call Duration You can set this property when Call Type is set to Call by Call. The default value is 120, and the unit is second. Call Interval You can set this property when Call Type is set to Call by Call. The value ranges from 1 to 120, and the default value is 30, and the unit is second. Call Mode The values are as follows: l Outgoing: Refers to the outgoing call mode. l Incoming: Refers to the incoming call mode. When selecting Incoming, you need to set Source Number and SaveFile only. The default value is Outgoing. Call Type The values are as follows: l Continuous Call: Refers to a long call. l Call by Call: Refers to a short call, which is controlled by the number of times a speech file is played. The default value is Call by Call. Destination Number Exceptional Interval You can set this property when Call Mode is set to Outgoing. The default value is 10, and the unit is second. Indicates the called number. Indicates the call exceptional interval, that is, the time from the previous call drop to the beginning of the next call. Indicates the call type. Indicates the call mode. Indicates the call interval. Indicates the call duration. Description Indicates the number of calls.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-41
14 Appendix
Property MOS Algorithm
Value/Range/Unit The values are as follows: l PESQ.862.1 l PESQ.862 l PESQ LQ l PESQ Ie The default value is PESQ. 862.1.
Description Indicates the MOS algorithm.
MOS Direction
Indicates the MOS direction. The Half duplex mode, that is the half duplex interaction mode is supported by the Probe.
Sample Type
Indicates the type of a speech sample. The 5s,English type is supported by the Probe, that is the five seconds are spent in playing a speech sample, and the language of the speech sample is English.
Save All Result Files Source Number Score Threshold
You can select Yes or No. You can set this property when Call Mode is set to Ingoing. You can set this property when Save All Result Files is set to No. The default value is 25, and the unit is second.
Determines whether to save all speech result files. Indicates the caller number. Indicates the number of times for scoring the speech quality during the current call process. Indicates the maximum time for call setup. If the call cannot be set up within the period specified by this parameter, the call setup fails.
Setup Timeout
Speech Sample File
The default speech sample file is Software installation directory \Bin\SQE\ResultFile \VQA_Result.wav. You can select Yes or No.
Indicates the storage path and name of the recorded speech file.
Time Sync
Before performing a speech quality evaluation test, check whether to synchronize the PC time of the calling part with the PC time of the called part.
14-42
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Sync SQE(MS-MS) (GSM/WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the Sync SQE(MS-MS) test item. You can refer to this part when performing a speech quality evaluation test by making calls between the PHU test terminals (such as Huawei U120e , Huawei U1205, Huawei U6100, or Huawei U1251) configured on a Probe. In this scenario, the version numbers of the two PHU terminals must be the same. In addition, only the calling PHU terminal needs to be configured with the Sync SQE(MS-MS) test item. Property Destination MS Value/Range/Unit Description Indicates the destination MS. You can select the destination MS from the drop-down list. The MS is another terminal that is connected to the Probe. Indicates the called number. Indicates the call type.
Destination Number Call Type
The values are as follows: l Continuous Call: refers to a long call. l Call by Call: Refers to a short call, which is controlled by the number of times a speech file is played. l Call by Count: It is controlled by the number of speech evaluation scoring times. The default value is Call by Count.
Call Duration
You can set this property when Call Type is set to Call by Call. The default value is 120, and the unit is second.
Indicates the call duration.
Call Interval
Indicates the call interval.
Test Count
You can set this property when Call Type is set to Call by Call. The default value is 1.
Indicates the number of tests.
Score Count
You can set this property when Call Type is set to Call by Count. The value ranges from 1 to 9999.
Indicates the number of times for scoring the speech quality during the current call process.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-43
14 Appendix
Property Exceptional Interval
Description Indicates the call exceptional interval, that is, the time from the previous call drop to the beginning of the next call. Indicates the maximum time for call setup. If the call cannot be set up within the period specified by this parameter, the call setup fails.
Setup Timeout
MOS Algorithm
The values are as follows: l PESQ.862.1 l PESQ.862 l PESQ LQ l PESQ Ie The default value is PESQ.862.1.
Indicates the MOS algorithm.
Speech Destination File Speech Sample File Save All Result Files Score Threshold
The default speech destination file is Software installation directory\Bin \SQE\ResultFile\VQA_Result.wav. The default speech sample file is Software installation directory\Bin \SQE\narr_ukasts_8.wav. You can select Yes or No. You can set this property when Save All Result Files is set to No. You can select Yes or No. The default value is No.
Indicates the storage path and name of the recorded speech file. Indicates the speech sample file provided by the Probe. Determines whether to save all speech result files. Indicates the MOS threshold for saving the speech result file. Determines whether to send the dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) signaling. When the MOS score is smaller than the value of DTMF Score Threshold, the Probe sends the DTMF signaling to the BSC.
Send DTMF
14-44
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property DTMF Score Threshold
Value/Range/Unit You can set this property when Send DTMF is set to Yes. l When MOS Algorithm is set to PESQ Ie, DTMF Score Threshold ranges from 1 to 140. l When MOS Algorithm is set to PESQ.862.1, PESQ.862, or PESQ LQ, DTMF Score Threshold ranges from 1 to 5.
Description Indicates the MOS threshold for sending the DTMF signaling.
Noise Type
The values are as follows: l No Noise: not to perform noise test l Car Noise: car noise l Street Noise: street noise l White Noise: white noise The default value is No Noise.
The noise test is performed during the speech quality evaluation test. Noise Type indicates the noise type, such as the car noise, street noise, and white noise. Indicates the SNR obtained from the noise sample file.
Noise Value
You can set this property when Noise Type is set to Car Noise, Street Noise, or White Noise. You can select 5dB, 10dB, or 10dB.
Command Type
The values are as follows: l Qualcomm Command: This command type is applicable to Qualcomm chipset-based terminals. If terminals fail to initiate calls through Qualcomm commands, you can configure a modem port and set Command Type to AT Command. l AT Command: After you set Command Type to AT Command, AT commands can be issued. Before setting Command Type to AT Command, you need to check that a modem port has been configured. The default value is Qualcomm Command.
Indicates the terminal command type. Select the command type according to the terminal type. Otherwise, call setup initiated by terminals may fail.
Video Phone (WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the Video Phone test item. You can refer to this part when performing the video phone test, and then perform the related operations.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-45
14 Appendix
Property Destination Number Setup Timeout
Description Indicates the destination number. Indicates the maximum time for call setup. If the call cannot be set up within the defined period, the call setup fails.
Call Duration
The default value is 120, and the unit is second. The default value is 15, and the unit is second.
Indicates the duration of a call, that is, the time from call setup to normal call release. Indicates the interval between two calls, that is, the time from the previous call disconnection to the beginning of the next call. Indicates the call Exceptional Interval, that is, the time from the previous call drop to the beginning of the next call. Indicates the total number of calls.
Test Interval
Exceptional Interval Test Count
The default value is 20, and the unit is second. The default value is 30.
Video Streaming (WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the WCDMA Video Streaming test item. You can refer to the description when performing a video streaming test and then perform relevant operations. To ensure that video files can be played normally, ensure that the PC is installed with an video player, for example, RealPlayer. Before performing a Video Streaming test, you must perform a Dial Up test. Property URL Value/Range/Unit The URL starting with http://. Description Indicates the URL of video files. The Probe supports only .rm video files. Test Interval Test Count The default value is 20, and the unit is second. The default value is 1. Indicates the interval between two tests. Indicates the number of times the test is performed.
14-46
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Disconnectio n Mode
Value/Range/Unit You can select the following values: l Keep Connected After a test is complete, the Probe originates the next video streaming test instead of disconnecting the data connection when the time specified in Test Interval is up. l Disconnected after transfer completed The Probe disconnects the data connection until the current activated video steaming service is complete. Before the next video steaming test, you must perform the dial-up test first. The default value is Disconnected after transfer completed.
Description Indicates the mode for disconnecting the current activated data connection.
Dial User
You can set this property after selecting Disconnected after transfer completed from Disconnection Mode.
Indicates the dial-up user name. Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to type the user name before the dial-up connection. Indicates the password for the dial-up connection. Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to type the user password before the dial-up connection. Indicates the phone number for the dial-up connection.
Dial Password
You can set this property after selecting Disconnected after transfer completed from Disconnection Mode.
Phone Number
You can set this property after selecting Disconnected after transfer completed from Disconnection Mode. The default value is *99#.
Voice Call (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA)

This describes the properties of the Voice Call test item. You can refer to this part when performing the voice call test, and then perform the related operations.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-47
14 Appendix
Property Destination Number Call Type
Value/Range/Unit You can select the following values: l Continuous Call: refers to a long call. The Probe does not disconnect this call until an exception occurs. If the call setup fails or a call drop occurs during the calling, the Probe terminates the current call test and starts another call test. l Call by Call: refers to a short call. Under the control of the Probe, an MS initiates a call that lasts for the period of time specified by Call Duration and then waits for the period of time specified by Test Interval before initiating another call. The number of times call tests are performed is defined by Test Count. The default value is Call by Call.
Description Indicates the outgoing call number. Indicates the call type.
Setup Timeout
Indicates the maximum time for call setup. If the call cannot be set up within the defined period, the call setup fails.
Call Duration
Indicates the duration of a call, that is, the time from call setup to normal call release.
Test Interval
Indicates the interval between two calls, the time from the previous call disconnection to the beginning of the next call. Indicates the call exceptional interval, that is, the time from the previous call drop to the beginning of the next call.
14-48
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Call Mode
Value/Range/Unit You can set this property when Call Type is set to Call by Call. You can select the following values: l Finite: indicates that the number of calls is limited. The number of calls cannot exceed the value of Test Count. l Infinite: indicates that the number of calls is unlimited. The default value is Finite.
Description Indicates the mode of call count.
Test Count
You can set this property when Call Type is set to Call by Call and Call Mode is set to Finite. The default value is 30.
Indicates the total number of calls.
Call Start Mode
You can select the following values: l Unlimited: The Probe performs the voice call test without determining the current status of the terminal. l Idle: When the terminal is not in idle state, if the current call is not terminated after the duration specified by Waiting Time, the Probe automatically disconnects the call and performs the voice call test. l Wait for call end: The Probe performs the voice call test after the current service performed on the terminal is automatically complete.
Indicates the mode in which the Probe starts a voice call test.
Waiting Time
You can set this property when Call Start Mode is set to Idle. You can select 0s, 5s, 10s, 15s, 30s, 60s, or 90s.
Indicates the waiting time of a test.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-49
14 Appendix
Property Command Type
Value/Range/Unit The values are as follows: l Qualcomm Command: This command type is applicable to Qualcomm chipset-based terminals. If terminals fail to initiate calls through Qualcomm commands, you can configure a modem port and set Command Type to AT Command. l AT Command: After you set Command Type to AT Command, AT commands can be issued. Before setting Command Type to AT Command, you need to check that a modem port has been configured. The default value is Qualcomm Command.
Description Indicates the terminal command type. Select the command type according to the terminal type. Otherwise, call setup initiated by terminals may fail.
Wait
This describes the properties of the Wait test item. You can refer to this part when setting the time interval between two test items, and then perform related operations. Property Wait Duration Value/Range/Unit The default value is 5, and the unit is second. Description Indicates the wait duration, that is, the time from the previous test item execution to the beginning of the next test item execution.
WAP Download (GSM/WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the WAP Download test item. You can refer to this part when performing the WAP download test, and then perform the related operations. You can test the download state of the WAP file by downloading file resources such as rings or pictures. You must perform the Dial Uptest before the WAP Download test. Property Test Count Value/Range/Unit The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 2. Description Indicates the number of tests.
14-50
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Test Interval
Value/Range/Unit The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 15. The unit is second. The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 150. The unit is second.
Description Indicates the interval between two tests. Indicates the timeout period. The timing starts when the first download request is sent. If the download page is not obtained within the preset time, you can infer that the connection fails. Indicates the type of a downloaded file.
Timeout
Download Type
You can select the following values: l Ring&Picture: refers to downloading pictures and rings. l Java: refers to downloading KJava. The default value is Ring&Picture.
Local Path URL List IP Port
The URL starts with http://. Contact local network operators to obtain the IP address. The value ranges from 0 to 1023, and the default value is 80.
Indicates the local path for saving the downloaded file. Indicates the URL for downloading pictures, rings, or KJava. Indicates the IP address of the WAP gateway. Indicates the port number of the WAP.
WAP Gateway Connection (GSM/WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the WAP Gateway Connection test item. You can refer to this part when performing the WAP gateway connection test, and then perform the related operations. You can test the gateway connection by sending the ping packet to the gateway. You must perform the Dial Up test before the WAP Gateway Connection test. Property Test Count Test Interval Value/Range/Unit The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 5. The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 1. The unit is second. Description Indicates the number of tests. Indicates the interval between two tests.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-51
14 Appendix
Property Timeout
Value/Range/Unit The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 30. The unit is second.
Description Indicates the timeout time. The timing starts when the first gateway connection request is sent. If the connection is not set up within the preset time, you can infer that the connection fails. Indicates the IP address of the WAP gateway.
IP
Contact local network operators to obtain the IP address.
WAP Logon (GSM/WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the WAP Logon test item. You can refer to this part when performing the WAP login test, and then perform the related operations. You can test the WAP login and upload. You must perform the Dial Up test before the WAP Logon test. Property Test Count Test Interval Value/Range/Unit The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 10. The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 5. The unit is second. The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 60. The unit is second. Description Indicates the number of tests. Indicates the interval between two tests. Indicates the timeout time. The timing starts when the first gateway connection request is sent. If the connection is not set up within the preset time, you can infer that the connection fails. Indicates the URL of the tested WAP page. Indicates whether to download icons on the title page.
Timeout
URL Download Icon
The URL starts with http://. You can select the following values: l True: downloads icons on the title page. l False: not download icons on the title page. The default value is True.
IP Port
Contact local network operators to obtain the IP address. The value ranges from 0 to 1023, and the default value is 80.
Indicates the IP address of the WAP gateway. Indicates the port number of the WAP.
14-52
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
WAP Page Refresh (GSM/WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the WAP Page Refresh test item. You can refer to this part when performing the WAP page refreshing test, and then perform the related operations. You can test the upload state of a WAP page by refreshing the same page many times. You must perform the Dial Up test before the WAP Page Refresh test. Property Test Count Test Interval Value/Range/Unit The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 10. The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 5. The unit is second. The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 60. The unit is second. Description Indicates the number of tests. Indicates the interval between two tests. Indicates the timeout time. The timing starts when the first gateway connection request is sent. If the connection is not set up within the preset time, you can infer that the download fails. Indicates whether to download icons on the title page.
Timeout
Download Icon
You can select the following values: l True: downloads icons on the title page. l False: not download icons on the title page. The default value is True.
URL IP Port
The URL starts with http://. Contact local network operators to obtain the IP address. The value ranges from 0 to 1023, and the default value is 80.
Indicates the URL of the tested WAP page. Indicates the IP address of the WAP gateway. Indicates the port number of the WAP.
NetEntry (WiMAX)
This section describes the properties of the WiMAX NetEntry test item. You can refer to this section when the Probe performs NetEntry tests. NetEntry tests are used for measuring the network access performance. Before accessing the network during a test, the MS must exit from the network. Property Test Count Value/Range/Unit The default value is 10. Description Indicates the number of NetEntry tests.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-53
14 Appendix
Property Test Interval
Value/Range/Unit
Description
The default value is 5, and Indicates the interval between two the unit is second. NetEntry tests.
NetSearch (WiMAX)
This section describes the properties of the NetSearch test item of the WiMAX system. You can perform the frequency scan test by referring to this part. The NetSearch test is used to scan the frequencies that are searched by the UE. Property Scan Type Value/Range/Unit The values are as follows: l Specified Frequency Scan: Indicates the frequency to be scanned. You can set the frequency in Center Frequency List. l Continuous Frequency Scan: Indicates the continuous frequency scan. The default value is Specified Frequency Scan. Center Frequency List CenterFreqStart You can set this property when Scan Type is set to Specified FrequencyScan. You can set this property when Scan Type is set to Continuous FrequencyScan. Range: l WiMAX 2.3GHz: 2.3 to 2.4 l WiMAX 2.5GHz: 2.496 to 2.69 l WiMAX 3.5GHz: 3.4 to 3.6 The default value is 0 and the unit is MHz. CenterFreqStep You can set this property when Scan Type is set to Continuous FrequencyScan. The value ranges from 0.25 to 10 and the unit is MHz. Indicates the step of the continuous frequency scan. The value of this property must be multiples of 0.01. Indicates the center frequency to be scanned. Indicates the start frequency of the continuous frequency scan. Description Indicates the scan type.
14-54
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property CenterFreqEnd
Value/Range/Unit You can set this property when Scan Type is set to Continuous FrequencyScan. Range: l WiMAX 2.3GHz: 2.3 to 2.4 l WiMAX 2.5GHz: 2.496 to 2.69 l WiMAX 3.5GHz: 3.4 to 3.6 The default value is 0 and the unit is MHz.
Description Indicates the end frequency of the continuous frequency scan.
BandWidth
You can set this property when Scan Type is set to Continuous FrequencyScan. The value can be 5, 7, 8.75, or 10. The default value is 0 and the unit is MHz.
Indicates the bandwidth.
The default value is 15. The value ranges from 0 to 30 and the unit is s.
Indicates the scan timeout period. When the value of CINR is set to a small value, you are advised to set this property to 15 or a greater value. 0 indicates the scan with indefinite scan period. In this case, the scanner performs continuous scan until an exception occurs.
Attach/Detach (LTE)
This describes the properties of the Attach and Detach test items. You can refer to this part when performing the LTE attach or detach test, and then perform the related operations.
NOTE
The attach and detach tests are performed alternately. If an attach test is performed, the next attach test cannot be performed until the detach test is performed.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-55
14 Appendix
Test Item Attach
Property Attach Type
Value/Range/Unit The values are as follows: l PS: Indicates that the attach tests for only data services are to be performed. l PS_CS: Indicates that the attach tests for data and voice services are to be performed.
Description Indicates the attach test type. Currently, only the attach test of PS is supported.
Timeout
The value is a positive integer ranging from 15 to 60, and the default value is 15, and the unit is second. The values are as follows: l Attach only: Indicates that only the attach test is performed. Before performing the next attach test, you must configure the LTE Detach test item. l Detach before Attach: Indicates that a detach test must be performed before the PS Attach test is performed.
Indicates the time to wait for the attach success or failure. Indicates the attach test mode.
Attach Mode
TestCount Detach Type
The values are as follows: l PS: Indicates that the detach tests for only data services are to be performed. l CS: Indicates that the detach tests for only speech services are to be performed. l PS_CS: Indicates that the detach tests for data and voice services are to be performed.
Indicates the test count. Indicates the detach test type. Currently, only the detach test of PS is supported.
Detach
Detach Type
The values are as follows: l PS: Indicates that the detach tests of only data services are to be performed. l CS: Indicates that the detach tests of only speech services are to be performed. l PS_CS: Indicates that the detach tests of data and voice services are to be performed.
Indicates the detach test type. Currently, only the detach test of PS is supported.
14-56
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Test Item
Property Timeout
Value/Range/Unit The value is a positive integer ranging from 15 to 60, and the default value is 15. The unit is second.
Description Indicates the time to wait for the detach success or failure.
Cell Scan (LTE)

This section describes the properties of the Cell Scan test item. You can perform the corresponding LTE cell scanning tests by referring to this part. Property FreqBandSear chType Value/Range/Unit The values are as follows: l Spec Band specifies that the cell searching is performed on the specified frequency band. The value ranges from Low Band to High Band. l Spec Freq specifies that the cell searching is performed on the specified EARFCNs. Note that the cell searching can be performed on a maximum of three EARFCNs. The number of EARFCNs to be scanned can be set in FreqCount. The values of EARFCNs can be set in SpecFreqx (x ranges from 1 to 3). Low Band The value is an integer ranging from 0 to 39650, and the default value is 32. The value is an integer ranging from 0 to 39650, and the default value is 32. Indicates the start value of a frequency band to be scanned. Indicates the end value of a frequency band to be scanned. Description Indicates the type of a cell to be scanned.
High Band
Iperf (LTE)
This describes the properties of the Iperf test item. You can refer to this part when performing the TCP or UDP of the LTE network performance test, and then perform the related operations.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-57
14 Appendix
Property Mode
Value/Range/Unit The values are as follows: l Server: Indicates the server mode. As the server, the Probe listens the specified port, performs the related operations according to the configuration after receiving a connection request or data from the client, and displays the network performance indicator. l Client: Indicates the client mode. As the client, the Probe sends TCP or UDP packets to the specified server in a period according to the configuration.
Description Indicates the test mode.
Protocol Port
Supports the TCP and UDP. The value ranges from 0 to 65535.
Indicates the data transmission protocol type. l When Mode is set to Server, it refers to the port listened by the server. l When Mode is set to Client, it indicates the client port connected to the server.
Report Interval
The value is an integer, and the unit is second. The default value is 0, which indicates that the data is not periodically reported.
Indicates the data report cycle.
Test Count Test Interval BandWidth
The default value is 5, and the unit is second. You can set this property when Mode is set to Client. The value is an integer, and the default value is 1000. The unit is kbit/s.
Indicates the number of Iperf tests. Indicates the interval between two continuous Iperf tests. Indicates the data transmission bandwidth.
Server Address
You can set this property when Mode is set to Client.
Indicates the IP address of the server accessed by the client.
14-58
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Test Mode
Value/Range/Unit You can set this property when Mode is set to Client. The values are as follows: l Normal: Indicates the unidirectional test mode. l DualTest: Indicates the half duplex test mode. l Tradeoff: Indicates the duplex test mode. The default value is Normal.
Description Indicates the client test mode.
Test Time
You can set this property when Mode is set to Client. The value is an integer, and the default value is 10, and the unit is second.
Indicates the test duration.
Frequency Scan (LTE)

This describes the properties of the Frequency Scan test item. You can refer to this part when performing the LTE frequency scanning test, and then perform the related operations. Property FreqBandSearchType Value/Range/Unit The values are as follows: l All Band: Search the cell in all bands supported by the UE. l Spec Band: Search the cell in the specified band. The default value is All Band. FreqBandSearchDelay The value can be set to 100, 300, 500, and 1000. The unit is ms. The default value is 1000. Low Band You can set this property when FreqBandSearchType is set to Spec Band. The value is an integer ranging from 0 to 1000, and the default value is 32. High Band You can set this property when FreqBandSearchType is set to All Band. The value is an integer ranging from 0 to 1000, and the default value is 32. Indicates the end band. Indicates the cycle for reporting the frequency scanning result. Indicates the start band. Description Indicates the band searching type.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-59
14 Appendix
14.1.3 Test Items of PCTel Scanners

This describes the PCTel scanner test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when designing a test plan for the PCTel scanner, and then perform the related operations.
Test Items Supported By the PCTel Scanners

This provides the test items supported by the scanners of the PCTel series. N et w or k G S M PCTel DTI EX Test Items PCTel DTI LX Test Items PCTel PCT-505 Test Items PCTel PCT-520 Test Items
l CW l GSM Scanning l Spectrum Analysis l CW l RSSI Scanning l Spectrum Analysis l TopN Pilot Scanning
l CW l GSM Scanning l Spectrum Analysis l CW l Pilot Scanning l RSSI Scanning l Spectrum Analysis l TopN Pilot Scanning l CW l Pilot Scanning l RSSI Scanning l Spectrum Analysis l TopN Pilot Scanning
l CW l GSM Scanning l Spectrum Analysis
W C D M A
l CW l RSSI Scanning l Spectrum Analysis l TopN Pilot Scanning
l CW l RSSI Scanning l Spectrum Analysis l TopN Pilot Scanning
C D M A
W i M A X
l CW l RSSI Scanning l TopN Preamble Index Scanning
CW (PCTel)
This section describes the properties of CW test item. You can refer to this section when performing the CW test by using the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, or WiMAX PCTel scanners.
14-60
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Channel
Description l For GSM, WCDMA, and CDMA scanners, Channel indicates the tested ARFCN. You can manually enter ARFCNs. Multiple ARFCNs are separated by commas. A maximum of 100 ARFCNs can be set. l For WiMAX scanners, Channel indicates the channel corresponding to the tested frequency. The format is [frequency | channel]. in the right area. Enter the value of Frequency in the You can click displayed Channel Setting dialog box. The system automatically calculates the channel to which this frequency belongs.
Output Mode
Indicates the interval of reporting GSM or WCDMA scanner data. You can select either of the following values: l Normal: Indicates that scanner data is reported at the default interval. l Stacked: Indicates that scanner data is reported at an interval of 20 ms. This property can be set for only EX or LX PCTel scanners.
GSM Scanning
This describes the properties of the GSM Scanning test item. You can refer to this part when performing the scanning test by using the GSM PCTel scanner, and then perform the related operations. Property Channel List Value/Range/Unit l The ARFCNs of GSM 850 (869 MHz - 894 MHz) range from 127 to 252. l The ARFCNs of E-GSM (925 MHz - 960 MHz) range from 0 to 124. l The ARFCNs of DCS 1800 (1805 MHz - 1880 MHz) range from 511 to 886. l The ARFCNs of PCS 1900 (1930 MHz - 1990 MHz) range from 511 to 811. RSSI Threshold The value ranges from -115 to -80. The default value is -105. The Unit is dBm. Indicates the threshold of the received signal strength indicator. Description Indicates the tested ARFCN. Click on the right of the Channel List. In the displayed GSM channel dialog box, select the ARFCNs to be scanned. The maximum number is 255.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-61
14 Appendix
Property Option Code
Value/Range/Unit The values are as follows: l BSIC & C/I, which indicates that the scanner used for the test supports both the BSIC and C/ I functions. l BSIC, which indicates that the scanner used for the test supports only the BSIC function.
Description Indicates the function option of the scanner. If the scanner does not support the C/I function, Option Code must be set to BSIC. Otherwise, the test cannot be performed normally. In the IE view, The C/I value is displayed as -10.
Spectrum Analysis
This describes the properties of the Spectrum Analysis test item. You can refer to this part when performing the spectrum analysis by using the GSM, WCDMA, or CDMA PCTel scanner, and then perform the related operations. Property Center Frequency Span Value/Range/Unit Unit: MHz Unit: MHz Description Indicates the center frequency. Indicates the bandwidth measured in the spectrum analysis. Indicates the resolution bandwidth, which is used to calculate the start frequency and the number of ARFCNs. Indicates the number of scanning times.
RBW
You can select 5, 10, 20, 40, or 80. The default value is 80. The unit is kHz. You can select 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16. The default value is 2.
NumberSweeps
Pilot Scanning
This describes the properties of the Pilot Scanning test item. You can refer to this part when performing the pilot scanning test by using the WCDMA or CDMA PCTel scanner, and then perform the related operations. Property Channel Value/Range/Unit A maximum of six ARFCNs can be tested simultaneously. Multiple ARFCNs are separated by commas. Each pilot code ranges from 0 to 511. Description Indicates the tested ARFCN. Click on the right of Channel, and then set the pilot code to be scanned.
14-62
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property ChipWindowSize
Value/Range/Unit You can manually enter the size ranging from 1 to 64. The default value is 32. The unit is dB. You can manually enter the threshold. The value ranges from -30 to 0. The default value is -20. The unit is dB.
Description Indicates the size of the chip window.
PNThreshold
Indicates the threshold of the available pseudo-random number.
RSSI Scanning
This section describes the properties of the RSSI Scanning test item. You can refer to this section when performing the signal strength scan test by using the WCDMA, CDMA, or WiMAX PCTel scanners. Property BandWidth Channel for BandWidth Value/Range/Unit You can select 5MHz or 10MHz. Format: [frequency | channel] Description Indicates the used bandwidth of the WiMAX scanner. Indicates the channel corresponding to the tested frequency of the WiMAX scanner. The procedure for setting this property is as follows: 1. Select a used bandwidth from BandWidth. in the right area. The 2. Click Channel Setting dialog box is displayed. 3. Enter the value of Frequency in the displayed Channel Setting dialog box. The system automatically calculates the channel to which this frequency belongs. Channel Indicates the tested ARFCN of the WCDMA or CDMA scanner. You can manually enter ARFCNs. Multiple ARFCNs are separated by commas.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-63
14 Appendix
Property Output Mode
Value/Range/Unit You can select either of the following values: l Normal: Indicates that scanner data is reported at the default interval. l Stacked: Indicates that scanner data is reported at an interval of 20 ms.
Description Indicates the scanner data reporting mode. This property can be set for only EX or LX PCTel scanners.
TopN Pilot Scanning

This describes the properties of the TopN Pilot Scanning test item. You can refer to this part when measuring TopN pilots by using the WCDMA or CDMA PCTel scanner, and then perform the related operations. Property N Channel Value/Range/Unit You can manually enter the number ranging from 1 to 32. A maximum of six ARFCNs can be tested simultaneously. Multiple ARFCNs are separated by commas. You can manually enter the size ranging from 1 to 64. The default value is 32. The unit is dB. You can manually enter the threshold. The value ranges from -30 to 0. The default value is -20. The unit is dB. Description Indicates the number of pilots to be scanned. Indicates the tested ARFCN. Indicates the size of the chip window. Indicates the threshold of the available pseudo-random number (PN).
ChipWindowSize
PNThreshold
TopN Preamble Index Scanning

This describes the properties of the TopN Preamble Index Scanning test item. You can refer to this part when measuring Top N preamble index by using the WiMAX PCTel scanner, and then perform the related operations. Property N Value/Range/Unit Description
You can manually enter Indicates the number of preamble indexes to be the number ranging scanned. from 1 to 32. The default value is 3.
14-64
14 Appendix
Property BandWidth Channel for BandWidth
Value/Range/Unit You can select 5MHz or 10MHz. Format : [frequency | channel]
Description Indicates the used bandwidth. Indicates the channel corresponding to the tested frequency. The setting steps are as follows: 1. Select a used bandwidth from BandWidth. 2. Click in the right area. The Channel Setting dialog box is displayed. 3. Enter the value of Frequence in the displayed Channel Setting dialog box. The system automatically calculates the channel to which this frequency belongs.
14.1.4 Test Items of Anritsu Scanners

This describes the Anritsu scanner test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when designing a test plan for the Anritsu scanner, and then perform the related operations.
Test Items Supported By the Anritsu Scanners

This provides the test items supported by the scanners of the Anritsu ML series. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Test Item CW GSM Specified/ UNSpecified MultiNetwork Specified MultiNetwork UNSpecified Specified Base Station Measurement UNSpecified Base Station Measurement ML8720 ML8740 ML8742
NOTE
l : indicates that the corresponding scanner supports the test item. l : indicates that the corresponding scanner does not support the test item.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-65
14 Appendix
CW (Anritsu, GSM/WCDMA)
This describes the properties of the CW test item. You can refer to this section when testing a continuous wave by using the GSM or WCDMA Anritsu scanner. Property Unspecifie d Calibrate User Value/Range/Unit Unit: dB Description Indicates the user correction value, which is used for compensating antenna loss. Indicates whether Calibrate User is valid.
Reference
The value can be any of the following: l True l False The default value is False.
Adjust Antenna
The value can be any of the following: l Disable l Standard l Customized The default value is Disable.
Indicates the mode for adjusting the antenna gain.
Conditions
Carrier Frequency
The value ranges from 925.0 to 960.0, 1805.0 to 1880.0, and 2110.0 to 2170.0, at a step length of 0.1. The unit is MHz. The value range is 1 to 500
Indicates the carrier frequency to be tested.
Trigger Demultiplier
Indicates the external triggering demultiplier. One sampling is performed every time a triggering pulse of the preset value is detected. Indicates the measurement duration.
ScanRate
l When External Trigger is set to 0, ScanRate ranges from 0.01 to 0.09, 0.1 to 0.9, 1 to 9, 10 to 90, and 100 to 500. The unit is second. l When External Trigger is set to 1, ScanRate ranges from 1 to 500. The unit is times. If ScanRate is set to a value less than 10 (ms), the measurement duration is 10 ms.
14-66
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property External Trigger
Value/Range/Unit The value can be any of the following: l 0: The external triggering mode is not adopted, that is, CWs are sampled according to the internal timing mode. l 1: The external triggering mode is adopted, that is, CWs are sampled according to the external triggering mode. The default value is Disable. Data Processing The value can be any of the Method following: l Median: The measurement duration is 50. l Average: The measurement duration is -1. The default value is Average. Threshold The unit is dB.
Description Indicates whether to adopt the external triggering mode.
Indicates the method for processing the data sampled during each measurement duration.
Indicates the threshold of white noise. The recommended value is -120.
GSM Specified/UNSpecified (Anritsu, GSM)

This describes the properties of the GSM Specified/UNSpecified test item. You can refer to this section when testing a specified or unspecified GSM cell by using the GSM Anritsu scanner. Property GSM Specfied/ Unspecifi ed BTS Calibrate User Value/Range/Unit Unit: dB Description Indicates the user correction value, which is used for compensating antenna loss. Indicates whether Calibrate User is valid.
Reference
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-67
14 Appendix
Property Adjust Antenna
Value/Range/Unit The value can be any of the following: l Disable l Standard l Customized The default value is Disable. Specified/ Unspecified The value can be Unspecified or Specified. The default value is Specified. ARFCN/ Frequency -
Description Indicates the mode for adjusting the antenna gain.
Indicates the specified or unspecified BTS measurement.
Enables you to set the ARFCN or frequency of the channel to be tested. You can set this parameter as follows: 1. Click on the right of ARFCN/ Frequency. The Unspecified Config Dialog dialog box is displayed. 2. In the Unspecified Config Dialog dialog box, set the starting and ending ARFCNs or frequencies, the number of channels to be tested, and whether to perform the test.
Threshold
The threshold must be set to a value not greater than -120. The unit is dB. The value can be any of the following: l 0: The BSIC is decoded. l 1: The BSIC is not decoded. The default value is 1.
Indicates the threshold of white noise. Indicates whether to decode the base station identify code (BSIC).
Condition s
BSIC Decode
14-68
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property External Trigger
Value/Range/Unit The value can be any of the following: l Disable: Sampling is performed according to the internal timing mode. l Enable: Sampling is performed according to the external triggering mode. The default value is Disable. Trigger Demultiplier The value range is 1 to 500
Measurement Duration
l When External Trigger is set to Disable, Measurement Duration ranges from 0.02 to 0.05 at a step length of 0.01. The unit is second. l When External Trigger is set to Enable, Measurement Duration ranges from 1 to 500 at a step length of 1. The unit is times.
RSSI Methods
The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0%-100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum, respectively. The default value is Average.
Indicates the method for processing the received signal strength indicator.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-69
14 Appendix
Property C/I Methods
Value/Range/Unit The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0%-100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum, respectively. The default value is Average.
Description Indicates the method for processing the C/I data.
MultiNetwork Specified (Anritsu, GSM/WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the MultiNetwork Specified test item. You can refer to this section when testing multi-network specified cell by using the GSM or WCDMA Anritsu scanner. Property Common Setting External Trigger Value/Range/Unit The value can be any of the following: l Disable: CWs are sampled according to the internal timing mode. l Enable: CWs are sampled according to the external triggering mode. The default value is Disable. Description Indicates whether to adopt the external triggering mode.
14-70
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Diversity
Value/Range/Unit The value can be any of the following: l OFF: The diversity function is disabled. If the required diversity antenna is not installed, you can select only OFF. l Receive ANT: The diversity function is enabled. l Two Carrier: The two carrier frequencies measurement function is enabled. The default value is OFF.
Description Enables you to set the diversity function or the two carrier frequencies measurement function.
GSM Specified BTS
Calibrate User
Unit: dB
Indicates the user correction value, which is used for compensating antenna loss. Indicates whether Calibrate User is valid.
Reference
Adjust Antenna
RF Input Type
Only RF Input1 is supported for the GSM measurement.
Indicates the radio frequency (RF) input mode.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-71
14 Appendix
Property ARFCN/ Frequency
Value/Range/Unit -
Description Enables you to set the ARFCN or frequency to be scanned. Click on the right of ARFCN/Frequency. In the displayed Unspecified Config Dialog dialog box, set the starting and ending ARFCNs or frequencies, the number of channels to be tested, and whether to perform the test.
Threshold
Indicates the threshold of white noise. Indicates whether to decode the BSIC.
BSIC Decode
The value range is 1 to 500
14-72
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property RSSI Methods
Value/Range/Unit The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average. C/I Methods The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average. Search Band Select The value can be any of the following: l Both Band l Each Band The default value is Both Band. Both Band You can select any value from 1 to 32. The value ranges from 2110.0 to 2200.0 at a step length of 0.2. The unit is MHz.
Description Indicates the data processing method for the received signal strength indicator.
Indicates the data processing method for the C/I.
Indicates the specified band to be tested for the GSM.
Indicates the number of a dual-band. Indicates the carrier frequency of an antenna in RF Input2 mode.
WCDMA Specified BTS
Carrier Frequency
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-73
14 Appendix
Property RF Input Type
Value/Range/Unit Only RF Input2 is supported for the WCDMA measurement. Unit: dB
Description Indicates the radio frequency input mode. Indicates the user correction value, which is used for compensating antenna loss. Indicates whether Calibrate User is valid.
Calibrate User
Reference
Adjust Antenna
The value can be 0.01, 0.02, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, or 10. The default value is 0.5. The unit is second. The value range is 0-6. The value 0 indicates that the scanner is not installed with any diversity antenna. The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average.
Indicates the measurement duration.
Fingers at ANT2
Indicates the maximum number of fingers used by antenna 2. Indicates that the same data processing method is used for the RSCP, ratio of the pilot energy per chip to total power spectral density of the receive bandwidth (Ec/ No), and signal-to-noise ratio (SIR).
All Methods
14-74
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property RSCP Method
Value/Range/Unit The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average. Ec/No Method The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to -100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average. SIR Method The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average.
Description Indicates the data processing method for the RSCP.
Indicates the data processing method for the Ec/No.
Indicates the data processing method for the SIR.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-75
14 Appendix
Property Rake Threshold
Value/Range/Unit The value range is 0 to 20. The default value is 20. The unit is dB.
Description Indicates the threshold of the rake receiver. The valid receive range of the rake receiver is from the best finger minus the rake threshold to the best finger. Indicates the range of the fingers that can be received. A finger that is greater than the receiver noise plus the selection level can be received. Sets the primary and secondary scrambling codes and the channel number. You can set this parameter as follows: on the right of 1. Click Channel Code. The MeasureChannel dialog box is displayed. 2. In the MeasureChannel dialog box, set the primary and secondary scrambling codes, channel number, and coding mode.
Selection Level
The value range is 0 to 20. The default value is 4. The unit is dB.
Channel Code
MultiNetwork UNSpecified (Anritsu, GSM/WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the MultiNetwork UNSpecified test item. You can refer to this section when testing multi-network unspecified cell by using the GSM or WCDMA Anritsu scanner.
14-76
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Commo n Setting External Trigger
Value/Range/Unit The value can be either of the following: l Disable: Sampling is performed according to the internal timing mode. l Enable: Sampling is performed according to the external triggering mode. The default value is Disable. Diversity The value can be any of the following: l OFF: The diversity function is disabled. If the required diversity antenna is not installed, you can select only OFF. l Receive ANT: The diversity function is enabled. l Two Carrier: The two carrier frequencies measurement function is enabled. The default value is OFF.
Enables you to set the diversity function or the two carrier frequencies measurement function.
GSM UNSpec ified BTS
Calibrate User
Unit: dB
Indicates the user correction value, which is used for compensating antenna loss. Indicates whether Calibrate User is valid.
Reference
Adjust Antenna
RF Input Type
Only RF Input1 is supported for the GSM measurement.
Indicates the radio frequency (RF) input mode.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-77
14 Appendix
Property ARFCN/ Frequency
Value/Range/Unit -
Description Enables you to set the ARFCN or frequency to be scanned. You can set this parameter as follows: 1. Click on the right of ARFCN/Frequency. The Unspecified Config Dialog dialog box is displayed. 2. In the Unspecified Config Dialog dialog box, set the starting and ending ARFCNs or frequencies, the number of channels to be tested, and whether to perform the test.
Threshold
Indicates the threshold of white noise. Indicates whether to decode the BSIC.
BSIC Decode
The value range is 1 to 500.
14-78
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property RSSI Methods
Value/Range/Unit The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum, respectively. The default value is Average. C/I Methods The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum, respectively. The default value is Average.
Description Indicates the data processing method for the received signal strength indicator.
Indicates the data processing method for the C/I.
WCDM A UNSpec ified BTS
Carrier Frequency RF Input Type Calibrate User
The value ranges from 2110.0 to 2200.0 at a step length of 0.2. The unit is MHz. Only RF Input1 is supported for the WCDMA measurement. Unit: dB
Indicates the carrier frequency of an antenna in RF Input2 mode. Indicates the RF input mode. Indicates the user correction value, which is used for compensating antenna loss. Indicates whether Calibrate User is valid.
Reference
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-79
14 Appendix
Value/Range/Unit The value can be any of the following: l Disable l Standard l Customized The default value is Disable. Measurement Duration The value can be 0.01, 0.02, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, or 10. The default value is 0.5. The unit is second. The value range is 0 to 6. The value 0 indicates that the scanner is not installed with any diversity antenna. The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average. RSCP Method The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average.
Fingers at ANT2
Indicates the maximum number of fingers used by antenna 2. Indicates that the same data processing method is used for the RSCP, Ec/No, and SIR.
All Methods
Indicates the data processing method for the RSCP.
14-80
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Ec/No Method
Value/Range/Unit The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average. SIR Method The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average. Rake Threshold The value range is 0 to 20. The default value is 20. The unit is dB.
Description Indicates the data processing method for the Ec/No.
Indicates the threshold of the rake receiver. The valid receive range of the rake receiver is from the best finger minus the rake threshold to the best finger. Indicates the range of the fingers that can be received. A finger that is greater than the receiver noise plus the selection level can be received.
Selection Level
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-81
14 Appendix
Property Channel Code
Value/Range/Unit -
Description Sets the primary and secondary scrambling codes and the channel number. You can set this parameter as follows: on the right of 1. Click Channel Code. The MeasureChannel dialog box is displayed. 2. In the MeasureChannel dialog box, set the primary and secondary scrambling codes, channel number, and coding mode.
CH Limits
Group Number Start Group Number End Cell Number Start Cell Number End Min.Secondary SC Max.Secondary SC
Indicates the starting number of the primary scrambling code group. Indicates the ending number of the primary scrambling code group. Indicates the starting cell number. Indicates the ending cell number. Indicates the minimum secondary scrambling code. Indicates the maximum secondary scrambling code.
The value range is 0 to 7. The default value is 0. The value range is 0 to 7. The default value is 7. The value range is 0 to 15. The default value is 0. The value range is 0 to 15. The default value is 0.
14-82
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Searching Method
Value/Range/Unit The value can be any of the following: l P-CPICH: Scrambling codes are searched on only the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH). l SCH: Scrambling codes are searched on the Primary Synchronization Channel (PSCH) and Secondary Synchronization Channel (SSCH). The default value is SCH. Measurement Channel Specified Channel The value ranges from 1 to 32, and the default value is 6. The value can be False or True. The default value is False. Measurement Channel is valid only when Specified Channel is set to True.
Description Indicates the searching method.
Indicates the number of the channel to be measured. Indicates the number of the specified channel.
Specified Base Station Measurement (Anritsu, WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the Specified Base Station Measurement test item. You can refer to this section when testing a specified WCDMA cell by using the Anritsu scanner. Property Unspecified Calibrate User Value/Range/Unit Unit: dB Description Indicates the user correction value, which is used for compensating antenna loss. Indicates whether Calibrate User is valid.
Reference
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-83
14 Appendix
Value/Range/Unit The value can be any of the following: l Disable l Standard l Customized The default value is Disable.
Conditions
The value can be 0.01, 0.02, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, or 10. The default value is 0.5. The unit is second. The value range is 1 to 6. The recommended value is 6. The value range is 0 to 6. The value 0 indicates that the scanner is not installed with any diversity antenna. The value can be any of the following: l OFF: The diversity function is disabled. If the required diversity antenna is not installed, you can select only OFF. l Receive ANT: The diversity function is enabled. The default value is OFF.
Fingers at ANT1 Fingers at ANT2
Indicates the maximum number of fingers used by antenna 1. Indicates the maximum number of fingers used by antenna 2. Enables you to set the diversity function.
Diversity
14-84
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property All Methods
Value/Range/Unit The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum, respectively. The default value is Average. RSCP Method The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum, respectively. The default value is Average. Ec/No Method The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum, respectively. The default value is Average.
Description Indicates that the same data processing method is used for the RSCP, Ec/No, and SIR.
Indicates the data processing method for the RSCP.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-85
14 Appendix
Property SIR Method
Value/Range/Unit The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum, respectively. The default value is Average. Rake Threshold The value range is 0 to 20. The default value is 1. The unit is dB.
Description Indicates the data processing method for the SIR.
Indicates the threshold of the rake receiver. The valid receive range of the rake receiver is from the best finger minus the rake threshold to the best finger. Indicates the range of the fingers that can be received. A finger that is greater than the receiver noise plus the selection level can be received. Indicates the carrier frequency of the antenna RF input.
Selection Level
Carrier Frequency
The value ranges from 2110.0 to 2200.0 at a step length of 0.2. The unit is MHz.
14-86
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property CH Code Channel Code
Value/Range/Unit -
Description Sets the primary and secondary scrambling codes and the channel number. You can set this parameter as follows: on the right of 1. Click Channel Code. The MeasureChannel dialog box is displayed. 2. In the MeasureChannel dialog box, set the primary and secondary scrambling codes, channel number, and coding mode.
UNSpecified Base Station Measurement (Anritsu, WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the UNSpecified Base Station Measurement test item. You can refer to this section when testing an unspecified WCDMA cell by using the Anritsu scanner. Property Unspecifie d Calibrate User Value/Range/Unit Unit: dB Description Indicates the user correction value, which is used for compensating antenna loss. Indicates whether Calibrate User is valid.
Reference
Adjust Antenna
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-87
14 Appendix
Property Conditions Measurement Duration
Value/Range/Unit The value can be 0.01, 0.02, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, or 10. The default value is 0.5. The unit is second.
Description Indicates the measurement duration.
Fingers at ANT1
The value range is 1 to 6. Indicates the maximum The recommended value is number of fingers used by 6. antenna 1. The value range is 0 to 6. The value 0 indicates that the scanner is not installed with any diversity antenna. The value can be any of the following: l OFF: The diversity function is disabled. If the required diversity antenna is not installed, you can select only OFF. l Receive ANT: The diversity function is enabled. The default value is OFF. Indicates the maximum number of fingers used by antenna 2. Enables you to set the diversity function.
Fingers at ANT2
Diversity
All Methods
The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average.
Indicates that the same data processing method is used for the RSCP, Ec/No, and SIR.
14-88
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property RSCP Method
Value/Range/Unit The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average. Ec/No Method The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average. SIR Method The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average.
Description Indicates the data processing method for the RSCP.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-89
14 Appendix
Property Rake Threshold
Value/Range/Unit The value range is 0 to 20. The default value is 20. The unit is dB.
Description Indicates the threshold of the rake receiver. The valid receive range of the rake receiver is from the best finger minus the rake threshold to the best finger. Indicates the range of the fingers that can be received. A finger that is greater than the receiver noise plus the selection level can be received. Indicates the carrier frequency of the antenna RF input. Indicates the starting number of the primary scrambling code group. Indicates the ending number of the primary scrambling code group. Indicates the starting cell number. Indicates the ending cell number. Indicates the minimum secondary scrambling code. Indicates the maximum secondary scrambling code. Indicates the searching method.
Selection Level
Carrier Frequency
The value ranges from 2110.0 to 2200.0 at a step length of 0.2. The unit is MHz. The default value is 0.
CH Limits
Group Number Start Group Number End Cell Number Start Cell Number End Min.Secondary SC
The value range is 0 to 7. The default value is 0. The value range is 0 to 7. The default value is 7. The value range is 0 to 15. The default value is 0. The value range is 0 to 15. The default value is 0. The value can be any of the following: l P-CPICH: Scrambling codes are searched on only the CPICH channel. l SCH: Scrambling codes are searched on P-SCH and S-SCH. The default value is SCH.
Max.Secondary SC Searching Method
14-90
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property Measurement Channel Specified Channel
Value/Range/Unit
Description
The value ranges from 1 to Indicates the number of the 32, and the default value is channel to be measured. 6. The value can be False or True. The default value is False. Measurement Channel is valid only when Specified Channel is set to True. Indicates the number of the specified channel.
CH Code
Channel Code
Sets the primary and secondary scrambling codes and the channel number. You can set this parameter as follows: on the right of 1. Click Channel Code. The MeasureChannel dialog box is displayed. 2. In the MeasureChannel dialog box, set the primary and secondary scrambling codes, channel number, and coding mode.
14.1.5 Test Items of Rohde & Schwarz Scanners

This describes the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX scanner test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when designing a test plan for the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX scanner, and then perform the related operations.
TSMX Spectrum Analysis (WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the TSMX Spectrum Analysis test item. You can refer to this section when performing the spectrum analysis by using the TSMX scanner. Property Center Frequency Span Value/Range/Unit You can manually enter a value ranging from 80 MHz to 3 GHz. You can manually enter a value. The maximum value is 40. The unit is MHz.
Description Indicates the center frequency. Indicates the bandwidth to be scanned.

14-91
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property RBW
Value/Range/Unit Unit: kHz
Description Indicates the resolution bandwidth.
TSMX TopN (WCDMA)

This describes the properties of the TSMX TopN test item. You can refer to this section when measuring TopN pilots by using the TSMX scanner. Property Frequency Value/Range/Unit You can set a maximum of six frequencies by using commas to separate the frequencies. The value ranges from 80 MHz to 3 GHz. The value range is 1 to 6. Description Indicates the frequency under test. Indicates the maximum number of pilots to be scanned. Indicates the valid threshold of the RSCP signal. Indicates the scanning frequency. Indicates the time synchronization mode.
Pilot Number
PNThreshold
The value range is -130 to -20. The default value is -115. The unit is dBm. The value range is 0.5 to 10. The unit is Hz
MeasureRate
TimeSyncMod e
The value can be any of the following: l 0: You can use the internal clock to synchronize the TSMX scanner. l 1: You can use the GSM signal to synchronize the TSMX scanner. l 2: You can use the PSS or GSM signal to synchronize the TSMX scanner. l 3: You can use the PPS pulse to synchronize the TSMX scanner. l 4: This mode can be used for only the WCDMA_3GPP PN scanner. The average of measured CPICH signals is used. l 256: The synchronization clock source in use is unknown.
14.2 Description of Predefined Events

This describes the system predefined events of the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX and LTE networks. You can refer to this part when configuring event parameters on each network.
14 Appendix
14.2.1 General Events This section describes the general events provided by the Probe. You can refer to this section when configuring general events and then perform the related operations. 14.2.2 GSM Predefined Events This describes the GSM predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events on the GSM network. 14.2.3 WCDMA Predefined Events This describes the WCDMA predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events on the WCDMA network. 14.2.4 CDMA Predefined Events This describes the CDMA predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events on the CDMA network, and then perform the related operations. 14.2.5 WiMAX Predefined Events This section describes the predefined events in the WiMAX network. You can refer to this section when configuring predefined events in the WiMAX network. 14.2.6 LTE Predefined Events This section describes the predefined events in the LTE network. You can configure LTE network events by referring to the following descriptions.
14.2.1 General Events

This section describes the general events provided by the Probe. You can refer to this section when configuring general events and then perform the related operations. Name Call Setup Timeout Data Transfer Start Filemark Record Pause Record Resume Meaning Call setup timeout Data transfer start Suspension of logfile recording Resuming of logfile recording Stopping of a test MS connection success MS disconnection success Description This event occurs when a call setup event times out. This event occurs when a data service test, such as FTP test or HTTP test, starts. A filemark is encountered in the logfile. This event occurs when you suspend the recording of logfiles in the Probe. This event occurs when logfiles continue to be recorded from the time point the recording is suspended for the last time. This event occurs when a test is stopped in the Probe. This event occurs when an MS is successfully connected. This event occurs when an MS is successfully disconnected.
Test Stop MS Connected MS Disconnected
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-93
14 Appendix
14.2.2 GSM Predefined Events

This describes the GSM predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events on the GSM network.
Packet Service Events

This describes the packet service events of the GSM. You can refer to this part when configuring the packet service events on the GSM network, and then perform the related operations. Name AttachAttem pt AttachSuc Meaning Attach attempt Attach success Description The MS attempts to attach to the packet service. If the MS receives the Attach Accept or Attach Complete message within the specified time after sending the Attach Request message, you can infer that the attaching is successful. After sending the Attach Request message, the MS receives the Attach Reject message or does not receive the Attach Accept or Attach Complete message until the Attach Request message times out. The data services such as FTP and HTTP services start to be executed, and thus the data transfer starts. The MS attempts to detach from the packet service. If the MS receives the Detach Accept message within the specified time after sending the Detach Request message, you can infer that the detaching is successful. The MS attempts to send an MMS.
AttachFail
Attach failure
Data Transfer Start DetachAtte mpt DetachSuc
Data transfer start Detach attempt Detach success MMS Sending attempt MMS sending success MMS sending failure PDP activation request PDP activation success
GSMMMS MOAttempt GSMMMS MOSuc GSMMMS MOFail PDPActivati onReq PDPActivati onSuc
The MS sends an MMS successfully.
The MS fails to send an MMS.
If the MS sends the Activate PDP Context Request message, you can infer that the PDP request is activated. If the MS receives the Activate PDP Context Accept message after sending the Activate PDP Context Request message, you can infer that the PDP activation is successful.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-94
14 Appendix
Name PDPActivati onFail
Meaning PDP activation failure PDP deactivation request PDP deactivation success Routing area update request Routing area update success Routing area update failure RAS dial attempt RAS dial success RAS hangup RAS error Session start Session end Session drop
Description If the MS does not receive the Activate PDP Context Accept message within the specified time after sending the Activate PDP Context Request message, you can infer that the PDP activation fails. The MS sends the Deactivate PDP Context Request message to request the PDP deactivation. If the MS receives the Deactivate PDP Context Accept message after sending the Deactivate PDP Context Request message, you can infer that the PDP activation is successful. The MS sends the Routing Area Update Request message to request the routing area update. If the MS receives the Routing Area Update Accept or Routing Area Update Complete message after sending the Routing Area Update Request message, you can infer that the routing area is updated successfully. If the MS does not receive the Routing Area Update message after sending the Routing Area Update Request message, you can infer that the routing area fails to be updated. The remote access service (RAS) dial is attempted. The RAS dial is successful. The RAS hangs up. The RAS dial is terminated exceptionally. The packet services such as FTP and HTTP are started. The session start events include FTP Get and FTP Put. The packet services such as FTP and HTTP are ended. Any of the following conditions indicates that the task is terminated exceptionally: l In the FTP service, the data downloading is terminated exceptionally. l In the HTTP and WAP Download services, if the cause value of the Deactivate PDP Context Request message of the MS is not Regular Deactivation, you can infer that the PDP session is dropped.
PDPDeactiv ationReq PDPDeactiv ationSuc RAUpdateR eq RAUpdateS uc
RAUpdateFa il RAS Dial Attempt RAS Dial RAS Hangup RAS Error Session Start Session End Session Drop
Session Error
Session error
The data services such as FTP and HTTP fail to be executed.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-95
14 Appendix
Voice Service Events

This describes the voice service events of the GSM. You can refer to this part when configuring the voice service events on the GSM network, and then perform the related operations. Name GSMCallAttempt (MOC) Meaning GSM mobile originating call attempt Description The MS sends the Channel Request message to request the traffic channel. The situation varying according to the cause values is MOC. MOC indicates a mobile originating call. The MS sends the Channel Request message to request the traffic channel. The situation varying according to the cause values is MTC. MTC indicates a mobile terminating call. The MS repeatedly sends the Channel Request message after sending a Channel Request message and before receiving the Immediate Assignment message. If the MS sends the Assignment Complete message after sending the Assignment command message, you can infer the GSM assignment is successful. If the MS receives the Assignment Failure message after receiving the Assignment command message, you can infer the GSM assignment fails. The outgoing call is set up successfully. The incoming call is set up successfully. The calling MS receives the Downlink Connect message or Uplink Connect Ack message, you can infer that the GSM outgoing call is established successfully. The called MS receives the Downlink Connect message or Uplink Connect Ack message, you can infer that the GSM incoming call is established successfully.
GSMCallAttempt (MTC)
GSM mobile terminating call attempt
GSMCallAttemptRetry
GSM call attempt retry
GSMAssignmentSuc
GSM assignment success
GSMAssignmentFail
GSM assignment failure
GSMOutgoingCallSetup GSMIncomingCallSetup GSMOutgoingCallEstablished
GSM outgoing call setup GSM incoming call setup GSM outgoing call establishment success
GSMIncomingCallEstablished
GSM incoming call establishment success
14-96
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name GSMOutgoingCallSetupFailRF GSMIncomingCallSetupFailRF GSMOutgoingCallSetupFailNotRF GSMIncomingCallSetupFailNotRF GSMCallCompleted
Meaning GSM outgoing call establishment failure GSM incoming call establishment failure GSM outgoing call establishment failure (not RF reason) GSM incoming call establishment failure (not RF reason) GSM call completed
Description Call abnormally ended prior to GSMOutgoingCallSetup event (RF reason). Call abnormally ended prior to GSMIncomingCallSetup event (RF reason). Call abnormally ended prior to GSMOutgoingCallSetup event (not RF reason). Call abnormally ended prior to GSMIncomingCallSetup event (not RF reason). If the MS receives the Disconnect, Release, or Release complete message, you can infer that the GSM call is complete. The call is terminated exceptionally after being established successfully. An attempted inter-cell handover in GSM. Successful inter-cell handover in GSM. An attempted inter-cell handover in GSM failed. An attempted intra-cell handover in GSM. Successful intra-cell handover in GSM. An attempted intra-cell handover in GSM failed. After the GSM call attempt event occurs, the MS receives the Immediate Assignment or Immediate Assignment Extend message to assign the stand-alone dedicated control channel (SDCCH). During the period from the successful SDCCH assignment to the call establishment, the signaling process terminated exceptionally.
GSMCallDropped GSMHandoverReq GSMHandoverSuc GSMHandoverFail GSMIntracellHandoverReq GSMIntracellHandoverSuc GSMIntracellHandoverFail GSMSDCCHAssigne d
GSM call dropped GSM inter-cell handover request GSM inter-cell handover success GSM inter-cell handover failure GSM intra-cell handover request GSM intra-cell handover success GSM intra-cell handover failure GSM SDCCH assignment success
GSMSDCCHCallDro p
GSM SDCCH call dropped
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-97
14 Appendix
Name GSMCellReselection GSMLocationUpdateSuc GSMLocationUpdateFail GSMSMSSentAttempt GSMSMSSentSuc GSMSMSSentFail GSMSMSReceived CMServiceReq CMServiceAcpt CMServiceReqRej
Meaning GSM cell reselection GSM location update success GSM location update failure GSM SMS sent attempt GSM SMS sent success GSM SMS sent failure GSM SMS received Connection management service request Connection management service accept Connection management service failure
Description The MS selects a new serving cell in idle status. If the MS receives the Location Updating Accept message, the GSM location is updated. The MS fails to update the location area code (LAC). The MS attempts to send an SMS message. The MS succeeds in sending an SMS message. The MS sends an SMS message failed. The MS succeeds in receiving an SMS message. -
14.2.3 WCDMA Predefined Events

This describes the WCDMA predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events on the WCDMA network.
Authentication Ciphering Events

This describes the authentication ciphering events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring the authentication ciphering events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related operations. Name AuthenCiph erReq Meaning Authenticati on ciphering request Description If the UE receives the Authentication AND Ciphering REQ message, you can infer that the UE requests the authentication ciphering.
14-98
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name AuthenCiph erSuc
Meaning Authenticati on ciphering success Authenticati on ciphering failure
Description If the network receives the Authentication AND Ciphering REQ message and sends the Authentication AND Ciphering Resp message, you can infer that the authentication is ciphered successfully. When any of the following situations occurs, you can infer that the authentication fails to be ciphered. l The UE receives the Authentication AND Ciphering REJ message. l The UE receives the Authentication AND Ciphering Failure message. l The UE does not receive the Authentication AND Ciphering Resp message within the specified time.
AuthenCiph erFail
Authentication Events
This describes the authentication events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring the authentication events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related operations. Name Authenticat ionReq AuthenticationRsp Meaning Authenticati on request Authenticati on success Description If the network receives the Authentication Request message, you can infer that the UE originates an authentication request. If the network receives the Authentication Request message and sends the Authentication Response message to the UE, and then the UE does not receive the Authentication Reject message within the specified time, you can infer that the UE authentication is successful. When any of the following situations occurs, you can infer that the authentication fails. l No response to the Authentication Request message is received within the specified time. l The UE receives the Authentication Failure message. l The UE receives the Authentication Reject message.
Authenticat ionFail
Authenticati on failure
Call Connection Events

This describes the call connection events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring call connection events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations. Name PagingType1
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Meaning Paging type 1
Description This is the paging event of the UE in idle status.

14-99
14 Appendix
Name PagingType2 OutgoingCallAt tempt
Meaning Paging type 2 Outgoing call attempt
Description This is the paging event of the UE in dedicated status during the concurrent service. The RRC connection request is sent, and the cause value of the RRC request is Originating Conversational Call or Emergency Call. If the UE does not receive the RRC request or the cause value of the RRC request is incorrect but receives the CM Service or Call Proceeding request, the Outgoing Call Attempt event also occurs. The RRC connection request is sent, and the cause value of the RRC request is any of the following values: l Terminating Conversational Call l Paging Type2 l Paging response
IncomingCallAt tempt
Incoming call attempt
OutgoingCallSe tupSuc IncomingCallSe tupSuc OutgoingCallSe tupFailRFReaso n IncomingCallSe tupFailRFReaso n OutgoingCallSe tupFailNotRFR eason IncomingCallSe tupFailNotRFR eason CallSetupLinkRestore OutgoingCallEs tablished IncomingCallEs tablished
Outgoing call setup success Incoming call setup success Outgoing call setup failure (RF reason) Incoming call setup failure (RF reason) Outgoing call setup failure (not RF reason) Incoming call setup failure (not RF reason) Call establishment link restored Outgoing call established Incoming call established
The outgoing call is interrupted or cancelled.
The incoming call is interrupted or cancelled.
The call reestablishment caused by the interrupted signal link during the call establishment process also is successful. The outgoing call receives the Connect message or sends the Connect Acknowledge message. The incoming call sends the Connect message or receives the Connect Acknowledge message.
14-100
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name CallDropped
Meaning Call dropped
Description l When the UE is in dedicated status and does not perform inter-system handovers, if the UE receives any of the following messages, you can infer that the call is dropped. Master Information Block message System Information1 message The RRC state is RRC Disconnected. l The UE receives the RRC Connection Release message whose cause value is RRC Abnormal Release. l The UE receives the CC Disconnect or CC Release Complete message whose cause value is not any of the following values: Normal Call Clearing Normal Unspecified User alerting no answer User busy Call rejected Destination out of order
CallCompleted LinkRestoreAttempt LinkRestoreSuc
Call completed Link restored attempt Link restored success
The call is connected and ended properly. l The RRC state received by the UE is CELL_FACH. l The UE sends the Cell Update message. l The RRC state sent to the UE is CELL_DCH. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message. The reported RRC state is RRC_Disconnect. The UE sends the RRC Connection Request message whose cause value is Originating Low Priority Signaling and then receives the CM Service Request message within the specified time. The UE receives the CM Service Request message.
LinkRestoreFail WCDMASMSS entAttempt
Link restored failure WCDMA SMS sending attempt WCDMA SMS sending success WCDMA SMS reception attempt WCDMA SMS reception success
WCDMASMSS ent WCDMASMSR eceiveAttempt
The UE sends the Paging Type1 or Paging Type2 message and then receives the RRC Connection Request message whose cause value is Terminating Low Priority Signaling within the specified time. After receiving the Paging Response message, the UE receives the Downlink CP-ACK message.
WCDMASMSR eceived
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-101
14 Appendix
Name RAS Dial Attempt RAS Dial RAS Hangup RAS Error Session Start Session End Session Drop CMServiceReq
Meaning RAS dial attempt RAS dial success RAS hangup RAS error Session start Session end Session dropped Connection management service request Connection management service accept Connection management service failure
Description The RAS dial is attempted. The RAS dial is successful. The RAS hangs up. The RAS dial is terminated exceptionally. The packet services such as FTP and HTTP are started. This event occurs when all data transmission or reception are complete. -
CMServiceAcpt
CMServiceReq Rej
Security Events
This describes the security events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring security events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related operations. Name SecurityMo deReq SecurityMo deSuc Meaning Security mode request Security mode success Description The UE sends the Security Mode Command message to request for the security mode. If the UE receives the Security Mode Command message, sends the Security Mode Complete message, and does not receive the Security Mode Fail message, you can infer that the security mode is successful. When any of the following situations occurs, you can infer that the security mode fails. l The UE receives the Security Mode Failure message. l The UE does not send the Security Mode Complete message within the specified time.
SecurityMo deFail
Security mode failure
14-102
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
GMM Process Events

This describes the GPRS Mobility Management (GMM) process events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring the GMM process events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related operations. Name AttachSuc Meaning Attach success Attach failure PDP activation request PDP activation success PDP activation failure Detach Routing area update request Routing area update success Routing area update failure Description If the UE receives the Attach Accept or sends the Attach Complete message, you can infer that the attaching is successful. The UE does not receive the Attach Accept message or does not send the Attach Complete message. If the UE sends the Activate PDP Context Request message, you can infer that the PDP request is activated. If the UE receives the Activate PDP Context Accept message after sending the Activate PDP Context Request message, you can infer that the PDP activation is successful. If the UE does not receive the Activate PDP Context Accept message after sending the Activate PDP Context Request message, you can infer that the PDP activation fails. If the UE receives the Detach Accept message, you can infer that the detaching is successful. The UE sends the Routing Area Update Request message to request the routing area update. If the UE receives the Routing Area Update Complete message after sending the Routing Area Update Request message, you can infer that the routing area is updated successfully. When any of the following situations occurs, you can infer that the routing area fails to be updated. l The UE receives the Routing Area Update Reject message. l The UE does not receive the Routing Area Update Accept, Routing Area Update Complete, or GPRS Suspension Request message.
AttachFail PDPActivat ionReq PDPActivat ionSuc PDPActivat ionFail Detach RAUpdate Req RAUpdateS uc RAUpdateF ail
Handover Events
This describes the handover events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring the soft handover and hard handover events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related operations.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-103
14 Appendix
Name SoftHOAttempt
Meaning Soft handover attempt Soft handover Soft handover failure
Description The UE receives the ActiveSet Update message.
SoftHO SoftHOFail
The UE sends the ActiveSet Update Complete message. l The UE receives the ActiveSet Update message. l The UE receives the ActiveSet Update message. l After receiving the ActiveSet Update message, the UE does not send the ActiveSet Update Complete message within the specified time. The UE sends the Measurement Report 1A message. The UE sends the Measurement Report 2A message. The UE sends the Measurement Report 3A message. The UE sends the Measurement Report 4A message. The UE sends the Measurement Report 1B message. The UE sends the Measurement Report 2B message. The UE sends the Measurement Report 3B message. The UE sends the Measurement Report 4B message. The UE sends the Measurement Report 1C message. The UE sends the Measurement Report 2C message. The UE sends the Measurement Report 3C message. The UE sends the Measurement Report 1D message. The UE sends the Measurement Report 2D message. The UE sends the Measurement Report 3D message. The UE sends the Measurement Report 1E message. The UE sends the Measurement Report 2E message. The UE sends the Measurement Report 1F message. The UE sends the Measurement Report 2F message. The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message within the fixed time.
Event1A Event2A Event3A Event4A Event1B Event2B Event3B Event4B Event1C Event2C Event3C Event1D Event2D Event3D Event1E Event2E Event1F Event2F PhChannelRecfgSuc
Event 1A Event 2A Event 3A Event 4A Event 1B Event 2B Event 3B Event 4B Event 1C Event 2C Event 3C Event 1D Event 2D Event 3D Event 1E Event 2E Event 1F Event 2F Physical channel reconfigurat ion success
14-104
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name PhChannelRecfgFail
Meaning Physical channel reconfigurat ion failure Transport channel reconfigurat ion success Transport channel reconfigurat ion failure Radio bearer reconfigurat ion success Radio bearer reconfigurat ion failure Radio bearer release RB release failure Intrafrequency hard handover
Description The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Fail message in the fixed time or the event times out.
TrChannelRecfgSuc
The UE sends the Transport Channel Reconfiguration Complete message within the fixed time.
TrChannelRecfgFail
The UE receives the Transport Channel Reconfiguration Fail message within the fixed time or the event times out.
RBReconfigSuc
The UE sends the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration Complete message within the fixed time.
RBReconfigFail
The UE receives the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration Failed message within the fixed time or the event times out.
RBRelease
The UE sends the Radio Bearer Release Complete message. The UE receives the Radio Bearer Release Fail message within the fixed time or does not send the Radio Bearer Release Complete message. The UE receives any of the following messages sent from the network: l Radio Bearer Reconfiguration l Transport Channel Reconfiguration l Physical Channel Reconfiguration If the downlink frequency of the cell FrequencyInfo of this message is the same as that of the current active set, the primary scrambling code of the cell Primary CPICH info is not included in the current active set, and the UE gives the response to corresponding complete message, the intra-frequency hard handover is successful.
RBReleaseFail
IntraFreqHHO
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-105
14 Appendix
Name IntraFreqHHOFa il
Meaning Intrafrequency hard handover failure
Description The UE receives any of the following messages sent from the network: l Radio Bearer Reconfiguration l Transport Channel Reconfiguration l Physical Channel Reconfiguration If the downlink frequency of the cell FrequencyInfo of this message is the same as that of the current active set, the primary scrambling code of the cell Primary CPICH info is not included in the current active set, and the UE gives the response to corresponding failure message, the intra-frequency hard handover fails.
InterFreqHHO
Interfrequency hard handover
The UE receives any of the following messages sent from the network: l Radio Bearer Reconfiguration l Transport Channel Reconfiguration l Physical Channel Reconfiguration If the downlink frequency of the cell FrequencyInfo of this message is different from that of the current active set, and the UE gives the response to corresponding complete message, the inter-frequency hard handover is successful.
InterFreqHHOFa il
Interfrequency hard handover failure
The UE receives any of the following messages sent from the network: l Radio Bearer Reconfiguration l Transport Channel Reconfiguration l Physical Channel Reconfiguration If the downlink frequency of the cell FrequencyInfo of this message is different from that of the current active set, and the UE gives the response to corresponding failure message, the inter-frequency hard handover fails.
IntraFrequencyCellReselection
Intrafrequency cell reselection Interfrequency cell reselection Cell reselection connection mode
In the idle state, the UE performs cell reselection between intra-frequency cells.
InterFrequencyCellReselection
In the idle state, the UE performs cell reselection between inter-frequency cells.
CellReselectionConnectMode
The UE receives the Cell Reselection cause message.
14-106
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name CSConnectionH O2Gto3GAttemp t
Meaning CS handover attempt from 2G to 3G CS handover succeeded from 2G to 3G CS handover failed from 2G to 3G CS handover attempt from 3G to 2G CS handover succeeded from 3G to 2G CS handover failed from 3G to 2G PS handover attempt from 2G to 3G PS handover succeeded from 2G to 3G PS handover failed from 2G to 3G
Description If the UE receives the (GSM RR DL_DCCH) Inter System To UTRAN Handover Command message, you can infer that the UE requests the CS handover from 2G to 3G. After receiving the handover attempt message, if the UE sends the (RRC UL_DCCH) Handover to UTRAN Complete message within the specified time, you can infer that the CS handover from 2G to 3G is successful. After receiving the handover attempt message, if the UE receives the Handover Failure message within the specified time or does not send the Handover Complete message, you can infer that the CS handover from 2G to 3G fails. If the UE receives the (RRC DL_DCCH) Handover From UTRAN Command-GSM message, you can infer that the UE requests the CS handover from 3G to 2G.
CSConnectionH O2Gto3GSuc
CSConnectionH O2Gto3GFail
CSConnectionH O3Gto2GAttemp t
CSConnectionH O3Gto2GSuc
After receiving the handover attempt message, if the UE sends the Handover Complete message within the specified time, you can infer that the CS handover from 3G to 2G is successful. After receiving the handover attempt message, if the UE receives the Handover from UTRAN Failure message within the specified time or does not send the Handover Complete message, you can infer that the CS handover from 3G to 2G fails. The UE sends the RRC Connection Request message to request for the PS handover from 2G to 3G.
CSConnectionH O3Gto2GFail
PSConnectionH O2Gto3GAttemp t PSConnectionH O2Gto3GSuc
After receiving the handover attempt message, if the UE sends the RB Setup Complete message within the specified time, you can infer that the PS handover from 2G to 3G is successful. After receiving the handover attempt message, if the UE receives the Routing Area Update Reject (NAS GMM) message within the specified time or does not receive the RB Setup Complete message, you can infer that the PS handover from 2G to 3G fails.
PSConnectionH O2Gto3GFail
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-107
14 Appendix
Name PSConnectionH O3Gto2GAttemp t PSConnectionH O3Gto2GSuc
Meaning PS handover attempt from 3G to 2G PS handover succeeded from 3G to 2G PS handover failed from 3G to 2G
Description If the UE sends the (RRC DL_DCCH) Cell Change Order From UTRAN message, you can infer that the UE requests for the PS handover from 3G to 2G. After receiving the handover attempt message, if the UE receives the (NAS GMM) Routing Area Update Accept message or sends the RB Setup Complete message within the specified time, you can infer that the PS handover from 3G to 2G is successful. After receiving the handover attempt message, if the UE receives the (RRC DL_DCCH) Cell Change Order From UTRAN Failure message within the specified time or does not send the Routing Area Update Accept/Routing Area Update Complete message, you can infer that the PS handover from 3G to 2G fails. If the UE receives the Location Update Accept message after the WtoGIdle occurs, you can infer that the cell from 3G to 2G is reselected. If the UE receives the Location Update Accept message after the GtoWIdle occurs, you can infer that the cell from 2G to 3G is reselected. Before the hard handover (including the intra-frequency hard handover, inter-frequency hard handover, and intersystem hard HO), the network sends the Measurement Control message to activate the compression mode, and then performs the measurement. The network sends the Measurement control message to notify the UE of activating the compression mode, and then performs the measurement before hard handover. If the cell measured in compression mode does not meet the requirements for the hard handover, the network sends the Measurement Control message to notify the UE of deactivating the compression mode within the specified time, and then activates the compression mode again. If the cell is qualified, the hard handover is performed. The UE automatically deactivates the compression mode after the hard handover is successful.
PSConnectionH O3Gto2GFail
CellResel3Gto2G
Cell reselection from 3G to 2G Cell reselection from 2G to 3G Compressio n mode activation
CellResel2Gto3G
CompressedModeActivation
CompressedMod eDeActivation
Compressio n mode deactivation
HSDPA Events
This describes the HSDPA events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring HSDPA events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations.
14-108
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name H2HIntraFreqCellChangeSuc
Meaning HSDPA to HSDPA intrafrequency serving cell update success
Description The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the network and then sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message to the network. l The UE receives the Radio bearer reconfiguration message from the network and then sends the Radio bearer reconfiguration complete message to the network. l The UE receives the Activeset update message from the network and then sends the Activeset update complete message to the network.
H2R99IntraFreqSHOSuc
HSDPA to R99 intrafrequency soft handover success
H2R99IntraFreqHHOSuc
HSDPA to R99 intrafrequency hard handover success
l The UE receives the Radio bearer reconfiguration message from the network and then sends the Radio bearer reconfiguration complete message to the network. l The UE receives the Physical channel reconfiguration message from the network and then sends the Physical channel reconfiguration complete message to the network.
R992HIntraFreqSHOSuc
R99 to HSDPA intrafrequency soft handover success
The UE receives the Radio bearer reconfiguration message from the network and then sends the Radio bearer reconfiguration complete message to the network. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the network and then sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message to the network. l The UE receives the Radio bearer reconfiguration message from the network and then sends the Radio bearer reconfiguration complete message to the network.
R992HIntraFreqHHOSuc
R99 to HSDPA intrafrequency hard handover success
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-109
14 Appendix
Name H2HIntraFreqCellChangeFail
Meaning HSDPA to HSDPA intrafrequency serving cell update failure
Description The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the network and does not send the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message to the network. The UE receives the Radio bearer reconfiguration message from the network and does not send the Radio bearer reconfiguration complete message to the network. l The UE receives the Radio bearer reconfiguration message from the network and then sends the Radio bearer reconfiguration complete message to the network. l The UE receives the Physical channel reconfiguration message from the network and sends the Physical channel reconfiguration failed message to the network or does not send the Physical channel reconfiguration complete message to the network within the specified time.
H2R99IntraFreqSHOFail
HSDPA to R99 intrafrequency soft handover failure
H2R99IntraFreqHHOFail
HSDPA to R99 intrafrequency hard handover failure
R992HIntraFreqSHOFail
R99 to HSDPA intrafrequency soft handover failure
The UE receives the Radio bearer reconfiguration message from the network and does not send the Radio bearer reconfiguration complete message to the network. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the network and then sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message to the network. l The UE receives the Radio bearer reconfiguration message from the network and sends the Radio bearer reconfiguration failed message to the network. Alternatively, the UE does not send the Radio bearer reconfiguration complete message to the network within the specified time.
R992HIntraFreqHHOFail
R99 to HSDPA intrafrequency hard handover failure
14-110
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name H2GHHOSuc
Meaning HSDPA to 2G hard handover success
Description l The UE receives the Cell Change order from UTRAN message from the UTRAN network. l The UE receives the Routing Area Update Accept message from the UTRAN network.
H2GHHOFail
HSDPA to 2G hard handover failure
l The UE receives the Cell Change order from UTRAN message from the UTRAN network. l The UE receives the system message that cannot be received from the network in DCH state. l The UE receives the GSM system message, indicating the idle status from the network. l The UE sends the Cell Change order from UTRAN fail message to the network.
H2HInterFreqCellChangeSuc H2HInterFreqCellChangeFail H2R99InterFreqHHOSuc H2R99InterFreqHHOFail R992HInterFreqHHOSuc R992HInterFreqHHOFail CompressedModeActivation
HSDPA to HSDPA interfrequency serving cell update success HSDPA to HSDPA interfrequency serving cell update failure HSDPA to R99 interfrequency hard handover success HSDPA to R99 interfrequency hard handover failure R99 to HSDPA interfrequency hard handover success R99 to HSDPA interfrequency hard handover failure Compression mode activation
Before the hard handover (including the intra-frequency hard handover, inter-frequency hard handover, and inter-system hard HO), the network sends the Measurement Control message to activate the compression mode, and then performs the measurement.
14-111
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name CompressedModeDeActivation
Meaning Compression mode deactivation
Description The network sends the Measurement control message to notify the UE of activating the compression mode, and then performs the measurement before hard handover. If the cell measured in compression mode does not meet the requirements for the hard handover, the network sends the Measurement Control message to notify the UE of deactivating the compression mode within the specified time, and then activates the compression mode again. If the cell is qualified, the hard handover is performed. The UE automatically deactivates the compression mode after the hard handover is successful.
HSUPA Events
This describes the HSUPA events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring HSUPA events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related operations. Name CellChangeUtoUBySHOAttempt Meaning HSUPA serving cell update attempt triggered by soft handovers Description l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) serving cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message send by the RNC. l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE reports the measurement report on the 1D event and obtains the primary scrambling code of the reported cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the RNC. CellChangeUtoUByInterHHOAttempt HSUPA serving cell update attempt triggered by interfrequency hard handovers l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the RNC.
CellChangeUtoUByIntraHHOAttempt
HSUPA serving cell update attempt triggered by intrafrequency hard handovers
14-112
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name CellChangeUtoUBySHOSuc
Meaning HSUPA serving cell update success triggered by soft handovers
Description l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message to the SRNC.
CellChangeUtoUByIntraHHOSuc
HSUPA serving cell update success triggered by intrafrequency hard handovers
l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE reports the measurement report on the 1D event and obtains the primary scrambling code of the reported cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message to the SRNC.
CellChangeUtoUByInterHHOSuc
HSUPA serving cell update success triggered by interfrequency hard handovers
l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message to the SRNC. l The active set has multiple links. One cell is the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Failure message to the SRNC.
CellChangeUtoUBySHOFail
HSUPA serving cell update failure triggered by soft handovers
CellChangeUtoUByIntraHHOFail
HSUPA serving cell update failure triggered by intrafrequency hard handovers
l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE reports the measurement report on the 1D event and obtains the primary scrambling code of the reported cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Failure message to the SRNC.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-113
14 Appendix
Name CellChangeUtoUByInterHHOFail
Meaning HSUPA serving cell update failure triggered by interfrequency hard handovers
Description l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Failure message to the SRNC. The UE receives the Cell Change Order from UTRAN message from the UTRAN network. l The UE receives the Cell Change Order from UTRAN message from the UTRAN network. l The UE sends the Routing Area Update Accept Complete message to the GPRS network. l The UE receives the Cell Change Order from UTRAN message from the UTRAN network. l The UE receives the system message of the GSM or WCDMA, returns to the UTRAN network and responds the Cell Change Order from UTRAN Failure message, or receives no message indicating success or failure in the fixed time. l The UE sends the RRC Connection Setup Request message to the UTRAN network. l The UE sends the Routing Area Update Accept Complete message to the UTRAN network. l The UE sends the RRC Connection Setup Request message to the UTRAN network. l The UE receives the system message of the GSM or WCDMA, receives the RRC Connection Setup Request message, receives the Routing Area Update Failure message, or does not receive the response of the RRC Connection Setup message. l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration message from the RNC.
PSConnectionHO UtoGPRSAttempt PSConnectionHO UtoGPRSSuc
Handover attempt between HSUPA and GPRS Handover success between HSUPA and GPRS
PSConnectionHO UtoGPRSFail
Handover failure between HSUPA and GPRS
PSConnectionHOGPRStoUSuc
GPRS to HSUPA inter-system handover success
PSConnectionHOGPRStoUFail
GPRS to HSUPA inter-system handover failure
ChannelChangeIn terCellIntraFreEtoDAttempt
HSUPA to R99 inter-cell intrafrequency hard handover attempt
14-114
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name ChannelChangeIn terCellIntraFreEtoDSuc
Meaning HSUPA to R99 inter-cell intrafrequency hard handover success
Description l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration Complete message to the SRNC.
ChannelChangeIn terCellIntraFreEtoDFail
HSUPA to R99 inter-cell intrafrequency hard handover failure
l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration Failure message to the SRNC.
ChannelChangeIn terCellInterFreEtoDAttempt
HSUPA to R99 inter-cell interfrequency hard handover attempt HSUPA to R99 inter-cell interfrequency hard handover success
l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration Complete message to the SRNC.
ChannelChangeIn terCellInterFreEtoDSuc
ChannelChangeIn terCellInterFreEtoDFail
HSUPA to R99 inter-cell interfrequency hard handover failure
ChannelChangeIn traCellEtoDAttempt
HSUPA to R99 intra-cell channel type change attempt
l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration message from the RNC.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-115
14 Appendix
Name ChannelChangeIn traCellEtoDSuc
Meaning HSUPA to R99 intra-cell channel type change success
Description l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration Complete message to the SRNC.
ChannelChangeIn traCellEtoDFail
HSUPA to R99 intra-cell channel type change failure
ChannelChangeIn traCellDtoEAttempt
R99 to HSUPA intra-cell channel type change attempt R99 to HSUPA intra-cell channel type change success
l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration Complete message to the SRNC.
ChannelChangeIn traCellDtoESuc
ChannelChangeIn traCellDtoEFail
R99 to HSUPA intra-cell channel type change failure
ChannelChangeEtoFAttempt
EDCH to FACH channel change attempt
l The latest active set of the UE has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the network.
14-116
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name ChannelChangeEtoFSuc
Meaning EDCH to FACH channel change success
Description l The latest active set of the UE has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the network. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message to the network.
ChannelChangeEtoFFail
EDCH to FACH channel change failure
l The latest active set of the UE has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the network. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Failure message to the network and receives no corresponding message indicating success or failure in the fixed time.
ChannelChangeFtoEAttempt
FACH to EDCH channel change attempt
l The latest active set of the UE has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the network.
ChannelChangeFtoESuc
FACH to EDCH channel change success
l The latest active set of the UE has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the network. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message to the network.
ChannelChangeFtoEFail
FACH to EDCH channel change failure
l The latest active set of the UE has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the network. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Failure message to the network and receives no corresponding message indicating success or failure in the fixed time.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-117
14 Appendix
MM Process Events
This describes the mobility management (MM) process events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring the MM process events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related operations. Name LAUpdateR eq LAUpdateS uc LAUpdateF ail Meaning Location update request Location update success Location update failure Description The UE sends the Location Updating Request message to update its location. If the UE receives the Location Updating Accept message, you can infer that the location is updated successfully. If any of the following cases occurs, you can infer that the location fails to be updated. l The UE receives the Location Update Reject message. l If the UE does not receive the Location Update Accept message within the specified time. IMSIDetac h IdentityReq IdentityRsp International mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) detach Identity request Identity response If the UE sends the IMSI Detach Indication message, you can infer that the IMSI detach occurs. The UE sends the Identity Request message to request the identity identification. If the UE sends the Identity Request message and receives the Identity Response message, you can infer that the identity identification is successful.
MMS Events
This describes the MMS events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring MMS events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations.
14-118
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name MMSMOAtte mpt
Meaning MMS mobile originating (MO) attempt
Description The following process is referred to as an MMSMOAttempt event. 1. The UE sends the RRC Connection Request message. 2. The UE sends the RRC Connection Setup Complete message. 3. The UE sends the Service Request message. 4. The UE sends the Activate PDP Context Request message within the specified time. 5. The UE receives the Activate PDP Context Accept message.
MMSMOSuc
MMS MO sending success
The following process is referred to as an MMSMOSuc event. 1. After the MMSMOAttempt event occurs, the UE sends the Deactivate PDP Context Request message during the period from the time when the service is ended to the time when the UE receives the system message. 2. The UE receives the Deactivate PDP Context Accept and RRC Connect Release messages, and the Release Cause value of the RRC Connect Release message is Normal Event. 3. The UE sends the RRC Connection Release Complete message.
MMSMOFail
MMS MO sending failure
After the MMSMOAttempt event occurs, during the period from the time when the service is ended to the time when the UE receives the system message, if any of the following situations occurs, the MO fails to sent the MMS. l The UE does not send the Deactivate PDP Context Request message. l The UE does not receive the Deactivate PDP Context Accept message. l The UE receives the RRC Connect Release signaling but the Release Cause value of the RRC Connection Release message is not Normal Event.
Radio Bearer Establishment Events

This describes the radio bearer (RB) events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring RB events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-119
14 Appendix
Name RBSetupRe q RBSetupSu c RBSetupFai l
Meaning RB setup request RB setup success RB setup failure
Description The UE receives the Radio Bearer Setup message to request the RB setup. If the UE sends the Radio Bearer Setup Complete message, you can infer that the RB is set up successfully. When any of the following cases occurs, you can infer that the RB setup fails. l The UE receives the Radio Bearer Setup Failure message. l The UE does not receive the Radio Bearer Setup Complete message within the specified time.
RRC Events
This describes the radio resource control (RRC) events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring RRC events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations. Name RRCSetup Req RRCSetupS uc RRCSetupF ail RRCConne ctionRel Meaning RRC connection setup request RRC connection setup success RRC connection setup failure RRC connection release RRC connection abnormal release Description The UE sends the RRC Connection Request message to the network to request for the RRC connection setup. If the UE sends the RRC Connection Setup Complete message to the network, you can infer that the RRC connection setup is successful. The UE sends the RRC Connection Request message to the network and does not receive the RRC Connection Setup message within the specified time. The UE receives the RRC Connection Release message whose cause value is Normal Event or User Inactivity. Alternatively, the UE sends the RRC Connection Release Complete message. When any of the following situations occurs, you can infer that the RRC connection is released exceptionally. l The UE receives the RRC Connection Release message whose cause value is not Normal Event or User Inactivity. l If RRC state is set to CELL_DCH and the UE does not receive RRC Connection Release, the received RRC state is Disconnected, Master Information Block, System Information 1, or System Information 2. RRCState RRC State This event occurs when the UE sends the RRC State packets.
RRCConne ctionAbnor mal
14-120
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
14.2.4 CDMA Predefined Events

This describes the CDMA predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events on the CDMA network, and then perform the related operations. The system defines the following states of the MS: l l l INITorIDLE: indicates the state combining the initial state with the idle state. SYS_ACC: indicates the system access state. TC: indicates the traffic state.
EV-DO Events
This describes events of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. You can refer to this part when configuring events on the CDMA2000 EV-DO network, and then perform the related operations. Name DOATConnectR eq DOATConnectSu c DOATConnectFa il Meaning AT connection request AT connection success AT connection failure Description The AT sends the Connection Request message on the access channel. The AT sends the Traffic Channel Complete message on the reverse traffic channel. When any of the following situations occurs, you can infer that the connection fails. l The AT receives the Connection Deny message on the control channel. l The AT does not send the Traffic Channel Complete message within the specified time after sending the Connection Request message. DOANConnectR eq DOANConnectS uc DOANConnectF ail AN connection request AN connection success AN connection failure The AN sends the Connection Request message on the access channel. The AN sends the Traffic Channel Complete message on the reverse traffic channel. When any of the following situations occurs, you can infer that the connection fails. l The AN receives the Connection Deny message on the control channel. l The AN does not send the Traffic Channel Complete message within the specified time after sending the Connection Request message.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-121
14 Appendix
Name DOANNormalRe lease
Meaning AN normal release
Description When any of the following situations occurs, you can infer that the release is normal. l The AN receives the Connection Close message on the forward traffic channel. l The AT gives the response to the Connection Close message on the reverse traffic channel.
DOATNormalRe lease DO-CallDrop DOReverseSoftH OReq DOReverseSoftH OSuc DOReverseSoftH OFail DOSessionReq DOSessionSuc
AT normal release
The AT sends the Connection Close message on the reverse traffic channel. The AN sends the Traffic Channel Assignment message on the control channel or on the forward traffic channel. The AT sends the Traffic Channel Complete message. On the reverse traffic channel, the AT does not receive the Traffic Channel Complete message corresponding to the Traffic Channel Assignment sent from the AN within the specified time. An EV-DO session request occurs. An EV-DO session attempt completed successfully.
Call dropped Reverse soft handoff request Reverse soft handoff success Reverse soft handoff failure
Session request Session success
MMS Events (1x)

This describes the MMS events of the CDMA2000 1x. You can refer to this part when configuring the MMS on the CDMA2000 1x network, and then perform the related operations. Name 1xMMSESendReq Meaning MMS sending request Description In idle status, the MS sends an Origination Message, and then parses it to determine whether this call is about the MMS service. If yes, the MS requests for sending MMSs. In sync status, the MS sends the Service Connect Complete Message. The MS originates an Order Release message or receives an Order Release message from the mobile switching center (MSC).
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
1xMMSESendCon 1xMMSESendCompl ete
MMS sending connected MMS sending complete
14-122
14 Appendix
Packet Service Events (1x)

This describes the packet service events of the CDMA2000 1x. You can refer to this part when configuring the PS events on the CDMA2000 1x network, and then perform the related operations. Name 1xPSOutgoing CallReq 1xPSOutgoing CallSuc Meaning PS outgoing call request PS outgoing call success Description In INIT or IDLE status, the MS sends an Origination Message, and then parses it to determine whether this call is about the PS service. If yes, the MS requests the PS outgoing call. After originating an outgoing call request for the PS services, if the MS receives any of the following log packets in SYS_ACC status, you can infer that the PS outgoing call is successful. l Service Connect Completion Message in the log packet of the Reverse Link Channel Traffic l Diagnostic packet in TC status 1xPSOutgoing CallFail PS outgoing call failure After originating an outgoing call request for the PS services, if the MS receives any of the following log packets in SYS_ACC status, you can infer that the PS outgoing call is failed. l Log packet of the Sync Channel l Log packet of the Paging Channel l Diagnostic packet in INIT or IDLE status 1xPSCallDrop ped PS call dorpped After originating an outgoing call request for the PS services, if the MS receives any of the following log packets and does not receive or originate the Release Order message before receiving the log packet, you can infer that the PS call is dropped. l Log packet of the Sync Channel l Log packet of the Paging Channel l Diagnostic packet in INIT or IDLE status 1xPSCallCom pleted PS call completed In TC status, if the MS originates a Release Order and the BSS also originates a Release Order, you can infer that the PS call is complete.
SMS Events (1x)

This describes the SMS events of the CDMA2000 1x. You can refer to this part when configuring the SMS events on the CDMA2000 1x network, and then perform the related operations.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-123
14 Appendix
Name 1xSMSSentReq
Meaning SMS sending request
Description In idle status, the MS sends an Origination Message, and then parses it to determine whether this call is about the SMS service. If yes, the MS requests for sending SMSs. In sync status, the MS sends the Service Connect Complete Message. In dedicated status, the MS sends the Data Burst Message. The MS or MSC sends the Order Release message.
1xSMSSendCon 1x-SMSSend 1xSMSSendComp lete 1xSMSReceiveRe q 1xSMSReceiveCo n 1x-SMSReceive 1xSMSReceiveCo mplete
SMS sending connected SMS sending SMS sending complete SMS reception request SMS reception connected SMS received SMS reception complete
In idle status, the MS receives the Service Connect Complete message. In sync status, the MS sends the Service Connect Complete Message. In dedicated status, the MS receives the Data Burst Message. The MS or MSC sends the Order Release message.
Voice Service Events (1x)

This describes the voice service events of the CDMA2000 1x. You can refer to this part when configuring the CS voice service events on the CDMA2000 1x network, and then perform the related operations. Name 1xCSOutgoingCallReq 1xCSOutgoingCallSuc Meaning CS outgoing call request Description In INIT or IDLE status, the MS sends an Origination Message, and then parses it to determine whether this call is about the CS service. If yes, the MS requests the CS outgoing call. After originating an outgoing call request for the CS services, if the MS receives any of the following information in SYS_ACC status, you can infer that the CS outgoing call is successful: l Service Connect Completion Message in the log packet of the Reverse Link Channel Traffic l Diagnostic packet in TC status
CS outgoing call success
14-124
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name 1xCSOutgoingCallFail
Meaning CS outgoing call failure
Description After originating an outgoing call request for the CS services, if the MS receives any of the following log packets in SYS_ACC status, you can infer that the CS outgoing call is failed. l Log packet of the Sync Channel l Log packet of the Paging Channel l Diagnostic packet in INIT or IDLE status
1xCSIncomingCallReq 1xCSIncomingCallSuc
CS incoming call request
In INIT or IDLE status, the MS sends a Paging Response Message, and then parses it to determine whether this call is about the CS service. If yes, the MS requests the CS incoming call. After the CS incoming call request event occurs, if the MS receives any of the following information, you can infer that the CS incoming call is successful. l Service Connect Completion Message in the log packet of the Reverse Link Channel Traffic l Diagnostic packet in TC status
CS incoming call success
1xCSIncomingCallFail
CS incoming call failure
After the CS incoming call request event occurs, if the MS receives any of the following log packets, you can infer that the CS incoming call is failed. l Log packet of the Sync Channel l Log packet of the Paging Channel l Diagnostic packet in INIT or IDLE status
1xCSCallDropped
CS call dropped
After originating an outgoing call request for the CS services, if the MS receives any of the following log packets and does not receive or send the Release Order message before receiving the log packet, you can infer that the CS call is dropped. l Log packet of the Sync Channel l Log packet of the Paging Channel l Diagnostic packet in INIT or IDLE status
1xCSCallCompleted
CS call completed
In TC status, if the MS sends a Release Order message and the base station subsystem (BSS) also sends a Release Order message, you can infer that the CS call is complete. The request for adding, deleting, or replacing pilots in the active set occurs. When pilots are replaced, the number of pilots in the active set must be greater than one.
1xSoftHandoffReq
Soft handoff request
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-125
14 Appendix
Name 1xSoftHandoffSuc
Meaning Soft handoff success
Description The pilots in the active set are added, deleted, or replaced successfully. When pilots are replaced, the number of pilots in the active set must be greater than one. The pilots in the active set fail to be added, deleted, or replaced. When pilots are replaced, the number of pilots in the active set must be greater than one. Refers to the handoff in traffic state to another frequency or a different band. Refers to the successful handoff in traffic state to another frequency or a different band. Refers to the failed handoff in traffic state to another frequency or a different band. Refers to the handoff in traffic state to the same frequency. Refers to the successful handoff in traffic state to the same frequency. Refers to the failed handoff in traffic state to the same frequency.
1xSoftHandoffFail 1xInterFreqHandoffReq 1x-InterFreqHandoffSuc 1x-InterFreqHandoffFail 1xIntraFreqHandoffReq 1x-IntraFreqHandoffSuc 1x-IntraFreqHandoffFail
Soft handoff failure Inter-frequency hard handoff request Inter-frequency hard handoff success Inter-frequency hard handoff failure Intra-frequency hard handoff request Intra-frequency hard handoff success Intra-frequency hard handoff failure
14.2.5 WiMAX Predefined Events

This section describes the predefined events in the WiMAX network. You can refer to this section when configuring predefined events in the WiMAX network. Name WXBSDeREGSuc WX-BSDSAFail WX-BSDSAReq WX-BSDSASuc Meaning Base station (BS) out of service success BS service flow setup failure BS service flow setup request BS service flow setup success Description The BS is out of service. The service flow setup fails. The BS initiates a service flow setup request. The service flow setup is successful.
14-126
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name WX-BSDSCFail WX-BSDSCReq WX-BSDSCSuc WX-BSDSDFail WX-BSDSDReq WX-BSDSDSuc WXBSEnterIdleFail WXBSEnterIdleReq WXBSEnterIdleSuc WX-Drop WX-DSAFail WX-DSAReq WX-DSASuc WX-HOCancel
Meaning BS service flow change failure BS service flow change request BS service flow change success BS service flow deletion failure BS service flow deletion request BS service flow deletion success BS entering idle state failure BS entering idle state request BS entering idle state success MS call drop at the data link layer Dynamic service addition failure Dynamic service addition request Dynamic service addition success Handover cancellation
Description The service flow change fails. The BS initiates a service flow change request. The service flow change is successful. The service flow deletion fails. The BS initiates a service flow deletion request. The service flow deletion is successful. The BS fails to initiate the state conversion of an MS to idle state. The BS initiates a request for triggering the state conversion of an MS to idle state. The BS successfully initiates the state conversion of an MS to idle state. Signal loss occurs on an MS. The service flow allocation fails. The MS initiates a request for the service flow allocation. The service flow allocation is successful. After sending a handover request, the MS sends a MOB_HO-IND message to cancel the handover. After sending a handover request, the MS does not receive a Ranging response message or sends a MOB_HO-IND message with the cause value of rejection. After sending a MOB_MSHO-REQ message to the BS, the MS receives a MOB_BSHO-RSP message from the BS or sends a Ranging request for handover.
WX-HOFail
Handover failure
WX-HOReq
Handover request
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-127
14 Appendix
Name WX-HOSuc
Meaning Handover success
Description After MS sends a handover request, a new BS serves as the serving BS and services are not disrupted. The MS fails to perform location update.
WXLocationUpdateFail WXLocationUpdateReq WXLocationUpdateSuc WXMSDeREGReq WXMSDeREGSuc WX-MSDSAFail WX-MSDSAReq WX-MSDSASuc WX-MSDSCFail WX-MSDSCReq WX-MSDSCSuc WX-MSDSDFail WX-MSDSDReq WX-MSDSDSuc WXMSEnterIdleFail WXMSEnterIdleReq
MS location update failure
MS location update request
The BS initiates a request for MS location update. The MS performs location update successfully. The MS requests for out of service. The MS is out of service. -
MS location update success
MS request for out of service MS out of service success MS service flow setup failure MS service flow setup request MS service flow setup success MS service flow change failure MS service flow change request MS service flow change success MS service flow deletion failure MS service flow deletion request MS service flow deletion success MS entering idle state failure MS entering idle state request
14-128
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name WXMSEnterIdleSuc WXMSExitIdleFail WXMSExitIdleReq WXMSExitIdleSuc WXNetEntryAttempt WX-NetEntryFail
Meaning MS entering idle state success MS exiting idle state failure MS exiting idle state request MS exiting idle state success Network access attempt
Description The MS sends an RNG-REQ (initial network access) message to the BS to request for accessing the network. The MS fails to access the network when the WX-RNGFail, WX-SBCFail, WXPKMFail, and WX-REGFail events occur or the MS receives an RNG-REQ message before the service flow allocation is successful. MS access success refers to that the MS registers on the BTS before the service stream is allocated successfully. The MS receives a PKM-RSP (Fail) message. The specified MS initiates an authentication request for network access during the basic capability negotiation. The MS receives a PKM-RSP (Success) message after the authentication on the BS side is successful. The MS receives the registration failure message from the network side or does not receive any registration response. The MS sends an RNG-REQ (initial network access) message to the BS to request for registration. After sending a registration request, the MS receives an REG-RSP message from the BS. The MS receives an RNG-RSP (Fail) message.
Network access failure
WX-NetEntrySuc
Network access success
WX-PKMFail WX-PKMReq
Authentication failure Authentication request
WX-PKMSuc
Authentication success
WX-REGFail
Registration failure
WX-REGReq
Registration request
WX-REGSuc
Registration success
WX-RNGFail
Initial distance measurement failure
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-129
14 Appendix
Name WX-RNGReq
Meaning Initial distance measurement request Initial distance measurement success Basic capability negotiation failure Basic capability negotiation request
Description The MS initially accesses the network, performs handover or accesses the network again. The MS receives an RNG-RSP (Success) message. The MS does not receive an SBC-RSP message within the specified time. The basic capability negotiation request is initiated when the MS initially accesses the network or after the distance measurement is successful. The MS receives an SBC-RSP message. A service stream is set up successfully after the MS is connected to the network. A service stream setup fails when the MS accesses the network.
WX-RNGSuc WX-SBCFail WX-SBCReq
WX-SBCSuc WXNetConnectSuc WXNetConnectFail
Basic capability negotiation success MS connection success Network connection failure
14.2.6 LTE Predefined Events

This section describes the predefined events in the LTE network. You can configure LTE network events by referring to the following descriptions. Name AttachAttem pt AttachSuc AttachFail DetachAttem pt DetachSuc RRCSetupRe q RRCSetupSu c Meaning Attach attempt Attach success Attach failure Detach attempt Detach success RRC connection setup request RRC connection setup success Description A UE attempts to attach to the data service. A UE attaches to the data service successfully. A UE fails to attach to the data service. A UE attempts to detach from the data service. A UE detaches from the data service successfully. A UE sends an RRC Connection Request message to the network to request for the RRC connection setup. If a UE sends an RRC Connection Setup Complete message to the network, you can infer that the RRC connection setup is successful.
14-130
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name RRCSetupFa il
Meaning RRC connection setup failure
Description A UE receives an RRC Connection Reject message or does not receive an RRC Connection Setup message within the specified time after sending an RRC Connection Request message to the network. If an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message contains the specified information element (drbToAddModList or drb-ToAddModifyList), you can infer that a UE attempts to set up the Evolved Radio Access Bearer (ERAB). If a UE receives an RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message after the ERABSetupAttempt event occurs, you can infer that the ERAB setup is successful. If a UE does not receive an RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message within the specified time after the ERABSetupAttempt event occurs, you can infer that the ERAB setup fails. If a UE receives an RRC Release or RRC Connection Reconfiguration message after receiving a Deactivate Eps Bearer Context Request message, you can infer that the ERAB is released normally. If a UE receives an RRC Release or RRC Connection Reconfiguration message but does not receive a Deactivate Eps Bearer Context Request message, you can infer that the ERAB is released abnormally. If measId of a MeasurementReport message is the same as measId of the previous RRC ConnectionReconfiguration message, a handover A3 measurement report is generated. A UE attempts to perform a handover. A UE performs a handover successfully. A UE fails to perform a handover.
ERABSetup Attempt
ERAB setup attempt
ERABSetupS uc
ERAB setup success
ERABSetupF ail
ERAB setup failure
ERABNorma lRel
ERAB normal release
ERABAbnor malRel
ERAB abnormal release
HOA3Measu rereport
Handover A3 measurement report
HOAttempt HOSuc HOFail
Handover attempt Handover success Handover failure
14.3 Description of Information Elements

This describes the MS and Scanner information elements supported by the Probe. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the view window. 14.3.1 GSM Information Elements of MSs This describes the GSM information elements of the MSs. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the GSM MS air interface views. 14.3.2 WCDMA Information Elements of UEs
14 Appendix
This describes the WCDMA information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the WCDMA UE air interface views. 14.3.3 CDMA Information Elements of MSs This describes the CDMA information elements of the MSs. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the CDMA MS air interface views. 14.3.4 WiMAX Information Elements of UEs This describes the WiMAX information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the WiMAX UE air interface views. 14.3.5 LTE Information Elements of UEs This describes the LTE information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the LTE UE air interface views. 14.3.6 Information Elements of Scanners This describes the IEs of the PCTel, Anritsu, and Rohde & Schwarz scanners. You can refer to the description when browsing the IEs in the views of these scanners. 14.3.7 Packet Service Testing Information Elements This describes the packet service testing information elements. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the packet service views. 14.3.8 Speech Quality Evaluation Information Elements This describes meanings of the IEs related to Speech Quality Evaluation. The following table provides information about IEs related to the speech quality service. 14.3.9 Noise Test Information Elements This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Noise Test KPI. The following table provides the information noise test information elements.
14.3.1 GSM Information Elements of MSs

This describes the GSM information elements of the MSs. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the GSM MS air interface views.
3G Neighboring Cell Measurement

This describes meanings of the IEs related to 3G Neighboring Cell Measurement of the GSM. The following table provides the information about the 3G neighboring cells, such as the ARFCN, quality, and level. IE Name UARFCN P-SC Diversity Squal Range/Unit Range: 0 to 16383 Range: 0 to 511 0 or 1 Unit: dB Description Indicates the ARFCNs of measured GSM neighbors. Indicates the primary scrambling code of measured GSM neighbors. Indicates whether to use the diversity mode. 0 refers to No and 1 refers to Yes. Indicates the quality of the received signal, which is applicable to cell selection criteria S.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-132
14 Appendix
IE Name Srxlev RSCP Ec/Io
Range/Unit Unit: dB Range: -115 to -25. Unit: dBm. Range: -30 to 0. Unit: dB.
Description Indicates the rank of the received signal level, which is applicable to cell selection criteria S. Indicates the received signal code power. Indicates the ratio of energy per chip to the total power density of received bandwidth.
AMR Call Average

This describes meanings of the IEs related to AMR Call Average of the GSM. The following table provides the distribution of AMR codec usage for the whole of the call currently in progress. IE Name Codec Range/Unit Range: 0 to 7 Description Indicates the AMR codec: l 0: 12.2 kbit/s l 1: 10.2 kbit/s l 2: 7.95 kbit/s l 3: 7.40 kbit/s l 4: 6.70 kbit/s l 5: 5.90 kbit/s l 6: 5.15 kbit/s l 7: 4.75 kbit/s Uplink Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the distribution of uplink AMR codec usage for the current call. This IE is invalid if no call is ongoing. Indicates the distribution of downlink AMR codec usage for the current call. This IE is invalid if no call is ongoing.
Downlink
AMR Cell Average

This describes meanings of the IEs related to AMR Cell Average of the GSM. The following table provides the distribution of AMR codec usage in the current serving cell before the handover..
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-133
14 Appendix
IE Name Codec
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 7
Description Indicates the AMR codec: l 0: 12.2 kbit/s l 1: 10.2 kbit/s l 2: 7.95 kbit/s l 3: 7.40 kbit/s l 4: 6.70 kbit/s l 5: 5.90 kbit/s l 6: 5.15 kbit/s l 7: 4.75 kbit/s
Uplink
Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %.
Indicates the distribution of uplink AMR codec usage since the MS started using the current serving cell. Indicates the distribution of downlink AMR codec usage since the MS started using the current serving cell.
Downlink
AMR Codec Usage

This describes meanings of the IEs related to AMR Codec Usage of the GSM. The following table provides the information about the uplink and downlink AMR codec rates for the current terminal. IE Name Codec UL Range/Unit l 12.2 kbit/s l 10.2 kbit/s l 7.95 kbit/s l 7.40 kbit/s l 6.70 kbit/s l 5.90 kbit/s l 5.15 kbit/s l 4.75 kbit/s Uplink Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the distribution of uplink AMR codec usage across the active set being used. Description Indicates the uplink codec rate.
14-134
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Codec DL
Range/Unit l 12.2 kbit/s l 10.2 kbit/s l 7.95 kbit/s l 7.40 kbit/s l 6.70 kbit/s l 5.90 kbit/s l 5.15 kbit/s l 4.75 kbit/s
Description Indicates the downlink codec rate.
Downlink
Indicates the distribution of downlink AMR codec usage across the active set being used.
AMR Setting GSM

This describes meanings of the IEs related to AMR Setting GSM of the GSM. The following table provides the current active set of AMR speech coders on the uplink and downlink respectively, along with hysteresis and threshold values governing AMR mode switches. IE Name Active Set UL Range/Unit Range: 0 to 3 Description Indicates the current active set of AMR speech codecs on the uplink, each codec being described by a text string, such as 12.2 kbit/s rate. Indicates the current active set of AMR speech codecs on the downlink, each codec being described by a text string, such as 12.2 kbit/s rate. Indicates the hysteresis value in the AMR mode switch mechanism. Indicates the threshold value in the AMR mode switch mechanism. Indicates the C/I limit for codec change to lower bit rate, calculated from Hysteresis and Threshold. The C/I value used as input to mode control in AMR. This parameter is distinct from the ordinary C/I information elements, although the value should be similar.
Active Set DL
Range: 0 to 3
Hysteresis Threshold Lower Limit
Range: 0 to 15 Range: 0 to 63 Range: -5 to 35. Unit: dB.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-135
14 Appendix
IE Name Upper Limit
Range/Unit Range: -5 to 35. Unit: dB.
Description Indicates the C/I limit for codec change to higher bit rate, calculated from Hysteresis and Threshold. The C/I value used as input to mode control in AMR. This parameter is distinct from the ordinary C/I information elements, although the value should be similar.
BA List
This describes meanings of the IEs related to BA List of the GSM. The following table provides the signal strength of the neighboring cells of the current cell, including the information about IEs such as the BCCH, level and BSIC. IE Name BCCH ARFCN Range/Unit Range: 0 to 1023 l GSM-R 850: 128 to 251 l P-GSM 900: 1 to 124 l E-GSM 900: 0 to 124, 975 to 1023 l DCS 1800: 512 to 885 l PCS 1900: 512 to 810 BAND l GSM-R 850 l P-GSM 900 l E-GSM 900 l DCS 1800 l PCS 1900 RxLev BSIC Range: -110 to -47. Unit: dBm. Range: 00 to 77 Indicates the received signal strength. Indicates the base station identity code. Indicates the frequency band of BCCH carrier. Description Indicates the ARFCN of the broadcast control channel.
GPRS Data Bytes Sent/Received

This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS Data Bytes Sent/Received of the GPRS. The following table provides the total data bytes that are sent and received through the application, subnetwork dependent convergence protocol (SNDCP), logical link control (LLC), and radio link control (RLC) layers.
14-136
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Application Bytes Received (DL) Application Bytes Sent (UL) SNDCP Bytes Received (DL) SNDCP Bytes Sent (UL) LLC Bytes Received (DL) LLC Bytes Sent (UL)
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 2 x 109. Unit: byte. Range: 0 to 2 x 109. Unit: byte. Range: 0 to 2 x 109. Unit: byte. Range: 0 to 2 x 109. Unit: byte. Range: 0 to 2 x 109. Unit: byte. Range: 0 to 2 x 109. Unit: byte. Range: 0 to 2 x 109. Unit: byte. Range: 0 to 2 x 109. Unit: byte.
Description Indicates the number of bytes received at the application protocol level. Indicates the number of bytes sent at the application protocol level. Indicates the number of bytes received at the SNDCP protocol level since GPRS attach. Indicates the number of bytes sent at the SNDCP protocol level since GPRS attach. Indicates the number of bytes received at the LLC protocol level since PS attach. Indicates the number of bytes sent at the LLC protocol level since PS attach. Indicates the number of bytes received at the RLC protocol level since GPRS attach. Indicates the number of bytes sent at the RLC protocol level since GPRS attach.
RLC Bytes Received (DL) RLC Bytes Sent (UL)
GPRS Data Throughput

This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS Data Throughput of the GPRS. The following table provides the information about IEs related to the data throughput ratio at the application, SNDCP, LLC, and RLC layers. IE Name App Throughput Range/Unit Unit: kbit/s Description Indicates the data throughput on the uplink and downlink at the application layer. Indicates the data throughput on the uplink and downlink at the SNDCP layer. Indicates the data throughput on the uplink and downlink at the LLC layer.
SNDCP Throughput
Range: 0 to 400. Unit: kbit/ s. Range: 0 to 400. Unit: kbit/ s.
LLC Throughput
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-137
14 Appendix
IE Name RLC Throughput
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 400. Unit: kbit/ s. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %.
Description Indicates the data throughput on the uplink and downlink at the RLC layer. Indicates the retransmission rate on the uplink at the LLC layer. Indicates the retransmission rate on the uplink at the RLC layer. Indicates the block error rate on the downlink at the RLC layer.
LLC Retrasimission Rate RLC Retrasimission Rate RLC BLER
GPRS Data Timeslots

This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS Data Timeslots of the GPRS. The following table provides the information about IEs related to the GPRS data timeslots. IE Name TS used TS Channel Type CS-n Data n: 1 to 4 MCS-n Data n: 1 to 9 GMSK rate Range/Unit Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Description Indicates the used timeslot number on the uplink and downlink. Indicates the type of channel in each timeslot on the uplink and downlink. These elements contain the distribution of coding scheme usage for each timeslot. These elements contain the distribution of modulation coding scheme usage for each timeslot. Indicates the usage percentage of the Gaussian minimum shift-frequency keying (GMSK) coding scheme. Indicates the usage percentage of 8 phase shift keying (8PSK) coding scheme.
8PSK rate
GPRS Line Chart

This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS Line Chart of the GPRS. The following table provides the information about IEs such as the APP, SNDCP, LLC, and RLC throughput ratio and timeslot usage of the GPRS.
14-138
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name APP Throughput SNDCP Throughput LLC Throughput RLC Throughput Number Of Used Timeslot (DL) Number Of Used Timeslot (UL) Current CS (DL) Current CS (UL) Current MCS (DL) Current MCS (UL)
Range/Unit Unit: kbit/s Range: 0 to 400. Unit: kbit/s. Range: 0 to 400. Unit: kbit/s. Range: 0 to 400. Unit: kbit/s. Range: 1 to 4 Range: 1 to 4 Range: 1 to 9 Range: 1 to 9
Description Indicates the data throughput on the uplink and downlink at the application layer. Indicates the data throughput on the uplink and downlink at the SNDCP layer. Indicates the data throughput on the uplink and downlink at the LLC layer. Indicates the data throughput on the uplink and downlink at the RLC layer. Indicates the number of used timeslots on the downlink. Indicates the number of used timeslots on the uplink. Indicates the coding scheme currently used on downlink. Indicates the coding scheme currently used on uplink. Indicates the modulation coding scheme currently used on downlink. Indicates the modulation coding scheme currently used on uplink.
GPRS PDP Context

This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS PDP Context of the GPRS. The following table provides the information about IEs related to the PDP. IE Name Active PDP Contexts Range/Unit 0 or 1 Description Indicates whether to active the PDP contexts. l 0: Active l 1: Inactive PDP NSAPI PDP LLC SAPI PDP Delay Class An integer ranging from 5 to 15 Range: 3 to 11 Indicates the service access point identity at the network layer. Indicates the service access point identity at the logical link control layer. Indicates the delay class as defined by subscription.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-139
14 Appendix
IE Name PDP Reliability Class PDP Precedence Class PDP Peak Throughput PDP Mean Throughput PDP Radio Priority PDP Access Point Name PDP Address
Range/Unit IPv4 or IPv6
Description Indicates the reliability class as defined by subscription. Indicates the precedence class as defined by subscription. Indicates the peak throughput as defined by subscription. Indicates the mean throughput. Indicates the radio priority as defined by subscription. Indicates the host name or network address for each active PDP context. Indicates the user address.
GPRS Status
This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS Status of the GPRS. The following table provides the information about IEs related to the GPRS status. IE Name Number of TS Used (DL) Number of TS Used (UL) PBCCH TS RAC GMM State Range/Unit Range: 0 to 8 Range: 0 to 8 Range: 0 to 7 Range: 0 to 255 Description Indicates the number of timeslots used on the downlink. Indicates the number of timeslots used on the uplink. Indicates the timeslots of the packet broadcast control channel. Indicates the Routing Area Code. Indicates the state of GPRS Mobility Management (GMM) protocol: Idle, Ready, or Standby. Indicates the state of GPRS Radio Resource (GRR) protocol: Packet Idle or Packet Transfer. Indicates the temporary logical link identity. Indicates the Temporary Flow ID on the downlink. Used to identify the temporary block flow.
GRR State
TLLI TFI (DL)
Range: 0 to 31
14-140
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name TFI (UL)
Description Indicates the Temporary Flow ID on the uplink. Used to identify the temporary block flow. Indicates the network control mode. Indicates the network operation mode. Uplink coding scheme. Refers to the coding mode with the maximum usage ratio on the uplink within 500 ms.
NC NMO Coding Scheme UL
l 1 to 4 corresponds to CS 1 to CS 4. l 7 to 15 corresponds to MCS 1 to MCS 9.
Coding Scheme DL
l CS 1 to CS 4 l MCS 1 to MCS 9
Downlink coding scheme. Refers to the coding mode with the maximum usage ratio on the downlink within 500 ms. Mean value of the bit error probability (BEP) Coefficient of variation of BEP
Mean BEP CV BEP
GSM C/A
This describes the meanings of the IEs related to GSM C/A of the GSM. The following table provides the information about IEs such as the signal strength of the frequency used by the current MS and the adjacent-frequency signal strength. The Probe disables the GSM C/A measurement function by default. You can obtain corresponding IE information only after the C/A measurement function is enabled. For details about how to enable the C/A measurement function, see 11.2.2 Conducting GSM C/A Measurements. IE Name SS C/A +1 Range/Unit Range: -110 to -47. Unit: dBm. Range: -110 to +100. Unit: dB. Description Indicates the signal strengths of the four adjacent frequencies of the current serving cell. Indicates the carrier-to-adjacent ratio. Calculation formula: Received signal strength at the serving frequency - Received signal strength at the adjacent frequency that is equal to the serving frequency plus 200 kHz. Indicates the carrier-to-adjacent ratio. Calculation formula: Received signal strength at the serving frequency - Received signal strength at the adjacent frequency that is equal to the serving frequency plus 400 kHz.
C/A +2
Range: -110 to +100. Unit: dB.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-141
14 Appendix
IE Name C/A -1
Range/Unit Range: -110 to +100. Unit: dB.
Description Indicates the carrier-to-adjacent ratio. Calculation formula: Received signal strength at the serving frequency - Received signal strength at the adjacent frequency that is equal to the serving frequency minus 200 kHz. Indicates the carrier-to-adjacent ratio. Calculation formula: Received signal strength at the serving frequency - Received signal strength at the adjacent frequency that is equal to the serving frequency minus 400 kHz.
C/A -2
Range: -110 to +100. Unit: dB.
GSM C/I
This describes meanings of the IEs related to GSM C/I of the GSM. The following table provides the information about IEs such as the channel ARFCN, received signal strength, and intrafrequency carrier-to-interference ratio. IE Name ARFCN RxLev C/I Range/Unit Range: -110 to -47. Unit: dBm. Unit: dB Description Indicates the channel ARFCN. Indicates the received signal strength. Indicates the intra-frequency carrier-tointerference ratio.
Hopping Parameters
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Hopping Parameters of the GSM. The following table provides the GSM hopping parameters. IE Name Hopping State Range/Unit 0 or 1 Description Indicates whether to use the frequency hopping. 0 indicates no and 1 indicates yes. Indicates the ARFCNs of the channels in the hopping frequency list, for example, 1, 10, 19, and 28. Indicates the number of hopping frequencies in the Hopping Freq List.
Hopping Freq List
Range: 0 to 1023
Hopping Freq count
14-142
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name MAIO
Description Indicates the mobile allocation index offset. The mobile allocation index offset indicates the position from which the frequency hopping starts in the hopping frequency list. This IE is valid only when the frequency hopping is used. Indicates the hopping sequence number. The hopping sequence number indicates which hopping frequency list is being used.
HSN
Range: 0 to 63
Other Radio Parameters

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Other Radio Parameters of the GSM. The following table provides the GSM channel and cell reselection parameters. IE Name ATT AGBLK CBA CBQ T3212 Max Retrans Reestablishment Tx Integer MS_TXPWR_M AX_CCH RXLEV_ACCE SS_MIN POWER_OFFSE T_VALID Range/Unit 0 or 1 Range: 0 to 7 Not allowed or Allowed Not barred or Barred Range: 0 to 63 1, 2, 4, or 7 Not qualify or Qualify 3 to 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32, or 50 Range: 0 to 31. Unit: dBm. Description Indicates whether to allow IMSI attach. 0 indicates no and 1 indicates yes. Indicates the number of reserved blocks. Indicates the cell bar access. Indicates the cell bar qualify. Indicates the periodical location update counter. Indicates the maximum number of retransmissions. Indicates whether to limit cell reconstruction. Indicates the number of extended transmission timeslots. Indicates the maximum level of the transmit power allowed for an MS to access the control channel. Indicates the minimum strength of the received signal allowed for an MS to access the system. Indicates whether POWER_OFFSET is valid.
Range: -110 to -47. Unit: dBm. -
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-143
14 Appendix
IE Name POWER_OFFSE T
Description Indicates the power offset, which must be used with MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH. l 0: 0 dB l 1: 2 dB l 2: 4 dB l 3: 6 dB
CELL_RESELE CT_HYSTERES IS CELL_RESELE CT_OFFSET TEMPORARY_ OFFSET
Range: 0 to 14. Step: 2. Unit: dB. Range: 0 to 63 corresponding to 0 dB to 126 dB. Step: 2 dB. Range: 0 to 7. The values from 0 to 6 correspond to 0 dB to 60 dB. The value 7 corresponds to . Range: 0 to 31, corresponding to 20s to 620s.
Indicates the cell reselection hysteresis.
Indicates the cell reselection offset.
Indicates the temporary offset.
PENALTY_TIM E
Indicates the penalty time.
Radio Parameters
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Radio Parameters of the GSM. The following table provides the information about IEs such as the received signal strength and transmit powers of each cell of the GSM. IE Name Rxlev Full Rxlev Sub Rxlev Idle RxQual Full RxQual Sub TA Range/Unit Range: -110 to -47. Unit: dBm. Range: -110 to -47. Unit: dBm. Range: -110 to -47. Unit: dBm. Range: 0 to 7 Range: 0 to 7 Range: 0 to 63. Unit: bit. Description Indicates the received signal strength (Full value). Indicates the received signal strength (Sub value). Indicates the received signal strength of the serving cell in idle status. Indicates the received signal quality (Full value). Indicates the received signal quality (Sub value). Indicates the timing advance. Valid only in dedicated mode.
14-144
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Tx Power
Range/Unit The value range is: l GSM 850 MHz: 5 to 39 (Unit: dBm) l GSM 900 MHz: 5 to 39 (Unit: dBm) l GSM 1800 MHz: 0 to 36 (Unit: dBm) l GSM 1900 MHz: 0 to 33 (Unit: dBm)
Description Indicates the transmit power. Valid only in dedicated mode.
Power Control Level NCell RxLev 1-6 RLT Actual RLT Max C/I Worst FER Full
Range: 0 to 31
Indicates the transmit power level ordered by the base station. Valid only in dedicated mode. Indicates the received signal strength of a neighboring cell. Indicates the actual radio link timeout. Indicates the maximum radio link timeout. Indicates the worst carrier-to-interference ratio. Indicates the frame error rate (Full value). The formula is as follows: Number of error frames/Total number of frames x 100%.
Range: -110 to -47. Unit: dBm. Range: 0 to 64 Range: 0 to 64 Range: -5 to +35. Unit: dB Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %.
FER Sub
Indicates the frame error rate (Sub value). The formula is as follows: Number of error frames/Total number of frames x 100%.
BER Full
Indicates the bit error rate (Full value). The formula is as follows: Number of error bits/Total number of bits x 100%.
BER Sub
Indicates the bit error rate (Sub value). The formula is as follows: Number of error bits/Total number of bits x 100%.
DSC Actual
Range: 0 to 45
Indicates the current value of Downlink Signalling Counter (DSC). Valid only in idle mode.
MS_DTX
Indicates the discontinuous transmission of the MS.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-145
14 Appendix
IE Name CGI
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the Cell Global Identity, consisting of the Mobile Country Code, Mobile Network Code, Location Area Code, and cell ID. Indicates the cell name. Indicates the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number of Traffic Channel. This IE is valid only in dedicated mode and only for channels where no frequency hopping is used.
Cell Name TCH ARFCN
Range: 0 to 1023 l GSM-R 850: 128 to 251 l P-GSM 900: 1 to 124 l E-GSM 900: 0 to 124, 975 to 1023 l DCS 1800: 512 to 885 l PCS 1900: 512 to 810
BCCH ARFCN
Range: 0 to 1023 l GSM-R 850: 128 to 251 l P-GSM 900: 1 to 124 l E-GSM 900: 0 to 124, 975 to 1023 l DCS 1800: 512 to 885 l PCS 1900: 512 to 810
Indicates the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number of Broadcast Control Channel. This IE is valid only in the idle mode and only for channels where no frequency hopping is used.
Timeslot Cell Priority Mode
Range: 0 to 8 -
Indicates the number of timeslots. Indicates the cell priority. Indicates the service type performing by the MS currently, such as Voice. This IE is displayed as Idle in idle state. Indicates the channel type that a speech coder uses. Indicates the ciphering algorithm used for the CS or PS domain, for example, A5/1, A5/2, or GEA5/1. Indicates the number of subchannels. Indicates whether to support the GPRS. Indicates whether to support the enhanced general packet radio service (EGPRS). Indicates the currently used speech codec: EFR, HR, FR, or AMR.
Channel Type Ciphering Algorithm Sub Channel Number Cell GPRS Support Cell EGPRS Support Speech Codec
YES or NO YES or NO -
14-146
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Serving and Neighboring Cells

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Serving and Neighboring Cells of the GSM. The following table provides the information about IEs such as the ARFCNs of the broadcast control channel (BCCH), base station identity codes (BSICs), cell names, frequency bands, received signal strength, parameters of cell selection and reselection, and location area codes of the serving and neighboring cells. IE Name BAND Range/Unit l GSM-R 850 l P-GSM 900 l E-GSM 900 l DCS 1800 l PCS 1900 BCCH ARFCN Range: 0 to 1023 l GSM-R 850: 128 to 251 l P-GSM 900: 1 to 124 l E-GSM 900: 0 to 124, 975 to 1023 l DCS 1800: 512 to 885 l PCS 1900: 512 to 810 BSIC Cell Name Cell ID C1 C2 C31 Range: 00 to 77 Range: -127 to 127. Unit: dB. Range: -127 to 127. Unit: dB. Range: -127 to 127. Unit: dB. Indicates the base station identity code. Indicates the cell name. Present only if an engineering parameter file is used. Indicates the cell identity. Present only if an engineering parameter file is used. Indicates the cell selection criterion. This IE is valid only in idle mode. Indicates the cell reselection criterion. This IE is valid only in idle mode. Indicates the GPRS cell selection criterion. This IE is valid only in the packet service. Indicates the GPRS cell reselection criterion. This IE is valid only in the packet service. Indicates the distance between the MS and the cell. Indicates the Location Area Code of the serving cell. Indicates the ARFCN of the broadcast control channel. Description Indicates the frequency band of BCCH carrier.
C32
Range: -127 to 127. Unit: dB.
Distance LAC
Unit: km Range: 0 to 65535
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-147
14 Appendix
IE Name Rxlev (Sub +Idle)
Range/Unit Range: -110 to -47. Unit: dBm.
Description Indicates the received signal strength (Sub value) or the idle value in idle status of the serving cell.
Vocoder Usage
This section describes the IEs related to Vocoder Usage in the GSM network. The following table provides the usage information about the uplink and downlink AMR codec rates for the test terminal. IE Name EFR Range/Unit Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Description Indicates the percentage of the enhanced full rate (EFR) to all the AMR rates on the uplink or downlink. Indicates the percentage of the full rate (FR) to all the AMR rates on the uplink or downlink. Indicates the percentage of the half rate (HR) to all the AMR rates on the uplink or downlink. Indicates the percentage of the full adaptive multirate (FAMR) to all the AMR rates on the uplink or downlink. Indicates the percentage of the half adaptive multirate (HAMR) to all the AMR rates on the uplink or downlink.
FR HR FAMR
HAMR
14.3.2 WCDMA Information Elements of UEs

This describes the WCDMA information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the WCDMA UE air interface views.
AMR Codecs
This section describes the IEs related to AMR Codecs in the WCDMA network. The following table provides the information about the WCDMA AMR uplink and downlink codecs, voice type, and frame rate. IE Name Bad Frame Indicator Range/Unit BFI not set or BFI set Description Indicates the bad frame indicator on the downlink.
14-148
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Error Flag Frame Rate
Range/Unit Normal or Encoder error l 12.2 kbit/s l 10.2 kbit/s l 7.95 kbit/s l 7.40 kbit/s l 6.70 kbit/s l 5.90 kbit/s l 5.15 kbit/s l 4.75 kbit/s
Description Indicates the error flag on the uplink. Indicates the frame rate on the uplink or downlink.
Frame Type Time Alignment Flag UnStable Frame Indicator Vocoder Data Vocoder Mode
TAF not set or TAF set UFI not set or UFI set -
Indicates the frame type on the uplink or downlink. Indicates the time alignment flag on the downlink. Indicates the unstable frame indicator on the downlink. Indicates the vocoder data on the uplink or downlink. Indicates the vocoder mode on the uplink or downlink, such as AMR, EFR, FR, or HR.
Cell Search
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Cell Search of the WCDMA. The following table provides the parameter information about searching cells. The steps for searching cells are as follows: 1. Synchronize timeslots. The UE synchronizes timeslots of a cell according to the basic synchronization codes of the supplemental channel (SCH). 2. Identify the frame alignment and code group. The UE searches the frame alignment according to the secondary synchronization codes of the SCH, and then identifies the obtained timeslot synchronization code groups. 3. Identify the scrambling code. The UE confirms that the basic scrambling code of the cell is found.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-149
14 Appendix
IE Name Chart of Step One Search Chart of Step Two Search Chart of Step Three Search Step Three P-SC S-SC Ec/Io
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 511 Range: 0 to 15 Range: -30 to 0. Unit: dB. -
Description Indicates the first step of searching cells. Indicates the second step of searching cells. Indicates the third step of searching cells. Indicates the primary scrambling code. Indicates the secondary scrambling code. Indicates the ratio of the energy per chip to the total power density of the received bandwidth. Indicates the peak position in chipx8 units.
PN_POS
DRX Mode
This describes meanings of the IEs related to DRX Mode of the WCDMA. The following table provides the parameter information about the discontinuous reception. IE Name DRX Cycle Num Paging indicator bit Description Indicates the number of discontinuous reception mechanism (DRX) cycles. Indicates the paging indicator bit.
Finger
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Finger of the WCDMA. You can check whether a barrier or a line-of-sight path exists in the link. IE Name Finger ID P-SC Ec/Io Range/Unit Range: 0 to 11 Range: 0 to 511 Range: -30 to 0. Unit: dB. Description Indicates the Rake finger identifier. Indicates the primary scrambling code for each Rake finger. Indicates the ratio of the energy per chip to the total power density of the received bandwidth.
14-150
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Finger Pos
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the PN position offsets of the finger.
HSDPA Link Statistics

This describes meanings of the IEs related to HSDPA Link Statistics of the HSDPA. The following table provides the information about the HSDPA link statistics. IE Name Scheduled Rate-Delta Scheduled Rate-Average Served Rate-Delta Range/Unit Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Description Indicates the rate delta of scheduling data at the MAC layer. Indicates the average rate of scheduling data at the MAC layer. Indicates the rate delta of transmission at the MAC layer, including the rate of failed transmissions and retransmissions. Indicates the average rate of transmission at the MAC layer, including the rate of failed transmissions and retransmissions. Indicates the rate delta of transmission at the MAC layer, excluding the rate of failed transmissions and retransmissions. Indicates the average rate of transmission at the MAC layer, excluding the rate of failed transmissions and retransmissions. Indicates the usage ratio of the HS-SCCH channel (transient value). Indicates the usage ratio of the HS-SCCH channel (phase average value). Indicates the schedule block error rate at the MAC layer (transient value). Indicates the schedule block error rate at the MAC layer (phase average value). Indicates the residual block error rate at the RLC layer (transient value). Indicates the residual block error rate at the RLC layer (phase average value).
Served Rate-Average
Unit: kbit/s
MAC Layer Rate-Delta
Unit: kbit/s
MAC Layer Rate-Average
Unit: kbit/s
HS-SCCH Success RateDelta HS-SCCH Success RateAverage HS-DSCH SBLER-Delta HS-DSCH SBLERAverage HS-DSCH Res.BLERDelta HS-DSCH Res.BLERAverage
Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-151
14 Appendix
IE Name HS-DSCH Retrans. RateDelta HS-DSCH Retrans. RateAverage CQI Single Stream CQI (MIMO) Dual Stream CQI1 (MIMO) Dual Stream CQI2 (MIMO) Number of HS-PDSCH Codes
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 30 Range: 0 to 15
Description Indicates the retransmission rate of the High Speed Downlink Shared Channel (HS-DSCH) (transient value). Indicates the retransmission rate of the HS-DSCH channel (phase average value). Indicates the average value of the Channel Quality Indicator (CQI). Indicates the single stream CQI. Indicates the CQI of stream 1 in double stream transmission mode. Indicates the CQI of stream 2 in double stream transmission mode. Indicates the average number of codes used by the UE.
HSDPA Physical Channel

This describes meanings of the IEs related to HSDPA Physical Channel of the HSDPA. The following table provides the configuration information about the HSDPA physical channel. IE Name HS-DSCH Configuration H-RNTI UE ID DL DPCH to HSSCCH Timing Offset Range/Unit Unit: chip Description Indicates the temporary ID of the UE. Indicates the timing offset of the downlink dedicated physical channel (DPCH) relative to the high speed shared control channel (HSSCCH). Indicates the number of processes of the hybird automatic repeat request (HARQ). Indicates the coding and validity of the HS-SCCH. Indicates the orthogonal variable spreading factor.
HARQ Processes
HS-SCCH Configuration
HS-SCCH OVSF
14-152
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Uplink HS-DPCCH Configuration CQI Feedback Cycle CQI Repetition Factor Ack/Nack Repetition Factor
Range/Unit Unit: ms
Description Indicates the feedback cycle of the channel quality indicator (CQI). Indicates the CQI repetition factor. Indicates the repetition factor of the ACKnowledgement (ACK) or Negative ACKnowledgement (NACK). Indicates the timing offset of the high speed dedicated physical control channel (HSDPCCH) relative to the uplink dedicated physical control channel (DPCCH). Indicates the power offset of the ACK relative to the downlink DPCCH. Indicates the power offset of the NACK relative to the downlink DPCCH. Indicates the power offset of the CQI relative to the downlink DPCCH. Indicates the ID of the MAC-d flow. Indicates the ID of the coded composite transport channel. Indicates the list for queue ID. Indicates the queue ID. Indicates the MAC-hs window size. Indicates duration of the MAC-hs reordering release
UL DPCCH to HSDPCCH Timing Offset
Unit: chip
PO-ACK
PO-NACK
PO-CQI
MAC-d Flow Mapping List
MAC-d Flow ID CCTrCH ID
Queue ID List Reordering Queue Parameters Queue ID Receive Window Size Reordering Release Timer
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-153
14 Appendix
IE Name MAC-d PDU Sizes
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the size of the MAC-d PDU.
HS-DSCH Decoding Statistics

This describes meanings of the IEs related to HS-DSCH Decoding Statistics of the HSDPA. The following table provides the information about the HSDPA decoding statistics on carrier 0, carrier 1, and the two carriers. IE Name Carrier TBS QPSK 16QAM Range/Unit Unit: bit Unit: frame Unit: frame Description Indicates the carrier for statistics, which can be Carrier0, Carrier1, or Total. Indicates the transport block size. Each frame transmits only one TB. Indicates the number of frames modulated in Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) mode. Indicates the number of frames modulated in 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (16QAM) mode. Indicates the number of frames modulated in 64QAM mode. Indicates the number of frames failing to be transmitted at the MAC layer. Indicates the number of frames successfully transmitted at the MAC layer. Indicates the number of NACK messages to which the NodeB translates the ACK messages returned by the UE upon successful decoding. Indicates the number of exceptional frames, for example, the frame whose TBS of the current successful retransmission is different from that of the latest successful transmission. Indicates the schedule block error rate at the MAC layer, which is calculated through the following formula: Number of transmission failures / Total number of transmissions x 100%. Indicates the schedule block error rate of the first frame at the MAC layer.
64QAM SBSB+ Dup.SB+
Unit: frame -
Other
SBLER
1st SBLER
14-154
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Block-
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the number of frames that fail to be transmitted at the RLC layer. After several failures at the MAC layer, the RLC initiates the retransmission. Indicates the number of frames successfully transmitted at the RLC layer. The value of Block + is the same as the value of SB+. Indicates the residual block error rate at the RLC layer, which is calculated through the following formula: Number of frames that fail to be transmitted at the RLC layer / Total number of transmissions at the RLC layer x 100%. Indicates the number of frames successfully transmitted at the MAC layer during the first transmission. Indicates the number of frames successfully transmitted in the second retransmission after the first transmission fails. Indicates the number of frames successfully transmitted in the third retransmission after the first transmission and the second retransmission fail. Indicates the number of frames successfully transmitted in the fourth retransmission after the first three transmissions fail. Indicates the number of frames successfully transmitted in the fifth retransmission after the first four transmissions fail. Indicates the number of frames successfully transmitted in the sixth or later retransmission after all the previous transmissions fail.
Block+
Res.BLER
>=6
HS-SCCH Decoding Statistics

This describes meanings of the IEs related to HS-SCCH Decoding Statistics of the HSDPA. The following table provides the information about the HSDPA decoding statistics on carrier 0, carrier 1, and the two carriers. IE Name HS-SCCH Attempts Range/Unit Description Indicates the total number of frames.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-155
14 Appendix
IE Name HS-SCCH Success
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the number of HS-SCCH frames scheduled to the UE that is in the communication. Indicates the success ratio of the HSSCCH channel. Indicates the ratio of NACK messages to which the NodeB translates the ACK messages transmitted by the UE upon successful decoding. Indicates the rate of the transport blocks (TBs) that use the HS-SCCH Less operation mode to total TBs. Indicates the number of single stream transmissions used in the multiple input multiple output (MIMO). Indicates the number of double stream transmissions used in the MIMO. Indicates the percentage of single stream transmission used in the MIMO. Indicates the percentage of double stream transmission used in the MIMO. Indicates the percentage of data using single stream transmission. Indicates the percentage of data using double stream transmission. Indicates the schedule block error rate of single stream transmission, which is calculated through the following formula: NACK / (ACK + NACK) 100%. Indicates the schedule block error rate of stream 1 in double stream transmission mode, which is calculated through the following formula: NACK1 / (ACK1 + NACK1) 100%.
HS-SCCH Success Rate ACK->NACK/DTX (Duplicate SB +)
Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %.
HS-SCCH Less Operation Rate 1 TB
2 TBs Percent 1TB
Percent 2TBs
Percent Single Stream Percent Dual Stream Single Stream SBLER
Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %.
Dual Stream1 SBLER
14-156
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Dual Stream2 SBLER
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %.
Description Indicates the schedule block error rate of stream 2 in double stream transmission mode, which is calculated through the following formula: NACK2 / (ACK2 + NACK2) 100%.
HSUPA DL Channel Configuration

This describes meanings of the IEs related to HSUPA DL Channel Configuration of the HSDPA. The following table provides the configuration information about the downlink channel of the HSUPA. IE Name HSUPA DL All Channel Configuration SERV_CELL_ INDEX TTI SG_SEL P_ERNTI Range/Unit Description Indicates the serving cell index of the uplink packet access (UPA) service. Indicates the transmission time interval. Indicates the type of the initial serving grant (SG). Indicates the temporary identifier of the primary radio network, which is allocated for the UE that performs the EUL service. Indicates the temporary identifier of the secondary radio network, which is allocated for the UE that performs the EUL service. Indicates whether the access grant channel (AGCH) is activated. Indicates whether AGCH information fields are valid. Indicates the spreading factor of the AGCH. Indicates the start frame number or subframe number of the AGCH. Indicates the end frame number or subframe number of the AGCH.
S_ERNTI
AGCH_ACTI ON AGCH_VALI D AGCH_OVSF AGCH_STAR T AGCH_END
Range: 0 to 255 -
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-157
14 Appendix
IE Name AGCH_DPCH _OFFSET STTD_AGCH
Description Indicates the offset from the first AGCH transmission time interval to the DPCH. Indicates whether the space time transmit diversity (STTD) is used on the AGCH. Indicates the EUL cell number. Indicates the scrambling code. Indicates whether the current cell is the serving cell of the EDCH. Indicates the index of the radio link set. Indicates the reference finger index. Indicates the index of the hybrid ARQ indicator channel (HICH). Indicates whether the relative grant channel (RGCH) is activated. Indicates whether RGCH information fields are valid. Indicates whether the HICH is activated. Indicates whether HICH information fields are valid. Indicates the OVSF code for the HICH and RGCH. Indicates the start frame number or subframe number for the HICH. Indicates the end frame number or subframe number for the HICH. Indicates the offset from the HICH to the DPCH. Indicates the timeslot offset of the HICH to the P-CCPCH. Indicates the ID of the Handamard codes for the HICH. Indicates whether the space time transmit diversity (STTD) is used on the HICH.
HSUPA DL Each Cell Configuration in the EUL Active Set
CELL_IDX PSC SERV_CELL RLS_IDX REF_FINGER TPC_INDEX RGCH_ACTI ON RGCH_VALI D HICH_ACTIO N HICH_VALID HICH_OVSF HICH_START HICH_END HICH_DPCH_ OFFSET TAU_HICH HICH_SIGNA TURE HICH_STTD
Range: 1 to 6 Range: 0 to 511 Range: 0 to 5 Range: 0 to 31 Range: 0 to 5 Range: 0 to 255 Range: 0 to 149 Range: 0 to 39 -
14-158
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name RGCH_STAR T RGCH_END RGCH_DPCH _OFFSET RGCH_SIGN ATURE DPCH_CHAN NEL
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 149 Range: 0 to 39 Range: 0 to 7
Description Indicates the start frame number or subframe number of the RGCH. Indicates the end frame number or subframe number of the RGCH. Indicates the offset from the RGCH to the DPCH. Indicates the signature sequence ID of the RGCH. Indicates the number of downlink dedicated physical channel.
HSUPA Link Statistics

This describes meanings of the IEs related to HSUPA Link Statistics of the HSUPA. The following table provides the information about the HSUPA link statistics. IE Name HSUPA Link Throughput Statistics MAC-e PDU NonDTX Rate Range/Unit Unit: kbit/s Description Indicates the nonDTX (non discontinuous transmission) rate. Indicates the served rate. Indicates the available rate. Indicates the nonDTX probability. Indicates the schedule block error rate. Indicates the schedule block error rate of the first frame. Indicates the limited rate of power. Indicates the limited rate of serving grant (SG). Indicates the limited rate of buffer.
MAC-e PDU Served Rate MAC-e PDU Available Rate HSUPA Link Quality Statistics RxNon-DTX Probability SBLER 1st SBLER
Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %.
Power Limited Rate SG Limited Rate
Buffer Limited Rate
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-159
14 Appendix
IE Name Happy Rate HSUPA Grant Statistics Average AG
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. -
Description Indicates the HAPPY rate. Indicates the average value of absolute grant (AG). Indicates the combined hold rate of relative grant (RG). Indicates the combined up rate of relative grant. Indicates the combined down rate of relative grant. Indicates the average value of serving grant.
Combined RG Hold Rate Combined RG Up Rate Combined RG Down Rate Average SG
Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. -
HSUPA UL Channel Configuration

This describes meanings of the IEs related to HSUPA UL Channel Configuration of the HSDPA. The following table provides the configuration information about the downlink channel of the HSUPA. IE Name HSUPA DL Channel Configuration TTI IR_CC DPDCH_PRES Range/Unit Description Indicates the transmission time interval. Indicates the coding scheme. Indicates whether the current R99 dedicated physical data channel (DPDCH) is valid. Indicates whether the downlink HSDPA is valid. Indicates the timeslot format of the DPCCH. Indicates the ACTION type. Indicates the maximum EUL spreading factor.
HS_DPCCH_P RES SLOT_FORM AT ACTION_TYP E MAX_EUL_S F
Range: 0 to 3 -
14-160
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name UE_MAX_SF
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the maximum EUL spreading factor exported by UE. Indicates the start EUL frame number or subframe number. Indicates the end EUL frame number or subframe number. Indicates the maximum punctuating limit. Indicates the maximum transmit power of UE. Indicates the E-DPDCH I/Q mapping. Indicates the service grant. Indicates the grant selection. Indicates the threshold of the enhanced transport format combination indicator (ETFCI). Indicates the ETFCI threshold. Indicates the power offset from E-DPCCH to DPCCH. Indicates whether an indicator is configured for the Ref E-TFCI.
START_FRA ME_NUM END_FRAME _NUM PL_NON_MA X MAX_TX_PW R IQ_MAP SERVING_GR ANT GRANT_SEL 2IDX_STEP_T
Range: 44 to 100 Range: -50 to 33. Unit: dBm Range: 0 to 37
3IDX_STEP_T EDPCCH_PO HSUPA UL Channel Each Reference Power Offset TFCI_CONFI G
Range: 0 to 37 Range: 0 to 8 1 indicates that the indicator is configured, and 0 indicates that the indicator is not configured. Range: 1 to 127 Range: 0 to 29
REF_TFCI REF_PWR_OF FSET
Indicates the enhanced transport format combination indicator. Indicates the power offset.
Inter-RAT GSM Cell Information

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Inter-RAT GSM Cell Information of the WCDMA. The following table provides the inter-system (such as GSM) cell information.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-161
14 Appendix
IE Name BCCH ARFCN BAND
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 1023 -
Description Indicates the absolute radio frequency channel number for the BCCH. Indicates the inter-system frequency band. The following frequency bands are included: l GSM 900 MHz l DCS 1800 MHz l PCS 1900 MHz l GSM 850 MHz
RSSI BSIC
Unit: dBm Range: 00 to 77
Indicates the received signal strength indicator. Indicates the base station identity code.
Power Control
This section describes the IEs related to Power Control in the WCDMA network. The following table lists the information about power control, such as the signal to interference ratio, transmit power, and receive power. IE Name SIR Range/Unit Range: -20 to 30. Unit: dB. Unit: dBm Unit: dBm Range: -128 to -20. unit: dBm. Range: -128 to -20. unit: dBm. Range: -128 to -20. unit: dBm. Range: -128 to -20. unit: dBm. Description Indicates the signal to interference ratio of the dedicated physical control channel (DPCCH). Indicates the transmit power. Indicates the receive power. Indicates the received signal strength of link 0 on carrier 0. Indicates the received signal strength of link 0 on carrier 1. Indicates the received signal strength of link 1 on carrier 0. Indicates the received signal strength of link 1 on carrier 1. Indicates the power control bit that is sent from the NodeB to the UE for adjusting the transmit power on the uplink. Indicates the power control bit that is sent from the UE to the NodeB for adjusting the transmit power on the downlink.
Tx Power Rx Power Rx Carr0 Chain0 Rx Carr1 Chain0 Rx Carr0 Chain1 Rx Carr1 Chain1 UE Tx TPC/frame
Cell Tx TPC/frame
14-162
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
RACH and PRACH

This describes meanings of the IEs related to RACH and PRACH of the WCDMA. The following table provides the information about the UE access. IE Name RACH AICH State Range/Unit Description Indicates the state of the acquisition indicator channel (AICH) sent by the latest access timeslot. Indicates the number of transmitted preambles. Indicates the signature for the preamble of the latest access channel. Indicates the subchannel where the latest preamble signature is transmitted. Indicates the number of the system frame where the latest preamble is transmitted. Indicates the timeslot of the AICH. Indicates the allowed maximum transmit power. Indicates the 16-bit mask of the available signal. Indicates the 12-bit mask of the available signal. Indicates the minimum spreading factor used for each random access channel (RACH) with the period 10 ms. Indicates the number of scrambling codes. Indicates the limit for punctuating on the uplink. Indicates the ID of the transport channel. Indicates the offset of preamble power. Indicates the maximum number of transmitted preambles.
Number of Preamble Signature Slot No SFN AICH Timing PRAC H Max Tx Pwr Avail Sig Mask Sub Ch Mask SF Min
Range: 0 to 64 Range: 0 to 15 Range: 0 to 15 Range: 0 to 4095 Range: -50 to 33. Unit: dBm. -
SC Num UL Punct Lmt Trch Id Pwr Offset Max Pream Num
Range: 0 to 15 Range: 1 to 32 Unit: dB Range: 1 to 64
RLC Throughput
This describes meanings of the IEs related to RLC Throughput of the WCDMA. The following table provides the information about the uplink and downlink throughput at the RLC layer of the WCDMA.
14 Appendix
IE Name RLC UL Throughput RLC PDU Throughput UL
Range/Unit Unit: kbit/s
Description Indicates the uplink packet data unit (PDU) throughput at the RLC layer. Indicates the uplink signaling data unit (SDU) throughput at the RLC layer. Indicates the uplink PDU retransmission rate at the RLC layer. Indicates the channel identifier. Indicates the throughput. Indicates the downlink PDU throughput at the RLC layer. Indicates the downlink SDU throughput at the RLC layer. Indicates the downlink PDU error rate at the RLC layer. Indicates the channel identifier. Indicates the throughput.
RLC SDU Throughput UL
Unit: kbit/s
RLC PDU Retransmission Rate UL RB UL Assigned Throughput ChannelIdentity Throughput RLC DL Throughput RLC PDU Throughput DL RLC SDU Throughput DL RLC PDU Errors Rate DL RB DL Assigned Throughput ChannelIdentity Throughput
Unit: %
Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s
Unit: kbit/s
Unit: %
Unit: kbit/s
Serving/Active Set and Neighboring Cells

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Serving/Active Set and Neighboring Cells of the WCDMA. The following table provides the parameters of the active set, monitoring set, or detection set of a UE. IE Name Freq DL P-SC Ec/Io Range/Unit Unit: MHz Range: 0 to 511 Range: -30 to 0. Unit: dB. Description Indicates the downlink frequency. Indicates the primary scrambling code. Indicates the ratio of the combined peak energy per chip to the total power density of the received bandwidth.
14-164
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Peak Ec/Io RSCP Peak RSCP PS DL
Range/Unit Range: -30 to 0. Unit: dB. Range: -115 to -25. Unit: dBm. Range: -115 to -25. Unit: dBm. -
Description Indicates the ratio of the peak energy per chip to the total power density of the received bandwidth. Indicates the combined received signal code power. Indicates the peak received signal code power. Indicates the downlink resource block bearer type of an active set for PS services, such as R99 and HSDPA. Indicates the uplink resource block bearer type of an active set for PS services, such as R99 and HSUPA. Indicates the secondary scrambling code. Indicates the identifier of the cell configured on the RNC. Present only if an engineering parameter file is used. Indicates the cell name. Present only if an engineering parameter file is used. Indicates the distance between the UE and the cell. Indicates the Location Area Code of the serving cell. Indicates the RNC identifier. Present only if an engineering parameter file is used. l In non-DC-HSDPA mode, the value of Carrier is null. l In DC-HSDPA mode, Carrier displays the information about the carrier in an active set cell.
PS UL
S-SC Cell ID
Range: 0 to 15 Range: 0 to 65535
Cell Name Distance LAC RNC ID Carrier
Unit: m Range: 0 to 65535 Range: 0 to 255 -
UE State
This describes meanings of the IEs related to UE State of the WCDMA. The following table provides the state information about the UE. IE Name Cell Barred Cell ID Cell Reserved Range/Unit Description Indicates the cell barred indicator. Indicates the cell identity. Indicates the cell reserved flag.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-165
14 Appendix
IE Name Cell Reserved for SoLSA GMM State
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the flag of the cell reserved for Support of Localized Service Area (SoLSA). Indicates the state of GPRS Mobility Management (GMM) protocol: Idle, Ready, or Standby. Indicates the GPRS mobility management substate. Indicates the international mobile equipment identity. Indicates the international mobile subscriber identity. Indicates the Location Area Code of the serving cell. Indicates the Mobile Country Code of the serving cell. Indicates the mobility management state. Indicates the mobility management substate. Indicates the mobility management update. Indicates the Mobile Network Code of the serving cell. May consist of two or three digits. Indicates the Routing Area Code. Indicates the radio frequency mode. Indicates the Radio Network Controller identity. Indicates the radio resource control state. Indicates the service state. Indicates the downlink ARFCN of the UTRAN terrestrial radio access network. Indicates the uplink ARFCN of the UTRAN terrestrial radio access network. Indicates the flag of the UE camped on a cell. Indicates the identity of the user registration area (URA)
GMM Sub State IMEI IMSI LAC MCC MM State MM Sub State MM Update MNC
Range: 0 to 65535 Range: 000 to 999 Range: 000 to 999
RAC RF Mode RNC ID RRC State Service State UARFCN DL UARFCN UL UE Camped on a cell URA ID
Range: 0 to 255 -
14-166
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
WCDMA BLER
This describes meanings of the IEs related to WCDMA BLER of the WCDMA. The following table provides the information about IEs such as the transport channel number, block error rate (BLER), size of the window, and number of received blocks that are checked by cyclic redundancy check (CRC) in the WinSize. IE Name TrCH BLER WinSize CRC REC CRC ERROR RACH BLER FACH BLER Range/Unit Unit: frame Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Description Indicates the transport channel number. Indicates the block error rate. Indicates the size of the window. Indicates the number of received blocks that are checked by CRC in the WinSize. Indicates the number of received error blocks that are checked by CRC in the WinSize. Indicates the block error rate of the random access channel. Indicates the block error rate of the forward access channel.
14.3.3 CDMA Information Elements of MSs

This describes the CDMA information elements of the MSs. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the CDMA MS air interface views.
MS State
This describes meanings of the IEs related to MS State of the CDMA. The following table provides the basic information about the MS. IE Name ESN IMSI RF Mode Channel Slot Cycle Index BS P_REV P_REV in use Description Indicates the equipment serial number. Indicates the international mobile subscriber identity. Indicates the radio frequency mode. Indicates the central ARFCN. Indicates the index of the timeslot cycles. Indicates the highest protocol revision supported by the base station. Indicates the protocol revision currently used between the base and mobile stations.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Mobile P_REV
Description Indicates the highest protocol revision supported by the CDMA MS.
Combined Ec/Io (1x)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Combined Ec/Io of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table provides value changes of Combined Ec/Io. IE Name Combined Ec/Io Range/Unit Range: -30 to 0. Unit: dB. Description Indicates the strength of the pilot, computed by the ratio of the pilot energy per chip to total power spectral density.
FCH/SCH FER (1x)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to FCH/SCH FER of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table provides frame erasure ratios on the forward FCH, SCH 0, and SCH 1. IE Name F-FCH FER F-SCH0 FER F-SCH1 FER Range/Unit Unit: % Unit: % Unit: % Description Indicates the frame error rate on the forward FCH. Indicates the frame error rate on the forward SCH 0. Indicates the frame error rate on the forward SCH 1.
Finger (1x)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Finger of the CDMA2000 1x. You can check whether a barrier or a line-of-sight path exists in the link. IE Name PN Sector Ec/Io Range/Unit Range: -30 to 0. Unit: dB. Unit: chip Description Indicates the pilot PN offset of the finger. Indicates the sector name corresponding to the pilot of the finger. Indicates the ratio of the pilot energy per chip of the finger to total power spectral density of the received bandwidth. Indicates the absolute finger position.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Delay
14-168
14 Appendix
IE Name Status
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the finger state. The following states are included: l Locked: indicates the finger is locked in the symbol combiner. l UnLocked: indicates the finger is unlocked in the symbol combiner.
SectorName Distance
Unit: m
Indicates the sector name. Indicates the distance between the MS and the serving cell.
Forward Link Info (1x)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Forward Link Info of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table provides the number of frames at different rates of the forward traffic channel and the frame rates of the channel at different time. IE Name FFCH FSCH0 FSCH1 Full Half Quarter Eighth Erasure Description Indicates the forward fundamental channel. Indicates the statistics for the forward supplemental channel 0. Indicates the statistics for the forward supplemental channel 1. Indicates the statistics for the full-rate frames of the forward traffic channel. Exists on the FCH and SCH. Indicates the statistics for the half-rate frames of the forward traffic channel. Exists on only the FCH. Indicates the statistics for the one-quarter rate frames of the forward traffic channel. Exists on only the FCH. Indicates the statistics for the one-eighth rate frames of the forward traffic channel. Exists on only the FCH. Indicates the statistics for the erasure frames of the forward traffic channel. Exists on the FCH and SCH.
Markov Statistics (1x)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Markov Statistics of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table provides information about IEs such as the statistics for the Markov call frames.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-169
14 Appendix
IE Name Mode Total frames
Description Indicates the current call type of the MS. Involves all call types supported by the MS. Indicates the total number of frames received by the Markov call. The number is cleared when a new Markov call starts. Indicates the reception state of the MS. The following states are involved: l Entering CDMA State: refers to the CDMA acquisition state. l Sync Channel State: refers to the synchronization state. l Paging Channel State: refers to the paging state. l Traffic Channel Initialization State: refers to the traffic initialization state. l Traffic Channel State: refers to the normal traffic state. l Exit State: refers to the exit state.
State
Bad frames
Indicates the number of bad frames during the Markov call, including the number of the erasure frames and full-rate frames with error bits. The number is cleared when a new Markov call starts. Indicates the current Markov call rate. The following rates are involved: l Rate Variable: refers to the variable rate. l Rate 1/8: refers to the one-eighth rate. l Rate 1/4: refers to the one-quarter rate. l Rate 1/2: refers to the half rate. l Full: refers to the full rate.
Markov rate
Error rate Received Frames Counts Full D1/2 D1/4 D1/8 Bsig
Indicates the Markov call error rate. The calculation formula is Bad frames/Total frames. Indicates the number of full-rate frames received actually. Indicates the number of half-rate unavailable frames received actually. Indicates the number of one-quarter rate unavailable frames received actually. Indicates the number of one-eighth rate unavailable frames received actually. Indicates the number of signaling frames received actually.
14-170
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Half Quarter Eighth FErrs Erasures BitErrs Percent
Description Indicates the number of half-rate frames received actually. Indicates the number of one-quarter rate frames received actually. Indicates the number of one-eighth rate frames received actually. Indicates the number of full-rate frames that are actually received with error bits. Indicates the number of erasure frames received actually on the fundamental channel (FCH). Indicates the number of frames that are actually received with error bits. Indicates the percentage of error frames (the frames with error rates or bits except for the signaling) to total frames. Indicates the expected number of full-rate frames. Indicates the expected number of half-rate frames. Indicates the expected number of one-quarter rate frames. Indicates the expected number of one-eighth rate frames.
Expected
Full Half Quarter Eighth
Pilot Sets (1x)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Pilot Sets of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table provides information about the serving cell and neighboring cells of the current MS on the CDMA network. The pilot set refers to a set of the pilot channels that have the same frequency and different PN phases. The pilot set includes the parameters of the active set, candidate set, and neighboring pilot set. IE Name Active Set Candidate Set Neighbor Set PN Range/Unit Range: 0 to 511 Description Indicates the active set. Indicates the candidate set. Indicates the neighboring pilot set. Indicates the PN offset of the pilot.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-171
14 Appendix
IE Name Ec/Io
Range/Unit Range: -30 to 0. Unit: dB. Unit: m
Description Indicates the ratio of the pilot energy per chip to total power spectral density of the received bandwidth. Indicates the sector name. Indicates the distance between the MS and the serving cell.
SectorName Distance
Power (1x)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Power of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table provides power information about the MS. IE Name Rx Power Tx Power TxAdj Range/Unit Range: -120 to -10. Unit: dBm. Range: -127 to -36. Unit: dBm. Range: -127 to 128. Unit: dB. Description Indicates the received signal power. Indicates the transmit power. Indicates the power control value, that is, the adjustment step of the transmit power.
Reverse Link Info (1x)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Reverse Link Info of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table provides the number of frames at different rates of the reverse traffic channel and the frame rates of the channel at different time. IE Name RFCH RSCH0 RSCH1 Full Half Quarter Eighth Description Indicates the reverse fundamental channel. Indicates the statistics for the reverse supplemental channel 0. Indicates the statistics for the reverse supplemental channel 1. Indicates the statistics for the full-rate frames of the reverse traffic channel. Exists on the FCH and SCH. Indicates the statistics for the half-rate frames of the reverse traffic channel. Exists on only the FCH. Indicates the statistics for the one-quarter rate frames of the reverse traffic channel. Exists on only the FCH. Indicates the statistics for the one-eighth rate frames of the reverse traffic channel. Exists on only the FCH.
14-172
14 Appendix
IE Name Erasure
Description Indicates the statistics for the error frames of the reverse traffic channel. Exists on the FCH and SCH.
RLP Statistics (1x)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to RLP Statistics of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table provides statistical values of each type of frames at the radio link protocol (RLP) layer. IE Name Service ID Last Reset Time Retransmitted Frames Not Found Retransmitted Frames Missing Last RTT Measurement Frames Largest Consecutive Erasures Number of Resets Number of NAK Aborts Block of Bytes Used RX Queue Idle Frames Fill Frames Blank Frames Null Frames New Data Frames Fundamental Data Frames Erasures Multiplexer Erasures Total Bytes Description Indicates the service ID. Indicates the latest reset time, that is, the last reset time (ms). Indicates the number of retransmissions that is not found. Indicates the number of missing transmitted frames. Indicates the number of 20 ms frames for the last round-trip time measurement. Indicates the largest block of consecutive erasures. Indicates the number of resets. Indicates the number of NAK aborts. Indicates the method for adding the block of bytes. Indicates the number of received idle frames. Indicates the number of received fill frames. Indicates the number of received blank frames. Indicates the number of received null frames. Indicates the number of received new data frames. Indicates the number of received 20 ms fundamental data frames. Indicates the number of received erasures at the radio link layer. Indicates the number of received erasures at the multiplexer layer. Indicates the total number of received bytes.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-173
14 Appendix
IE Name TX Queue Retransmitted Frames Idle Frames New Data Frames Fundamental Data Frames Total Bytes TX NAK Counts Single Double Triple
Description Indicates the number of retransmitted frames. Indicates the number of transmitted idle frames. Indicates the number of transmitted new frames. Indicates the number of transmitted 20 ms fundamental data frames. Indicates the total number of transmitted bytes. Indicates the number of single NAKs. Indicates the number of double NAKs. Indicates the number of triple NAKs.
RLP Throughput (1x)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to RLP Throughput of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table provides changes of the throughput received and transmitted at the RLP layer. IE Name 1x RLP Rx Throughput Instantaneous 1x RLP Tx Throughput Instantaneous Range/Unit Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Description Indicates the instantaneous throughput on the downlink. Indicates the instantaneous throughput on the uplink.
Signaling (1x)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Signaling of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table provides information about the receive and transmit power of the MS. IE Name Rx Power Tx Power TxAdj Range/Unit Range: -120 to -10. Unit: dBm. Range: -127 to -36. Unit: dBm. Range: -127 to 128. Unit: dB. Description Indicates the received signal power. Indicates the transmit power. Indicates the power control value, that is, the adjustment step of the transmit power. Indicates the frame error rate of the forward fundamental channel.
F-FCH FER
14-174
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Combined Ec/Io
Range/Unit Range: -30 to 0. Unit: dB.
Description Indicates the strength of the pilot, computed by the ratio of the pilot energy per chip to total power spectral density. Indicates the assignment rate on the forward supplemental channel.
F-SCH Rate
The rate ranges are 0X-1X, 1X-2X, 2X-4X, 3X-8X, 4X-16X, 5X-18X, and 6X-32X. If the rate is outside the ranges, N/A is displayed. -
R-SCH Rate
Indicates the assignment rate on the reverse supplemental channel.
Air Link Summary (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Air Link Summary of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides information about IEs of the forward signals on the air interface on the CDMA2000 EV-DO. IE Name Best Predicted ASP Index Best ASP SINR Best ASP Filtered SINR Data Rate - Current Data Rate - Short Data Rate - Long PER - Current PER - Short PER - Long ASP[1] Filtered RPC ASP[2] Filtered RPC Range/Unit Range: 1 to 6 Range: -15 to 20. Unit: dB. Range: -15 to 20. Unit: dB. Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: % Unit: % Unit: % Description Indicates the sector index of the best active set pilot (ASP). Indicates the signal-to-interference-andNoise ratio (SINR) of the best ASP. Indicates the filtered SINR of the best ASP. Indicates the instantaneous data rate. Indicates the average data rate in a short period. Indicates the average data rate in a long period. Indicates the instantaneous packet error rate (PER). Indicates the average PER in a short period. Indicates the average PER in a long period. Indicates the filtered reverse power control (RPC) of the ASP 1. Indicates the filtered RPC of the ASP 2.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-175
14 Appendix
IE Name ASP[3] Filtered RPC ASP[4] Filtered RPC ASP[5] Filtered RPC ASP[6] Filtered RPC
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the filtered RPC of the ASP 3. Indicates the filtered RPC of the ASP 4. Indicates the filtered RPC of the ASP 5. Indicates the filtered RPC of the ASP 6.
AT Status (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to AT Status of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides the state of the AT, including the parameters of the sector to which the AT is connected, AT connection state, session connection state, and pilot set. IE Name Protocol States AT state Description Indicates the AT state. The contained states are as follows: l Inactive l Acquisition l Sync l Idle l Access l Connected Session state Indicates the session connection state. The contained states are as follows: l Closed l AMP setup l AT-initiated negotiation l AN-initiated negotiation l Open l Closing ALMP state Indicates the state of the air link management protocol (ALMP). The contained states are as follows: l Inactive l Initialization l Idle l Connected
14-176
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Initialization state
Description Indicates the initialization state. The contained states are as follows: l Inactive l Network determination l Pilot acquisition l Sync Idle state Indicates the idle state. The contained states are as follows: l Inactive l Monitor l Sleep l Connection setup l Suspend Connected state Indicates the connection state. The contained states are as follows: l Inactive l Open Route update state Indicates the route update state. The contained states are as follows: l Inactive l Idle l Connection Setup l Connected l Synchronize connection setup Overhead state Indicates the state of overhead message processing. The contained states are as follows: l Inactive l Process All messages l Sleep l Frequency Change In Progress l Access Handoff In Progress l Wait for Link
Session Attempt
Result
Indicates the session attempt result. The results are as follows: l Received UATIAssignment message l Did not received UATIAssignment message
RATI
Indicates the random access terminal identifier.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-177
14 Appendix
IE Name UATI
Description Indicates the unicast access terminal identifier (UATI). When Result is set to 1, the value of UATI is null. Indicates the color code. When Result is set to 1, the value of UATI is null. Indicates the PN offset of the pilot. When Result is set to 1, the value of UATI is null. Indicates the name of the current serving sector. Indicates the AT state. The contained states are as follows: l Inactive l Acquisition l Sync l Idle l Access l Connected Session state Indicates the session connection state. The contained states are as follows: l Closed l AMP setup l AT-initiated negotiation l AN-initiated negotiation l Open l Closing Sector ID UATI024 Code MAC index Channel Band Class Subnet mask Color code Serving Sector PN User count SectorName Indicates the ID of the current serving sector. Indicates the latter 24 codes of the UATI. Indicates the MAC index. Indicates the ARFCN. Indicates the frequency band. Indicates the subnet mask of a sector. Indicates the color code. Indicates the PN of the current serving sector. Indicates the number of users. Indicates the name of the current serving sector.
Color Code PN SectorName AT Status AT state
14-178
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Finger (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Finger of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. You can check whether a barrier or a line-of-sight path exists in the link. IE Name State Information Search State MSTR (chip x8) MSTR Error Range/Unit Unit: 1/8 chip Description Indicates the search state. Indicates the mobile station time reference (MSTR) offset relative to the real time control (RTC) timebase. Indicates the MSTR offset relative to the earliest arriving in-lock and enabled active set pilot. Indicates the pilot PN of the earliest arriving finger. Indicates the PN offset of the pilot of the finger. Indicates the offset in the RTC buffer for this pilot. Indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio. Indicates the locked state. 0 refers to the unlocked state and 1 refers to the locked state. Indicates the antenna selection, only valid when diversity is disabled. 0 refers to Antenna 0, and 1 refers to Antenna 1. Indicates whether the diversity is enabled for the AT. 0 refers to Disabled, and 1 refers to Enabled. Finger index, which indicates the index of the demodulator finger.
Unit: 1/8 chip
MSTR Pilot PN Finger Information PN RTC Offset C/I Locked
Unit: 1/8 chip Unit: dB 0 or 1
Antenna
0 or 1
Diversity
0 or 1
Finger Idx
The range is 1000 to 1011, referring to finger 0 to finger 11. Range: 1 to 6 Range: 1 to 6 -
RPC Cell Idx ASP Idx C/I (Ant0)
Cell index, which indicates the index assigned to a cell by AT. Sector index, which indicates the index assigned to a sector by AT. C/I equivalent of the finger for antenna 0, only valid when diversity is enabled.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-179
14 Appendix
IE Name C/I (Ant1) SectorName Distance
Range/Unit Unit: m
Description C/I equivalent of the finger for antenna 1, only valid when diversity is enabled. Indicates the sector name. Indicates the distance between the MS and the serving cell.
Pilot Set (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Pilot Set of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides information about the serving cell and neighboring cells of the current MS of the CDMA. The pilot set refers to a set of the pilot channels that have the same frequency and different PN phases. The pilot set includes the parameters of the active set, candidate set, and neighboring pilot set. IE Name Neighbor Set Pilot PN Pilot Energy Range/Unit Unit: dB Description Indicates the pilot PN of the neighboring pilot set. Indicates the pilot strength Ec/Io of the neighboring pilot set, that is, the ratio of the energy per chip to total power spectral density of the received bandwidth. Indicates the ARFCN of the neighboring pilot set. Indicates the frequency band. Indicates the search window size of the neighboring set. Indicates the sector name. Indicates the distance between the MS and the neighboring cell. Indicates the pilot PN of the active set. Indicates the pilot strength Ec/Io of the active set, that is, the ratio of the energy per chip to total power spectral density of the received bandwidth. Indicates the MAC index of the active set.
Channel Number Band Class Window Size SectorName Distance Active Set Pilot PN Pilot Energy
Unit: MHz Unit: m Unit: dB
Mac Index
14-180
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Window Center (x2) SectorName Distance Candidate Set Pilot PN Pilot Energy
Range/Unit Unit: m Unit: dB
Description Indicates the search window center of the active set. Indicates the sector name. Indicates the distance between the MS and the active set cell. Indicates the pilot PN of the candidate set. Indicates the pilot strength Ec/Io of the candidate set, that is, the ratio of the energy per chip to total power spectral density of the received bandwidth. Indicates the PN offset of the pilot. Indicates the frequency band. Indicates the search window center of the candidate set. Indicates the sector name. Indicates the distance between the MS and the candidate set cell. Indicates the PN increment of the pilot. Indicates the frequency band. Indicates the search state of the AT. Indicates the ARFCN of the active set. Indicates the search window size of the active set. Indicates the search window size of the remaining set.
Channel Number Band Class Window Center (x2) SectorName Distance General Pilot PN Increment Band Class Searcher State Active Set Channel Active Set Window Remaining Set Window
Unit: MHz Unit: m Unit: MHz -
Power (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Power of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides power information about test terminals.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-181
14 Appendix
IE Name Power Amplifier State TX Open Loop TX Closed Loop TX Pilot TX Total RX Antenna 0 RX Antenna 1
Range/Unit On or Off. Range: -128 to 127. Unit: dBm. Range: -128 to 127. Unit: dBm. Range: -128 to 127. Unit: dBm. Range: -128 to 127. Unit: dBm. Range: -128 to 127. Unit: dBm. Range: -128 to 127. Unit: dBm.
Description Indicates the power amplifier state. Indicates the open loop transmit power. Indicates the closed loop transmit power. Indicates the pilot power. Indicates the total transmit power. Indicates the received power of antenna 0. Indicates the received power of antenna 1.
Rel. 0 Forward LinkInfo (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rel. 0 Forward LinkInfo of the CDMA2000 EVDO. The following table provides the number of frames at different rates of the forward traffic channel and the frame rates of the channel at different time. IE Name Rates Good CRC Bad CRC Total Forward Traffic Channel Statistics Frames at 38.4 kbit/s Frames at 76.8 kbit/s Frames at 153.6 kbit/ s Short frames at 307.2 kbit/s Long frames at 307.2 kbit/s
14-182
Description Indicates the frame rate. Indicates the number of frames that pass the cyclic redundancy check (CRC). Indicates the number of the frames that do not pass the CRC. Indicates the sum of Good CRC and Bad CRC of each rate. Indicates the statistics for the frames at 38.4 kbit/ s. Indicates the statistics for the frames at 76.8 kbit/ s. Indicates the statistics for the frames at 153.6 kbit/ s. Indicates the statistics for the short frames at 307.2 kbit/s. Indicates the statistics for the long frames at 307.2 kbit/s.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Short frames at 614.4 kbit/s Long frames at 614.4 kbit/s Frames at 921.6 kbit/ s Short frames at 1.228 Mbit/s Long frames at 1.228 Mbit/s Frames at 1.843 Mbit/s Frames at 2.457 Mbit/s Total frames
Description Indicates the statistics for the short frames at 614.4 kbit/s. Indicates the statistics for the long frames at 614.4 kbit/s. Indicates the statistics for the frames at 921.6 kbit/ s. Indicates the statistics for the short frames at 1.228 Mbit/s. Indicates the statistics for the long frames at 1.228 Mbit/s. Indicates the statistics for the frames at 1.843 Mbit/s. Indicates the statistics for the frames at 2.457 Mbit/s. Indicates the sum of Good CRC of all rates, sum of Bad CRC of all rates, and sum of Total of all rates. Indicates the statistics for the frames at 38.4 kbit/ s. Indicates the statistics for the frames at 76.8 kbit/ s. Indicates the sum of Good CRC of all rates, sum of Bad CRC of all rates, and sum of Total of all rates. Indicates the mean throughput. Indicates the total PER, which is calculated based on the formula: Total CRC Bad Frames/(Total CRC Bad Frames + Total CRC Good Frames).
Control Channel Statistics
Frames at 38.4 kbit/s Frames at 76.8 kbit/s Total frames
TX Queue
Mean served throughput Packet Error Rate (PER)
Rel. 0 Reverse LinkInfo (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rel. 0 Reverse LinkInfo of the CDMA2000 EVDO. The following table provides the number of frames at different rates of the reverse traffic channel and the frame rates of the channel at different time.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-183
14 Appendix
IE Name Reverse Rate Indicator Actual RRI
Description Indicates the actual reverse rate indicator. The following values are included: l 0 kbit/s l 9.6 kbit/s l 19.2 kbit/s l 38.4 kbit/s l 76.8 kbit/s l 153.6 kbit/s Reverse Rate Limit Indicates the reverse rate limit. The following values are included: l 0 kbit/s l 9.6 kbit/s l 19.2 kbit/s l 38.4 kbit/s l 76.8 kbit/s l 153.6 kbit/s Power Amplifier Limit Indicates the power amplifier limit. Indicates the number of packets transmitted at 9.6 kbit/s. Indicates the number of packets transmitted at 19.2 kbit/s. Indicates the number of packets transmitted at 38.4 kbit/s. Indicates the number of packets transmitted at 76.8 kbit/s. Indicates the number of data packets transmitted at 153.6 kbit/s.
Traffic Statistics
9.6kbit/s 19.2kbit/s 38.4kbit/s 76.8kbit/s 153.6kbit/s
Rev. A DRC-DSC-ARQ Buffer (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A DRC-DSC-ARQ Buffer of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides information about the data source control (DSC) and data rate control (DRC). IE Name DRC Cover DSC Value Range/Unit Range: 0 to 7 Range: 0 to 7 Description Indicates the DRC coverage. Indicates the DSC value.
14-184
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name DRC Rate ASP DRC Lock
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 3072. Unit: kbit/s. -
Description Indicates the DRC rate. Indicates the DRC lock for ASP1 to ASP6.
Rev. A Forward Link User Packet Throughput (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A Forward Link User Packet Throughput of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides the throughput of the forward link user packet. IE Name SUP Throughput Range/Unit Unit: kbit/s Description Indicates the throughput of the single service user packet.
Rev. A MultiFlow RLP Statistics (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A MultiFlow RLP Statistics of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides statistical information about the forward or reverse multi-RLP layer. IE Name Forward Link Statistics Flow ID Version Reset time Retransmissions not found AT NAK bytes requested RX retransmitted bytes RX new data bytes RX total bytes Range/Unit Description Indicates the ID of the RLP flow. Indicates the version. Indicates the latest reset time, that is, the last reset time. Indicates the number of retransmissions that is not found. Indicates the number of NAK bytes requested by the AT for retransmission. Indicates the number of received retransmitted bytes. Indicates the number of received new data bytes. Indicates the total number of received data bytes.
14-185
Unit: byte
Unit: byte Unit: byte Unit: byte
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name NAK timeouts/ aborts Resets AT reset request count AN reset ACK count AN reset request count Reverse Link Statistics Flow ID Version Reset time Retransmissions not found AN NAK bytes requested TX retransmitted bytes TX new data bytes TX total bytes Resets AT reset request count AN reset ACK count AN reset request count
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the number of NAK timeouts or aborts. Indicates the number of resets. Indicates the number of resets requested by the AT. Indicates the number of ACKs received from the AN. Indicates the number of resets requested by the AN. Indicates the ID of the RLP flow. Indicates the version. Indicates the latest reset time, that is, the last reset time. Indicates the number of frames that are not received in the retransmission. Indicates the number of NAK bytes requested by the AN for retransmission. Indicates the number of retransmitted bytes. Indicates the number of transmitted new data bytes. Indicates the total number of transmitted data bytes. Indicates the number of resets. Indicates the number of resets requested by the AT. Indicates the number of ACKs received from the AN. Indicates the number of resets requested by the AN.
Unit: byte
Unit: byte Unit: byte -
Rev. A Multi-User Packet Forward Statistics (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A Multi-User Packet Forward Statistics of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides multi-user packet forward statistics.
14 Appendix
IE Name CRC Count Termination Slot Count Packet Error Rate Throughput When Served Instantaneous Throughput Instantaneous Throughput (1s) Sequence (Elapsed Time)
Range/Unit Unit: % Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s
Description Indicates the number of transmitted multi-user traffic channel packets. Indicates the number of CRCs transmitted by each timeslot. Indicates the PER. Indicates the terminal throughput. Indicates the instantaneous throughput. Indicates the instantaneous throughput, which is calculated according to the difference of the previous packet. Indicates the sequence number of the log packet.
Rev. A Reverse Link Metrics (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A Reverse Link Metrics of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. You can obtain counters of the reverse link statistics. IE Name HiCap SPn ACKs n: 0 to 3 HiCap PARQ NAKs Range/Unit Description Indicates the number of ACKs of the high capacity (HiCap), which is received by the current instance. Indicates the number of NAKs of the HiCap, which is received by the current instance. Indicates the number of ACKs of the low latency (LoLat), which is received by the current instance. Indicates the number of NAKs of the LoLat, which is received by the current instance. Indicates the number of transmitted packets. Indicates the number of packets transmitted successfully. Indicates the PER. Indicates the duration for packet transmission.
LoLat SPn ACKs n: 0 to 3 LoLat PARQ NAKs
Packets Sent Good Packets PER Total Packet TX Time
Unit: % Unit: ms
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-187
14 Appendix
IE Name Transmitted Throughput Overall Throughput Total PER Total Instantaneous PER Total Transmitted Throughput Total Overall Throughput Total Instantaneous Throughput Average Latency Total Packets Sent Unexpected HARQ NAKs
Range/Unit Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: % Unit: % Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: ms -
Description Indicates the transmission throughput. Indicates the overall throughput. Indicates the total PER. Indicates the total instantaneous PER. Indicates the total transmission throughput. Indicates the overall throughput. Indicates the total instantaneous throughput. Indicates the average latency. Indicates the total number of transmitted packets. Indicates the number of HARQ NAKs received by the same packet of the current instance. Indicates the ratio of error packets to total transmitted packets.
HARQ-PARQ Mismatch Rate
Unit: %
Rev. A Reverse Link Throughput (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A Reverse Link Throughput of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. statistical information about the reverse link throughput. IE Name Throughput-Average Throughput-Instantaneous Throughput-TX Average Range/Unit Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Description Indicates the average throughput. Indicates the instantaneous throughput. Indicates the average transmit throughput.
Rev. A Single-User Forward Statistics (EV-DO)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A Single-User Forward Statistics of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides single-user forward statistics.
14-188
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name DRC Info Forward Traffic Channel Statistics Format
Range/ Unit -
Description Indicates the forward traffic channel statistics. Indicates the DRC information format. The format is [Rate, Transmit Slot, Transmit Bit]. Indicates the number of passed CRCs. Indicates the number of failed CRCs. Indicates the total number of CRCs. Indicates the transmit slot. Indicates the average value. Indicates the N slot. N ranges from 1 to 16. Indicates the DRC rate. Indicates the DRC format. Indicates the number of CRCs transmitted successfully. Indicates the number of CRCs failed to be transmitted. Indicates the total number of CRCs. Indicates the number of packets transmitted at each slot. Indicates the sequence number of the log packet. Indicates the PER. Indicates the terminal throughput. Indicates the instantaneous throughput. Indicates the instantaneous throughput, which is calculated according to the deviation of the previous packet.
Passed Failed Total Termination Slot Count Info Avg 1-16 Forward Control Channel Statistics DRC kbit/s DRC Format CRC Count Passed CRC Count Failed CRC Count Total Termination Slot Count General Traffic Channel Sequence Number (Elapsed Time) Packet Error Rate Throughput When Served Instantaneous Throughput Instantaneous Throughput (1s)
Unit: % Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-189
14 Appendix
IE Name Short Control Channel Throughput When Served Instantaneous Throughput Instantaneous Throughput (1s)
Range/ Unit Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s
Description Indicates the terminal throughput. Indicates the instantaneous throughput. Indicates the instantaneous throughput, which is calculated according to the deviation of the previous packet.
RLP (EV-DO)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to RLP of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides statistical values of each type of frames at the RLP layer. IE Name Service ID Last Reset Time Total AN/AT Resets AN Resets AT Resets Received Reset AN ACKs RX Queue Total AT Bytes New AT Bytes Duplicate AT Bytes Retransmitted AT Bytes AT NAK Requests Range/Unit Unit: ms Unit: byte Unit: byte Unit: byte Unit: byte Unit: byte Description Indicates the service ID. Indicates the latest reset time, that is, the last reset time. Indicates the total number of resets requested by the AN or AT. Indicates the number of resets requested by the AN. Indicates the number of resets requested by the AT. Indicates the number of ACKs received by the AN. Indicates the total number of bytes received by the AT. Indicates the number of new data bytes received by the AT. Indicates the number of duplicate bytes received by the AT. Indicates the number of retransmitted bytes received by the AT. Indicates the number of NAK bytes requested by the AT for retransmission.
14-190
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name AT NAK Aborts AT NAK Bytes TX Queue Total AT Bytes New AT Bytes Duplicate AT Bytes Retransmissions Not Found AN NAK Requests AN NAK Bytes
Range/Unit Unit: byte Unit: byte Unit: byte Unit: byte Unit: byte
Description Indicates the number of NAK timeouts or aborts of the AT. Indicates the number of NAK bytes received by the AT. Indicates the total number of bytes transmitted by the AT. Indicates the number of new data bytes transmitted by the AT. Indicates the number of duplicate bytes transmitted by the AT. Indicates the number of bytes that are not received in retransmission. Indicates the number of NAK bytes requested by the AN for retransmission. Indicates the number of NAK bytes transmitted by the AN.
14.3.4 WiMAX Information Elements of UEs

This describes the WiMAX information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the WiMAX UE air interface views.
NETEntry/HO Delay
This describes meanings of the IEs related to NETEntry/HO Delay of the WiMAX. The following table provides the parameters related to the network entry and handover delay of the test terminal. IE Name NetEntry Delay Time HO Delay Time Range/Unit Unit: ms Unit: ms Description Indicates the delay time of the network entry. Indicates the handover delay time.
Basic Information (Runcom)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Basic Information of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides basic information about the current terminal such as the serving cell identifier, terminal connection state, and frequency.
14 Appendix
IE Name MS State Base ID Preamble Index IDCell Current Frequency Frame Ratio (DL:UL) Permutation MAC State Max Tx Power Cell Name
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 114 Unit: Hz Unit: dBm -
Description Indicates the ID of the BS. Indicates the preamble index. Indicates the cell ID. Indicates the current frequency. Indicates the frame ratio on the uplink and downlink. Indicates the downlink permutation zone. Indicates the MAC state. Indicates the maximum transmit power. Indicates the cell name. Present only if an engineering parameter file is used. Indicates the distance between the MS and the serving cell. Indicates the network entry state of the MS. Indicates the number of the provisioned connection. Indicates the number of the admitted connection. Indicates the basic connection identifier (CID). Indicates the primary CID. Indicates the secondary CID. Indicates the number of downlink traffic connections. Indicates the number of uplink traffic connections. Indicates the frame number. Indicates the logical frame number. Indicates the number of downlink PDUs.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Distance Network Entry State
Unit: m 0 refers to success, and 1 refers to failure. -
Connection
No. of Provisioned Connection No. of Admitted Connection Basic CID Primary CID Second CID DL Traffic Connections UL Traffic Connections
Frame
Frame Number Logical Frame Number DL PDU Number
14-192
14 Appendix
IE Name UL PDU Number DL SDU Number UL SDU Number DL Discard Frame Number Burst Uplink Burst Data Zone Downlink Burst Data Zone Uplink Burst Data Duration Downlink Burst Data Duration Uplink Burst Data Size Downlink Burst Data Size Uplink Burst Data CID Downlink Burst Data CID Uplink Burst Data UIUC Downlink Burst Data DIUC Uplink Burst Data FEC Scheme Downlink Burst Data FEC Scheme DL Map FEC Scheme
Range/Unit Unit: slot Unit: slot Unit: byte Unit: byte -
Description Indicates the number of uplink PDUs. Indicates the number of downlink SDUs. Indicates the number of uplink SDUs. Indicates the number of frames discarded on the downlink. Indicates the uplink permutation zone. Indicates the downlink permutation zone. Indicates the uplink burst data duration. Indicates the downlink burst data duration. Indicates the size of the uplink burst data. Indicates the size of the downlink burst data. Indicate the CID corresponding to the uplink burst data. Indicate the CID corresponding to the downlink burst data. Indicates the uplink interval usage code (UIUC) of the burst data. Indicates the downlink interval usage code (DIUC) of the burst data. Indicates the FEC scheme of the uplink burst data. Indicates the FEC scheme of the downlink burst data. Indicates the MCS of the downlink MAP.
Range: 0 to 15
Range: 0 to 15
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-193
14 Appendix
IE Name Uplink Burst Data FEC Repetition Downlink Burst Data FEC Repetition
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the MCS repetition of the uplink burst data. Indicates the MCS repetition of the downlink burst data.
Cell Measurement (Runcom)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Cell Measurement of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides information about the cell measurement. IE Name BSID Preamble CINR mean CellName Distance RSSI mean Range/Unit Range: 0 to 114 Range: -50 to -30. Unit: dB. Unit: m Range: -110 to -10. Unit: dBm. Description Indicates the ID of the BS. Indicates the preamble code. Indicates the mean CINR. Indicates the cell name. Present only if an engineering parameter file is used. Indicates the distance between the UE and the serving cell. Indicates the mean RSSI.
CS_Info (Runcom)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to CS_Info of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides information about the convergence sublayer (CS). IE Name No. SFID Direction CID SF Type CS Type Service Class Name
14-194
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the number. Indicates the ID of the service flow. Indicates the direction. Indicates the CID. Indicates the type of the service flow. Indicates the type of the convergence sublayer. Indicates the service type.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Basic SFID Direction CID SF Type Source Port Low Value Source Port high Value Destination Port Low Value Destination Port High Value CS Type Qos Set Flag Provisioned Qos Set Flag Admitted Qos Set Flag Active Classifier Priority Service Class Name PHS PHSI PHSS PHSV PHSM PHSF Qos Profile Traffic Priority Maximum Sustained Traffic Rate Minimum Reserved Traffic Rate
Range/Unit Unit: byte Unit: bit/s Unit: bit/s
Description Indicates the ID of the service flow. Indicates the direction. Indicates the CID. Indicates the type of the service flow. Indicates the low value of the source port. Indicates the high value of the source port. Indicates the low value of the destination port. Indicates the high value of the destination port. Indicates the CS type. Indicates whether to use the provisioned QoS set. Indicates whether to use the admitted QoS set. Indicates whether to use the active QoS set. Indicates the classifier priority. Indicates the service name. Indicates the ID of the payload header suppression. Indicates the size of the payload header suppression. Indicates whether the payload header suppression is valid. Indicates the mask of the payload header suppression. Indicates the payload header suppression field. Indicates the traffic priority. Indicates the maximum sustained traffic rate. Indicates the minimum reserved traffic rate.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-195
14 Appendix
IE Name Tolerated Jitter SDU Size Maximum Latency Unsolicited Grant Interval Unsolicited Polling Interval IP Protocol IP Source Address IP Source Mask Address IP Destination Address IP Destination Mask Address Tos Low Tos high Tos Mask
Range/Unit Unit: ms Unit: byte Unit: ms Unit: ms Unit: ms -
Description Indicates the tolerated jitter. Indicates the SDU size. Indicates the maximum latency. Indicates the unsolicited grant interval. Indicates the unsolicited polling interval. Indicates the protocol at the IP layer. Indicates the source IP address. Indicates the source IP address mask. Indicates the destination IP address. Indicates the destination address mask. Indicates the service type range of IP packets (lower limit). Indicates the service type range of IP packets (upper limit). Indicates the service type mask of IP packets.
DL Frame Prefix and MS Capability (Runcom)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to DL Frame Prefix and MS Capability of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides information about the uplink frames and MS capabilities. IE Name DL Frame Prefix FFT Size Used Subchannel FFC Repetition Code FEC Coding Range/Unit Description Indicates the number of subcarriers supported by the BS. Indicates the used subchannel. Indicates the number of DL_Map repetitions. Indicates the DL_Map coding scheme.
14-196
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name MS Physical Capability TTG RTG Max Tx Power FFT Support
Range/Unit Unit: dBm -
Description Indicates the transmit-to-receive time interval. Indicates the receive-to-transmit time interval. Indicates the maximum transmit power. Indicates the number of subcarriers supported by the MS.
Handover and Neighboring Cells (Runcom)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Handover and Neighboring Cells of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides information about the handover and neighboring cells. IE Name HO Event HO Type HO Latency Time Serving BSID CellName Range/Unit Description Indicates the handover type. Indicates the handover latency. Indicates the BS ID of the serving cell. Indicates the cell name. Present only if an engineering parameter file is used. Indicates the distance between the UE and the serving cell. Indicates the ID of the recommended BS. Indicates the number of handover drops. Indicates the number of handover trials. Indicates the number of ping pang handovers. Indicates the handover drop rate.
Distance
Unit: m
Recom. BSID HO Statistic The Number of HO Drop The Number of HO Trial Ping Pang Count During HO HO Drop Rate
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-197
14 Appendix
IE Name Cells List NO. BSID Cell ID Preamble Index CINR mean
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 114 Range: -50 to -30. Unit: dB. Range: -110 to -10. Unit: dBm. Unit: dB -
Description Indicates the number. Indicates the ID of the BS. Indicates the cell ID. Indicates the preamble index. Indicates the mean carrierto-interference-and-noise ratio (CINR). Indicates the mean RSSI. Indicates the mean SNR. Indicates the cell name. Present only if an engineering parameter file is used. Indicates the distance between the UE and the serving cell. Indicates the central frequency.
RSSI mean SNR mean CellName
Distance
Unit: m
Freq
Unit: Hz
MAC Throughput (Runcom)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to MAC Throughput of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides information about the uplink and downlink throughput. IE Name DL App Throughput UL App Throughput DL Bit Data Rate UL Bit Data Rate DL Packet Data Rate UL Packet Data Rate Range/Unit Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: pkt/s Unit: pkt/s Description Indicates the downlink throughput at the application layer Indicates the uplink throughput at the application layer Indicates the downlink bit rate. Indicates the uplink bit rate. Indicates the downlink packet rate. Indicates the uplink packet rate.
14-198
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Modulation and Coding (Runcom)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Modulation and Coding of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides information about the current or history MCS. IE Name Active CID Direction FEC Type FEC Type ID Description Indicates the CID. Indicates the direction. Indicates the MCS type. Indicates the ID of the MCS type.
Power and PER (Runcom)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Power and PER of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides information about the transmit power, receive power, and reception quality. IE Name Power RSSI Mean RSSI Deviation CINR Mean CINR Deviation Tx Power Tx Reference Power Tx Headroom Range/Unit Range: -110 to -10. Unit: dBm. Range: -50 to -30. Unit: dB. Unit: dBm Unit: dB Description Indicates the mean RSSI. Indicates the RSSI deviation. Indicates the mean CINR. Indicates the CINR deviation. Indicates the transmit power. Indicates the reference transmit power. Indicates the headroom between the current transmit power and the maximum transmit power that can be used for the UE. Indicates the transmit power offset of the BS. Indicates the power work mode. Indicates the packet error rate.
Tx Power BS Offset Power Work Mode PER
Ranging (Runcom)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Ranging of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides information about all the reported IEs related to the ranging.
14 Appendix
IE Name Ranging Method UL Ranging Code UL Ranging Seed Ranging Type
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the uplink ranging codes. Indicates the random seed of the uplink ranging. Indicates the ranging type. The following types are included: l Initial: refers to the initial ranging. l Periodic: refers to the periodic ranging. l BW Request: refers to the bandwidth request ranging. l Handover: refers to the handover ranging.
Ranging Method UL Initial Ranging Power Tx Reference Power Ranging Code Start of Ranging Codes Group Initial Ranging Codes Periodic Ranging Codes Bandwidth Requests Codes Handover Ranging Codes Ranging Backoff Initial Ranging Codes Periodic Ranging Codes BW Request Ranging Codes Handover Ranging Codes
Unit: dBm Range: 0 to 255 Range: 0 to 255 Range: 0 to 255 Range: 0 to 255 Range: 0 to 255 2N. The range of N is 0 to 15. 2N. The range of N is 0 to 15. 2N. The range of N is 0 to 15. 2N. The range of N is 0 to 15.
Indicates the ranging method. Indicates the uplink initial ranging power. Indicates the reference transmit power. Indicates the start of a ranging code group. Indicates the initial ranging codes. Indicates the periodic ranging codes. Indicates the bandwidth request ranging codes. Indicates the handover ranging codes. Indicates the backoff window size of the initial ranging. Indicates the backoff window size of the periodic ranging. Indicates the backoff window size of the bandwidth request ranging. Indicates the backoff window size of the handover ranging.
14-200
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Ranging Statistic Initial Ranging Periodic Ranging BW Request Ranging Handover Ranging
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the initial ranging. Indicates the periodic ranging. Indicates the bandwidth request ranging. Indicates the handover ranging.
Secondary Connect Profile (Runcom)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Secondary Connect Profile of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides the information about the secondary CID. IE Name Secondary CID ARQ Support Range/Unit Not Supported: supports the ARQ. Supported: not support the ARQ. Unmanaged: disables the IP management mode. Managed: enables the IP management mode. The IP versions are IP4 and IPv6. Description Indicates the secondary CID. Indicates whether to support the automatic repeat request (ARQ). Indicates the IP management mode. Indicates the supported IP versions.
IP Management Mode
IP Version
Basic Information (GCT)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Basic Information of the WiMAX_GCT. The following table provides basic information about the current terminal such as the serving cell identifier, terminal connection state, and frequency. IE Name MS State BSID IDCell Frequency Frame Ratio Preamble Index MAC State Range/Unit Unit: kHz Range: 0 to 114 Description Indicates the ID of the BS. Indicates the cell ID. Indicates the central frequency. Indicates the frame ratio on the uplink and downlink. Indicates the preamble index. Indicates the MAC state.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-201
14 Appendix
IE Name Max Tx Power Segment DL PermBase UL PermBase Cell Name
Range/Unit Unit: dBm Range: 0 to 2 Range: 0 to 31 Range: 0 to 69 -
Description Indicates the maximum transmit power. Indicates the preamble carrier set. Indicates the permutation base for specified downlink. Indicates the permutation base for specified uplink. Indicates the cell name. Present only if an engineering parameter file is used. Indicates the distance between the MS and the serving cell. Indicates the frequency assignment (FA) index. Indicates the bitmap information about the frame control header (FCH). Indicates the length of the downlink MAP message. Indicates the FCH coding scheme. Indicates the index of the FCH repeat coding. Indicates the number of used subchannels. Indicates the number of frames. Indicates the uplink PDU number. Indicates the downlink PDU number. Indicates the connection identifier (CID) corresponding to the uplink burst data. Indicates the CID corresponding to the downlink burst data. Indicates the UIUC corresponding to the uplink burst data.
Distance FA Index FCH FCH Bitmap
Unit: m -
DL MapLen CodingInd RptCodingInd UsedSubch (Total 6 Group) Frame Frame Number UL PDU Number DL PDU Number Burst Uplink Burst Data CID Downlink Burst Data CID Uplink Burst Data UIUC
Range: 0 to 65535
14-202
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Downlink Burst Data DIUC Uplink Burst Data FEC Scheme Downlink Burst Data FEC Scheme
Description Indicates the DIUC corresponding to the downlink burst data. Indicates the FEC scheme of the uplink burst data. Indicates the FEC scheme of the downlink burst data.
BCS (GCT)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to BCS of the WiMAX_GCT. The following table provides information about the parameters related to the background cell search (BCS) test. IE Name Preamble Index CINR mean RSSI mean Range/Unit Unit: dB Unit: dBm Description Indicates the preamble index. Indicates the mean CINR. Indicates the mean RSSI.
Handover and Neighboring Cells (GCT)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Handover and Neighboring Cells of the WiMAX_GCT. The following table provides information about the handover and neighboring cells. IE Name HO Event HO Type Range/Unit Description Indicates the handover type: l HO Intra FA: refers to the intra-FA handover. l HO Inter FA: refers to the inter-FA handover. Current Preamble Index Current Serving ACOR Previous Preamble Index Previous Serving ACOR Range: 0 to 133 Range: 0 to 133 Indicates the preamble index of the current serving cell. Indicates the ACOR of the current serving cell. Indicates the preamble index of the previous cell. Indicates the ACOR of the previous cell.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-203
14 Appendix
IE Name HO Traffic Latency Time HO Latency Time HO Statistic The Number of HO Drop The Number of HO Trial Ping Pang Count During HO HO Drop Rate Cells List Preamble Index CINR mean RSSI mean Freq
Range/Unit Unit: ms Unit: ms Range: 0 to 114 Range: -50 to -30. Unit: dB. Range: -110 to -10. Unit: dBm. Unit: kHz
Description Indicates the handover traffic latency. Indicates the handover latency. Indicates the number of handover drops. Indicates the number of handover trials. Indicates the number of ping pang handovers. Indicates the handover drop rate. Indicates the preamble index. Indicates the mean CINR. Indicates the mean RSSI. Indicates the central frequency.
Modulation and Coding (GCT)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Modulation and Coding of the WiMAX_GCT. The following table provides information about the current or history modulation coding scheme (MCS). IE Name CID Direction UIUC/DIUC Range/Unit Range: 0 to 15 Description Indicates the ID of the CID. Indicates the transmit direction. Indicates the uplink interval usage code or downlink interval usage code. Indicates the type of the forward error correction (FEC). Indicates the number of repetitions.
FEC Type Repetition
14-204
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Power and PER (GCT)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Power and PER of the WiMAX_GCT. The following table provides information about the transmit power, receive power, and reception quality. IE Name Power Tx Power Tx Power Offset (BS) Tx Power Offset (SS) Min Tx Power Max Tx Power Noise Interference (BS) Noise Interference (SS) Power Work Mode PER Burst PER Burst Lost Burst MAP PER MAP Lost MAP PDU PER PDU ERROR PDU RX Range/Unit Unit: dBm Unit: dBm Unit: dBm Unit: dBm Unit: dBm Unit: dBm Unit: dBm Unit: % Unit: % Unit: % Description Indicates the transmit power. Indicates the transmit power offset on the BS side. Indicates the transmit power offset on the subscriber station. Indicates the minimum transmit power in a period. Indicates the maximum transmit power in a period. Indicates the noise interference on the BS side. Indicates the noise interference on the subscriber station. Indicates the power work mode. Indicates the burst PER. Indicates the number of lost burst packets. Indicates the number of received burst packets. Indicates the MAP PER. Indicates the number of lost MAP packets. Indicates the number of received MAP packets. Indicates the PDU PER. Indicates the number of error PDU packets. Indicates the number of received PDU packets.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-205
14 Appendix
Ranging (GCT)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Ranging of the WiMAX_GCT. The following table provides information about the initial ranging codes, periodic ranging codes, bandwidth request ranging codes, and handover ranging codes. IE Name Ranging Backoff Initial Ranging Codes Periodic Ranging Codes BW Request Ranging Codes Handover Ranging Codes Ranging Code Start of Ranging Codes Group Initial Ranging Codes Periodic Ranging Codes BW Requests Ranging Codes Handover Ranging Codes Description Indicates the backoff window size of the initial ranging. Indicates the backoff window size of the periodic ranging. Indicates the backoff window size of the bandwidth request ranging. Indicates the backoff window size of the handover ranging. Indicates the start of a ranging code group. Indicates the initial ranging codes. Indicates the periodic ranging codes. Indicates the bandwidth request ranging codes. Indicates the handover ranging codes.
UL and DL (GCT)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to UL and DL of the WiMAX_GCT. The following table provides information about the uplink, downlink, and antenna. IE Name ATN 1 RSSI CINR AGC ATN 2 RSSI CINR AGC DL Frequency Offset Range/Unit Unit: dBm Unit: dB Unit: dBm Unit: dB Unit: Hz Description Indicates the RSSI value. Indicates the CINR value. Indicates the value of the automatic gain control (AGC). Indicates the RSSI value. Indicates the CINR value. Indicates the AGC value. Indicates the downlink frequency offset.
14-206
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Min FO Max FO Sync Lost UL Tx Timing Offset BR ranging tries BRH Tries
Range/Unit Unit: Hz Unit: Hz Unit: m -
Description Indicates the minimum downlink frequency offset. Indicates the maximum downlink frequency offset. Indicates the synchronization lost. Indicates the transmit timing offset. Indicates the number of bandwidth request ranging tries. Indicates the number of BRH tries.
Max200
This describes meanings of the IEs related to Max200 of the WiMAX Max. The following table provides the basic information about the current UE. IE Name CINR Mean BSID CINR Deviation Cell ID RSSI Frequency UL Data Rate DL Data Rate WiMAX State Tx Power MAC Address PER Cell Name Distance Range/Unit Range: -50 to -30. Unit: dB. Unit: dB Range: -110 to -10. Unit: dBm. Unit: bit/s Unit: bit/s Unit: dBm Unit: % Unit: m Description Indicates the mean CINR. Indicates the base ID. Indicates the CINR deviation. Indicates the cell ID. Indicates the RSSI value. Indicates the central frequency. Indicates the uplink data rate. Indicates the downlink data rate. Indicates the state of the WiMAX. Indicates the transmit power. Indicates the MAC address. Indicates the packet error rate. Indicates the cell name. Indicates the distance between the UE and the serving cell.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-207
14 Appendix
Basic Information (Sequans)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Basic Information of the WiMAX Sequans. The following table provides basic information about the current terminal such as the serving cell identifier, terminal connection state, and frequency. IE Name MS State BSID Bandwidth Cell Name Distance FFT Size Frequency MAC Address MAC Version PHY Type Range/ Unit Unit: MHz Unit: m Unit: kHz Description Indicates the ID of the BS. Indicates the bandwidth. Indicates the cell name. Present only if an engineering parameter file is used. Indicates the distance between the MS and the serving cell. Indicates the number of subcarriers. Indicates the central frequency. Indicates the MAC address. Indicates the MAC version. Indicates the multiple access type: l SC, that is single carrier. l SCA, that is selective call acceptance. l OFDM, that is orthogonal frequency division multiplex. l OFDMA., that is orthogonal frequency division multiple access. Preamble Index SS State Connect ion Basic CID Frame Number Primary CID Second CID UL Permbase Range: 0 to 114 Range: 0 to 69 Indicates the preamble index. Indicates the signal strength (SS) state of the MS. Indicates the basic CID. Indicates the frame number. Indicates the primary CID. Indicates the secondary CID. Indicates the uplink permutation base, which determines the combination mode of uplink subchannels.
14-208
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Burst Profiles (Sequans)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Burst Profiles of the WiMAX_Sequans. The following table provides burst information about the uplink and downlink frames such as interval usage code (IUC), and FEC. IE Name DL Qty FEC Code IUC Code UL Qty Description Indicates the number of burst profiles on the downlink. Indicates the FEC scheme of the burst data on the downlink or uplink. Indicates the interval usage code on the downlink or uplink. Indicates the number of burst profiles on the uplink.
Downlink Channel Descriptor (Sequans)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Downlink Channel Descriptor of the WiMAX_Sequans. The following table provides information about the IEs related to the downlink channel descriptor (DCD) signaling. IE Name DCD Info Configuration Count BS EIRP MaxRSS For InitRanging Frequency MAC Version HysteresisMargin TimeToTrigger Duration BS Restart Count DLBurstProfiles Qty DCD PHY Specific PHY Type Channel Number Range/Unit Unit: dBm Unit: dBm Description Indicates the number of DCDs. Indicates the effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP) of the BS. Indicates the maximum EIRP received by the initial ranging on the BS side. Indicates the center frequency. Indicates the MAC version. Indicates the handover hysteresis. Indicates the statistics duration. Indicates the number of BS restart attempts. Indicates the number of downlink burst profiles. Indicates the multiple access type. Indicates the channel number. This IE is displayed only when the channel is assigned manually.
14-209
Unit: kHz Range: 0 to 255 -
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Channel Switch Frame Number BSID TTG (PS) RTG (PS) HARQ ACK Delay UL Perm Type For Broadcast In HARQ Max Retransmission Def RSSI And CINR Aver Parameter DL AMC Allocated Band Bitmap H-Add Threshold H-Delete Threshold ASR Slot Len And Switching Period HO Type Support DL BP For Multi FEC Types Paging Group Qty Neighbor BS Trigger Qty HO Aver Params
Range/Unit Unit: frame -
Description Indicates the channel switch frame number. Indicates the ID of the BS. Indicates the transmit-to-receive time interval. Indicates the receive-to-transmit time interval. Indicates the acknowledgement delay of the HARQ on the uplink. Indicates the permutation zone used by the HARQ. Indicates the maximum number of HARQ retransmissions on the downlink. Indicates the default RSSI and CINR.
Indicates the bitmap of the downlink AMC assignment. Indicates the threshold for adding neighboring cells. Indicates the threshold for deleting neighboring cells. Indicates the slot length and switching period of the anchor switch reporting (ASR). Indicates the supported handover type. Indicates the FEC type of the downlink burst data. Indicates the number of paging groups. Indicates the target threshold of the neighboring cell quality. Indicates the average value of the handover.
14-210
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Cell Name
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the cell name. Present only if an engineering parameter file is used. Indicates the distance between the UE and the serving cell. Indicates the paging interval time.
Distance Paging Interval Len
Unit: m Unit: frame
Frame Configuration Definition (Sequans)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Frame Configuration Definition of the WiMAX_Sequans. The following table provides information about the frame structure. IE Name FCD Configuration Count Channel Started Channel Gain Ratio Range/Unit Description Indicates the number of frame configuration definitions (FCDs). Indicates the start channel. Indicates the ratio of the cyclic prefix to the available frame duration. Indicates the bandwidth. Indicates the frame duration. Indicates the multiple access type. Indicates the number of subcarriers. Indicates the preamble index. Indicates the subchannel structure bitmap.
TURE or FALSE -
Bandwidth Frame Duration PHY Type FFT Size Preamble Index SubChannel Bitmap
Unit: MHz Range: 0 to 114 -
MCS and Zone Info (Sequans)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to MCS and Zone Info of the WiMAX Sequans. The following table provides information about the current or historical modulation coding scheme. IE Name DL FEC Type
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Description Indicates the downlink forward error correction (FEC) type.

14 Appendix
IE Name UL FEC Type DL Repetition UL Repetition Current Zone
Description Indicates the uplink FEC type. Indicates the number of repetitions on the downlink. Indicates the number of repetitions on the uplink. Indicates the current zone where the terminal transmits data. The values are as follows: l pusc with all: indicates that all the channels can be used for data transmission. l pusc with 1/3: indicates that 1/3 of all the channels can be used for data transmission.
MIMO Type
Indicates the multiple input multiple output (MIMO) used by the terminal. The values are as follows: l MIMO A: indicates that the data stream is divided into multiple data streams. Within the same duration, the data transmitted by multiple antennas is the same. l MIMO B: indicates that the high-speed data stream is divided into multiple data streams based on the number of antennas, and then data streams are modulated separately and transmitted through the corresponding antennas to improve the channel capacity directly.
Neighbor BS List (Sequans)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Neighbor BS List of the WiMAX_Sequans. The following table provides information about the neighboring cells such as the ID of the BS, preamble index, SINR value, and signal strength. IE Name BS Information Neighbor BS Qty Current Serving BSID Current Serving PreambleIdx Current Serving Frequency BS List BSID PreambleIdx Range/Unit Unit: kHz Description Indicates the number of neighboring cells. Indicates the BS ID of the current serving cell. Indicates the preamble index of the current serving cell. Indicates the central frequency of the current serving cell. Indicates the ID of the BS. Indicates the preamble index.
14-212
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Frequency CINR RSSI Cell Name
Range/Unit Unit: kHz Unit: dB Unit: dBm -
Description Indicates frequency. the central
Indicates the CINR value. Indicates the RSSI value. Indicates the cell name. Present only if an engineering parameter file is used. Indicates the distance between the UE and the serving cell. Indicates the minimum handover latency. Indicates the maximum handover latency. Indicates the mean handover latency. Indicates the last handover latency.
Distance
Unit: m
HO Statistics
Min HO Latency Time Max HO Latency Time Mean HO Latency Time Last HO Latency Time
Unit: ms Unit: ms Unit: ms Unit: ms
Power and PER (Sequans)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Power and PER of the WiMAX_Sequans. The following table provides information about the power and signal of the UE. IE Name MeanRSSI StdDevRSSI MeanCINR StdDevCINR MeanCINRReuse1 Range/Unit Unit: dBm Unit: dB Unit: dB Unit: dB Unit: dB Description Indicates the mean RSSI. Indicates the RSSI standard deviation. Indicates the mean CINR. Indicates the CINR standard deviation. Indicates the mean CINR of the serving cell when all subchannels are used. Indicates the CINR standard deviation of the serving cell when all subchannels are used.
StdDevCINRReuse1
Unit: dB
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-213
14 Appendix
IE Name MeanCINRReuse3
Range/Unit Unit: dB
Description Indicates the mean CINR of the serving cell when one-third subchannels are used. Indicates the CINR standard deviation of the serving cell when one-third subchannels are used. Indicates the dffective isotropic radiated power of the BS. Indicates the power control adjustment step on the uplink. Indicates the power control adjustment step on the downlink. Indicates the minimum power control adjustment value. Indicates the maximum power control adjustment value. Indicates the current transmit power. Indicates the maximum transmit power of the UE. Indicates the packet error rate. Indicates the downlink frequency offset. Indicates the power control mode.
StdDevCINRReuse3
Unit: dB
BS EIRP Up PowerOffset Adjust Step Down PowerOffset Adjust Step Min Adjustment Max Adjustment PowerOffset PowerOffset
Unit: dBm Unit: dB Unit: dB Unit: dB Unit: dB Unit: dBm Unit: dBm Unit: % Unit: Hz The power control mode includes open loop and closed loop.
Current Tx Power Max Tx Power PER Frequency Offset Power Mode
Ranging (Sequans)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the Ranging of the WiMAX Sequans. The following table provides information about all the reported IEs related to the ranging. IE Name Ranging Backoff Initial Ranging Periodic Ranging Range/Unit 2N. The range of N is 0 to 15. 2N. The range of N is 0 to 15. Description Indicates the backoff window size of the initial ranging. Indicates the backoff window size of the periodic ranging.
14-214
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name BW Request Ranging Handover Ranging Ranging and Other Code RangingCode Group Start Initial Ranging Codes Periodic Ranging Codes Bandwidth Request Codes Handover Ranging Codes MaxRSS For InitRanging InitRanging Interval
Range/Unit 2N. The range of N is 0 to 15. 2N. The range of N is 0 to 15. Range: 0 to 255 Range: 0 to 255 Range: 0 to 255 Range: 0 to 255 Range: 0 to 255 Unit: dBm
Description Indicates the backoff window size of the bandwidth request ranging. Indicates the backoff window size of the handover ranging. Indicates the start number of the ranging codes. Indicates the initial ranging codes. Indicates the periodic ranging codes. Indicates the bandwidth request ranging codes. Indicates the handover ranging codes. Indicates the maximum effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP) of the initial ranging. Indicates the assignment interval of the initial ranging.
Unit: frame
SF List (Sequans)
This describes meanings of the IEs related to SF List of the WiMAX_Sequans. The following table provides information about all the reported IEs related to the server flower (SF). IE Name ARQ Authenticate Algorithm Baisc CID CID Delivery Service Range/Unit The value is Disabled or Enabled. Description Indicates whether to support the ARQ. Indicates the authentication algorithm. Indicates the basic connection identifier. Indicates the connection identifier. Indicates the delivery service.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-215
14 Appendix
IE Name Direction Encrypt Algorithm HARQ Max Traffic Rate Maximum Latency Min Traffic Rate SAID Scheduling Service Type Service Class Name SF Qty
Range/Unit The value is Uplink or Downlink. The value is Disabled or Enabled. Unit: bit/s Unit: ms Unit: bit/s -
Description Indicates the direction. Indicates the encrypt algorithm. Indicates whether to support the HARQ. Indicates the maximum traffic rate. Indicates the maximum latency. Indicates the minimum traffic rate. Indicates the ID of the safety set. Indicates the scheduling service type. Indicates the service class. Indicates the number of server flowers. Indicates the SF state: l Provisioned l Admitted l Active
SF State
Indicates the SF type: l Basic SF l Primary SF l Secondary SF l Data SF l Multicast SF
SF Type
SFID ToleRated Jitter Traffic Priority
Unit: ms -
Indicates the ID of the server flower. Indicates the tolerated jitter. Indicates the traffic priority.
14-216
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Uplink Channel Descriptor (Sequans)

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Uplink Channel Descriptor of the WiMAX_Sequans. The following table provides information about the IEs related to the uplink channel descriptor (UCD) signaling. IE Name UCD Info Configuration Count Initial Ranging Backoff Start Initial Ranging Backoff End BW Request Backoff Start BW Request Backoff End Reservation Timeout Range/Unit Description Indicates UCDs. the number of
Indicates the start backoff window size of the initial ranging. Indicates the end backoff window size of the initial ranging. Indicates the start backoff window size of the bandwidth request ranging. Indicates the end backoff window size of the bandwidth request ranging. Indicates the interval for originating the rangings of the same type. Indicates frequency. the central of
Frequency ULBrustProfile Qty UCD PHY Specific
Unit: kHz -
Indicates the number uplink burst profiles.
PHY Type Initial Ranging Codes Periodic Ranging Codes Bandwidth Codes Request
Indicates the multiple access type. Indicates the initial ranging codes. Indicates the periodic ranging codes. Indicates the bandwidth request ranging codes. Indicates the start of the periodic ranging backoff codes. Indicates the end of the periodic ranging backoff codes.
Periodic Ranging Backoff Start Periodic Backoff End Ranging
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-217
14 Appendix
IE Name RangingCode Start Group
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 255 Unit: dB Unit: dB Unit: frame Unit: frame Unit: frame
Description Indicates the start of a ranging code group. Indicates the permutation zone. uplink
Permutation Base Ul Alloc Subch Bitmap Optional Ul Subch Bitmap Band AMC Threshold Band AMC Threshold Alloc Alloc Release
Indicates the bitmap of all the uplink subcarriers. Indicates the bitmap of optional uplink subcarriers. Indicates the threshold for allocating the band AMC. Indicates the threshold for releasing the band AMC. Indicates the allocation duration of the band AMC. Indicates the release duration of the band AMC. Indicates the maximum period for refreshing the band CINR. Indicates the assignment and retry duration of the band AMC. Indicates the threshold for assigning the channel. Indicates the threshold for releasing the channel. Indicates the duration of the channel assignment. Indicates the duration of the channel release. Indicates the maximum period for refreshing the bin CINR. Indicates the re-assignment duration. Indicates the HARQ acknowledgement delay.
Band AMC Allo Timer Band AMC Timer Release
Band Status ReportMax Period
Unit: frame Band AMC Retry Timer Safety Ch Threshold Safety Ch Threshold Allo Release Unit: dB Unit: dB Unit: frame Unit: frame Unit: frame
Safety Ch Allo Timer Safety Timer Ch Release
Bin Status ReportMax Period Safety Ch Retry Timer HARQ ACK Delay DL
Unit: frame Unit: frame
14-218
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name CQICH Band Trans Delay AMC
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the AMC transmission delay of the channel quality information channel (CQICH). Indicates the number of retransmissions. maximum HARQ
Max Retransmission In UL-HARQ Normalized Overrides CQICH Field Size C/N
Indicates the normalized carrier-to-noise ratio (C/N) overrides. Indicates the CQICH field size. Indicates the size of the start backoff window where the UE performs the ranging during the handover. Indicates the size of the end backoff window where the UE performs the ranging during the handover. Indicates the normalized C/N overrides 2. Indicates the average CINE required for the band AMC entry. Indicates the preamble upper bound step of the adaptive antenna system (AAS). Indicates the preamble lower bound step of the AAS. Indicates whether to send the AAS Beam Select message. Indicates whether to use the CQICH. Indicates the upper adjustment step of the uplink power. Indicates the lower adjustment step of the uplink power.
Range: 0-7 Range: 0-15
Handover Ranging Backoff Start Range: 0-15 Handover Backoff End Normalized Overrides2 Band AMC Average CINR UpperBound Preamble LowerBound Preamble Ranging
C/N
Unit: dB
Entry
AAS
Unit: dB
AAS
Unit: dB The value is No or Yes. Unit: dB
Allow AAS Beam Select Messages Use CQICH Indication Flag Up PowerOffset Adjust Step Down PowerOffset Adjust Step
Unit: dB
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-219
14 Appendix
IE Name Min PowerOffset Adjustment Max PowerOffset Adjustment Handover Codes Ranging
Range/Unit Unit: dB Unit: dB InitRanging Interval The value ranges from 0 to 14, and the unit is dB. -
Description Indicates the adjustment step of the minimum power. Indicates the adjustment step of the maximum power. Indicates the ranging codes. handover
Indicates the interval for transmitting the initial ranging. Indicates the report on the transmit power. Indicates the threshold for transmitting the report on the transmit power. Indicates the interval for transmitting the report on the transmit power. Indicates the p_avg value. Indicates the threshold for assigning the CQICH. Indicates the interval for assigning CQICH. Indicates the p_avg value after the CQICH is assigned. Indicates the normalized C/N during the channel sounding. Indicates the burst profile on the uplink.
Tx Power Report bitmap Tx Power Threshold Tx Power Interval Report
Report
Tx Power Report a (p_avg) Tx Power Report Threshold-CQICH Tx Power Report Interval-CQICH Tx Power Report a (p_avg)-CQICH Normalized C/N Channel Sounding Up BurstProfile MultiFECTypes For
The value ranges from 0 to 14, and the unit is dB. -
Basic Information (Beceem)

This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Basic Information of the WiMAX Beceem. The following table provides the information about the status information of the current terminal. IE Name Bandwidth Range/Unit Range: 5 MHz, 7 MHz, 8.75 MHz, and 10 MHz. Unit: MHz. Description Indicates the bandwidth.
14-220
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name BSID
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the ID of the BS. It is displayed only if an engineering parameter file is used. Indicates the name of a cell. It is displayed only if an engineering parameter file is used. Indicates the standard deviation of the carrier-to-interference-and-noise ratio (CINR). Indicates the CINR of the diversity antenna. Indicates the mean CINR. Indicates the CINR of the primary antenna. Indicates the distance between the terminal and the serving cell. Indicates the downlink bit rate. Indicates the permutation base for the specified downlink subchannel. Indicates the frame ratio on the uplink and downlink. Indicates the central frequency. Indicates the frequency offset on the downlink. Indicates the MAC address. Indicates the network entry state, including wait for sync, phy sync achieved, wait for RNG RSP, wait for SBC RSP, wait for REGRSP, wait for DSA, and network entry complete. Indicates the number of service flows. Indicates the power mode, including close loop, openloop passive retention, open loop passive, and open loop active. Indicates the preamble index. Indicates the ranging code.
Cell Name
CINR Deviation
Range: -50 to 30. Unit: dB.
CINR Diversity Ant CINR Mean CINR Primary Ant Distance DL Bit Data Rate DL PermBase Frame Ratio Frequency Frequency Offset MAC Address Network Entry State
Range: -50 to 30. Unit: dB. Range: -50 to 30. Unit: dB. Range: -50 to 30. Unit: dB. Unit: m Unit: kbit/s Range: 0 to 31 Unit: kHz Unit: kHz -
Number of SFIDs Power Mode
Preamble Index Ranging Code
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-221
14 Appendix
IE Name Ranging Seed RSSI Deviation
Description Indicates the ranging seed. Indicates the standard deviation of the received signal strength indicator (RSSI). Indicates the RSSI of the diversity antenna. Indicates the mean RSSI. Indicates the RSSI of the primary antenna. Indicates whether to support the automatic repeat request (ARQ). Indicates the difference between the current transmission power and the maximum transmission power available for the UE. Indicates the transmission power. Indicates the uplink bit rate. Indicates the permutation base for the specified uplink subchannel.
RSSI Diversity Ant RSSI Mean RSSI Primary Ant Support ARQ
Range: -110 to -10. Unit: dBm. Range: -110 to -10. Unit: dBm. Range: -110 to -10. Unit: dBm. Range: Disable (does not support the ARQ), or Enable (support the ARQ) Unit: dBm
Tx Headroom
Tx Power UL Bit Data Rate UL PermBase
Unit: dBm Unit: kbit/s Range: 0 to 69
CS Information (Beceem)
This describes the meanings of the IEs related to CS Information of the WiMAX Beceem. The following table provides the information about the convergence sublayer. IE Name IP Associated PHSI Range/Unit Range: 0 to 255 Description Indicates the associated payload header suppression index (PHSI). It is the mirror of the PHSI. Indicates the destination MAC address. Indicates the destination port range. Indicates the destination IP address. Indicates the source IP address. Indicates the IP layer protocol. Indicates the source MAC address.
Destination MAC Address Destination Port Range IP Destination Address IP Source Address Protocol Source MAC Address
14-222
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Source Port Range Tos-High Tos-Low Tos-Mask PHS Classifier Rule Priority
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the source port range. Indicates the lower limit of the IP packet service type. Indicates the upper limit of the IP packet service type. Indicates the mask of the IP packet service type. Indicates the priority of data packet classifier rules. Classifier rules map data packets to transmission connections.
Packet Classification Rule Index PHSF
Range: 0 to 15
Indicates the packet classification rule index. It provides references for the formulation of PHS rules. Indicates the payload header suppression field (PHSF), which is a set of bytes. It specifies the header part to be suppressed in the packet data unit (PDU) message. Indicates the ID of the payload header suppression, which is a 8-bit mask. It specifies the bytes that are suppressed and those are not suppressed in the PHSF. Indicates the mask of the payload header suppression. It specifies the bytes to be suppressed in the PHSF. Indicates the size of the payload header suppression. The value is equal to the number of bytes in the PHSF or the number of valid bits in the PHSM. Indicates whether the payload header suppression is valid. It determines whether to perform suppression verification before suppressing the payload header. Indicates the connection ID. It can map service flows to the transmission connections on the MAC layer.
PHSI
PHSM
PHSS
Range: 1 to 255. Unit: byte
PHSV
SF List Inform ation
CID
Range: 0 to 65535
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-223
14 Appendix
IE Name Direction
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the direction of the service flow. The service flow may be used in the uplink or downlink direction, and each PDU message correlates with an independent service flow.
SF Scheduling Type
Indicates the scheduling type of the service flow, including the BE, nrtPS, rtPS, ErtPS, and UGS. Indicates the state of the service flow, including Provisioned Set, Admitted Set, and Active Set. Indicates the ID of the service flow. Indicates the transaction ID.
SF state
SFID TID
Range: 0 to 65535
HARQ and FER Information (Beceem)

This describes the meanings of the IEs related to HARQ and FER Information of the WiMAX Beceem. The following table provides the information about the hybrid automatic retransmission request (HARQ) and frame error rate. IE Name FER PER SDU Reject PDU Reject PDU CRC Error Range/Unit Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Description Indicates the frame error rate. Indicates the packet error rate. Indicates the number of the rejected signaling data unit (SDU) packets. Indicates the number of the rejected packet data unit (PDU) packets. Indicates the number of PDU packets with cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors. Indicates the number of PDU packets with header check sequence (HCS) errors. Indicates the number of downlink Map packets with CRC errors. Indicates the number of downlink Map packets with HCS errors.
PDU HCS Error
DL MAP CRC Error DL MAP HCS Error
14-224
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name SDU Number PDU Number Control Packet Number UL BURST HARQ ASK DELAY DL BURST HARQ ACK DELAY
Range/Unit Range: Sync, one frame offset, two frames offset, and three frames offset Range: Sync, one frame offset, two frames offset, and three frames offset
Description Indicates the number of the transmitted or received SDU packets Indicates the number of the transmitted or received PDU packets Indicates the number of the transmitted or received control packets Indicates the acknowledgement delay of the burst HARQ on the uplink. Indicates the acknowledgement delay of the burst HARQ on the downlink.
Ranging (Beceem)
This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Ranging of the WiMAX Beceem. The following table provides the information about the uplink channel descriptor (UCD) message. IE Name Initial ranging code Start Periodic ranging code Start Handover ranging code Start Bandwidth ranging code Start Initial ranging code End Periodic ranging code End Handover ranging code End Bandwidth ranging code End Range/Unit Range: 0 to 255 Range: 0 to 255 Range: 0 to 255 Range: 0 to 255 Range: 0 to 255 Range: 0 to 255 Range: 0 to 255 Range: 0 to 255 Description Indicates the start number of the initial ranging code. Indicates the start number of the periodic ranging code. Indicates the start number of the handover ranging code. Indicates the start number of the bandwidth request ranging code. Indicates the end value of the initial ranging code. Indicates the end value of the periodic ranging code. Indicates the end value of the handover ranging code. Indicates the end value of the bandwidth request ranging code.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-225
14 Appendix
Physical Information (Beceem)

This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Physical Information of the WiMAX Beceem. The following table provides the information about the physical channel coding. IE Name DL MAP DL Map FEC Scheme Range/ Unit Description Indicates the modulation coding scheme (MCS) of the downlink MAP. The downlink MAP is used to identify the usage of downlink burst intervals in the physical layer in burst mode. Frame Number Local Frame Number Indicates the frame number. Indicates the number of the current frame, namely the frame on which the downlink Map message is received. Indicates the physical layer state, including SYNC_ACHIEVED, SYNC_TRYING_TO_SYNC, and SYNC_INVALID. Indicates the number of downlink channel descriptor (DCD) message changes. Indicates the connection ID of the downlink burst data. Indicates the downlink interval usage code (DIUC) of the burst data. Indicates the downlink burst data duration. Indicates the MCS repetition of the downlink burst data. Indicates the MCS of the downlink burst data. Indicates the downlink burst data size. Indicates the uplink permutation zone. Indicates the number of uplink channel descriptor (UCD) message changes. Indicates the connection ID of the uplink burst data.
PHY state
DL Burst
DCD Change Count
Downlink Burst Data CID Downlink Burst Data DIUC Downlink Burst Data Duration Downlink Burst Data FEC Repetition Downlink Burst Data FEC Scheme Downlink Burst Data Size Downlink Burst Data Zone UL Burst UCD Change Count Uplink Burst Data CID
Unit: slot Unit: byte -
14-226
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Uplink Burst Data Duration Uplink Burst Data FEC Repetition Uplink Burst Data FEC Scheme Uplink Burst Data Size Uplink Burst Data UIUC Uplink Burst Data Zone
Range/ Unit Unit: slot Unit: byte -
Description Indicates the uplink burst data duration. Indicates the MCS repetition of the uplink burst data. Indicates the MCS of the uplink burst data. Indicates the uplink burst data size. Indicates the uplink interval usage code (UIUC) of the burst data. Indicates the downlink permutation zone.
Handover and Neighboring Cells (Beceem)

This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Handover and Neighboring Cells of the WiMAX Beceem. The following table provides the information about terminal handover and neighboring cells. IE Name Bandwidth BSID Range/Unit Unit: MHz Description Indicates the bandwidth. Indicates the ID of the BS. It is displayed only if an engineering parameter file is used. Indicates the name of a cell. It is displayed only if an engineering parameter file is used. Indicates the mean CINR. Indicates the distance between the terminal and the neighboring cell. Indicates the central frequency. Indicates the handover type. Indicates the delay of the last handover. Indicates the number of ping pang handovers. Indicates the preamble index.
CellName
CINR Mean Distance Frequency HO Type Last HO Latency Time Ping Pang Count During HO Preamble Index
Range: -50 to 30. Unit: dB. Unit: m Unit: kHz Unit: ms Range: 0 to 114
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-227
14 Appendix
IE Name RSSI Mean The Number of HO The Number of HO Drop The Number of HO Ranging Failure The Number of HO Trial
Range/Unit Range: -110 to -10. Unit: dBm. -
Description Indicates the mean RSSI. Indicates the number of successful handovers. Indicates the number of handover drops. Indicates the number of ranging handover failures. Indicates the number of handover trials.
14.3.5 LTE Information Elements of UEs

This describes the LTE information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the LTE UE air interface views.
BandWidth
This section describes the IEs related to the Bandwidth of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the uplink bandwidth by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name UL RB Num UL RB Start Range/Unit Range: 0 to 100 Range: 0 to 99 Description Indicates the number of uplink resource blocks. Indicates the start uplink resource block.
BLER
This section describes the IEs related to the BLER of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the block error rate (BLER) by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name Initial Error TB Count Initial Total TB Count Residual Error TB Count
14-228
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the statistics of transport blocks (TBs) with initial transmission errors on codeword 0 or 1. Indicates the statistics of TBs initially transmitted on codeword 0 or 1. Indicates the statistics of TBs with retransmission errors on codeword 0 or 1.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Residual Total TB Count Code0 Initial BLER Code1 Initial BLER Code0 Residual BLER Code1 Residual BLER PDSCH BLER
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 100; Unit: % Range: 0 to 100; Unit: % Range: 0 to 100; Unit: % Range: 0 to 100; Unit: % Range: 0 to 100; Unit: %
Description Indicates the statistics of TBs retransmitted on codeword 0 or 1. Indicates the initial BLER on codeword 0. Indicates the initial BLER on codeword 1. Indicates the residual BLER on codeword 0. Indicates the residual BLER on codeword 1. Indicates the BLER on the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH).
Buffer Status Report

This section describes the IEs related to the Buffer Status Report of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the buffer status report (BSR) by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name Long BSR0 Long BSR1 Long BSR2 Long BSR3 Short BSR Range/Unit Range: 0 to 63 Range: 0 to 63 Range: 0 to 63 Range: 0 to 63 Range: 0 to 63 Description Indicates the status reports of long buffer 0. Indicates the status reports of long buffer 1. Indicates the status reports of long buffer 2. Indicates the status reports of long buffer 3. Indicates the status reports of short buffer.
Camp Cell Information

This section describes the IEs related to the Camp Cell Information of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the camp cell by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name CP Length Range/Unit Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates the normal CP length. 1 indicates the extended CP length. Description Indicates the cyclic prefix length.
C-RNTI
Indicates the cell radio network temporary identifier.

14-229
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Dl BandWidth
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 5 l 0 indicates 1.4 MHz. l 1 indicates 3 MHz. l 2 indicates 5 MHz. l 3 indicates 10 MHz. l 4 indicates 15 MHz. l 5 indicates 20 MHz.
Description Indicates the downlink bandwidth.
DL Frequency EARFCN eNBTxAntennasNumber NeighbourAntennasNumber PCI P-RNTI RA-RNTI SI-RNTI SpecialSubFramePatterns SPS C-RNTI
1, 2, or 4 1, 2, or 4 Range: 0 to 503 -
Indicates the downlink central frequency. Indicates the E-UTRA absolute radio frequency channel number. Indicates the eNodeB transmit antenna number. Indicate the neighbor antenna number. Indicates the physical cell identity. Indicates the paging radio network temporary identifier. Indicates the random access radio network temporary identifier. Indicates the system information radio network temporary identifier. Indicates the ratio of special sub frames such as DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS, available only for TDD. Indicates the semi-persistent scheduling cell radio network temporary identifier. Indicates the ratio of sub frames on the uplink and downlink, available only for TDD. Indicates the synchronous flag.
SubFrameAssignmentType SyncFlag
Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates the synchronization. 1 indicates the asynchronization. Range: 0 to 63 -
TAC TMP C-RNTI
Indicates the tracking area code. Indicates the temporary cell radio network temporary identifier.
14-230
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name TPC-PUCCH-RNTI
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the cell radio network temporary identifier for power control on Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH). Indicates the cell radio network temporary identifier for power control on PUCCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH). Indicates the transmission mode. Indicates the UE received antenna number. Indicates the UE transmit antenna number. Indicates the uplink bandwidth.
TPC-PUSCH-RNTI
Transmission Mode UERxAntennasNumber UETxAntennasNumber UL BandWidth
Range: 1 to 9 1, 2, or 4 1 or 2 Range: 0 to 5 l 0 indicates 1.4 MHz. l 1 indicates 3 MHz. l 2 indicates 5 MHz. l 3 indicates 10 MHz. l 4 indicates 15 MHz. l 5 indicates 20 MHz.
UL Freqency Work Mode
Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates the FDD mode. 1 indicates the TDD mode.
Indicates the uplink central frequency. Indicates the work mode.
Cell Reselection Parameters

This section describes the IEs related to the Cell Reselection Parameters of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the cell reselection parameters by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name RESEL_C OMM NCellReselectionHigh Range/Unit Range: 1 to 16 Description Indicates the maximum number of cell reselections for UEs to enter the high-mobility state. Indicates the minimum number of cell reselections for UEs to enter the mediummobility state.
14-231
NCellReselectionMedium
Range: 1 to 16
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name PCompensation
Range/Unit Unit: dB
Description Indicates the difference between the maximum allowed transmit power of the UE and the maximum actual transmit power of the UE, that is, max(PeMax - PuMax, 0). Indicates the maximum transmit power of a UE during data transmission on the downlink. Indicates the maximum RF output power of the UE. Indicates the hysteresis value for ranking criteria. Indicates the hysteresis value for ranking criteria. Indicates the offset to the signalled Qrxlevmin taken into account in the Srxlev evaluation as a result of a periodic search for a higher priority PLMN while camped normally in a VPLMN. Indicates the minimum required received signal level in a cell. Indicates the scaling factor for Qhyst in high service flow for high-mobility state.
PeMax
Unit: dBm
PuMax QHyst Qrxlevmeas QRxLevMinOffse t
Unit: dBm Range: 0 to 8 Unit: dBm Range: 1 to 8
RxLevMin
Range: -70 to -22. Unit: dBm. Range: 0 to 3 0 indicates 0.25. 1 indicates 0.5. 2 indicates 0.7. 3 indicates 1.
SfHigh
SfMedium
Range: 0 to 3 0 indicates 0.25. 1 indicates 0.5. 2 indicates 0.7. 3 indicates 1.
Indicates the scaling factor for Qhyst in medium service flow for medium-mobility state.
TEvaluation
Value: 30, 60, 120, 180, or 240. Unit: s
Indicates the duration for evaluating the allowed number of cell reselections.
14-232
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name THystNormal
Range/Unit Value: 30, 60, 120, 180, or 240 -
Description Indicates the additional time period before the UE can enter the normal-mobility state. Indicates the cell reselection information that is common for intra-frequency cells. Indicates the threshold (in dB) for E-UTRAN inter-frequency and inter-RAT measurements. Indicates the threshold for serving frequency that is used in reselection evaluation towards lower priority EUTRAN frequency or RAT. Indicates the value that is applicable for the intrafrequency neighboring EUTRA cells. Indicates the minimum required RxLevel in a cell. Indicates the scaling factor for Qhyst in sf-High for highmobility state. Indicates the scaling factor for Qhyst in sf-medium for medium-mobility state. Indicates the threshold (in dB) for intra-frequency measurements. Indicates the cell reselection timer value TreselectionRAT for E-UTRAN. This parameter can be set for each E-UTRAN frequency. Indicates the cell reselection priority. Indicates the minimum required Rx level in a cell. Indicates the inter frequency number.
SERVING_ FREQ_INF O
CellReselectPriority SNonIntraSearch
Range: 0 to 56. Unit: dB. Range: 0 to 56
ThreshServingLo w
INTRA_FR EQ_CELL_ RESELEC T
PMax
QRxLevMin SfHigh
SfMedium
SIntraSearch
Range: 0 to 31. Unit: dB. Range: 0 to 7
TReselectEutra
INTER_FR EQ_CARR IER_FREQ
CellReselectionPriority DlCarrierFreq InterFrequencyNumber
Unit: dBm -
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-233
14 Appendix
IE Name NeighborCellConfig PCI PMax
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 503 Unit: dBm
Description Indicates the neighbor cell configuration table. Indicates the neighbor cell ID. Indicates the value applicable for the neighboring E-UTRAN cells on a carrier frequency. Indicates the frequency offset for E-UTRAN frequencies with the same priority. Indicates the frequency offset for E-UTRAN frequencies with the same priority. Indicates the minimum required RxLevel in a cell. Indicates the scaling factor for Qhyst in sf-high for highmobility state. Indicates the scaling factor for Qhyst in sf-Medium for medium-mobility state. Indicates the threshold used by the UE when reselecting towards the higher priority frequency X than current serving frequency. Indicates the threshold used in reselection towards frequency X priority from a higher priority frequency. Indicates the cell reselection timer value for E-UTRAN. This parameter can be set for each E-UTRAN frequency.
QOffsetCell
Range: 0 to 30
QOffsetFreq
RxLevMin SfHigh
SfMedium
ThreshXHigh
ThreshXLow
TReselectEutra
Range: 0 to 7
Cell Scan
This section describes the IEs related to the Cell Scan of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the LTE cell searching test by referring to the following descriptions.
14-234
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name DlBandWidth Frequency Iot RSRP RSRQ RSSI SCHRP
Range/Unit Unit: M Unit: dB Range: -132 to -40. Unit: dBm. Range: -20 to 0. Unit: dB. Unit: dBm Unit: dBm
Description Indicates the downlink bandwidth, such as 5 M, 10 M, and 20 M. Indicates the frequency involved in the cell searching test. Indicates the Iot value. Indicates the reference signal received power. Indicates the reference signal received quality. Indicates the received signal strength indicator. Indicates the SCH_RP value.
Cell Search
This section describes the IEs related to the Cell Search of the LTE network. You can obtain the information reported by the test terminal during the cell searching. IE Name CP Type GroupID Physical Sector RxAntNumber Range/Unit Range: 0 to 1 Range: 0 to 167 Range: 0 to 2 Range: 0 to 3 l 0 indicates 1R. l 1 indicates 2R. l 2 indicates 3R. l 3 indicates 4R. SyncPosition System Bandwidth Range: 0 to 11520 Range: 0 to 5 l 0 indicates 1.4 MHz. l 1 indicates 3 MHz. l 2 indicates 5 MHz. l 3 indicates 10 MHz. l 4 indicates 15 MHz. l 5 indicates 20 MHz.
Description Indicates the cyclic prefix type. Indicates the group ID. Indicates the physical sector index. Indicates the received antenna number.
Indicates the symbol synchronization position. Indicates the system bandwidth.
14 Appendix
IE Name Time Position
Range/Unit Range: 0 to (11520 x 16)
Description Indicates the time position.
Constellation Painting
This section describes the IEs related to the Constellation Painting of the LTE network. You can obtain the statistical information by referring to the following descriptions when the QPSK, 16QAM, or 64QAM is used as the modulation method. IE Name QPSK 16QAM Range/Unit Unit: frame Unit: frame Description Indicates the number of frames modulated in Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) mode. Indicates the number of frames modulated in 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (16QAM) mode. Indicates the number of frames modulated in 64QAM mode.
64QAM
Unit: frame
CQI
This section describes the IEs related to the CQI of the LTE network. You can obtain the configuration information about the channel quality indicator (CQI) by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name DL SubBand Schedule Number Rank1 Rank2 Code0 Rank2 Code1 Rank3 Code0 Rank3 Code1 Rank4 Code0 Rank4 Code1 Range/Unit Description Indicates the scheduling times of downlink subband. Indicates the CQI of Rank 1. Indicates the CQI of Rank 2 on codeword 0. Indicates the CQI of Rank 2 on codeword 1. Indicates the CQI of Rank 3 on codeword 0. Indicates the CQI of Rank 3 on codeword 1. Indicates the CQI of Rank 4 on codeword 0. Indicates the CQI of Rank 4 on codeword 1.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-236
14 Appendix
IE Name Sub0~24 Sub Band CQI Wide Band CQI
Description Indicates the scheduling times of subband. Indicates the CQI of each subband. Indicates the CQI of each wideband.
CQI Configuration Information

This section describes the IEs related to the CQI Configuration Information of the LTE network. You can obtain the configuration information about the channel quality indicator (CQI) by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name AckMcsOffsetIndex AperiodCqiReportMode BandwidthPartNumber CQIMcsOffsetIndex MultiRi NOffsetRi ParaH ParaK PeriodCqiReportMode CQIPeriodicity PmiMode PucchFeedBackType Rank1CQISpecial Rank2Code0CQISpecial Rand2Code1CQISpecial RiBitNumber RiMcsOffsetIndex
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 15 Range: 0 to 4 Range: 0 to 4 Range: 0 to 15 Range: 0 to 32 Range: -160 to 0 Range: 1 to 17 Range: 0 to 4 Range: 5 to 8 Range: 1 to 160 Range: 0 to 2 Range: 1 to 2 Range: 0 to 15 Range: 0 to 15 Range: 0 to 15 Range: 0 to 2 Range: 0 to 15
Description Indicates the MCS offset index of the acknowledgment (ACK). Indicates the aperiodic CQI report mode of the PUSCH. Indicates the number of bandwidth parts. Indicates the MCS offset index of the CQI. Indicates the multi-RIs. Indicates the rank indicator (RI) offset. Indicates the parameter H. Indicates the parameter K. Indicates the periodic CQI report mode of the PUSCH. Indicates the CQI periodicity. Indicates the PreCoding Matrix Index (PMI) mode. Indicates the CQI feedback type of the PUCCH. Indicates the special CQI of rank 1. Indicates the special CQI on codeword 0 of rank 2. Indicates the special CQI on codeword 1 of rank 2. Indicates the number of RI bits. Indicates the MCS offset index of RI.
14-237
14 Appendix
IE Name SubFrameOffset Transmit Mode
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 159 Range: 0 to 8
Description Indicates the CQI subframe offset. Indicates the transmission mode.
DRX Information
This section describes the IEs related to the DRX Information of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the DRX by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name AnrEnable ContentionTimer DrxCfgInd DrxCycleType Range/Unit Range: 0 to 1 Range: 0 to 1 Range: 0 to 1 Range: 1 to 3 l 1 indicates the short period of DRX. l 2 indicates the long period of DRX. l 3 indicates the invalid period of DRX. DrxInactivityTimer DrxRetxTimer DrxRetxTimer1 Range: 0 to 2,560. Unit: ms Range: 1 to 33. Unit: ms Range: 0 to 1 Indicates the value of the DRX inactivity timer. Indicates the value of the DRX retransmission timer. Indicates the instantaneous state of the DRX retransmission timer that corresponds to HARQ channel 1. Indicates the instantaneous state of the DRX retransmission timer that corresponds to HARQ channel 2. Indicates the instantaneous state of the DRX retransmission timer that corresponds to HARQ channel 3. Indicates the instantaneous state of the DRX retransmission timer that corresponds to HARQ channel 4.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Description Indicates whether the DRX is enabled for the ANR. Indicates the instantaneous state of the contention timer. Indicates the DRX configuration indicator. Indicates the DRX cycle type.
DrxRetxTimer2
Range: 0 to 1
DrxRetxTimer3
Range: 0 to 1
DrxRetxTimer4
Range: 0 to 1
14-238
14 Appendix
IE Name DrxRetxTimer5
Description Indicates the instantaneous state of the DRX retransmission timer that corresponds to HARQ channel 5. Indicates the instantaneous state of the DRX retransmission timer that corresponds to HARQ channel 6. Indicates the instantaneous state of the DRX retransmission timer that corresponds to HARQ channel 7. Indicates the instantaneous state of the DRX retransmission timer that corresponds to HARQ channel 8. Indicates the value of the DRX short cycle timer. Indicates whether the DRX is enabled. Indicates the offset when the DRX cycle is started. Indicates the DRX state timer. Indicates the DRX sub-state. Indicates the instantaneous state of inactivity timer. Indicates the long cycle of the DRX. Indicates the LTE type.
DrxRetxTimer6
Range: 0 to 1
DrxRetxTimer7
Range: 0 to 1
DrxRetxTimer8
Range: 0 to 1
DrxShortCycleTimer DrxStartedFlag DrxStartOffset DrxStateBitmap DrxSubState InactivityTimer LongDrxCycle LTEType
Range: 1 to 16. Unit: ms Range: 0 to 1 Range: 0 to 2,599. Unit: ms Range: 0 to 232 Range: 0 to 4 Range: 0 to 1 Range: 10 to 2,560. Unit: ms Range: 1 to 3 l 1 indicates FDD. l 2 indicates TDD. l 3 indicates the invalid LTE mode.
OndurationTimer OndurationTimerState ShortDrxCycleFlg ShortDrxCycle
Range: 1 to 200. Unit: ms Range: 0 to 1 Range: 0 to 640 Range: 2 to 640. Unit: ms
Indicates the value of the continuous monitoring timer. Indicates the instantaneous state of the continuous monitoring timer. Indicates whether the short cycle of the DRX is valid. Indicates the short cycle of the DRX.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-239
14 Appendix
EPS Bearer Information

This section describes the IEs related to the EPS Bearer Information of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the Evolved Packet System (EPS) bearer by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name Bearer Context Type CID Number DLGuaranteedMax Rate DLMaxRate EPSB ID EPSB Number Link EPSB ID QCI ULGuaranteedMax Rate ULMaxRate Range/Unit Range: 0 to 31 Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Range: 1 to 11 Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Description Indicates the bearer context type. Indicates the context ID. Indicates the maximum guaranteed bit rate for downlink. Indicates the maximum bit rate for downlink. Indicates the evolved packet system bearer ID. Indicates the number of evolved packet system bearer. Indicates the evolved packet system link bearer ID. Indicates the QoS class identifier. Indicates the maximum guaranteed bit rate for uplink. Indicates the maximum bit rate for uplink.
HARQ
This section describes the IEs related to the HARQ of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name ReTx Index Range/Unit Description l First Transfer: indicates the number of initial transmission successes (during a statistic period). l Nth RxTx: indicates the number of Nth retransmission successes (during a statistic period). MAX ReTx Count Repetition Range: 0 to 9 repetition or non-repetition Indicates the maximum number of HARQ retransmissions. Indicates the HARQ transmission mode.
14-240
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Period
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the HARQ retransmission period. This IE is displayed only when Repetition is set to repetition. Indicates the uplink initial block error rate (BLER). Indicates the uplink residual BLER. Indicates the uplink scheduling BLER. Indicates the number of times that the UL HARQ ACK messages are transmitted. The following statistics are displayed separately: number of times that the UL HARQ ACK messages are successfully transmitted for the first time within a statistical period and the number of times that the UL HARQ ACK messages are successfully retransmitted from the first time to the ninth time within a statistical period. Indicates the number of times that the UL HARQ NACK messages are transmitted. The following statistics are displayed separately: number of times that the UL HARQ NACK messages are successfully transmitted for the first time within a statistical period and the number of times that the UL HARQ NACK messages are successfully retransmitted from the first time to the ninth time within a statistical period. Indicates the number of times that the DL HARQ ACK messages are transmitted on codeword 0. The following statistics are displayed separately: number of times that the DL HARQ ACK messages are successfully transmitted for the first time within a statistical period and the number of times that the DL HARQ ACK messages are successfully retransmitted from the first time to the ninth time within a statistical period.
UL IBLER UL RBLER UL SBLER UL HARQ ACK
Range: 0 to 100; unit: % Range: 0 to 100; unit: % Range: 0 to 100; unit: % -
UL HARQ NACK
Code0 DL HARQ ACK
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-241
14 Appendix
IE Name Code0 DL HARQ NACK
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the number of times that the DL HARQ NACK messages are transmitted on codeword 0. The following statistics are displayed separately: number of times that the DL HARQ NACK messages are successfully transmitted for the first time within a statistical period and the number of times that the DL HARQ NACK messages are successfully retransmitted from the first time to the ninth time within a statistical period. Indicates the number of times that the DL HARQ ACK messages are transmitted on codeword 1. The following statistics are displayed separately: number of times that the DL HARQ ACK messages are successfully transmitted for the first time within a statistical period and the number of times that the DL HARQ ACK messages are successfully retransmitted from the first time to the ninth time within a statistical period. Indicates the number of times that the DL HARQ NACK messages are transmitted on codeword 1. The following statistics are displayed separately: number of times that the DL HARQ NACK messages are successfully transmitted for the first time within a statistical period and the number of times that the DL HARQ NACK messages are successfully retransmitted from the first time to the ninth time within a statistical period.
Code1 DL HARQ ACK
Code1 DL HARQ NACK
HO Interrupt Delay
This section describes the IEs related to the HO Interrupt Delay. You can obtain the information about the interruption delay due to the UE handover by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name MacHoDlInteruptTime Unit: s MacHoUlInteruptTime Range/Unit Unit: s Description Indicates the downlink interruption delay due to the MAC handover. Indicates the uplink interruption delay due to the MAC handover.
14-242
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Unit: s MacRcvFpgaSyncTime Unit: s MacRcvHOReqTime Unit: s MacRcvRarTime Unit: s MacRx1stAckTime Unit: s MacRx1stCrcRightTime Unit: s MacRx1stDrbTime Unit: s MacRx1stPktTime Unit: s MacRx1stSrbTime Unit: s MacRx1stUlgrantTime Unit: s MacRxLastAckTime Unit: s MacRxLastCrcRightTime Unit: s MacRxLastDrbTime Unit: s MacRxLastPktTime Unit: s MacRxLastSrbTime
Indicates the start time stamp of the baseband response random access. Indicates the start time stamp of the MAC random access at layer 3. Indicates the time stamp of the random access response (RAR) access message received by the MAC. Indicates the time stamp of the first ACK message that is received after the handover. Indicates the time stamp of the first packet that the CRC is performed correctly and is received by the target cell after the handover. Indicates the time stamp of the first user plane data packet that the CRC is performed correctly and is received by the target cell after the handover. Indicates the time stamp of the first packet that is received after the handover. Indicates the time stamp of the first signaling plane data packet that the CRC is performed correctly and is received by the target cell after the handover. Indicates the time stamp of the first uplink authorized message that is received after the handover. Indicates the time stamp of the last ACK message that is received before the handover. Indicates the time stamp of the last packet that the CRC is performed correctly and is received by the source cell before the handover. Indicates the time stamp of the last user plane data packet that the CRC is performed correctly and is received by the source cell before the handover. Indicates the time stamp of the last packet that is received before the handover. Indicates the time stamp of the last signaling plane data packet that the CRC is performed correctly and is received by the source cell before the handover.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-243
14 Appendix
Unit: s MacRxLastUlgrantTime MacSend1stPreambleTime MacSendLastPreambleTime Unit: s Unit: s Unit: s MacSendMsg3Time MacSendPreambleNum Unit: s MacTx1stDrbTime Unit: s MacTx1stSrbTime Unit: s MacTxLastDrbTime Unit: s MacTxLastSrbTime OriginalCellRlcRxLastPktRb OriginalCellRlcRxLastPktSi OriginalCellRlcRxLastPktTi PdcpHoDlDtContTime PdcpHoDlDtDelayTime PdcpHoDlDtStopTime Unit: s PdcpHoUlDtContTime PdcpHoUlDtDelayTime Unit: s Unit: s Unit: s -
Indicates the time stamp of the last uplink authorized message that is received by the MAC before the handover. Indicates the time stamp of the first preamble sent by the MAC. Indicates the time stamp of the last preamble sent by the MAC. Indicates the time stamp of the MAC handover completion, that is, the time stamp when the RRC Request message of Message 3 is sent. Indicates the number of preambles that are sent during the random access. Indicates the time stamp of the first user plane data packet that the CRC is performed correctly and is sent after the handover. Indicates the time stamp of the first signaling plane data packet that the CRC is performed correctly and is sent after the handover. Indicates the time stamp of the user plane data packet that is sent before the handover. Indicates the time stamp of the signaling plane data packet that is sent before the handover. Indicates the ID of the resource block of the last data packet that is received by the RLC of the source cell. Indicates the size of the last data packet that is received by the RLC of the source cell. Indicates the time of the last data packet that is received by the RLC of the source cell. Indicates the contention time of the PDCP downlink data transmission. Indicates the delay in the PDCP downlink data transmission. Indicates the stop time of the PDCP downlink data transmission. Indicates the contention time of the PDCP uplink data transmission. Indicates the delay in the PDCP uplink data transmission.
Unit: s Unit: s
14-244
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Unit: s PdcpHoUlDtStopTime PdcpRxPktNum PdcpRxPktSize PdcpRxPktTime Unit: s RlcDLHoCmpTime RlcHoDlInteruptTime RlcHoUlInteruptTime RlcRxPduSn RlcRxPduTime RlcRxPktSize RlcRxRbid Unit: s Unit: s Unit: s Unit: s
Indicates the stop time of the PDCP uplink data transmission. Indicates the sequence number of the first packet that is sent to the PDCP. Indicates the size of the first packet sent to the PDCP. Indicates the time that the first packet is sent to the PDCP. Indicates the time that the RLC downlink handover is complete. Indicates the RLC downlink interruption time. Indicates the RLC uplink interruption time. Indicates the sequence number of the first packet that is received by the RLC. Indicates the time that the first PDU that is received by the RLC. Indicates the size of the first packet that is received by the RLC. Indicates the ID of the resource block of the first packet that is received by the RLC. Indicates the ID of the resource block of the first data packet that is sent on the uplink of the RLC after the handover. Indicates the time that the first data packet is sent on the uplink of the RLC after the handover. Indicates the ID of the resource block of the last data packet that is sent on the uplink of the RLC before the handover. Indicates the time that the last data packet is sent on the uplink of the RLC before the handover. Indicates the time that the handover command is received on the uplink of the RLC.
RlcUlFirstRlcPktRbId Unit: s RlcUlFirstRlcPktTime RlcUlLastRlcPktRbId Unit: s RlcUlLastRlcPktTime Unit: s RlcULRxHoIndTime
IPerf Data
This section describes the IEs related to the IPerf Data. You can obtain the information about the data reported by the test terminal during the Iperf test.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-245
14 Appendix
In the case of the Iperf test, C mode refers to that the Probe sends data to the core network (CN) through the client. S mode refers to that the Probe receives data from the CN through the server. C/S mode refers to that the Probe sends data to and receives data from the CN at the same time. IE Name Bandwidth Begin Time End Time ID Jitter Lost Datagrams Lost Ratio Server UDP TCP or Client UDP Total Datagrams Transmit Bytes Range/Unit Unit: Mbit/s Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Description Indicates the bandwidth. Indicates the start time of data transmission. Indicates the end time of data transmission. Indicates the data transmission ID, which is used to identify a data transmission service. Indicates the jitter. Indicates the number of lost data packets. Indicates the ratio of lost packets, that is, the ratio of lost data packets to the total data packets. Indicates the downlink user datagram protocol (UDP) data transmission in S mode. Indicates the uplink and downlink TCP data transmission in C/S mode or the uplink UDP data transmission in C mode. Indicates the total number of transmitted data packets. Indicates the number of transmitted bytes.
Least Mean Square Painting

This section describes the IEs related to the Least Mean Square Painting of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the least mean square painting by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name LS Painting Description Indicates the least mean square painting.
Logical Channel Statistics

This section describes the IEs related to the Logical Channel Statistics of the LTE network. You can obtain the logical channel statistics by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name Logical Channel ID
14-246
Description Indicates the logical channel ID.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name RLC Mode
Range/Unit The value 0 indicates the AM mode; the value 1 indicates the UM mode; the value 2 indicates the TM mode. Range: 0 to 15. Range: 1 to 16 Range: 0 to 3
Description Indicates the radio link control (RLC) mode.
EPSB ID Logical Channel PRI Logical Channel Group ID Logical Channel Group PRI Logical Channel PBR BuckSizeDuration DLRLCReceivePduLength DLRLCRepeatPduLength
Indicates the carrier address. Indicates the logical channel priority. Indicates the logical channel ID. Indicates the logical channel group priority.
0, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256 50, 100, 150, 300, 500, or 1000 -
Indicates the prioritized bit rate (PBR) of a logical channel. Indicates the buck size duration. Indicates the total bytes of packet data units (PDUs) that a UE receives on the downlink at the RLC layer. Indicates the total bytes of duplicate PDUs that a UE receives on the downlink at the RLC layer, including the bytes of PDUs whose sequence number (SN) is smaller than VR(R). Indicates the total bytes of data that a UE receives on the downlink at the application layer. Indicates the total bytes of signaling data units (SDUs) that a UE receives on the downlink at the PDCP layer. Indicates the packet loss rate of SDUs that a UE receives on the downlink at the RLC layer. Indicates the number of status report PDUs that a UE receives on the downlink at the RLC layer. Indicates the total bytes of status report PDUs that a UE receives on the downlink at the RLC layer.
DLRabmReceiveSduLength DLPDCPReceiveSduLength DLRLCDropRate
Unit: %
DLRLCReceiveControlPduNumber DLRLCReceiveControlPduLength
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-247
14 Appendix
IE Name DlControlPduNumber
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the number of intervals between receptions of status reports on the downlink by a UE. Indicates the interval between receptions of status reports on the downlink by a UE. Indicates the number of status report PDUs that a UE triggers on the uplink. Indicates the total bytes of status report PDUs that a UE triggers on the uplink. Indicates the data volume of discarded packets based on the SDU timer that a UE receives on the uplink at the PDCP layer. Indicates the total bytes of PDUs that a UE transmits on the uplink at the RLC layer for the first time. Indicates the total bytes of PDUs that a UE retransmits on the uplink at the RLC layer. Indicates the usage of the transmit window where a UE transmits data on the uplink at the RLC layer. Indicates the number of intervals between sendings of status reports on the uplink by a UE. Indicates the interval between sendings of status reports on the uplink by a UE.
DLRLCRxControlPduTimeSpace ULRLCTxControlPduNumber ULRLCTxControlPduLength ULPDCPDropSduBySduTimer ULRLCTxNewPduLength ULRLCReTxPduLength ULRLCWindowUseRate UlControlPduNumber
ULRLCTxControlPduTimeSpace
MAC Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the MAC Parameters of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the MAC parameters related to the PDSCH and PUSCH by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name ActiveDemultFailNumber Range/Unit Description Indicates the number of service data units received on the downlink at the MAC layer that fail to be demultiplexed when PDSCHs are in activated state. Indicates the number of service data units received on the downlink at the MAC layer that are demultiplexed successfully when PDSCHs are in activated state.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
ActiveDemultySuccessNumber
14-248
14 Appendix
IE Name ActivePDSCHCrcCorrectNumber
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the number of times that the correct cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs) are performed on the service data units received on the downlink at the MAC layer when PDSCHs are in activated state. Indicates the number of times that the incorrect cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs) are performed on the service data units received on the downlink at the MAC layer when PDSCHs are in activated state. Indicates the number of antenna ports at the MAC layer. Indicates the number of system resource blocks that use the downlink bandwidth at the MAC layer. Indicates the number of DCI0s that are successfully parsed by the uplink at the MAC layer. Indicates the number of times that the correct CRCs are performed on the data packets received on the downlink at the MAC layer regardless of the states of PDSCHs. Indicates the number of times that the incorrect CRCs are performed on the data packets received on the downlink at the MAC layer regardless of the states of PDSCHs. Indicates the total number of data packets received on the downlink PDSCHs at the MAC layer. Indicates the number of data packets that are dynamically scheduled on uplink PUSCHs. Indicates the number of data packets that are semi-statically scheduled on uplink PUSCHs. Indicates the number of DCI0s that are received on the uplink at the MAC layer. Indicates the number of data packets that are successfully sent on the uplink PUCCHs at the MAC layer. Indicates the number of data packets that are successfully sent on the uplink PUSCHs at the MAC layer.
ActivePDSCHCrcErrorNumber
AntennaPortNumber DLSystemRBNumber
ParseDCI0SuccessNumber PDSCHCrcCorrectNumber
Range: 0 to 1000 -
PDSCHCrcErrorNumber
PDSCHTotalDataNumber PUSCHDynamicNumber PUSCHSemiStaticNumber ReceiveDCI0Number SendPUCCHSuccessNumber SendPUSCHSuccessNumber
Range: 0 to 1000 Range: 0 to 1000 Range: 0 to 1000 Range: 0 to 1000 Range: 0 to 1000
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-249
14 Appendix
IE Name TATimerLength ULSubCarrierRBNumber ULSymbolNumber ULSystemRBNumber
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the value of the timer for the tracing area (TA) at the MAC layer. Indicates the number of sub-carriers in each resource block on the uplink at the MAC layer. Indicates the number of symbols for each timeslot on uplink channels at the MAC layer. Indicates the number of system resource blocks that use the uplink bandwidth at the MAC layer.
MCS
This section describes the IEs related to the MCS of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the modulation coding scheme (MCS) by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name Code0Count Code0Mod Code0RBCou nt Code1Count Code1Mod Code1RBCou nt Count Modulation RBCount Range/Unit Range: 0 to 1,000 Range: 0 to 100,000 Range: 0 to 1,000 Range: 0 to 100,000 Range: 0 to 1,000 Range: 0 to 100,000 Description Indicates the scheduling times of each MCS on codeword 0 during a period. Indicates the modulation coding scheme of codeword 0, such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM. Indicates the number of resource blocks in each MCS on codeword 0 during a period. Indicates the scheduling times of each MCS on codeword 1 during a period. Indicates the modulation coding scheme of codeword 1, such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM. Indicates the number of resource blocks in each MCS on codeword 1 during a period. Indicates the scheduling times of each MCS during a period. Indicates the modulation, such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM. Indicates the number of resource blocks in each MCS during a period.
14-250
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
MIMO
This section describes the IEs related to the MIMO of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the multiple input multiple output (MIMO) by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name 1T1R 1T2R 2T2R SFBC 2T2R OL SM 2T2R CL Rank2 MultiUser 2T2R CL Rank1 Single Port5 Single Port56 4T2R SFBC 4T2R OL SM 4T2R CL Rank1 4T2R CL Rank2 4T4R SFBC 4T4R OL Rank2 4T4R OL Rank3 4T4R OL Rank4 BF Port7 Description Indicates the single-antenna port that contains one transmitter and one receiver. Indicates the single-antenna port that contains one transmitter and two receivers. Indicates the space frequency block code for two transmitters and two receivers. Indicates the open-loop spatial multiplexing for two transmitters and two receivers. Indicates the closed-loop multiplexing rank 2 for two transmitters and two receivers. Indicates the multi-user MIMO. Indicates the closed-loop multiplexing rank 1 for two transmitters and two receivers. Indicates the single-transmitter port (port 5). Indicates the dual-transmitter ports (port 5 and port 6). Indicates the space frequency block code for four transmitters and two receivers. Indicates the open-loop spatial multiplexing for four transmitters and two receivers. Indicates the closed-loop multiplexing rank 1 for four transmitters and two receivers. Indicates the open-loop multiplexing rank 2 for four transmitters and two receivers. Indicates the space frequency block code for four transmitters and four receivers. Indicates the open-loop multiplexing rank 2 for four transmitters and four receivers. Indicates the open-loop multiplexing rank 3 for four transmitters and four receivers. Indicates the open-loop multiplexing rank 4 for four transmitters and four receivers. Indicates the single-stream beam forming port (port 7).
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-251
14 Appendix
IE Name BF Port8 BF Port78 4T4R CL Rank1 4T4R CL Rank2 4T4R CL Rank3 4T4R CL Rank4 PMI
Description Indicates the single-stream beam forming port (port 8). Indicates the double-stream beam forming ports (port 7 and port 8). Indicates the closed-loop multiplexing rank 1 for four transmitters and four receivers. Indicates the closed-loop multiplexing rank 2 for four transmitters and four receivers. Indicates the closed-loop multiplexing rank 3 for four transmitters and four receivers. Indicates the closed-loop multiplexing rank 4 for four transmitters and four receivers. Indicates the PreCoding Matrix Index (PMI), and the value range is from 0 to 15.
NAS Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the NAS Parameters of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the NAS parameters by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name EMM Service State IP Type IPv4Address IPv6Address PdnNumber PLMN PLMN Select Mode Register State RRC Connect State SecurityModeCon trol Range/Unit IPv4 or IPv6 Range: 0 to 15 Description Indicates the evolved packet core (EPC) mobility management state. Indicates the IP address type. Indicates the IPv4 address. Indicates the IPv6 address. Indicates the number of packet data networks (PDNs). Indicates the registered public land mobile network (PLMN). Indicates the PLMN selection mode. Indicates the registration state. Indicates the RRC connection state. Indicates the security mode command switch.
14-252
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
PDCP Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the PDCP Parameters of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) parameters by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name DiscardTimerLength DL Count MaxCid Range/Unit Description Indicates the value of the discard timer configured for the PDCP. Indicates the downlink PDCP entity count. Indicates the maximum connection ID of the robust header compression (ROHC) context. Indicates the information about the ROHC profile configured for the PDCP.
PDCPRohcProfile
Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the ROHC profile information is not configured. 1 indicates that the ROHC profile information is configured. Range: 0 to 2 l 0 indicates 5 bits. l 1 indicates 7 bits. l 2 indicates 12 bits.
PDCPSnBitLength
Indicates the bit length of the sequence number configured for the PDCP.
RB ID RLC Mode
Range: 0 to 255 0 or 1. 0 indicates the RLC AM mode. 1 indicates the RLC UM mode. 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the state report is not sent during the handover. 1 indicates that the state report is sent during the handover. -
Indicates the radio bearer ID of the PDCP. Indicates the RLC mode of the PDCP.
StateReportFlag
Indicates the state report flag that is sent during the PDCP handover.
UL Count
Indicates the uplink PDCP entity count.
PHY Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the PHY Parameters of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the LTE physical channel parameters by referring to the following descriptions.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-253
14 Appendix
IE Name Adjust Point CFI1 Number
Description Indicates the adjustment point that is traced periodically. Indicates the number of times that the control format indicator (CFI) of the physical control format indicator channel (PCFICH) is 1. Indicates the number of times that the CFI of the PCFICH is 2. Indicates the number of times that the CFI of the PCFICH is 3. Indicates the number of times that the CFI of the PCFICH is 4. Indicates the number of downlink control information (DCI) on the downlink public dedicated control channel (PDCCH). Indicates the number of DCI on the uplink PDCCH. Indicates the number of ACK messages sent on the physical hybrid ARQ indicator channel (PHICH). Indicates the number of NACK messages sent on the physical hybrid ARQ indicator channel (PHICH). Indicates the number of times that the first path that is traced periodically fails to be determined. Indicates the number of times that the first path that is traced periodically fails to be determined for three consecutive times. Indicates the number of times that the first path that is traced periodically fails to be determined for three consecutive times but is in handover state. Indicates the number of times that the first path that is traced periodically is determined. Indicates the threshold that the first path is traced periodically. Indicates the number of times that the first path that is traced periodically is determined successfully.
CFI2 Number CFI3 Number CFI4 Number DCI DL Number
DCI UL Number PHICH Ack Number
PHICH Nack Number
FirstPathFailNumber
Range: 0 to 65535
FirstPathFailThreeNumber FirstPathFailThreeSwitchNumber
Range: 0 to 65535
Range: 0 to 65535
FirstPathNumber FirstPathStrValue FirstPathSuccessNumber
Range: 0 to 65535 Range: 0 to 65535 Range: 0 to 65535
14-254
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name FirstPathValue MaxPathPosition MaxPathValue
Description Indicates the value of the first path that is traced periodically. Indicates the position of the maximum path that is traced periodically. Indicates the value of the maximum path that is traced periodically.
PLMN Information
This section describes the IEs related to the PLMN Information of the LTE network. You can obtain the Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) information by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name Equivalent PLMN List Forbiden PLMN List Range/Unit Range: 0 to 15 Range: 0 to 63 Description Indicates the equivalent PLMN list. Indicates the forbidden PLMN list.
Power Control
This section describes the IEs related to the Power Control of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the power control by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name Alpha Factor Range/Unit Range: 0 to 7. The values of 0 to 7 correspond to the alpha factors 0, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, and 1. Description Indicates the alpha factor of power control shrinking.
CurrentFiValue CurrGiValue DeltaFPUCCH DeltaTFi DynNominal PUCCH DynNominalPUSC H

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Indicates the current Fi adjust value getting from the table according to the TPC value. Indicates the current Gi adjust value getting from table according to the TPC value. Indicates the delta F_PUCCH. Indicates the delta TFI on the Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH). Indicates the dynamic nominal Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUCCH) power. Indicates the dynamic nominal PUSCH power.
14-255
14 Appendix
IE Name DynUEPUCCH DynUEPUSCH FiType
Range/Unit Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates the accumulated type. 1 indicates the absolute type. Range: 1 to 6 Range: -40 to 23. Unit: dBm. Unit: dB Value: 0, 1, 2, or 3
Description Indicates the dynamic UE PUCCH power. Indicates the dynamic UE PUSCH power. Indicates the power control adjust type.
Format Max TxPower PathLoss PUCCHHn RB Number SumFiValue SumGiValue TPCValue
Indicates the command format of the PUCCH. Indicates the maximum transmit power. Indicates the path loss of the PUSCH or PUCCH. Indicates the PUCCH H(n). Indicates the resource block. Indicates the accumulation value of all Fi adjust value. Indicates the accumulation value of all Gi adjust value. Indicates the adjust value index of the power control on PUSCH that is used to calculate CurrGiValue .
PRB
This section describes the IEs related to the PRB of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the resource block by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name DL RB Count RB Index UL RB Slot0 Count UL RB Slot1 Count Range/Unit Range: 0 to 65535 Range: 1 to 100 Range: 1 to 1000 Range: 1 to 1000 Description Indicates the scheduling times of downlink resource block. Indicates the resource block index. Indicates the scheduling times of uplink resource block on slot 0. Indicates the scheduling times of uplink resource block on slot 1.
14-256
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Radio Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the Radio Parameters of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the transmit power and signal-to-interference plus noise ratio (SINR) of all the channels by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name PCI RSRP Range/Unit Range: 0 to 503 Range: -132 to -40; unit: dBm Description Indicates the physical cell ID. Indicates the measurement value of the reference signal received power (RSRP), which is used for deciding the uplink quality during the handover. Indicates the measurement value of the reference signal received quality (RSRQ), which is used for deciding the uplink quality during the handover. Indicates the measurement value of the received signal strength indicator (RSSI), which is used for deciding the uplink quality during the handover. Indicates the transmit power of the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH). Indicates the transmit power of the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH). Indicates the transmit power of the random access channel (RACH). Indicates the transmit power of the channel for a UE to send sounding reference signals (SRSs). Indicates the power headroom of a UE. Indicates the total number of granted downlink public dedicated control channels (PDCCHs). Indicates the total number of granted uplink PDCCHs. Indicates the average SINR. Indicates the target SINR of Rank 1. Indicates the target SINR on codeword 0 of Rank 2.
RSRQ
Range: -20 to 0; unit: dB
RSSI
Range: -132 to -40; unit: dBm
PUSCH Power PUCCH Power RACH Power SRS Power
Range: -40 to 23; unit: dBm Range: -40 to 23; unit: dBm Range: -40 to 23; unit: dBm Range: -40 to 23; unit: dBm Range: -40 to 23; unit: dB Range: 0 to 1000
Power Headroom PDCCH DL Grant Count PDCCH UL Grant Count Average SINR Rank1 SINR Rank2 SINR1
Range: 0 to 1000 Range: -20 to 50; unit: dB Range: -20 to 50; unit: dB Range: -20 to 50; unit: dB
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-257
14 Appendix
IE Name Rank2 SINR2 Rank3 SINR1 Rank3 SINR2 Rank4 SINR1 Rank4 SINR2 DrsRank1SINR DrsRank2SINR1 DrsRank2SINR2 RxChCorFactor TxChCorFactor Rank Indicator DMRS HOP
Range/Unit Range: -20 to 50; unit: dB Range: -20 to 50; unit: dB Range: -20 to 50; unit: dB Range: -20 to 50; unit: dB Range: -20 to 50; unit: dB Range: -20 to 50; unit: dB Range: -20 to 50; unit: dB Range: -20 to 50; unit: dB Range: 0 to 1 Range: 0 to 1 Range: 1 to 2 Range: 0 to 30
Description Indicates the target SINR on codeword 1 of Rank 2. Indicates the target SINR on codeword 0 of Rank 3. Indicates the target SINR on codeword 1 of Rank 3. Indicates the target SINR on codeword 0 of Rank 4. Indicates the target SINR on codeword 1 of Rank 4. Indicates the target SINR of dedicated reference signals of Rank 1. Indicates the target SINR of dedicated reference signals on codeword 0 of Rank 2. Indicates the target SINR of dedicated reference signals on codeword 1 of Rank 2. Indicates the Rx channel correlation factor. Indicates the Tx channel correlation factor. Indicates the rank value. Indicates the demodulation reference signal (DMRS) hopping group. This IE is displayed after the frequency hopping test is performed. You can choose Test > LTE SendCommand to control a terminal to perform the DMRS frequency hopping test.
Random Access Parameters

This section describes the IEs related to the Random Access Parameters of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the random access message by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name ContentionMessagePayload MACStatAfter Range/Unit Description Indicates the contention message payload. Indicates the state of the MAC layer after the random access.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-258
14 Appendix
IE Name MACStatePrevious Message3Payload Message5ScheduledUlGrant Message5ScheduledUlGrantPayload RaCauseType RandomAccessNumber RarMessagePayload RaType
Description Indicates the state of the MAC layer before the random access. Indicates the Message3 (RRC Request) payload. Indicates the Message5 (RRC Request Complete) scheduled on the uplink. Indicates the payload of Message5 (RRC Request Complete) scheduled on the uplink. Indicates the random access cause type. Indicates the random access number. Indicates the RAR message payload. Indicates the random access type.
0 or 1. 0 indicates the contention based random access. 1 indicates the noncontention based random access. Range: 0 to 19 Range: 0 to 19 Range: 0 to 19
ReceiveContentionMessage ReceiveRarMessage SendMessage3Message
Indicates the received contention messages. Indicates the received radio random access messages. Indicates the Message3 (RRC Request) sent during the random access.
RB Configuration Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the RB Configuration Parameters of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the resource block (RB) configuration parameters by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name BuckSizeDuration ControlPduLength EPSB ID Range/Unit 50, 100, 150, 300, 500, or 1000 Range: 0 to 15 Description Indicates the buck size duration. Indicates the length of a control protocol data unit (PDU). Indicates the evolved packet system bearer ID.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-259
14 Appendix
IE Name Logical Channel Group ID Logical Channel Group PRI Logical Channel ID Logical Channel PBR
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 3 Range: 0 to 32 Value: 0, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 0xFFFF. Unit: ms. Range: 1 to 16 Range: 0 to 2 l 0 indicates the acknowledge mode. l 1 indicates the unacknowledge mode. l 2 indicates the transparent mode.
Description Indicates the logical channel group ID. Indicates the logical channel group priority. Indicates the logical channel ID. Indicates the prioritized bit rate of a logical channel. Indicates the logical channel priority. Indicates the length of the PDU to be retransmitted. Indicates the RLC mode.
Logical Channel PRI ReTxPduLength RLC Mode
RxSduLength SendSduLength
Indicates the length of the received service data unit (SDU). Indicates the length of the sent SDU.
RLC Parameters
This section describes the IEs related to the RLC Parameters of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the radio link control channel parameters by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name Entity State Logical Channel ID MACNotifySendNumber RxMACPdu Range/Unit Range: 0 to 31 Description Indicates the entity state. Indicates the logical channel ID. Indicates the number of protocol data units (PDUs) that the MAC layer instructs the uplink RLC to send. Indicates the number of MAC PDUs received on downlink RLC channels.
14-260
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name RxPDCPSdu Transmit Type
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 2 l 0 indicates the acknowledge mode. l 1 indicates the unacknowled ge mode. l 2 indicates the transparent mode.
Description Indicates the number of PDCP service data units (SDUs) received on uplink RLC channels. Indicates the transmission type.
TxPduToMAC TxSduToPDCP VR(h)
Indicates the number of PDUs sent from the uplink RLC channel to the MAC layer. Indicates the number of PDUs sent from the downlink RLC to the PDCP. Indicates the highest receive state variable, that is, the sequence number of the received PDU that follows the PDU with the maximum sequence number in AM mode. Indicates the maximum acceptable receive state variable, which is equal to the sum of VR(r) and the receive window size. Indicates the maximum transmit state variable, that is, the sequence number of the maximum PDU (ACK) of the transmit state report. Indicates the receive state variable. As the lower limit of the AM receive window, it indicates the sequence number of the first PDU that is not completely received or disordered. Indicates the UM highest received state variable. As the upper limit of the receive window, it indicates the sequence number of the received PDU that follows the PDU with the maximum sequence number in UM mode. Indicates the UM receive state variable, that is, the sequence number of the first PDU that needs to be re-ordered in UM mode. Indicates the UM t-reordering state variable, that is, the sequence number of the PDU that triggers the re-ordering timer in UM mode.
VR(mr)
VR(ms)
VR(r)
VR(uh)
VR(ur)
VR(ux)
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-261
14 Appendix
IE Name VR(x)
Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the t-Reordering state variable, that is, the sequence number of the PDU that triggers the re-ordering timer in AM mode. Indicates the acknowledgment state variable, that is, the sequence number of the next PDU to be confirmed in AM mode. Indicates the maximum send state variable, that is, the sequence number of the maximum sent PDU in AM mode. The value of this parameter is equal to the sum of VT(a) and the send window size. Indicates the send state variable, that is, the sequence number of the next PDU to be sent in AM mode. Indicates the send state variable, that is, the sequence number of the next PDU to be sent in UM mode.
VT(a)
VT(ms)
VT(s)
VT(us)
RRC Information
This section describes the IEs related to the RRC Information of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the radio resource control by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name PUSCH Configure Parameter 64QAM Enable Range/Unit Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the 64QAM is disabled. 1 indicates that the 64QAM is enabled. Range: 1 to 7 Range: 0 to 10 Range: 0 to 15 Description Indicates whether the 64 quadrature amplitude modulation is enabled.
CyclicShift DeltaOffsetAckIndex DeltaOffsetCqiIndex DeltaOffsetRiIn dex GroupAssignPU SCH
Indicates the cyclic shift. Indicates the delta offset acknowledgment index. Indicates the delta offset channel quality indicator (CQI) index. Indicates the delta offset rank indicator (RI) index. Indicates the group that is assigned to the PUSCH.
14-262
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name GroupHoppingE nabled
Range/Unit Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the group hopping is disabled. 1 indicates that the group hopping is enabled. Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the hopping mode is Inter-SubFrame. 1 indicates that the hopping mode is Inter&IntraSubFrame. Range: 1 to 4 Range: 0 to 63 Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the sequence hopping is disabled. 1 indicates that the sequence hopping is enabled. Range: 8 to 64. Step: 8. Unit: subframe.
Description Indicates whether the group hopping is enabled.
Hopping Mode
Indicates the hopping mode.
SubBandNumbe r PUSCHHoppin gOffset SequenceHoppi ngEnabled
Indicates the number of subbands. Indicates the PUSCH hopping offset. Indicates whether the sequence hopping is enabled.
RACH Configure Parameter
MACContentio nTimer
Indicates the timer for contention resolution in TS 36.321 [6]. The unit is subframe. Value sf8 corresponds to 8 subframes, sf16 corresponds to 16 subframes. Indicates the maximum number of Msg3 HARQ transmissions in TS 36.321 [6], which is used for contention based random access. Indicates the threshold for preamble selection in TS 36.321 [6]. The unit is dB. Value minusinfinity corresponds to infinity. Value dB0 corresponds to 0 dB, dB5 corresponds to 5 dB.
14-263
MaxHarqMessa ge3Tx
Range: 1 to 8
MessagePower OffsetGroupB
Range: 0xFFFFFFFF, 0, 5, 8, 10, 12, 15, 18. Unit: dB.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name MessageSizeGr oupA PreambleInitialReceivedTargetPower PreambleTransmitMax PowerRamping Step RaPRACHMask Index
Range/Unit 56, 144, 208, or 256
Description Indicates the size of the random access preambles group A or B. Indicates the preamble initial received target power. Indicates the maximum number of transmitted preambles. Indicates the power ramping step. Indicates the random access physical random access channel (PRACH) mask index. Indicates the number of nondedicated random access preambles that correspond to group A. Indicates the dedicated random access preamble index. Indicates the total number of random access preambles. Indicates the duration of the random access response window. Indicates the cyclic shift. Indicates the duration of physical hybrid ARQ indicator channel (PHICH).
Range: -120 to -90. Unit: 2 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 20, 50, 100, or 200 0, 2, 4, or 6 -
RaPreambleGro upANumber
Range: 0 to 60. Step: 4
RaPreambleInde x RaPreambleNu mber RaResponseWin dowSize SRS Configure Parameter CyclicShift Duration
Range: 4 to 60. Step: 4 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 10 Range: 0 to 7 Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates the normal duration. 1 indicates the extended duration. Range: 0 to 23
FreqencyDomai nPosition
Indicates the frequency domain position.
14-264
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name SimultaneousAnAndSRS
Range/Unit Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the messages cannot be transmitted on a channel simultaneously. 1 indicates that the messages can be transmitted on a channel simultaneously. Range: 0 to 7 l 0 indicates UU_BW0. l 1 indicates UU_BW1. l 2 indicates UU_BW2. l 3 indicates UU_BW3. l 4 indicates UU_BW4. l 5 indicates UU_BW5. l 6 indicates UU_BW6. l 7 indicates UU_BW7. SRSConfigInde x SRSHoppingBa ndwidth SRSMaxUpPts Range: 0 to 1023 Range: 0 to 3 Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the maximum uplink pilot timeslot restriction is disabled. 1 indicates that the maximum uplink pilot timeslot restriction is enabled.
Description Indicates whether the sounding reference signal (SRS) and format 1a1b messages can be transmitted on a channel simultaneously.
SRSBandwidth
Indicates the SRS bandwidth.
Indicates the SRS configured index. Indicates the SRS hopping bandwidth. Indicates the maximum uplink pilot timeslot of the SRS.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-265
14 Appendix
IE Name SRSSubframeC onfig SRSUEReleated Bandwith TransmissionCo mb PUCCH Configure Parameter DeltaPUCCHSh ift EnableFlg
Description Indicates the number of configured subframes of the SRS. Indicates the UE-related bandwidth of the SRS. Indicates the transmission mode. Indicates the delta PUCCH shift. Indicates the enable flag.
Range: 0 to 3 0 or 1 1, 2, or 3 Value: 1 or 2. 1 indicates that the enable flag is disabled. 2 indicates that the enable flag is enabled. Range: 0 to 2047 Range: 0 to 2047
N1PUCCHAn N1PUCCHAnR ep
Indicate the PUCCH resource value. Indicates that the UE send the ACK and NACK messages repeatedly with a RepetitionFactor. Indicates the number of cyclic shifts. Indicates the bandwidth calculated on the basis of the resource block. Indicates the repetition factor that affects the value of N1PUCCHAnRep.
NcsAn NrbCqi
RepetitionFacto r
Range: 0 to 3 l 0 indicates N2_REPET_F ACTOR. l 1 indicates N4_REPET_F ACTOR. l 2 indicates N6_REPET_F ACTOR. l 3 indicates SPARE1_REP ET_FACTOR.
14-266
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name TddAckNackFe edbackMode
Range/Unit 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the feedback mode of ACK and NACK messages is bundling. 1 indicates that the feedback mode of ACK and NACK messages is multiplexing. 0 or 1. 0 indicates the low speed (restricted). 1 indicates the high speed (unrestricted). Range: 0 to 63 Range: 0 to 104 Range: 0 to 837 Range: 0 to 15
Description Indicates the feedback mode of the ACK and NACK messages in TDD mode.
PRACH Configure Parameter
HighSpeedFlag
Indicates the high speed flag.
PRACHConfigI ndex PRACHFreqencyOffset RootSequenceIn dex ZeroCorrelation ZoneConfig
Indicates the PRACH configuration index. Indicates the PRACH frequency offset. Indicates the root sequence index. Indicates the configuration value of the zero correlation zone.
RRU Measurement
This section describes the IEs related to the RRU Measurement of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the remote radio unit (RRU). IE Name RF RTWP_ChA Range/Unit 0 or 1 Range: -110 to -40. Unit: dBm. Description Indicates the radio frequency unit. Indicates the received total power of the wideband on main A. Received total (RT) indicates the total power of the wideband signals that a base station receives. Wideband power (WP) indicates the power of the wideband including the noise floor and self interference noise.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-267
14 Appendix
IE Name RTWP_ChB
Description Indicates the received total power of the wideband on diversity B. Received total (RT) indicates the total power of the wideband signals that a base station receives. Wideband power (WP) indicates the power of the wideband including the noise floor and self interference noise.
Tx Power
Range: -110 to +40. Unit: dBm.
Indicates the transmit power.
RSRP Measurement
This section describes the IEs related to the RSRP Measurement of the LTE network. You can obtain the measurement value of the reference signal received power (RSRP) of each antenna by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name RSRP Antenna0 RSRP Antenna1 RSRP Antenna2 RSRP Antenna3 DrsRSRP Antenna0 DrsRSRP Antenna1 DrsRSRP Antenna2 DrsRSRP Antenna3 Range/Unit Range: -132 to -40; unit: dBm Range: -132 to -40; unit: dBm Range: -132 to -40; unit: dBm Range: -132 to -40; unit: dBm Range: -132 to -40; unit: dBm Range: -132 to -40; unit: dBm Range: -132 to -40; unit: dBm Range: -132 to -40; unit: dBm Description Indicates the RSRP measurement value of antenna 0. Indicates the RSRP measurement value of antenna 1. Indicates the RSRP measurement value of antenna 2. Indicates the RSRP measurement value of antenna 3. Indicates the RSRP measurement value of the dedicated channel of antenna 0. Indicates the RSRP measurement value of the dedicated channel of antenna 1. Indicates the RSRP measurement value of the dedicated channel of antenna 2. Indicates the RSRP measurement value of the dedicated channel of antenna 3.
Service Data Flow Information

This section describes the IEs related to the Service Data Flow Information of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the service data flow by referring to the following descriptions.
14 Appendix
IE Name Bearer Context Type Context ID DLGuaranteedMaxRate DLMaxRate EPSB ID FlowLabelType LocalPortHighLimit LocalPortLowLimit PacketFilterID Precedence ProtocolID QCI RemoteIpv4Address RemoteIpv4Mask RemoteIpv6Address RemoteIpv6Mask RemotePortHighLimit RemotePortLowLimit SdfNumber SdfPfNumber SingleLcPort SingleRmtPort
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 31 Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Range: 0 to 65535 Range: 0 to 65535 Range: 0 to 15 Range: 0 to 255 Range: 0 to 65535 Range: 0 to 65535 Range: 1 to 11 Range: 0 to 65535 Range: 0 to 65535
Description Indicates the bearer context type. Indicates the context ID. Indicates the maximum guaranteed bit rate for downlink. Indicates the maximum bit rate for downlink. Indicates the evolved packet system (EPS) bearer ID. Indicates the IPv6 flow label type. Indicates the maximum local port number. Indicates the minimum local port number. Indicates the packet filter identifier. Indicates the packet filter priority. Indicates the protocol ID. Indicates the QoS class identifier. Indicates the remote IPv4 address. Indicates the remote IPv4 mask. Indicates the remote IPv6 address. Indicates the remote IPv6 mask. Indicates the maximum remote port number. Indicates the minimum remote port number. Indicates the number of service data flow. Indicates the number of service data flow packet filter. Indicates the single local port number. Indicates the single remote port number.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-269
14 Appendix
IE Name TypeOfService TypeOfServiceMask ULGuaranteedMaxRate ULMaxRate
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 255 Range: 0 to 255 Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s
Description Indicates the service type. Indicates the service type mask. Indicates the maximum guaranteed bit rate for uplink. Indicates the maximum bit rate for uplink.
Serving and Neighboring Cells

This section describes the IEs related to the Serving and Neighboring Cells of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the serving cell, listed cell, and detected cell by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name PCI RSRP RSRQ RSSI EARFCN Frequency Offset Range/Unit Range: 0 to 503 Range: -132 to -40. Unit: dBm. Range: -20 to 0. Unit: dB. Range: -132 to -40. Unit: dBm. Unit: Hz Description Indicates the physical cell ID. Indicates the reference signal received power. Indicates the reference signal received quality. Indicates the received signal strength indicator. Indicates the E-UTRA absolute radio frequency channel number. Indicates the frequency offset.
SINR PDF
This section describes the IEs related to the SINR PDF of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the signal-to-interference and noise ratio (SINR) of Rank 1 and Rank 2 by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name Average SINR DrsRank1SINR DrsRank2SINR1 Range/Unit Range: -20 to 50. Unit: dB. Range: -20 to 50. Unit: dB. Range: -20 to 50. Unit: dB. Description Indicates the average SINR. Indicates the dedicated reference signal target SINR of rank 1. Indicates the dedicated reference signal target SINR on codeword 0 of rank 2.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-270
14 Appendix
IE Name DrsRank2SINR2 RANK1 SINR RANK2 SINR1 RANK2 SINR2
Range/Unit Range: -20 to 50. Unit: dB. Range: -20 to 50. Unit: dB. Range: -20 to 50. Unit: dB. Range: -20 to 50. Unit: dB.
Description Indicates the dedicated reference signal target SINR on codeword 1 of rank 2. Indicates the target SINR on Rank 1. Indicates the target SINR on codeword 0 of Rank 1. Indicates the target SINR on codeword 0 of Rank 2.
Throughput
This section describes the IEs related to the Throughput of the LTE network. You can obtain the throughput of the medium access control (MAC), packet data convergence protocol (PDCP), and radio link control (RLC) by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name MAC DL Throughput MAC UL Throughput PDCP DL Throughput PDCP UL Throughput PHY DL Throughput PHY UL Throughput RLC DL Throughput RLC UL Throughput Range/Unit Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Description Indicates the downlink throughput at the MAC layer. Indicates the uplink throughput at the MAC layer. Indicates the downlink throughput at the PDCP layer. Indicates the uplink throughput at the PDCP layer. Indicates the downlink throughput at the physical layer. Indicates the uplink throughput at the physical layer. Indicates the downlink throughput at the RLC layer. Indicates the uplink throughput at the RLC layer.
Tracking Area Information

This section describes the IEs related to the Tracking Area Information of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the tracking area by referring to the following descriptions.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-271
14 Appendix
IE Name Forbiden TA List TA List
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 63 Range: 0 to 63
Description Indicates the forbidden tracking area. Indicates the tracking area list.
UE State
This section describes the IEs related to the UE State of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the status of the non-access stratum, RRC, and MS by referring to this section. IE Name EMM State Range/Unit Description Indicates the evolved packet system (EPS) mobility management state. Indicates the EPS mobility management sub state. Indicates the EPS mobility management update. Indicates the RRC connection state. Indicates the discontinuous reception mechanism state.
EMM Sub State EMM Update RRC State DRX State
Idle, Connected, or Unkown Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates the non-DRX state. 1 indicates the DRX state.
Cell Allowed Access
Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that Indicates the cell allowed access. the cell access is not allowed. 1 indicates that the cell access is allowed. Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the cell is not barred. 1 indicates that the cell is barred. Range: 0 to 503 Indicates the cell barred.
Cell Barred
Cell Reserved Camped PCI IMSI Version UE Category
Indicates the cell reserved. Indicates the camped physical cell identity. Indicates the international mobile subscriber identity. Indicates the version. Indicates the user equipment category.
14-272
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Antenna Selection
Range/Unit Range: 0 to 4 l 0 indicates the closed loop. l 1 indicates the open loop. l 2 indicates the singleantenna transmission. l 3 indicates the power aiding. l 4 indicates that the antenna is invalid.
Description Indicates the antenna selection.
Feature Group Indicators Timing Advance Synchronous State MME Code MME GroupId MTMSI AFC Period AFC Frequency Read Value PLMN TAC
Range: 0 to 63 -
Indicates the feature group indicators. Indicates the timing advance (TA). Indicates the downlink synchronization state of a UE. Indicates the mobility management entity code. Indicates the mobility management entity group ID. Indicates the M-temporary mobile subscriber identity. Indicates the automatic frequency control period. Indicates the automatic frequency control frequency read value. Indicates the public land mobile network. Indicates the tracking area code.
14.3.6 Information Elements of Scanners

This describes the IEs of the PCTel, Anritsu, and Rohde & Schwarz scanners. You can refer to the description when browsing the IEs in the views of these scanners.
GSM Information Elements of Scanners

This describes the IEs of the GSM scanner. You can refer to the description when browsing the IEs in the GSM scanner view.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-273
14 Appendix
IE Name ARFCN BSIC C/A C/I Center Frequency Frequency Power RSSI RxLev Spectrum Channel
Range/Unit Unit: dB Unit: dB Unit: MHz Unit: dBm Unit: dBm Unit: dBm -
Description Indicates the ARFCN. Indicates the base station identity code. Indicates the carrier-to-adjacent (ratio). Indicates the carrier-to-interference (ratio). Indicates the center frequency. Indicates the carrier frequency. Indicates the level strength of each frequency. Indicates the received signal strength indicator. Indicates the received signal level. Indicates the tested ARFCN of spectrum analysis.
WCDMA Information Elements of Scanners

This describes the IEs of the WCDMA scanner. You can refer to the description when browsing the IEs in the WCDMA scanner view. IE Name Aggregate Ec/Io Center Frequency Channel Code Delay Spread Dev.Drift Range/Unit Unit: dB Description Indicates the aggregate Ec/Io. Indicates the center frequency. Indicates the primary and secondary scrambling codes. Indicates the spread delay. Indicates the received signals of time slices, which are obtained by using the standard method. Indicates the received signals of time slices. Indicates the energy per chip. Indicates the ratio of the energy per chip to the total power density of the received bandwidth.
Drift Ec Ec/Io
Unit: dBm Unit: dB
14-274
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Eps/Io Ess/Io Finger No Io ISCP p Total Power RSSI Scrambling Code SIR Spectrum Channel Time Time Offset
Range/Unit Unit: dBm Unit: dBm Unit: dBm -
Description Indicates the peak value of the Ec/Io of the primary scrambling code. Indicates the peak value of the Ec/Io of the secondary scrambling code. Indicates the number of a finger. Indicates the total power spectral density of the received bandwidth. Indicates the interference signal code power. Indicates the total received power of the current ARFCN. Indicates the level strength of each frequency. Indicates the received signal strength indicator. Indicates the scrambling code. Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio. Indicates the tested ARFCN of spectrum analysis. Indicates the time sequence offset. Indicates the time sequence offset or pilot delay.
CDMA Information Elements of Scanners

This describes the IEs of the CDMA scanner. You can refer to the description when browsing the IEs in the CDMA scanner view. IE Name Aggregate Ec/Io Channel Delay Spread Ec/Io Range/Unit Unit: dB Unit: chip Unit: dB Description Indicates the aggregate Ec/Io. Indicates the tested ARFCN. Indicates the spread delay. Indicates the ratio of the pilot energy per chip to the total power spectral density of the received bandwidth. Indicates the total power of the specified bandwidth
14-275
Io
Unit: dBm
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name Pilot Delay Power Protocol RSSI Spectrum Channel
Range/Unit Unit: dBm -
Description Indicates the pilot delay. Indicates the power. Indicates the network system. Indicates the received signal strength indicator. Indicates the tested ARFCN of spectrum analysis.
WiMAX Information Elements of Scanners

This describes the IEs of the WiMAX scanner. You can refer to the description when browsing the IEs in the WiMAX scanner view. IE Name CINR RSSI Range/Unit Unit: dB Unit: dBm Description Indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio of the preamble numbered N. Here, N refers to the preamble index. Indicates the received signal strength indicator of the preamble numbered N. Here, N refers to the preamble index.
14.3.7 Packet Service Testing Information Elements

This describes the packet service testing information elements. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the packet service views.
App Throughput
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the App Throughput test for the packet service. The following table provides the information about the throughput ratio at the application layer of the packet service. IE Name Rx App Rate Range/Unit Range: 0 to 100000. Unit: kbit/s. Range: 0 to 50000. Unit: kbit/s. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Description Indicates the downlink throughput rate at the application layer, that is, the current throughput for data received at the application layer. Indicates the uplink throughput rate at the application layer, that is, the current throughput for data sent at the application layer. Indicates the retransmission ratio at the TCP layer.
Tx App Rate
TCP Retransmit Ratio
14-276
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Attach Detach
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the Attach Detach test for the packet service. The following table provides the information about the Attach or Detach service of the packet service. IE Name Attach Success Rate Detach Success Rate Attach Time Detach Time Range/Unit Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Unit: ms Unit: ms Description Indicates the attach success rate. Indicates the detach success rate. Indicates the attach time. Indicates the detach time.
FTP Service Quality Evaluation

This describes meanings of the IEs related to the FTP Service Quality Evaluation test for the packet service. The following table provides the information related to the FTP service of the packet service. IE Name Progress Download/Upload Rate Time Elapsed Current Load Size Total Load Size Download File Size Download Total Count Download Failure Count Download Failure Rate Upload File Size Upload Total Count Range/Unit Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbyte Unit: kbyte Unit: kbyte Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbyte Description Indicates the upload or download progress. Indicates the upload or download rate. Indicates the upload or download elapsed time. Indicates the size of the file uploaded or downloaded currently. Indicates the total size of all uploaded or downloaded files. Indicates the size of the downloaded file. Indicates the total number of download attempts. Indicates the number of download failures. Indicates the download failure rate. Indicates the size of the uploaded file. Indicates the total number of upload attempts.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-277
14 Appendix
IE Name Upload Failure Count Upload Failure Rate Download time
Range/Unit Unit: kbit/s Unit: s
Description Indicates the number of upload failures. Indicates the upload failure rate. Indicates the statistical value (such as minimum value, maximum value, average value, and standard deviation) of the download duration. Indicates the statistical value (such as minimum value, maximum value, average value, and standard deviation) of the average download rate. Indicates the statistical value (such as minimum value, maximum value, average value, and standard deviation) of the upload duration. Indicates the statistical value (such as minimum value, maximum value, average value, and standard deviation) of the average upload rate. Indicates the maximum rate on the uplink. Indicates the minimum rate on the downlink. Indicates the guaranteed rate on the uplink. Indicates the guaranteed rate on the downlink.
Download Avg rate
Unit: kbit/s
Upload time
Unit: s
Upload Avg rate
Unit: kbit/s
Max Rate Up Min Rate Down Guar Rate Up Guar Rate Down
Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s
HTTP Service Quality Evaluation

This describes meanings of the IEs related to the HTTP Service Quality Evaluation test for the packet service. The following table provides the information related to the HTTP service of the packet service. IE Name Progress Page download rate Max Rate Up Max Rate Down Guar Rate Up Guar Rate Down Range/Unit Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Description Indicates the test progress. Indicates the page download rate. Indicates the maximum uplink rate. Indicates the maximum downlink rate. Indicates the guaranteed rate on the uplink. Indicates the guaranteed rate on the downlink.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-278
14 Appendix
IE Name DNS Parse Time Page size Buffer Page access failure rate URL Page download time
Range/Unit Unit: s Unit: byte Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Unit: ms
Description Indicates the duration for parsing the domain name server (DNS). Indicates the page size. Indicates the buffer. Indicates the failure rate of accessing pages. Indicates the IP address of the HTTP server. Indicates the statistical value (such as minimum value, maximum value, average value, and standard deviation) of the page download duration. Indicates the statistical value (such as minimum value, maximum value, average value, and standard deviation) of the average page download rate.
Avg rate
Unit: kbit/s
Ping Service Quality Evaluation

This describes meanings of the IEs related to the Ping Service Quality Evaluation test for the packet service. The following table provides the information related to the Ping service of the packet service. IE Name Packet Size Range/Unit Unit: byte Description Indicates the size in bytes of the packet sent with the Ping command. Valid only during Ping sessions. Indicates the server IP address that is pinged. Indicates the status of the current ping test. Indicates the packet loss rate. Indicates the duration of the ping test. Indicates the maximum uplink rate. Indicates the maximum downlink rate. Indicates the guaranteed rate on the uplink. Indicates the guaranteed rate on the downlink.
IP Status Packet Loss Rate Ping time Max Rate Up Max Rate Down Guar Rate Up Guar Rate Down
Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Unit: ms Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-279
14 Appendix
PS Common Indicators
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the PS Common Indicators test for the packet service. The following table provides the information about the PDP activation for the packet service. IE Name PDP Activation Success Rate PDP Activation Time Range/Unit Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Unit: s Description Indicates the PDP activation success rate. Indicates the PDP activation time.
WAP Download
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the WAP Download test for the packet service. The following table provides the information related to the WAP download service of the packet service. IE Name Progress Download Rate Time Elapsed Current Load Size Total Load Size File Size Login failure rate Download Total Count Download Failure Count Download Failure Rate Max rate down Guar rate down Download time Download Avg rate Range/Unit Unit: % Unit: kbit/s Unit: ms Unit: byte Unit: byte Unit: byte Unit: % Unit: % Unit: kbit/s Unit: kbit/s Unit: ms Unit: kbit/s Description Indicates the test progress of the WAP download. Indicates the download rate. Indicates the elapsed download time. Indicates the size of the file downloaded currently. Indicates the total size of downloaded files. Indicates the size of the downloaded file. Indicates the failure rate of logging in to the WAP gateway. Indicates the total number of download attempts. Indicates the number of download failures. Indicates the download failure rate. Indicates the maximum download rate. Indicates the guaranteed download rate. Indicates the download time. Indicates the average download rate.
14-280
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
WAP Gateway Connection

This describes meanings of the IEs related to the WAP Gateway Connection test for the packet service. The following table provides the information related to the WAP gateway connection service of the packet service. IE Name WAP Gateway Connection ID Description Indicates the ID of the number of WAP gateway connection tests. The ID starts from 1. Indicates the time for the WAP gateway connection. Indicates the status of the WAP gateway connection test.
Time Status
WAP Logon
This describes meanings of the IEs related to the WAP Logon test for the packet service. The following table provides the information related to the WAP login service of the packet service. IE Name WAP Logon ID Time Status Description Indicates the ID of the number of WAP login tests. The ID starts from 1. Indicates the WAP login time. Indicates the status of the WAP login test.
WAP Page Refresh

This describes meanings of the IEs related to the WAP Page Refresh test for the packet service. The following table provides the information related to the WAP page refreshing service of the packet service. IE Name WAP Page Refresh ID Time Status Description Indicates the ID of the number of WAP page refreshing tests. The ID starts from 1. Indicates the time for refreshing the WAP page. Indicates the status of the WAP page refreshing test.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-281
14 Appendix
14.3.8 Speech Quality Evaluation Information Elements

This describes meanings of the IEs related to Speech Quality Evaluation. The following table provides information about IEs related to the speech quality service. IE Name Index Data Time PESQ P.862.1 KPI Min Max Avg Value Std Deviation Range/Unit Range: 1 to 4.5 Description Indicates the number of tests. Indicates the time calculated according to the speech evaluation. Indicates an algorithm of the perceptual evaluation of speech quality. Indicates the key performance indicator. Indicates the minimum value of the speech evaluation. Indicates the maximum value of the speech evaluation. Indicates the average value of the speech evaluation. Indicates the standard deviation of the speech evaluation.
14.3.9 Noise Test Information Elements

This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Noise Test KPI. The following table provides the information noise test information elements. IE Name MOS Score Noise Level Range/Unit Unit: dB Description Indicates the MOS score obtained through the PESQ 862.1 algorithm. Indicates the noise level of the noise sample file or recorded speech result file measured in the non-speech phase. The smaller the value is, the less the noise is. Indicates the name of the noise sample file used in the noise test. Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of the noise sample file or recorded speech result file. The SNR can be calculated through the following formula: SpeechLevel - NoiseLevel.
Sample Noise File SNR
Unit: dB
14-282
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
IE Name SNRI
Range/Unit Unit: dB
Description The signal-to-noise ratio improvement (SNRI) can be calculated through the following formula: Result File SNR - Sample File SNR. The larger the value is, the more the noises are eliminated.
Speech Activity Speech Level TNLR
Range: 0 to 1 Unit: dB Unit: dB
Indicates the speech activity of the noise sample file or recorded speech result file. Indicates the speech level of the noise sample file or recorded speech result file. Indicates the total noise level reduction (TNLR) in the non-speech phase. The TNLR can be calculated through the following formula: Result File NoiseLevel Sample File NoiseLevel.
14.4 Keyboard Shortcuts

This describes certain keyboard shortcuts of the Probe.
General Shortcuts
Function Open the online help. Open the project. Save the project. Open the engineering parameter view. Open the outdoor map window. Enlarge the map area. Shrink the map area. Open the Device Configure window to configure external devices. Add external devices. Connect the external device automatically. Disconnect the external device. Open the Test Plan Control dialog box to configure or view the test plan. Start or stop the logfile recording.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Shortcut F1 Ctrl + O Ctrl + S Ctrl + E Ctrl + M = F8 Ctrl + D F2 Ctrl + F2 F9 F10

14-283
14 Appendix
Function Pause or resume the logfile recording. Start the test plan. End the test plan. Insert filemark Switch worksheets on the operation interface.
Shortcut F11 F5 Ctrl + F5 F12 Ctrl + Tab
Replay Shortcuts
Function Close the logfile. Open the logfile. Play the logfile. Stop the logfile. Shortcut Ctrl + H Ctrl + L Enter Ctrl + F6
Shortcuts for synchronization

Function Check the signaling in the L2 Messages or L3 Messages view. Move the Line Chart view and update the data in the view. Synchronize the points in the map. Shortcut Up/Down Left/Right Left/Right
14.5 PSTN SQE Server

This provides the guidelines for using the PSTN SQE Server and methods for speech quality evaluation. The PSTN SQE Server is an important component of the speech evaluation solution of Huawei GENEX series. The PSTN SQE Server is deployed on the PSTN as the application management program and is used to test the speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink of the GSM and WCDMA networks. 14.5.1 Overview of the PSTN SQE Server This describes the overview of the PSTN SQE Server. The PSTN SQE Server is used to test the independent speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink. The following contents help you understand the features, rationale, scenarios, system structure, and basic concepts of the PSTN SQE Server. 14.5.2 Installing the PSTN SQE Server
14 Appendix
This section describes how to install the PSTN SQE Server and other assistants. To complete the installation of the PSTN SQE Server, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as prompted by the installation wizard. 14.5.3 Using PSTN SQE Server The PSTN SQE Server adopts the standard PESQ algorithm and implements the speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink on the radio network with the Probe and PHU. 14.5.4 Interface Reference of the PSTN SQE Server This describes the interfaces for using the PSTN SQE Server to perform the speech quality evaluation test and describes corresponding parameters. 14.5.5 FAQs This describes the problems that may occur during the use of the PSTN SQE Server and the corresponding causes. This also describes how to solve these problems. This also describes the using skills. 14.5.6 Test Items of the PSTN SQE Server This describes the properties of the SQE test item. You can refer to this part when using the PSTN SQE Server to perform the speech quality evaluation test, and then perform the related operations. 14.5.7 Predefined Events of the PSTN SQE Server This describes the predefined events of the PSTN SQE Server. You can refer to this part when configuring events of the speech quality evaluation.
14.5.1 Overview of the PSTN SQE Server

This describes the overview of the PSTN SQE Server. The PSTN SQE Server is used to test the independent speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink. The following contents help you understand the features, rationale, scenarios, system structure, and basic concepts of the PSTN SQE Server.
Introduction to the PSTN SQE Server

This describes features of the PSTN SQE Server. The PSTN SQE Server supports the speech quality evaluation tests on multiple networks and provides user-friendly interfaces.
Features
l l Speech quality evaluation test on multiple networks such as GSM and WCDMA. Speech quality evaluation test for outgoing and incoming calls. Speech quality evaluation test for outgoing calls The PSTN SQE Server can set modes of the speech quality evaluation test for outgoing calls and perform the speech quality evaluation test by configuring the specified destination number. Speech quality evaluation test for incoming calls The PSTN SQE Server can set modes of the speech quality evaluation test for incoming calls, listen to incoming calls, and give responses to incoming calls. Pre-synchronization of speech evaluation After a call is set up, the PSTN SQE Server can perform the pre-synchronization test to synchronize two parties for the normal speech evaluation test.
14 Appendix
Recording function Supporting the automatic recording during the speech evaluation test. For the concepts of recording, see Basic Concepts of the PSTN SQE Server. Playing function Supporting the automatic playing during the speech evaluation test. For the concepts of playing, see Basic Concepts of the PSTN SQE Server. l Supporting the half-duplex interactive speech evaluation. Thus, the speech quality on the uplink and downlink can be tested in real time. The two interactive speech evaluation modes are as follows: The PSTN SQE Server plays a speech sample, and the PHU records the speech sample. Then, the PHU plays a speech sample, and the PSTN SQE Server records the speech sample. The PHU plays a speech sample, and the PSTN SQE Server records the speech sample. Then, the PSTN SQE Server plays a speech sample, and the PHU records the speech sample. l Real-time display of key events on the PSTN such as calling, recording, and playing events. Thus, you can troubleshoot problems in time. For details, see 14.5.7 Predefined Events of the PSTN SQE Server. Simultaneous test for multiple channels. The PSTN SQE Server can perform the synchronous speech evaluation test for a maximum of eight channels. Recording and storing logfiles (.gen file) in real time. The logfile records the MOS values calculated by the specified channel according to different protocols such as PESQ.862, PESQ.862.1, PESQ LQ, and PESQ Ie. You can import the logfile to the GENEX Assistant to generate the analysis reports of speech evaluation.
l l
Application Scenarios
The PSTN SQE Server can be used in each phase of network lifecycles such as the network establishment, expansion, maintenance, and optimization and is applicable to the performance evaluation test and speech quality problem localization. l Performance evaluation test During the network establishment, expansion, or optimization, the PSTN SQE Server can be used to evaluate the speech quality performance of each network, thus providing the network establishment or optimization with information. l Speech quality problem localization on the radio network During the network maintenance or optimization, the PSTN SQE Server and the UEs of the GENEX Probe collect data. The PSTN SQE Server records the uplink MOS. The Probe records the downlink MOS and quickly locates the speech quality problems on the uplink and downlink with the GENEX Assistant.
System Structure
The PSTN SQE Server consists of a voice card, and PC that is installed with the PSTN SQE Server and a voice card driver. The voice card supports a maximum of eight speech channels. Figure 14-1 shows the system structure of the PSTN SQE Server. Table 14-3 describes each entity shown in Figure 14-1.
14 Appendix
Figure 14-1 System structure of the PSTN SQE Server
Table 14-3 Description of system structure of the PSTN SQE Server Entity PC Description Refers to a desktop, where the drivers for the PSTN SQE Server and voice card are installed.
NOTE The PC must has at least one PCI for installing a voice card.
Voice card
Provides an RJ-11 interface, which is used to connect to the PSTN. The voice card supports the speech call, call answer, recording, and playing functions. The type of the voice card supported by the PSTN SQE Server is Dialogic Diva Analog -2P/-4P/-8P. Refers to the interface that is provided by the voice card and is used to connect to the PSTN. Refers to the public switched telephone network.
RJ-11 PSTN
Working Principles of the PSTN SQE Server

This describes working principles of the PSTN SQE Server. The PSTN SQE Server supports the speech quality evaluation test on the uplink and downlink. By interacting with the PHU test terminal, the PSTN SQE Server performs the speech quality evaluation test. During the test, the PSTN SQE Server or Probe records the speech result files, performs the MOS analysis in real time, and then displays the MOS values. Thus, you can easily locate the speech quality problems on the radio network.
Speech Evaluation on the Uplink

The PHU test terminal plays a speech sample through the air interface. Then, the PSTN SQE Server receives the played speech sample through the PSTN and records the speech sample in the destination file. Thus, the uplink MOS value is obtained according to the speech result file and the speech sample through the PESQ algorithm, as shown in Figure 14-2. Table 14-4 describes Figure 14-2. Figure 14-2 Speech evaluation on the uplink
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-287
14 Appendix
Table 14-4 Speech evaluation on the uplink Entity Probe PHU test terminal Description Controls the dial-up of the PHU for playing a speech sample. Plays a speech sample through the air interface. Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, and Huawei U6100 are supported. PSTN SQE Server Receives the played speech sample through the PSTN, and then records the speech sample in the destination file.
Speech Evaluation on the Downlink

The PSTN SQE Server plays a speech sample through the PSTN. Then, the PHU test terminal receives the played speech sample through the air interface and records the speech sample in the destination file. Thus, the downlink MOS value is obtained according to the speech result file and the speech sample through the PESQ algorithm, as shown in Table 14-5. Figure 14-3 describes Table 14-5. Figure 14-3 Speech evaluation on the downlink
Table 14-5 Speech evaluation on the downlink Entity Probe PHU test terminal Description Compares the speech result file with the speech sample and obtains the downlink MOS value through the PESQ algorithm. Receives the played speech sample through the air interface, and then records the speech sample in the destination file. Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, and Huawei U6100 are supported. PSTN SQE Server Plays a speech sample through the PSTN.
14-288
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Basic Concepts of the PSTN SQE Server

This describes the basic concepts of the PSTN SQE Server, including the logfile, project, test task, PESQ, and MOS. These concepts help you better conduct the PSTN SQE Server to perform the speech quality evaluation test. Table 14-6 lists the basic concepts of the PSTN SQE Server. Table 14-6 Basic concepts of the PSTN SQE Server Basic Concepts Logfile Description The logfile is the record of the collected information during the drive test. The test data is stored in a file during the drive test. This file is called logfile (.gen file). Through the logfile, you can easily browse and analyze data. The PSTN SQE Server is used to manage test items based on the project. A maximum of eight speech channels can be configured in a project. Multiple test tasks can be configured for each speech channel. A test task consists of test items provided by the system. You can configure test tasks as required. The test task can provide guidelines for the speech quality test during the drive test. The PSTN SQE Server provides the events of the speech quality evaluation. These events indicate the status of the speech quality evaluation test. You can browse predefined events in the SpeechView window. This is an emulation interface of a voice card, which is used to connect to the telephone cable of the PSTN. This is an international standard algorithm of the perceptual evaluation of speech quality. You can evaluate the speech quality by comparing the original speech sample with the fading speech file. The result of the evaluation is the MOS value. The MOS is a subjective evaluation method adopting the ITU-T P.830 protocol. According to the requirements of the P.830 protocol, a specified talker and listener in the specified environment analyze the speech quality by collecting the objective feelings of the tested person in different scenarios. The PSTN SQE Server receives the speech sample played on the test terminal through the PSTN, and then records the speech sample in the destination file. The PSTN SQE Server plays the speech sample through the PSTN network.
Project
Test task
Event
Channel PESQ
MOS
Recording
Playing
Main Interface of the PSTN SQE Server

This describes the main interface for the PSTN SQE Server. The main interface consists of the menu bar, toolbar, operation interface, status bar, and entries to the related operations by using on the PSTN SQE Server.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-289
14 Appendix
Figure 14-4 shows the main interface for the PSTN SQE Server. Table 14-7 describes the items shown in Figure 14-4. Figure 14-4 Main interface of the PSTN SQE Server
Table 14-7 Description of the main interface No. 1 2 3 4 Name Menu bar Toolbar Operation interface Status bar Description Indicates the main menu of the system. For details, see Menu Bar. Provides the shortcut icons for common operations. For details, see Toolbar. Displays different view windows and configuration windows. For details, see Operation Interface. Displays the keyboard status such as the status of the Caps Lock, Num Lock, and Scroll Lock keys.
14-290
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Menu Bar
The menu bar of the PSTN SQE Server displays main menus of the system and is designed based on the main functions of the PSTN SQE Server to facilitate your operations. Table 14-8 describes the menu bar and the corresponding functions of the PSTN SQE Server. Table 14-8 Description of the menu bar Main Menu File Configuration Description Provides the entries for operations related to the project management. For details, see Table 14-9. Provides the entries for configuring speech channels, creating test tasks, and configuring test plans. For details, see Table 14-10. Provides the entries for operations related to the view management. For details, see Table 14-11. Provides the entries for performing and stopping test tasks. For details, see Table 14-12. Provides the entries for the system help and license management. For details, see Table 14-13.
View Test Help
Table 14-9 Description of the File menu Menu Item New Open Save Save as Close Description This menu item is used to create a project. This menu item is used to open a project under the specified path. This menu item is used to save a project. This menu item is used to save a current project as another one. This menu item is used to close a project.
Table 14-10 Description of the Configuration menu Menu Item Hardware Config Test Plan Editor Test Plan Configuration Editor Description This menu item is used to configure a speech channel. This menu item is used to create a test task. This menu item is used to configure a test plan.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-291
14 Appendix
Table 14-11 Description of the View menu Menu Item Speech/TV Description This menu item is used to display the view for monitoring test data.
Table 14-12 Description of the Test menu Menu Item Start Run Stop Run Description This menu item is used to start a test task. This menu item is used to stop a test task.
Table 14-13 Description of the Help menu Menu Item Contents License Info Update License View ESN About PSTN SQE Server Description This menu item is used to view the online help of the PSTN SQE Server. This menu item is used to view license information. This menu item is used to update the license. This menu item is used to obtain the ESN code. This menu item is used to view the version information about the PSTN SQE Server.
Toolbar
To enter windows fast or perform relevant operations, you can click corresponding icons on the toolbar of the main interface for the PSTN SQE Server. Table 14-14 describes the icons on the toolbar. Table 14-14 Description of the toolbar Icon Name Create a project. Open a project. Save a project. Description This icon is used to create a project. This icon is used to open a project (.xml file). This icon is used to save the current project.
14-292
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Icon
Name Configure a speech channel.
Description This icon is used to configure a speech channel. Click this icon to configure a speech channel in the displayed Hardware Config window. This icon is used to create a test task. Click this icon to create a test task in the displayed Test Plan Editor window. This icon is used to configure a test plan. Click this icon to configure a test plan in the displayed Test Plan Configuration Editor window. This icon is used to monitor a test. Click this icon to monitor a test in the displayed SpeechView view in real time. This icon is used to start a test task. This icon is used to stop a test task. This icon is used to view the version information about the PSTN SQE Server.
Create a test task.
Configure a test task.
Monitor a test.
Start a test task. Stop a test task. Help Content
Operation Interface
To enter windows fast, you can click corresponding icons in the navigation pane of the operation interface for the PSTN SQE Server. Table 14-15 describes the icons in the navigation pane. Table 14-15 Description of the navigation pane of the operation interface Icon Name Hardware Config Description This icon is used to configure a speech channel. Click this icon to configure a speech channel in the displayed Hardware Config window. This icon is used to create a test task. Click this icon to create a test task in the displayed Test Plan Editor window.
Test Plan Editor
Test Plan This icon is used to configure a test plan. Configuration Editor Click this icon to configure a test plan in the displayed Test Plan Configuration Editor window.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-293
14 Appendix
Icon
Name SpeechView
Description Click this icon to monitor a test in the SpeechView view in real time.
Operation Procedure of the PSTN SQE Server

This describes the procedure for using the PSTN SQE Server. In the speech evaluation project, the PSTN SQE Server creates test tasks to perform the speech quality evaluation test. You can familiarize yourself with the procedure for using the PSTN SQE Server. Table 14-16 describes the operation procedures. Table 14-16 Operation procedures Step 1 Operation Configure a voice card Description Refers to configuring the relevant parameters of the voice card. Thus, the voice card can run properly. Refers to creating a project for the speech evaluation. Reference For details, see Configuring a Voice Card.
Create a speech evaluation project. Configure a speech channel. Create a test task. Configure a test task.
For details, see Creating a Speech Evaluation Project.
Refers to configuring available speech channels in the PSTN SQE Server. Refers to creating a test task for the UE, which is used for the speech evaluation test. Refers to selecting the corresponding channel for a test task and setting properties of the Option. Refers to starting a test task and recording a logfile. During the test, you can browse the logfile in real time. Refers to browsing the test data in the SpeechView view.
For details, see Configuring a Speech Channel. For details, see Creating a Test Plan. For details, see Configuring a Test Plan.
Perform a test task.
For details, see Starting a Test Plan.
Browse the speech evaluation view in real time.
For details, see Browsing the Speech Evaluation View in Real Time.
14-294
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
14.5.2 Installing the PSTN SQE Server

This section describes how to install the PSTN SQE Server and other assistants. To complete the installation of the PSTN SQE Server, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as prompted by the installation wizard.
Context
After the PSTN SQE Server is installed, you must connect the dongle to the PC to obtain the license so that you can use the relevant functions authorized by the license.
Preparations Before Installing the PSTN SQE Server

Before installing the PSTN SQE Server, you must check whether the installation requirements are met. The installation requirements are as follows: l l l The software package of the Probe is available. The configuration of PC meets the requirement of the installation. The voice card and the corresponding driver are required.
Hardware Requirements of the PSTN SQE Server

Table 14-17 describes the requirements for PC configuration. Table 14-17 Hardware requirements of the PSTN SQE Server Configuration Items CPU Memory Hard disk PC port Configuration Requirements The Intel T2500 2.00 GHz Dual-Core processor is recommended. The minimum memory is 1 GB. It is recommended that the available hard disk space be 10 GB or greater. l If a dongle plugs into the PC, at least a USB port is required. l At least one PCI slot is required for installing a voice card. Operating system Windows XP Professional SP2.
Software Requirements of the PSTN SQE Server

Table 14-18 describes the software and the corresponding configurations recommended for the speech quality evaluation.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-295
14 Appendix
Table 14-18 Software requirements of the PSTN SQE Server Configuratio n Items Operating system GENEX Probe V200R003 software package Obtaining Methods l Huawei website: http:// support.huawei.com l GENEX Probe V200R003 software installation CDROM Configuration Requirements Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP2. You need to have an account with http:// support.huawei.com. In addition, you are authorized to download the GENEX Probe V200R003 software package or purchase the GENEX Probe V200R003 software. You need to have an account with http:// support.huawei.com. In addition, you are authorized to download the Dialogic Diva voice card driver or purchase the GENEX Probe V200R003 software. Remarks Mandatory Mandatory
Installation package of the Dialogic Diva voice card driver
l Huawei website: http:// support.huawei.com l GENEX Probe V200R003 software installation CDROM l Dialogc website: http:// www.dialogic.com/ support/software.
If the voice card driver is not installed, you cannot use the PSTN SQE Server to evaluate the speech quality.
License
The license is integrated in the dongle.
The GENEX Probe V200R003 is purchased.
Mandatory
Installing the PSTN SQE Server Main Program

During the installation of the Probe, the system installs the PSTN SQE Server by default. You can install the PSTN SQE Server as required.
Prerequisite
Check whether the computer meets the hardware requirements for installing the PSTN SQE Server. For details, see Preparations Before Installing the PSTN SQE Server.
Context
It is recommended that you install the GENEX Probe and PSTN SQE Server on two PCs.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the GENEX Probe V200R003 installation program.
14-296
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
If ... The installation program is downloaded from http://support.huawei.com. The installation CD-ROM of GENEX Probe V200R003 is available.
Then ... Decompress the downloaded package and perform Step 2. Perform Step 2.
Step 2 Double-click Setup.exe. The installation interface is displayed. Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, choose I accept the terms of the license agreement. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 In the dialog box as shown in Figure 14-5, specify User Name and Company Name. Figure 14-5 Customer Information
NOTE
l Anyone who uses this computer (all users): Authorize all users of this computer to use the Probe. l Only for me (user): Authorize only the current user to use the Probe.
Step 7 Click Next.

14 Appendix
Step 8 Select the Custom installation mode. Then select PSTN SQE Server. Step 9 Click Browse to select the installation directory. Step 10 Click Next. Step 11 After the installation is complete, you can select Yes, I want to restart my computer now or No, I will restart my computer later. Then click Finish. It is recommended that you select Yes, I want to restart my computer now. Step 12 Check whether the PSTN SQE Server is installed successfully. Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 > PSTN SQE Server and check whether the shortcut for the PSTN SQE Server exists. If ... The shortcut for the PSTN SQE Server exists. The shortcut for the PSTN SQE Server does not exist. ----End Then ... The PSTN SQE Server is installed successfully.
Perform Step 1 through Step 12 again.
Plugging in a Dongle
The dongle is a device that provides the user with the authorization to use the GENEX series products. License is integrated with the dongle. Therefore, you must plug the dongle into the computer before using the Probe to collect data or using the PSTN SQE Server to evaluate speech quality. If you only use the Probe to replay data, the dongle is not required.
Procedure
Step 1 Plug in the dongle. If ... Then ...
The software is being used for the first time Plug the dongle into the USB port of the PC. and the dongle is available. The dongle expires. Perform Step 2 through Step 5 to obtain a valid license and update the license for the dongle.
Step 2 Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 > corresponding software name (such as Probe or PSTN SQE Server) to run the main program. Step 3 On the displayed main interface, choose Help > View ESN. Step 4 Send the ESN to Huawei technical support engineer and wait for a new license.
14 Appendix
Normally, the new license will be delivered in two to three days. Step 5 Update the new license for the dongle. 1. 2. 3. 4. On the main interface, choose Help > Update License. In the Open dialog box, select the new license. Click Open. In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click OK.
CAUTION
When updating the new license for the dongle, ensure that only the dongle for the corresponding software is plugged into the computer. Step 6 Optional: Choose Help > License Info to check the authorization information of the dongle. ----End
Follow-up Procedure
If the dongle can not be used normally, the dongle driver should be installed. You can obtain the dongle driver through the following modes: l l Huawei website: http://support.huawei.com GENEX Probe V200R003 software installation CD-ROM
Installing the Driver for a Voice Card

This describes how to install the driver for a voice card. To ensure that the PC installed with the PSTN SQE Server can correctly recognize the Dialogic Diva voice card, you must install the driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card on the PC.
Prerequisite
1. 2. 3. 4. All applications are already closed. The Dialogic Diva voice card has been connected to the PC through the PCMCIA slot. You must log in to the PC where the driver for the voice card is installed as an administrator. If the PC where the PSTN SQE Server is installed is already installed with another driver for the voice card, uninstall it, and then install the driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-299
14 Appendix
If ...
Then ...
The driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card is Decompress the downloaded driver downloaded from http://support.huawei.com or installation package, and then perform http://www.dialogic.com/support/software Step 2. The installation CD-ROM of is available Step 2 Double-click Setup.exe to start the installation. Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 Select the installation mode in the displayed dialog box. l Default Installation: Diva API/CAPI will be installed.: refers to the default installation. It is recommended that you install the driver for the voice card in default installation mode. l Customized installation: Specify services which should be installed.: refers to the customized installation. If you select this installation mode, you can specify the services to be installed. l Secure installation: Exclude specific services from installation and conf: refers to the security installation. If you select this installation mode, you can set the security properties for different services. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 Optional: Select Install WIBU-KEY software to install the WIBU-KEY software. It is recommended that you do not install the WIBU-KEY software. Step 7 Click Next. Step 8 Click Install. Step 9 After the installation is complete, click Finish. Step 10 Restart the PC. Step 11 Check whether the driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card is installed successfully. Choose Start > All Programs > Dialogic Diva to check whether the software information about the driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card exists. If ... Then ... Perform Step 2.
The software information about the driver The driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card is for the Dialogic Diva voice card exists installed successfully. The software information about the driver Repeat Step 1 through Step 11 until the driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card does not for the Dialogic Diva voice card is installed exist successfully.
14-300
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

NOTE
14 Appendix
After the installation is complete, choose Start > All Programs > Dialogic Diva > Manual Diva Boards to view details about how to install the driver for the voice card.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the installation is complete, you need to correctly configure the voice card. Thus, the voice card can run properly. For details, see Configuring a Voice Card.
14.5.3 Using PSTN SQE Server

The PSTN SQE Server adopts the standard PESQ algorithm and implements the speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink on the radio network with the Probe and PHU.
Configuring a Voice Card

This describes how to configure a voice card. After the driver for a voice card is installed, you need to correctly configure the voice card. Thus, the voice card can run properly.
Prerequisite
The driver for the voice card is already installed..
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > Dialogic Diva > Configuration Manager. The Active Configuration - Dialogic(R) Diva(R) Configuration Manager window is displayed. Step 2 In the left pane of the Active Configuration - Dialogic(R) Diva(R) Configuration Manager
window, click
Step 3 Configure properties in the displayed dialog box. From the Country Selection drop-down list, select the country where you stay. Other properties are set by default. on the toolbar of the Active Configuration - Dialogic Step 4 After configuring the properties, click (R) Diva(R) Configuration Manager window to save and activate the property configuration. Step 5 After the properties are activated successfully, click OK in the displayed Activate Configuration dialog box. Step 6 In the displayed Update successful dialog box, perform either of the following operations: l Click Yes. The PC is restarted and the activated configuration takes effect. l Click No. The activated configuration does not take effect and the voice card cannot work normally. ----End
14 Appendix
Creating a Speech Evaluation Project

This describes how to create a speech evaluation project. All operations of the PSTN SQE Server are based on a project. Therefore, you need to create a project or open an existing project before the speech evaluation test is performed.
Context
In the PSTN SQE Server, you can open only one project at a time. To switch the current project to another one, you must close the open project.
Procedure
Step 1 Click
NOTE
on the toolbar or choose File > New to create a project.
You can click
on the toolbar or choose File > Open to open an existing project.
Step 2 Configure parameters. You can configure the speech channels, create test tasks, and configure test tasks for a project. For details, see corresponding chapters. Step 3 Optional: Save the current project as required. If You Need To ... Directly save the current project Save the current project as another one ----End Then ... Click on the toolbar or choose File > New.
Choose File > Save As.
Follow-up Procedure
You can close or delete a project through the File menu of the main interface or through the icons on the toolbar. For details about the main interface, see Main Interface of the PSTN SQE Server.
Configuring a Speech Channel

This describes how to configure a speech channel. Before performing a test, you need to connect the telephone cable to the PSTN correctly to make the channel of a voice card available, and then configure a speech channel.
Prerequisite
l l The telephone cable is already connected to the channel of the voice card in the PC. A speech evaluation project is already created or open.
NOTE
After the telephone cable is connected to the interface of the voice card in the PC, the software can automatically recognize the ID of the available speech channel. You can directly configure Source Number and Description for this channel.
14-302
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Context
A maximum of eight channels can be configured in a project.
Procedure
Step 1 Click on the toolbar or choose Configuration > Hardware Config. The Hardware Config window is displayed. Step 2 Select corresponding channel nodes in the list on the left of the Hardware Config window and configure Source Number and Description in the right area. ----End
Creating a Test Plan

This describes how to create a test plan. The PSTN SQE Server can be used for the test in different test environments and provide the test items for the speech quality evaluation. You can set test items for the speech quality evaluation and create test tasks for the UE, thus guiding the speech test.
Procedure
on the toolbar or choose Configuration > Test Plan Editor. The Test Plan Editor Step 1 Click window is displayed. Step 2 Click at the lower left corner of the TestPlanList area in the displayed Test Plan Editor window to create a test plan list. For the description of the parameters related to the Test Plan Editor window, see Parameters for Creating a Test Plan. Step 3 Enter Name and Description at the upper corner of the Test Plan Editor window. Step 4 Click Set to save the setting. at the left corner Step 5 Select a test plan list from the Test Plan Editor window, and then click of the TestPlan Config area to add a test plan to the test plan list and configure corresponding parameters. The test plan is named SQE by default. For details about SQE, see 14.5.6 Test Items of the PSTN SQE Server. ----End
Configuring a Test Plan

This describes how to configure a test plan. You need to select corresponding Channel and set the Option property for each created test plan before the test plan is started.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-303
14 Appendix
Prerequisite
l The telephone cable is already connected to the PSTN, and related parameters are already configured. For details about how to configure a speech channel, see Configuring a Speech Channel. At least one test plan is already created. For details about how to create a test plan, see Creating a Test Plan.
Procedure
Step 1 Click on the toolbar or choose Configuration > Test Plan Configuration Editor. The Test Plan Configuration Editor window is displayed. The list names of created test tasks are automatically displayed in the Test Plan Configuration Editor window. Step 2 In the displayed Test Plan Configuration Editor window, select corresponding Channel and set the Option property for each test plan list. For details about the Option property, see Parameters for Configuring a Test Plan.
NOTE
The Option property involves two fields: Yes and No. To perform the selected test plan, you must set Option to Yes.
----End
Starting a Test Plan

This describes how to start a test plan. After a speech channel is connected properly, corresponding parameters are already configured, and a test plan is configured, you can record the logfile and start a test plan.
Prerequisite
l The telephone cable is already connected to the PSTN, and related parameters are already configured. For details about how to configure a speech channel, see Configuring a Speech Channel. At least one test plan is already created. For details about how to create a test plan, see Creating a Test Plan. The corresponding channel is already selected for a test plan and Option is set to Yes. The Ring Back Tone service on the test terminal is stopped.
l l l
Procedure
l Click on the toolbar or choose Test > StartRun. The test plan is started.
When the test plan is started, the PSTN SQE Server records a logfile (.gen file) automatically. The default saving path is software installation directory\Huawei GENEX \Probe 2.3\PSTN SQE Server\Data. ----End
14 Appendix
Monitoring the Execution State of a Test Plan

This describes how to monitor the execution state of a test plan in the Event list of the SpeechView window during a test. This helps you view and analyze the test.
Prerequisite
At least one test plan is performed. For details, see Starting a Test Plan.
Procedure
l Click on the toolbar or choose View > Speech/TV. The SpeechView window is displayed. View the execution state of the test plan in the Event list. ----End
Stopping a Test Plan

This describes how to stop a test plan. You need to stop a test after it is finished.
Procedure
l Click on the toolbar or choose Test > StopRun. The test plan is stopped.
----End
Browsing the Speech Evaluation View in Real Time

This describes how to browse the speech evaluation view in real time. You can browse the test data in the SpeechView view during the test.
Prerequisite
At least one test task is performed. For details, see Starting a Test Plan.
Context
The SpeechView view is displayed in a chart and in a list. In the chart view, the changes of the MOS parameters are displayed in a histogram. In the list view, the changes are displayed in a table.
Procedure
l on the toolbar or choose View > Speech/TV. The SpeechView view is displayed. Click You can browse the test data in this view.
NOTE
Select the Channel No drop-down list of the SpeechView view. You can view the MOS information about different channels.
----End
14 Appendix
14.5.4 Interface Reference of the PSTN SQE Server

This describes the interfaces for using the PSTN SQE Server to perform the speech quality evaluation test and describes corresponding parameters.
Interface Description: Create a Test Plan

This describes the Test Plan Editor interface and helps you understand the interface components and functions of the components and shortcut icons. Figure 14-6 shows the Test Plan Editor interface. Table 14-19 provides the description of Figure 14-6. Figure 14-6 Test Plan Editor interface
Table 14-19 Description of the Test Plan Editor interface Name TestPlanList area TestPlanList Information area TestPlan Config area
14-306
Description Displays a test plan list. Displays the names of and information about test plan lists. Displays test tasks.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Name Toolbar of the TestPlanList area Toolbar of the TestPlan Config area
Description Provides the short icons for creating, deleting, and moving test plan lists. For details, see Table 14-20. Provides the short icons for creating, deleting, and moving test tasks. For details, see Table 14-20.
Table 14-20 Description of the Test Plan Editor Toolbar Icon Name Create Move up Move down Delete Description This icon is used to create a test plan list or a test plan. This icon is used to move the selected test plan list or test plan upwards. This icon is used to move the selected test plan list or test plan downwards. This icon is used to delete the selected test plan list or test plan.
Parameters for Configuring a Speech Channel

This describes the parameters for configuring a speech channel. You can refer to this part when configuring a speech channel and setting parameters. Parameter Channel Description Refers to an emulation interface of the voice card, which is connected to the PSTN through a telephone cable and is used for the speech call or speech listening. The system automatically obtains available channels and displays them in Channel. Refers to a ID of the selected channel. Refers to the source number of the selected channel. Refers to the description of the selected channel.
ChannelID SourceNumber Description
Parameters for Creating a Test Plan

This describes the parameters for creating a test plan. You can refer to this part when creating a test plan and setting parameters.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-307
14 Appendix
Parameter Name Description ID Name Property Value
Description Indicates the name of a test plan list. Indicates the description of a test plan list. Indicates the ID of a test plan. Indicates the name of a test plan. Indicates the property name of a test item. Enables you to set values of Property.
Parameters for Configuring a Test Plan

This describes the parameters for configuring a test plan. You can refer to this part when configuring a test plan and setting parameters. Parameter Name ChannelID Option Description Indicates the name of a test plan list. Indicates the channel ID that is used to select a test plan list. Involves two fields: Yes and No. If this parameter is set to Yes, the selected test plan lists are executable. If this parameter is set to No, the selected test plan lists are inexecutable.
Parameters for Browsing the Speech Evaluation View in Real Time

This describes the parameters for browsing the speech evaluation view. You can refer to this part when browsing the speech evaluation parameters and setting parameters. Parameter Speech MOS Time Algorithm Count Current MOS Avg MOS Max MOS Min MOS Speech Events
14-308
Description Indicates the time of the current MOS. Indicates the algorithm used for the current MOS. Indicates the number of the times of recording the MOS. Indicates the current MOS value. Indicates the average MOS value. Indicates the maximum MOS value. Indicates the minimum MOS value. Indicates the time of the current event.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
EventTime
14 Appendix
Parameter EventName DeviceID ChannelID
Description Indicates the name of the current event. Indicates the device ID. Indicates the channel ID.
14.5.5 FAQs
This describes the problems that may occur during the use of the PSTN SQE Server and the corresponding causes. This also describes how to solve these problems. This also describes the using skills.
What Should I Do When the PSTN SQE Server Searching for the Channel Fails? Symptom
The PSTN SQE Server cannot search for the channel after the telephone cable of the PSTN is connected to the PC.
Possible Causes
l l The telephone cable of the PSTN is not properly connected to the PC. The driver for the voice card is installed incorrectly.
Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the telephone cable of the PSTN is connected to the PC properly. Step 2 Reinstall the driver for the voice card. ----End
What Should I Do When Invalid MOS Values Are Generated? Symptom

l l Symptom I: The SQE (MS-PSTN) test fails to be performed. Symptom II: The SpeechView of the PSTN SQE Server contains invalid MOS values, that is, certain MOS values are smaller than 2.5.
Possible Causes
Table 14-21 lists the fault causes.
14 Appendix
Table 14-21 Fault cause Fault Symptom Symptom I Possible Cause l The version number of the Probe is incorrect. l The used test terminal is not Huawei U120e PHU, Huawei U1205 PHU or Huawei U6100 PHU. l The version number of the PHU is incorrect. l The RBT service of the PHU is not disabled. Symptom II The invalid MOS value may be caused by network problems if the following reasons are excluded. l The speech samples used by the Probe and PSTN SQE Server are different. l Other operations are performed on the keypad of the test MS. l An extension may be connected to the PSTN telephone cable that is connected to the PSTN SQE Server. l The configuration of the PC installed with the PSTN SQE Server does not meet the requirement.
Procedure
Step 1 Check the version number of the Probe. Use the Probe V200R002C01SPC010 or a later version. On the main interface of the Probe, choose Help > About PROBE to view the version number of the Probe. Step 2 Check the version number of the PHU. Use the PHU V100R002C01B010SPC110 or a later version. For details on how to view the version number of the PHU, see the help of the PHU. Step 3 Check whether the speech samples used by the Probe and PSTN SQE Server are the same. 1. 2. . The Test Plan Control window is displayed. On the main interface of the Probe, click View the value of the Sample Type property of the SQE (MS-PSTN) test item. . The Test Plan Editor window On the main interface of the PSTN SQE Server, click is displayed. View the values of the Sample Time and Language Of Sample properties of the SQE test item. If the time of playing the speech sample and the language type of the speech sample are different, reconfigure the two properties of the SQE (MS-PSTN) and SQE test items. ----End
14-310
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
How to Uninstall the Driver for a Voice Card Question

How to uninstall the driver for a voice card?
Answer
After the driver for the voice card is uninstalled, the voice card cannot be used properly, and the PSTN SQE Server cannot automatically recognize the available channel. Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > Dialogic Diva > Uninstall. The window for uninstalling the driver for the voice card is displayed. Step 2 Click Next. Step 3 Click Uninstall. Step 4 Click Finish after the driver is uninstalled. ----End
How to Uninstall the Main Program Question

How to uninstall the main program?
Answer
After the Probe main program is uninstalled, the PSTN SQE Server and system templates are deleted but the operation logs and recorded logfiles are left.
Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 > Uninstall Probe. The uninstalling interface is displayed. Step 2 Choose Remove. Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click Yes. Step 5 After the installation is complete, click Finish. ----End
14.5.6 Test Items of the PSTN SQE Server

This describes the properties of the SQE test item. You can refer to this part when using the PSTN SQE Server to perform the speech quality evaluation test, and then perform the related operations.
NOTE
The Ring Back Tone service on the test terminal must be stopped before the SQE test is performed.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-311
14 Appendix
Property Call Mode
Value/Range/Unit The value can be either of the following call modes: l Outgoing, refers to the outgoing call mode. l Incoming, refers incoming call mode. to the
Description Indicates the call mode.
The default value is Outgoing. Destination Number Source Number Call Type You can set this property when Call Mode is set to Outgoing. You can set this property when Call Mode is set to Incoming. The value can be either of the following call types: l Call By Call, refers to a short call. The number of calls cannot exceed the preset value. l Continuous Call, refers to a long call. The number of calls is unlimited. The default value is Call by Call. Call Duration You can set this property when Call Type is set to Call by Call. The default value is 120, and the unit is second. Call Interval The default value is 5, and the unit is second. Indicates the duration of a call, that is, the time from call setup to normal call release. Indicates number. the destination
Indicates the source number. Indicates a call type.
Indicates the interval between two calls, that is, the time from the previous call disconnection to the beginning of the next call. Indicates the total number of calls.
Call Count
You can set this property when Call Type is set to Call by Call. The default value is 5.
Setup Time
Indicates the maximum time for call setup. After a call is originated, if the call cannot be set up within the defined period, the call setup fails.
Exception Interval
Indicates the call exception interval, that is, the time from the previous call drop to the beginning of the next call.
14-312
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14 Appendix
Property MOS Direction
Value/Range/Unit -
Description Indicates the MOS direction. The Half duplex mode, that is the half duplex interaction mode is supported by the PSTN SQE Server.
Language Of Sample
Indicates the speech type of a speech sample. The English speech type is supported by the PSTN SQE Server.
Sample Time
The unit is second.
Indicates the duration of playing a speech sample. The 5s duration is supported by the PSTN SQE Server.
MOS Algorithm
The value can be any of the following algorithms: l PESQ.862.1 l PESQ.862 l PESQ LQ l PESQ Ie The default value is PESQ.862.1.
Indicates the algorithm of the speech quality evaluation.
14.5.7 Predefined Events of the PSTN SQE Server

This describes the predefined events of the PSTN SQE Server. You can refer to this part when configuring events of the speech quality evaluation. Name OutgoingCall CallAlerting CallAnswer CallConnected CallSetupFail Meaning Outgoing call Call alerting Call answer Call connected Call setup failure Description This event occurs when the channel originates a call. This event occurs when the channel receives an incoming call. This event occurs when the channel receives an incoming call. This event occurs when the channel is connected to an incoming call successfully. This event occurs when the channel receives the call disconnected event but does not receive the CallConnected event.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
14-313
14 Appendix
Name CallComplete
Meaning Call complete
Description This event occurs when the channel receives the call disconnected event reported from the voice card in the case of a normal channel call connection. Recording starts on the channel. The channel is in recording state. Recording is complete on the channel. Playing starts on the channel. The channel is in playing state. Playing is complete on the channel. This event occurs when the synchronization test is performed for the channel and PHU after the channel is connected to a call. This event occurs when the synchronization test is successfully performed for the channel and PHU. This event occurs when the synchronization test fails to be performed for the channel and PHU. The channel of the voice card is disconnected from the PSTN. Failures and exceptions occur during the playing. Failures and exceptions occur during the recording. This event occurs when the test is stopped. -
StartRecord Recording RecordComplete StartPlay Playing PlayComplete StartSync
Recording start Recording Recording complete Playing start Playing Playing complete Synchronization test start Synchronization test complete Synchronization test failure Channel disconnected Playing exception Record exception Test stop MOS
SyncComplete
SyncFailed ChannelDisconnected PlayException RecordException TestStop VoiceQuality
14-314
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
15 Technical Support
15
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Postal Code: 518129 Website: http://www.huawei.com Hotline telephone: 0755-28560000; 4008302118 Fax: 0755-28560111 Email: support@huawei.com or PA@huawei.com
Technical Support
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. Please feel free to contact our local office, customer care center or company headquarters.
Address: Administration Building, Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
15-1

GENEX Probe User Guide V200R003 04

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GENEX Probe User Guide V200R003 04

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GENEX Probe V200R003

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.